Booster Pump Agiba PDF

1.B-04.03.
13-R1-1
Meleiha Field Upgrade

Customer Purchase Order #: 4500015760
Customer: AGIBA Petroleum Co.
Pump Type & Size: CUP BB2 10x12x20Y
Customer Item No.: 300-P-101 E
CUP Shop Item No.: 0
CUP Serial No.: 30043416.01.001
Section 1 Leading Particulars Approved: PB

1.B-04.03.13-R1-1
The purpose of this instruction manual is to assist the persons responsible for the
installation of the pumping unit. It is not tended to cover all the details or variations which
may arise in connection with the installation of the pump. However, if additional
information is desired to cover a particular situation which is not included, contact
ClydeUnion Pumps or its authorized representative:
CLYDEUNION Pumps
Green Road
Penistone
Sheffield
England
S36 6BJ
Phone: (+44) 01226 763311
Fax: (+44) 01226 766535
http:www.clydeunion.com
CLYDEUNION Pumps hereby certifies that this Final Data Book is Certified Correct for
Customer Item Number: (example 1P-1208, 2P-1208)
…………………………………………………… …………………
Certified Correct by Date

1.B-04.03.13-R1-1
Index
1. LEADING PARTICULARS
2. INSTALLATION AND COMMISIONING
3. OPERATION
4. MAINTAINANCE
5. LUBRICATION
6. REPLACEMENT PARTS
7. DRAWINGS
8. MOTOR IOM
9. MECHANICAL SEAL IOM
10. COUPLING IOM
11. VFD IOM

1.B-04.03.13-R1-1
Section 1 – Leading Particulars
Contents
Pump Information
Before Start Up
During Operation
Before Stripping for Maintenance/ Repair
Before Putting Back into Service After Repair Or Shutdown
General Data
Scope
Construction
Casing
Shaft
Impeller
Bearings
Mechanical Seal Chambers
Baseplate
Rotation
Coupling

1.B-04.03.13-R1-1
Pump Information
Purchaser AGIBA Petroleum Co.
User AGIBA Petroleum Co.
Location EGYPT
Purchase Order No. 4500015760
Purchase Item No. 300-P-101 E
Service Main Line Oil Pump
Pump Serial No. 30043416.01.001
Pump Size & Type 10x12x20Y CUP BB2
No. of Stages One
Suction Flange 12" - 600Lb RF
Discharge Flange 10" - 600Lb RF
Product Crude Oil
Pumping Temperature 20°C Min. 50°C Max.
Differential Head 340.0 m
Capacity 825.0 m³ / hr
Suction Pressure 350.0 psig
Discharge Pressure 750.0 psig
Density @ P.T. 0.83
Rated Speed 2980 rpm
Mechanical Seal John Crane
Mechanical Seal Type Tandem Cartridge
Mechanical Seal API Code BDPFN
Coupling John Crane
Case Gasket Spiral Wound
ATEX Classification N/A
Rotation (Viewed from Coupling) CCW
Wearing Part Clearances API
Bearing Assembly:
Bearings
Drive End Ball
Outboard End Ball
Bearing Lubrication Specification ISO VG32
Bearing Lubrication Type Constant Level Oiler
Baseplate Design Fabricated Grout Type

1.B-04.03.13-R1-1
Before Start Up Before Stripping for Maintenance/ Repair

1. Read the Installation, Operation and 1. Ensure that the equipment is isolated from the
Maintenance Manual and check the pump set power supply.
alignment.
2. Drain the pump set and wait until it reaches
2. Ensure that the coupling guards and gland ambient temperature before starting work.
guards are firmly secured in place with all fixing
3. Ensure that no dangerous product remains in the
bolts tight.
pump prior to removing or stripping the pump.
3. Ensure that all process piping nuts, bolts and
4. Check and comply with safety rules which apply
studs are correctly tightened and that the vent,
to the plant that the equipment is installed in.
drain, seal and any other small bore piping has
not been damaged in transit or during pump 5. Wear the appropriate safety equipment, ie.
maintenance. If in doubt, remove for inspection Protective gloves, eye protection, clothing etc.
and re - hydro test. Before Putting Back into Service After
4. Ensure that the mechanical seals are correctly Repair Or Shutdown
set and that the nuts are correctly tightened and Go through the same checks listed for pump start up.
that the seal systems, if fitted, are correctly
Commissioned in line with suppliers instructions ___________________
and any external flush or quench is turned on.
5. Ensure that any auxiliary services, such as
cooling water etc. as identified on the General The above guidelines are based on the current state
Arrangement drawing is turned on. of knowledge and our best assessment, arising from
6. Stand well away from the equipment and this knowledge, of potential hazards in the operation
discharge pipe work until the unit is up to speed. of centrifugal pumps.
7. Check for any signs of leaks and stop the unit Any further information, which is deemed necessary,
immediately if any leaks are found. may be obtained by contacting ClydeUnion Pumps.
During Operation
1. Always wear safety equipment appropriate to the
plant the equipment is installed on, i.e. Comply
with the operating company's safety requirement
codes.
2. Do not remove the coupling or gland guards while
the equipment is running.
3. Do not tighten or slacken any nuts while the pump
is running or the electric motor is still connected
to the power supply.
4. In hot or cold service do not touch any parts of
the pump or pipe work without wearing suitable
protective gloves.

1.B-04.03.13-R1-1
General Data Impeller

The impeller design used within the CUP BB2 range
Scope is an enclosed double suction type and has integral
This manual provides operator and maintenance wear rings. The impeller is a one piece casting that is
personnel with information to aid in installing, machined and balanced to minimize vibration. The
operating and servicing the CUP BB2 Series impeller is secured in position on the pump shaft by
ClydeUnion centrifugal pump. These instructions have threaded sleeves or nuts and is locked against rotation
been developed from the experience of the engineers by a key.
and technicians who designed and manufactured this
unit. Bearings
In addition this manual contains supplementary data The pump bearing arrangement incorporates an
on the installation, maintenance and repair of outboard ball thrust bearing and an inboard ball radial
equipment provided with the pump, but not bearing.
manufactured by ClydeUnion Pumps.
Mechanical Seal Chambers
A copy of this manual should be readily available to
the equipment operator at all times. Read these Specific mechanical seal details are contained in the
instructions carefully before operating the pump. pump information section of this manual. In addition
reference should be made to the mechanical seal
Construction arrangement contained in this manual.
Casing Baseplate
The pump casing is a machined casting with a double Baseplates are raised lip, drain type, fabricated grout
suction and double volute design available. The end type and are designed to support the weight of the
cover of the casing is removable for access to the pump, driver and also to absorb normal loads imposed
rotating element. The suction and discharge nozzles on the pump nozzles by customer piping.
are located on the main casting allowing the pump to Rotation
be fully disassembled without disconnecting the Pumps are supplied with counter clockwise (CCW)
piping. Vent and drain connections are provided rotation viewed from the coupling end. See the
where required. certified General Arrangement drawing to verify the
The casings are hydrostatically tested to a minimum direction of rotation.
of one and a half times maximum discharge pressure
unless otherwise specified. Coupling
The flexible coupling between the pump and driver is
Shaft selected to suit operating speed, horsepower and
The pump shaft is designed with ample diameter to service requirements. For size and type refer to the
transmit the required torque and to resist undue Pump General Arrangement drawing.
deflection. The short bearing span in the CUP BB2
Series pump minimises shaft deflection and allows
maximum torque transmission.

Section 2
Installation and Commissioning
Contents
GENERAL
Check upon Arrival
Rust Preventive
Cleaning the Pump
Long Term Storage
MOUNTING THE PUMP

Foundation Construction
Levelling the baseplate
Grouting
Suction Strainer
Bypass Piping
Auxiliary Piping
Driver Installation
Shaft Alignment
Aligning Spacer Coupling
Spacer Coupling Alignment Equipment
Section 2 Installation and Commissioning Approved: PB

2.A.1-1 R2-16.12.14
General animals would leave in the pump could cause
serious damage if undetected, all openings in the
Check upon Arrival pump must be tightly sealed.
This pump was thoroughly inspected at the factory 4. The pump should be located so as to permit air
prior to shipment to assure its conformity with all to circulate freely around it, and should be
specifications. Upon receipt of the unit, check for any protected from the possibility of damage by
damage incurred during shipping. Any such damage warehouse traffic. A visual inspection of the
should be reported to the carrier immediately. exterior of the unit should be conducted every
Rust Preventive thirty days.
NOTE: For pumps that are constructed of stainless 5. All bearing surfaces are coated with a protective
steel and duplex steel, rust inhibitors are not used and layer of Shell Ensis Oil 158 prior to shipping.
flushing is not necessary. When the pump is placed in storage and at least
Any internal parts that are vulnerable to rust, as well once every six months thereafter, the bearings
as parts shipped on parts orders, are protected with a must be recoated, as follows:
film of rust inhibitor. This coating can be removed by a. Remove the filler plug, which is located on the
flushing the pump or parts with a mild alkali solution at top of the bearing housing, and fill the housing
82°C, Petroleum solvents are also effective. to the specified oil level with Shell Ensis Oil
External machined surfaces are protected with 158 (or equivalent)
durable rust preventive. This can be removed with b. Rotate the pump shaft by hand, at least ten
kerosene or safety solvents. revolutions in the proper direction of rotation
as indicated on the tag. Position the shaft at
Cleaning the Pump
least 90° from its original position.
Before installation the pump must be thoroughly
flushed out to remove any foreign matter that may 6. Remove the bearing housing drain plugs and
have accumulated during shipping, storage or drain the housings. Replace the plugs and clean
handling. up any spilled preservative.
Long Term Storage 7. An inspection record should be maintained on the
If a new pump must be stored for a period of time prior equipment containing the following information.
to installation, a number of precautions should be a. Date of inspection.
observed to prevent damage. The pump and its b. Signature of person performing the inspection
components, as shipped from the factory are or maintenance
adequately protected for indoor storage prior to c. Results of any visual inspections.
installation, with the following stipulations. d. Date of any maintenance performed.
1. Water or other corrosive media must be e. Description of any maintenance performed.
prevented from accumulating in the pump. The 8. If the equipment is stored for longer than one
pump suction and discharge nozzles are fitted year, it will be necessary to disassemble the
with plywood or metal covers, which are not bearing housings and inspect the bearings.
watertight and will leak if exposed to prolonged
moisture. Should water accumulate in the pump
casing and then be allowed to freeze, the pump
will be seriously damaged.
2. To prevent condensation of atmospheric
moisture in the pump, packages of VPI crystals
or silica gel desiccant should be put in the suction
and discharge openings before they are sealed.
The active life of the desiccant and the quantity
required would depend on the climate to which it
is exposed. A card treated with a humidity-
detecting chemical can be used to indicate when
the desiccant should be replaced. These may be
obtained through the same sources as the
desiccant.
3. Precautions must be taken to prevent mice or
other small animals from nesting in the pump
casing while it is in storage. Since the debris such

2.A.1-2 R2-16.12.14
Mounting the Pump remounted on the baseplate only after the
baseplate has been levelled and grouted onto the
Foundation Construction foundation. Hoist the baseplate into position on the
1. Using the certified general arrangement drawing, foundation, carefully guiding it onto the foundation
construct a template having the same dimensions bolts.
as the baseplate, as shown in Figure 1 to hold the 3. Ensure that the baseplate levelling screws are in
foundation bolts in position while the foundation is the baseplate and are slightly protruding from the
poured. underside of the baseplate. Hoist the baseplate
into position on the foundation, carefully guiding it
onto the foundation bolts. Level the baseplate by
placing a machinist’s level on the machined
surfaces of the pump and driver pads on the
baseplate and adjust the baseplate levelling
screws as necessary. The equipment baseplate
mounting surfaces must be levelled longitudinally
and transversely to 0.002” per ft for API 610 pumps
Figure 1 and 0.005” per ft for general purpose equipment
and ASME pumps.
4. When the baseplate is level, begin to tighten the
2. Each foundation bolt should be surrounded by a foundation bolt nuts. Continue to check the level
pipe sleeve with an inside diameter about three and adjust the baseplate levelling screws if
times the size of the bolt. In this way the pipe will necessary, until all the nuts are completely
be held solidly in place while a small amount of tightened and the unit is secure and level on the
movement of the bolt will be possible after the foundation.
foundation has been poured.
Grouting
CAUTION! The foundation bolts should extend
CAUTION! It is essential that the concrete
above the top of the pipe sleeves enough to
foundation is fully cured before grouting.
allow one inch of space between the bottom of the
baseplate and the foundation surface for grouting. The 1. Prepare the surfaces to be covered by chipping
recommended foundation bolt set up is shown in and removing all laitance, dirt or oil-soaked or
Figure 2. damaged concrete to provide a clean, irregular
surface for the grout.
2. The metal surfaces of the baseplate must be
thoroughly cleaned of any rust, oil, paint or other
foreign substances. Do not use oil based solvents
for cleaning, because the residue left by such
solvents would prevent the grout bonding to the
metal.
3. Remove any water from the foundation bolt
sleeves and dry the entire foundation.
4. Build wooden forms around the perimeter of the
foundation as shown in Figure 3.
Figure 2
Levelling the Baseplate

1. If the driver was factory installed, dependent upon
the position of the baseplate grout holes, it may be
necessary to remove the driver from the baseplate
to facilitate the grouting of the baseplate.
2. Should it prove necessary to remove the driver Figure 3

then it should be stored in a safe location and

2.A.1-3 R2-16.12.14
5. The forms must be of sufficient strength to Suction Strainer
withstand the pressure of the grout, and must be It is recommended that a temporary suction strainer
sealed and rendered watertight, by caulking should be installed in the suction pipe to prevent any
between the forms and foundation. Attach a foreign matter from being drawn into the pump on
chamfer strip on the inside of the forms at the initial start-up or following any repair work on the
grout grade elevation, to prevent sharp edges. suction system. The strainer should be cone shaped
similar to that shown in Figure 4 with dimensions
6. Whenever the grout bed exceeds five feet (1.50 shown in table 2.1.
m) in either length or width, expansion control
joints are necessary. Use 3/8" (10mm) softwood
strips spaced on five-foot (1.5m) maximum
centres.
7. If the forms are placed on horizontal rough
concrete surfaces, seal the bottom with a stiff
sand and cement mortar, flush with the inside of
the forms. This should be done immediately prior
to placing the grout, because shrinkage of the
mortar may result in leakage.
8. Apply two heavy coats of good quality wax paste,
or one coat of shellac and one heavy coat of wax,
to the forms. Plastic sheeting is acceptable but
Figure 4
the sheeting must be stretched tightly to prevent
wrinkling.
9. Mix the grout according to the manufacturer's
instructions, then start filling the forms at one end
and maintain a level grade as filling progresses Pipe Size A C D E
towards the other end of the form. Ensure that the 3 5 2.5 8 4
grout completely fills the area under the 4 6.375 3.5 10 4
baseplate, leaving no voids or depressions. 6 8.50 5.5 12 6
Check for leaks around the forms during 8 10.625 7.0 14 8
application of the grout. The grout is not self-
10 12.75 9.0 14 8
sealing and will leak until it sets.
12 15 11.0 16 10
10. After the grout has thoroughly hardened, remove 14 16.25 12.25 18 12
the forms and check that all the nuts on the 16 18.5 14 20 14
foundation bolts are completely tightened. 18 21 16 22 16
20 23 18.25 24 18
24 30 22 32 16
Table 2.1
If possible, the suction strainer should be installed in a

vertical section of pipe with a downward direction of
flow, to minimise the probability of debris falling back
into the system when the screen is removed for
cleaning. The strainer should be mounted in a spool
piece and pressure gauges should be installed for
monitoring the pressure drop across the screen. The
strainer should be left in the line for at least 24 hours.

2.A.1-4 R2-16.12.14
Bypass Piping holes must not be drilled in the baseplate until further
If the pump is required to operate at reduced checks are conducted, as described below.
discharge, then it is necessary to install a bypass pipe
from the discharge back to the suction source. This NOTE: If the unit is equipped with a driver that
will protect the pump from damage caused by the heat employs sleeve type journal bearings and no thrust
that would be generated in the pumpage by simply bearing, a limited end float coupling will be used
throttling the discharge line. between the pump and driver. This type of coupling is
designed to limit the axial movement of one coupling
To regulate the flow in the bypass line and control the hub relative to the other, so that end-float in the driver
break down in the output pressure, a minimum flow will be controlled by the pump's thrust bearing. The
orifice should be installed in the bypass line. This distance between the pump and driver is therefore
orifice thus controls the temperature rise generated in critical, since it will determine the position of the driver
the pump. shaft in its bearings.
The size of the orifice will depend on the desired CAUTION! When mounting a driver that has no
amount of reduction in the pump's discharge. thrust bearing, it is essential that the driver
Refer to the certified General Arrangement drawing for shaft is in its proper running position before
details when the minimum flow orifice has been establishing the distance between the shafts. In some
supplied with the pump. instances, the correct running position will be the
centre of axial travel and in other cases it will be the
magnetic centre. Reference must be made to both the
Auxiliary Piping instructions and motor arrangement drawing provided
Depending on the installation, auxiliary piping may be by the driver manufacturer.
required for any or all of the following: bearing
Use a straight edge on the horizontal axis of the shafts
lubrication, lube oil cooling, seal injection, stuffing box
to ensure that the shafts are properly aligned.
drain, bearing bracket drain or pump casing drain.
Reposition the driver laterally as necessary to
When required, this piping is normally installed at the
eliminate any gaps between the straight edge and the
factory. If any external connections are required, they
shafts.
will be shown on the certified general arrangement
When the driver is correctly positioned on the
drawing.
baseplate, assemble the coupling to verify that the
CAUTION! If at any time it is found necessary proper distance has been allowed between the shafts.
to weld around the pumping equipment and If a limited end-float coupling is used, verify that the
driver, be sure that the ground connection is located driver shaft is in its proper running position.
as close as possible to the place to be welded, so that
Carefully drill and tap the driver mounting holes in the
no electrical current passes through the pump or
baseplate. The size of the mounting bolts will be
driver.
determined by the size of the holes in the driver lugs.
Driver Installation The diameter of the bolts should be smaller than the
diameter of these holes by the amount indicated in
The driver should be mounted on the baseplate only
table 2.2.
after the baseplate has been levelled on the
foundation. The same is true of a gearbox when one Diameter
Less than
is used. Refer to the instructions provided by the of hole in .75" to 1" Over 1"
.75"
manufacturer of the driver for details concerning the mounting (19 to 25mm) (25mm)
(19mm)
proper handling of the unit. lug
Accurate alignment of the pump and driver is essential Minimum
to successful operation and must be done in the field. 0.0625" 0.125" 0.1875
bolt
When the driver is mounted at our works, the unit is (1.6mm) (3mm) (4.8mm)
clearance
given a preliminary alignment.
Because of the possibility of damage or distortion Table 2.2
during shipping and handling, it is recommended that
the alignment of the driver shaft is checked prior to Be sure that the holes in the baseplate are exactly
installation. This is achieved by using a dial indicator centred below the holes in the mounting lugs. Take
mounted on the motor. care not to disturb the position of the driver while
marking the holes.
Carefully position the driver on the baseplate. The
pump outline drawing gives the approximate
dimensions for mounting the driver. Note that these
dimensions are for reference only and the mounting

2.A.1-5 R2-16.12.14
Shaft Alignment slowly rotate the hub, carrying the bracket and
To prevent excessive stress on the driver and pump indicator. If the indicator reads zero all the way around
bearings, the coupling and the shafts it is necessary the periphery of the hub, then the two hubs are
to conduct the following alignment procedure prior to concentric. Lining up correctly is absolutely essential;
initial start-up and thereafter at any time that the pump a flexible coupling should not be required to
or driver is serviced. compensate for misalignment that can be eliminated.
1. Mount a pair of dial indicators so that one reads the To test for parallelism: use an inside micrometer and
angular run-out between the two shafts, and the measure the distance between hubs at four points on
other reads concentric run-out. While this may be the periphery 90º apart. If the same reading is
done using dial indicator extensions, it is obtained, then the hubs are parallel.
recommended that a set of yokes may be used. Coupling adjustment with both shafts turning gives
These yokes are constructed so that a fork on one maximum allowable tolerances which may be easier
yoke engages the other yoke, thus allowing both and quicker to use than the previous methods.
shafts to be easily turned in unison.
Spacer Coupling Alignment Equipment
2. Rotate the shafts in unison and read the total It is recommended that consideration is given to the
indicator run-out on the dial indicators. Reposition on-site use of either electronic or laser shaft alignment
the units on the baseplate, using shims as equipment. These types of alignment equipment can
necessary to achieve angular and concentric eliminate many of the problems encountered using the
alignment within the tolerances given in table 2.3. traditional coupling alignment methods. The principal
Maximum Total Indicator Run–out benefits being greater alignment accuracy and
improvements in commissioning times.
Operating Speed Angular Concentric
0.004" 0.006" (0.15mm)

Under 1800 rpm
(0.10mm)
0.002"
1800 - 4000 rpm 0.003" (0.07mm)
(0.05mm)
Over 4000 rpm
0.001"
0.002" (0.05mm)
(0.025mm)
Table 2.3
3. When the units are properly aligned, tighten the
mounting bolts, then double check the alignment.
Do not dowel the driver in place until after the
alignment has been checked at the normal
operating temperature.
4. After completing the alignment of the pump to the
driver, but prior to assembling the coupling,
momentarily start the driver to verify that it rotates
in the proper direction. If the rotation is correct
connect the coupling.
Aligning Spacer Coupling
Tools required: dial test indicator and inside
micrometer.
Remove the spacer piece between coupling halves.
On one of the hubs clamp mount an extension arm or
bracket sufficiently long to extend across the space
between hubs. At the outer end of the bracket, clamp
a dial test indicator so that it will bear against the
periphery of the hub opposite from the one on which
the bracket is mounted. Set the indicator to zero (0).
To test for concentricity: start at the top of the hub and

2.A.1-6 R2-16.12.14
Section 3
Operation
Contents
PRE-STARTING INSTRUCTIONS
STARTING PROCEDURE
OPERATING CHECKS
EXTENDED SHUTDOWN
CARE OF STANDBY PUMPS
UNUSUAL OPERATING CONDITIONS
STOPPING THE PUMP
FREEZING
HOT SERVICE
Section 3 Operation Approved: PB

3.1-1 R2-17.12.14
Pre-Starting Instructions 7. Where installed check that the hot fluid bypass
1. Clean up the unit and check all the piping to lines are open to prevent thermal shock on start-
verify that it is properly installed. If possible, up.
install a suction strainer. 8. If the pump is equipped with a pressure lube
2. Check all bolted flanged connections ensuring system. A pressure switch in the lube system
that they are tight and make certain that all can prevent the main driver from being started
external connections have been made and until the auxiliary lube oil pump has adequately
function properly. pressurised the system.
3. Be certain that the driver is properly installed in 9. If the pump is equipped with water-cooled
accordance with the instructions provided by the stuffing boxes, mechanical seal heat
manufacturer. exchangers, or lube oil heat exchangers, turn on
the coolant supply. If the pump is being
4. Check the shaft alignment. Refer to the operated in sub-freezing temperatures, it may
alignment instructions given. Verify that the be desirable to postpone turning on these
driver rotates in the proper direction and that the services until the pump approaches operating
coupling is properly installed. temperature.
5. The pump is equipped with mechanical seals, 10. If a minimum flow bypass line has been installed
make certain that they have been correctly set from the discharge back to the suction source,
and the drive collar setscrews tightened. Refer open the bypass valve. Otherwise, open the
to the mechanical seal arrangement drawing discharge valve approximately ten percent
contained in this manual. (10%).
6. Make certain that adequate lubrication is CAUTION! If the pump is located above
provided as explained under “Filling the Lube the suction source, the discharge valve
System". Where fitted, verify that the oil rings in cannot be opened until the driver has
the bearing housings are free to rotate. In sub- been started, since this would cause the pump
freezing temperatures the oil should be heated to lose its prime. In these circumstances, a
to ensure that the bearings receive adequate bypass line is recommended.
lubrication on start-up.
11. Start the driver and verify that the direction of
Starting Procedure rotation is correct. Bring the driver up to the
1. Before starting a centrifugal pump, the volute operating speed. Do not "slow roll" the driver.
casing and suction piping must be completely Turning the pump at less than 1500 rpm may
filled with liquid. The rotating parts within the result in seizing of the internal parts that depend
pump depend upon this liquid for lubrication and on the pumpage flow for lubrication.
may seize if the pump is operated dry. 12. As soon as the pump begins to develop
discharge pressure, start slowly opening the
2. With the discharge valve closed, slowly open the
discharge valve. Avoid making any abrupt
pump suction valve to allow the pumpage to
change in the discharge velocity. Surging in the
enter the pump casing.
piping, which could occur as a result of an
3. When the pump is located below the level of the abrupt change, may cause serious damage. If
liquid to be pumped, it will prime itself when the the pump does not produce pressure at the
vent on the top of the volute casing is opened to discharge within seven seconds after starting
release trapped air or vapour from the pump. the driver, shut it down and re-prime the pump.
When liquid appears at the vent, the pump is
CAUTION! Do not operate the pump
fully primed.
against a closed discharge valve.
4. When the pump is located above the level of the
13. Once the pump has reached operating speed,
liquid to be pumped, an ejector or other means
the discharge valve must be opened. Running
must be provided to expel trapped air or vapour
the pump with the discharge valve closed will
from the pump casing.
cause most of the energy developed by the
5. The pump is equipped with mechanical seals. driver to be transferred to the pumpage in the
Reference must be made to the mechanical seal form of heat. This will cause the pumpage to
installation instructions contained in this manual. vaporise in the pump and will result in damage
6. If the pumpage is above 149°C, refer to the to the unit.
section named “Hot Service” on the next page. 14. Check the bearing housing oil level and the
bearing temperature – see section 5 for the
bearing temperatures.

3.1-2 R2-17.12.14
15. Check that the lubrication device contains the and will prevent condensation from
correct grade of oil as specified in the lube oil accumulating in the pump casing.
schedule. 3. After the pump has been stopped for more than
16. Check for vibration. During the first few minutes thirty days the bearings must be hand
of operation some vibration may be expected, lubricated. Remove the inspection plugs, in
however as the pump and motor reach their addition if a tilting pad bearing arrangement is
normal operating temperature the vibration used remove the pipe plug over the thrust collar.
should reduce to within normal tolerances. Apply the oil directly to the shaft and bearings.
Reference should be made to the pump Use the same grade of oil as that in the system.
vibration specified levels and test results. Failure to provide lubrication to the bearings
Vibration indicates improper alignment and the before starting the pump could result in scoring
unit must be shut down and re-aligned. of the bearings due to the oil draining away from
the shaft and bearing surfaces.
17. Check for any increase in pressure drop across
the suction screen, if used. The screen should Care of Standby Pumps
be cleaned if such a drop occurs. Leave the If your pump is on hot stand-by for instant start-up
screen in the line for at least 24 hours before service, it should be kept hot by circulating hot liquid
removing. through it. Cooling services and a slight sealing oil
flow to the stuffing box should be maintained.
Operating Checks
Periodically check the level of the lubricating oil in the Unusual Operating Conditions
reservoir and monitor the condition of the oil. When operating for some time at reduced discharge,
much of the pump’s power will go into the liquid in
Monitor the oil and bearing temperatures. The the form of heat. Under these conditions a bypass
operating limits are given in Section 5. The pump must be provided to prevent the liquid from becoming
must be stopped if either of these limits is reached. hot enough in the pump to vaporise. This will cause
Monitor the suction and discharge pressure gauges your pump to seize by running dry.
to verify that the pump is operating correctly. If at any
time these gauges indicate zero or low pressure the Stopping the Pump
pump must be stopped immediately. 1. Pumps should be shut down rapidly to prevent
Periodically check for leakage at the stuffing boxes. the internal parts from running dry and seizing.
The pump is equipped with mechanical seals, 2. Close the suction and discharge valves in a
excessive leakage indicates worn or damaged seal sequence, which will retain liquid in the pump as
faces and repair or replacement is necessary. it stops.
CAUTION! Never throttle the suction line. 3. If the suction source is above the pump, close
Never attempt to control the pump output by the discharge valve first.
throttling the suction valve. To do so will 4. If the suction source is below the pump, close
result in cavitation and may seriously damage the the suction valve first.
pump. If the pump is required to operate at less than
maximum output it is necessary to utilise a bypass
Freezing
line. When the pump is exposed to freezing temperatures
and is not in operation, care should be taken to
Extended Shutdown prevent liquid from freezing within the pump. The
If the pump is not placed immediately in service after pump casing should be drained by blowing the liquid
installation then there are several precautions which out with air. Also, thoroughly drain all cooling jackets
must be observed. to prevent freezing and damage to your pump.
1. The pump casing should be drained by blowing Hot Service
the liquid out with air. Also, drain all cooling If the pumpage is over 149°C, your pump should be
jackets to prevent the coolant from freezing and heated before start-up. This can be accomplished by
damaging the pump. circulating a small amount of hot liquid through the
2. If possible, the pump should be started once pump until the pump casing is within 66°C of the
every two weeks and run for twenty or thirty pumping temperature.
minutes. This will keep the bearings lubricated

3.1-3 R2-17.12.14
Section 4
Maintenance
Contents
DISMANTLING
General
Preliminary Disconnecting
Dismantling Process
Dismantling: Thrust Bearing
Dismantling: Radial Bearing
Removal of Mechanical Seals
Removal of End Covers and Complete Rotating Element
Dismantling of Rotating Element
Parts Inspection
ASSEMBLY
General
Assembly of Rotating Element
Re-Assembly of the Pump Case
Mechanical Seal Installation
Bearing Installation
Wear Part Clearances
Final Assembly Check
Assembly Torque Values
Troubleshooting
Section 4 Maintenance Approved: PB

4.A.1-BB2-R1 1-03.04.14
Dismantling
Refer to the applicable Pump Cross Section Drawing Disconnect Ancillaries
included within this instruction manual.
General
The pump may be completely dismantled without
disturbing the driver or the suction and discharge Dismantle Bearing
piping.
Assemblies
CAUTION! Before dismantling the pump,
ensure that the pump has been completely
isolated by closing all the valves in both the
suction and discharge lines. In addition close the
valves in the lines to any auxiliary connections.
If it is deemed necessary to remove the mechanical
seals for inspection or replacement, then this may be
Remove Mechanical
done without disturbing the case but requires the
removal of any necessary auxiliary piping, the
Seals
bearings and bearing housings and the spacer
coupling.
Preliminary Disconnecting Ancillaries
Before commencing pump dismantling, be sure that
the pump has been isolated by: Remove End Cover
1. Closing all valves in the suction and discharge
lines.
2. Closing the lines to any auxiliary connections.
3. Disconnect all auxiliary piping from the stuffing
box and bearing housing.
• It is not necessary to disconnect the suction Remove Rotating Element
or discharge piping, or the drain piping.
4. Drain the bearing housings completely, using
the plug on the bottom of the housing.
5. Disconnect the coupling between the pump and
driver and remove the spacer.
• It is not necessary to disturb the driver.
Dismantling Process
The pump consists of four major sub-assemblies:
• Volute case.
• End Cover
• Shaft, impeller and all attached parts.
• The bearing assemblies.
- Thrust bearings
- Radial bearings
NOTE! ClydeUnion Pumps recommend that
the rotating element and bearing assemblies
be removed to a maintenance workshop
where adequate facilities are available for further
dismantling.

4.A.1-BB2-R1 2-03.04.14
Dismantling: Thrust bearing
NOTE! Before dismantling the bearing
assembly it is important to lock the seal in
place using the seal locking mechanism.
For instructions please refer to the Seal IOM.
This is to prevent damage to the seal faces.
2. Unfasten the setscrews on the fan and remove

the fan assembly.
View of Thrust bearing assembly before dismantling.
3. Remove the lubrication connections and any

instrumentation attached to the bearing housing.
4. Remove outboard cover fasteners, cover &

bearing isolator.
1. Remove fan guard by unfastening the retaining

screws.
5. Untighten and remove the locknut. Then remove

the lock washer and oil flinger.

4.B.1-1 R1-01.08.13
Dismantling: Radial Bearing
6. Remove inboard cover fasteners.
View of Radial bearing assembly before dismantling.
7. Remove housing mounting fasteners and

housing.
1. Remove the lubrication connections and any

instrumentation attached to the bearing housing.
8. Remove Bearing and spacer (Abutment) ring.

2. Remove the outboard bearing isolator.
9. Remove Inboard cover and bearing isolator. 3. Remove inboard cover fasteners.

4.B.1-2 R1-01.08.13
4. Remove housing mounting fasteners and dowels. 8. Remove Inboard cover and bearing isolator.
5. Remove Bearing housing.
6. Untighten and remove the locknut. Then remove

the lock washer and oil ring.
7. Remove Bearing, flinger and thrust ring.

4.B.1-3 R1-01.08.13
Removal of Mechanical Seals should be possible to assess the condition of the
1. Ensure the coupling hub and bearings have throttle bushings without removing them.
been removed in accordance with the previous
section and the coupling IOM. Dismantling of Rotating Element
2. Drain the seal barrier fluid loops. NOTE! It is recommended that the rotating
3. Remove the stud nuts that retain the seal plate element is dismantled in a workshop with
to ensure that they are free of the pump end the facilities for further dismantling.
cover(s). Reference should be made to the
mechanical seal arrangement drawing. Before disassembling the rotating element, the
4. To remove the mechanical seal, refer to the individual components should be numbered so that
removal instructions within seal manufacturers they can be returned to their original positions when
IOM contained in this document. the pump is reassembled. Because the exact
configuration of the rotating element can vary,
Removal of End Cover and Complete reference must be made to the specific pump cross
Rotating Element section drawing contained in this manual. If the
1. Support the thrust end cover by fitting suitably impeller is examined and determined to be in good
rated eyebolts to the lifting holes tapped in to the condition, removal is not advised. If there are cracks
top of the end cover. observed in the shrouds, or excessive erosion of the
2. Using a suitably rated sling, apply a slight vanes, the impeller should be replaced. Contact
upward tension on to the end cover. ClydeUnion pumps for additional advice.
3. Remove the casing nuts. 1. Thoroughly clean and polish the shaft ahead of
4. Insert jackscrews in the tapped holes located on the components as they are removed. Apply
the end cover face and tighten equally to break penetrating oil to the shaft at the impeller and
the joint between the end cover and the volute shaft sleeve fits to aid removal.
case. 2. The impeller retaining collar on the thrust end of
5. Allow the lifting equipment to take the weight of the shaft is the first part to remove. Mark the
the end cover off of the studs and carefully slide location of the collar on the shaft. Remove the
the end cover away from the volute. setscrew that locks the rotation of the retaining
collar on the shaft. File off any burrs that are
CAUTION! Ensure the end cover is suitably raised by the setscrew. Unscrew the retaining
supported to prevent contact between the collar and carefully slide off of the shaft.
throat bushing and the shaft.
NOTE! Thread direction of the impeller
6. Continue to remove the end cover until it clears retaining collar is determined by the
the end of the shaft. Apply a counterbalance to direction of rotation of the pump.
the end cover to ensure it comes out straight.
7. Place a sling around the free end of the shaft 3. Using a soft flame heat the impeller to
and gradually ease the element out of the pump approximately 120° C. Use a soft faced mallet to
volute, taking care to ensure the case and tap the impeller off of the shaft.
impeller eye wear rings do not bind. Once the NOTE! When heating the impeller start at
drive end side of the impeller is free, support the the outer perimeter and work towards the
load of the shaft on a suitable stand, remove the hub, heating as evenly as possible. Use
tension on the sling and attach an additional wet cloths to keep the shaft cool. Allow the
sling to the drive end side of the impeller to impeller, once removed, to cool slowly.
support the entire element. Take the weight of
the element on the slings and remove the
supporting stand. Continue to fully remove the Parts Inspection
rotating element. Before reassembling the pump, a thorough check of
8. Case wear rings are located by means of a all parts should be made to ensure that no damaged
pressed in pin. Using a suitable puller, remove or worn parts are reused. Check the volute case and
the wear rings from the end cover and volute end cover for any burrs, chips, cracks or excessive
case. erosion/corrosion.
9. If absolutely necessary, remove throat bushings The following parts must be inspected for wear:
from the end cover and volute case. These are Radial and Thrust bearings, Shaft Sleeves, Case
an interference fit so may require some Wearing Rings, Impeller Wearing Parts, Throat
persuasion. They are located axially by Bushings and Mechanical Seal Parts.
setscrews which will need to be removed. It

4.C.1.A-1 R1-02.04.14
1. The use of old gaskets and "O" Rings should be
avoided. Assembly General
2. Under no circumstances should the gaskets 1. Refer to the pump cross section drawing during
and/or "O" Rings between the volute case and assembly. In general, the pump should be
end covers be re-used. assembled in reverse order of dismantling.
3. The shaft should be checked carefully to ensure 2. Prepare for assembly by thoroughly cleaning all
that any burrs or irregularities are removed. File parts.
off any burrs and smooth off the resulting file 3. The shaft should be polished and any burrs
marks with fine emery cloth. removed at the impeller, bearing and sleeve
4. Polish the shaft with fine emery cloth at the locations.
impeller, shaft sleeve, bearing and coupling 4. Check the shaft for concentricity. The maximum
locations. allowable run out is 0.001" total indicated
5. Check the shaft for straightness. reading.
6. Mount the shaft on a stand with precision ball 5. Bores in the end cover and volute case must be
bearing rollers located at the bearing journals. clean and free of burrs so that the case wearing
Then using a dial indicator; measure the run-out rings, and throat bushings will seat properly.
at the impeller and mechanical seal locations. 6. Use new case gaskets of the same thickness
and quality as those which are being replaced.
CAUTION! At no point should the total run-
out exceed 0.002”. Assembly of Rotating Element
1. Mount the Impeller by use of a suitable press
after heating. Locate the impeller against the
7. All running clearances must be accurately shoulder of the shaft. The Impeller should be
measured to determine if the parts are uniformly oven-heated to a maximum of 250°F
excessively worn. to 360°F (120°C to 180°C) to ease assembly.
8. Standard non-control type throat bushing Powdered molybdenum disulphide may be used
diametrical design clearances are 0.030" - as a lubricant.
0.035” when installed over a shaft sleeve or 2. Allow the impeller to cool before continuing with
0.060" - 0.065" when installed over a bare shaft. the next stages of assembly.
9. The enclosed table “Running Clearances” gives
the design clearances for the impeller rings and 3. Fit the thrust end retaining collar and fix location
throttle bushings. using a radially located grub screw.
10. If the diametrical clearance between the running 4. Re-check the concentricity of the rotating
parts exceeds 140% of the maximum design element at this point. Place the element on
clearance, then the parts should be replaced. precision rollers and measure the concentricity
11. If the pump is not being reassembled using a dial indicator.
immediately then all clean machined parts must 5. The rotor should be re-balanced to ISO grade
be protected against rust. A thin application of G2.5.
light machine oil is normally adequate for short-
term storage of parts. Pump Assembly
Case and Impeller Wear Surface 1. Ensure the bores, locating areas and sealing
areas of the volute case and end cover are
Inspection clean and free of any burrs.
1. The case wear rings should be replaced if the 2. Fit the case wear rings in to the end cover and
pump's performance drops below acceptable volute case.
standards due to excessive wear. 3. Throat bushings are an interference fit in to the
2. Running clearance between the case wear ring end cover and volute case. These bushings
and impeller wear ring should be measured to should be cooled down to approximately -112°F
determine the level of wear. (-80°C) by either placing in a deep freeze or
3. Impeller wear surfaces should also be using dry ice. Locate in the end cover and volute
inspected. If excessive wear is observed, by drilling and tapping holes for new setscrews.
contact ClydeUnion Pumps for support. 4. Fit the new gaskets on to the gasket faces of the
4. If corrective action is applied to the impeller end cover.
wear surface, it is good practice to replace the 5. Carefully lift the complete rotating assembly
corresponding case wear rings. using two slings, one either side of the impeller.
6. Carefully guide the drive end of the shaft
through the case and through the throat bushing
in the volute case.

4.C.1.A-2 R1-02.04.14
7. Just before entry of the impeller in to the volute,
support the element using a suitable stand,
remove the tension on the slings and remove
the sling on the drive end side of the impeller.
8. Load up the slings with the weight of the
element and remove the supporting stand.
9. Carefully ease the element the rest of the way
through the case, lifting the shaft at the drive
end of the pump slightly to prevent rubbing
against the throat bush.
10. Lift the thrust end cover with the use of an
eyebolt and appropriately rated sling.
11. Carefully guide the end cover over the end of
the shaft, avoiding contact between the throat
bushing and shaft. Apply a counterbalance to
the cover to ensure it remains level throughout
installation.
12. Install the case nuts making reference to the
torque values listed in Table 4.2. The nuts
should be tightened in an alternating criss-cross
pattern in at least three passes. Between
passes, turn the shaft slightly to check for any
indication of binding of the rotating element.
13. Check between the cover and case with a feeler
gauge to be sure of metal to metal contact.
14. Check the allowable float of the rotating element
within the case by pushing the shaft in both
directions and marking the shaft with reference
to the seal face at both extremes. Ideally the
movement should measure at least 1/8”
(3.2mm).

4.C.1.A-3 R1-02.04.14
Table 4.1: Running Clearances
New Part Design Clearances
Diameter of Parts API 610
Under 2.00" .010" - .012"

2.0" – 2.499" .011" - .013"
2.5" – 2.999" .012" - .014"
3.0" – 3.499" .013" - .015"
3.5" – 3.999" .014" - .016"
4.0" – 4.499" .015" - .018"

4.5" – 4.999" .016" - .019"
5.0" – 5.999" .017" - .020"
6.0" – 6.999" .018" - .021"
7.0" – 7.999" .019" - .022"

8.0" – 8.499" .020" - .023"
8.5" – 8.999" .020" - .024"
9.0" – 9.999" .021" - .025"
10.00" – 10.999" .022" - .026"

11.00" – 11.499" .023" - .027"
11.50" – 11.899" .023" - .028"
12.00" – 12.999" .024" - .029"
13.00" – 13.999" .025" - .030"

14.00" – 14.999" .026" - .031"
15.00" – 15.999" .027" - .031"
16.00" – 16.999" .028" - .033"

4.D.1-1 R1-27.06.13
Mechanical Seal Installation
1. Reference should be made the seal 5. Reference must be made to the installation and
installation instructions contained in this operating instructions contained in this manual,
manual. and the procedure outlined for starting a new
pump should be followed.
2. Mechanical seals must be clean, complete
and the seal faces in good condition. Assembly Torque Values
The torque values given in Table 4.2 are
3. A Cartridge seal is installed by carefully recommended as a means of achieving tight, evenly
sliding the complete assemblies onto the stressed joints with a minimum probability of the
shaft. Be careful not to damage or displace nuts, bolts or studs breaking or loosening. The
the "O" rings that are inside the mechanical values given apply to all ClydeUnion pumps, both
seals. vertical and horizontal. Tighten all fasteners on the
pump to the values given in Table 4.2 according to
4. Install the studs and nuts that secure the the following procedure.
seals to the pump case. Do not tighten the
drive collar setscrews until the bearings 1. Except in cases where the lubricants would be
incompatible with the fastener application, all
have been installed.
threads should be lubricated with copperslip.
Bearing Installation 2. All fastenings, with the exception of capnuts
To re-install the bearings refer to the bearing should be tightened evenly to a torque value of
cross-section and repeat the instructions on approximately 80% of that given in Table 4.2 on
bearing dismantling in reverse order. the first pass. Capnuts should be tightened to a
maximum of 30% of the final torque value
Final Assembly shown in Table 4.3 on the first pass. Then in at
1. Assemble the pump half of the coupling on the least two passes over the entire bolting layout,
shaft. the fastenings should be tightened to their full
2. Assemble the auxiliary piping, fill the bearing oil torque values.
reservoirs and then check the alignment of the
3. Ensure even distribution of the loading by
pump and driver and connect the coupling.
tightening alternatively opposed fasteners, in
3. Reference must be made to the installation and increments around the component, until all are
operating instructions, including starting the tightened.
pump, and follow the procedure outlined for
starting a new pump.
Final Assembly Check
Before operating the pump following disassembly
and assembly, it is essential that a number of checks
are made.
1. The pump is equipped with mechanical seals,
therefore make certain that they have been
properly set and the drive collar set-screws
tightened. Refer to the mechanical seal
arrangement drawing contained in this manual.
2. Clean up the unit and re-connect any piping that 4. The torque values given here apply only to
was disconnected during disassembly. fasteners on stationary components of the
Reference should be made to the General pump. The fasteners on the rotating element are
Arrangement drawing for details of all the all secured by lock–tab washers or setscrews,
required connections. and therefore need not be tightened to the
maximum torque values.
3. Check the shaft alignment. Refer to the
alignment instructions. When proper alignment 5. Look for a stamping on the fastener to indicate
is assured, assemble the coupling. the material, and then refer to the appropriate
column on the torque table. Where the material
4. Make sure that adequate lubrication is provided. is not stamped on the fastener, select the
When filling the bearing housings, pour the correct column according to the following
lubricant directly onto the shaft and bearings guidelines.
through the inspection holes.

4.E-1 R2-13.06.14
Fastener Application Column Number (Table 4.2)
Raised face flange joint with gasket 1
Case parting flange (with hexagon nuts) 2
Case parting flange (with capnuts) Table 4.3
Bowl and column (vertical pump)

Discharge head to suction well (vertical pump)
Stuffing box 2 with steel fastener
Seal housing or 3 with stainless fastener
Insulation chamber, seal housing, pressure
chamber (‘C’ Headgear application)
Impeller retainer
Seal gland 3
Inner case (double case pump)
Driver stand (vertical pump) 2 or 4

Pump and driver mounting see
Coupling fastener
Bearing assembly and mounting grade mark

4.E-2 R2-13.06.14
Table 4.2: Torque Values
Column 1 2 3 4
Med Carbon & Alloy Steel 304 & 316SS

Carbon Steel
SAE Gr 5 B8,B8M
Material SAE Gr 1 or 2
B7,B7M Monel
and A307 Gr A or B
A325.A449* Al Bronze
Grade
B6
Load
Clamping(lubricated) 45,000 psi 60,000 psi 20,000 psi 37,500 psi
Produced (Non-lube) 33,750 psi 45,000 psi 15,000 psi 28,000 psi
Inch Lbf.ft Nm Lbf.ft Nm Lbf.ft Nm Lbf.ft Nm

1/4 - 20UNC 6 8 8 11 3 4 5 7
5/16 – 18UNC 12 16 16 22 5 7 10 14
3/8 – 16UNC 18 24 24 33 8 11 15 20
7/16 – 14UNC 30 41 40 54 13 18 25 34
1/2 - 13UNC 45 61 60 81 20 27 38 52
5/8 – 11UNC 90 122 120 163 40 54 75 102
3/4 - 10UNC 165 224 220 298 70 95 135 183
7/8 – 9UNC 255 346 340 461 110 149 210 285
1 – 8UN 390 529 520 705 170 230 325 441
1.1/8 – 8UN 465 630 750 1017 250 339 470 637
1.1/4 – 8UN 790 1071 1050 1424 350 475 655 886
1.3/8 – 8UN 1075 1458 1425 1932 475 644 890 1207
1.1/2 – 8UN 1395 1891 1850 2508 615 834 1150 1559
1.5/8 – 8UN 1800 2440 2400 3254 800 1085 1500 2034
1.3/4 – 8UN 2250 3051 3000 4067 1000 1356 1875 2542
2 – 8UN 3390 4596 4525 6135 1500 2034 2830 3837
2.1/4 – 8UN 4890 6630 6525 8847 2175 2949 4080 5532
2.1/2 – 8UN 6750 9152 9000 12202 3000 4067 5630 7633
2.3/4 – 8UN 9040 12257 12050 16338 4020 5450 7540 10223
3 – 8UN 11815 16019 15750 21354 5250 7118 9850 13355
* Limited to 1.1/2 – inch maximum diameter
Table 4.3: Torque Values for Capnuts in B7/B7M Material

Bolt Size (in) Torque (Lbf.ft) Torque (Nm)
1.00 – 8UN 520 705
1.1/8 - 8UN 740 1000
1.1/4 - 8UN 1030 1400
1.3/8 - 8UN 1400 1900
1.1/2 - 8UN 1740 2360
1.5/8 - 8UN 2300 3120
1.3/4 - 8UN 3000 4070
2.00 - 8UN 4320 5850
2.1/4 - 8UN 6120 8290
2.3/8 - 8UN 7200 9760
2.1/2 - 8UN 8400 11380

4.E-3 R2-13.06.14
Trouble Shooting
Important: First check the ratings shown on the pump nameplate
Malfunction Probable Cause Remedy
A Pump not properly primed A Re - prime pump, ensure that the

Pump fails to start pumping suction line shut off valve is fully open
Check suction line pressure. If low,

B Suction line clogged B locate and remove obstructions
Back - flush pump to clean impeller

C Impeller clogged with foreign C
material
A Air leak in suction line or A Check for leakage and correct

Pump output not up to through stuffing box
capacity
B Impeller partly clogged B Back - flush pump to clean impeller
C Worn casing or impeller rings C Replace defective parts as required
D Insufficient positive head in D Ensure that suction line shut - off valve
suction line is fully open and line is unobstructed
A Improperly primed pump A Re - prime pump

Pump starts, then stops
pumping B Air or vapour pockets in the B Rearrange piping as necessary to
suction line eliminate pockets
A Insufficient lubrication or lube A Check lubricant and cooling system

Bearings run hot cooling
A Improper shaft alignment A Align shafts
Undue vibration
B Partly clogged impeller B Back - flush pump to clear impeller
C Broken or bent impeller, C Replace defective parts as required

or bent shaft
A Overheating mechanical seal A Check lubrication and cooling lines

Excessive Leakage from
stuffing box Mechanical seal incorrectly
B installed B Remove seal, check components &
reinstall
Mechanical seal failure
C C Remove seal, check components &
replace as necessary

4.E-4 R2-13.06.14
Section 5
Lubrication
Contents
LUBE SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
RECOMMENDED BEARING LUBRICANT
NORMAL TEMPERATURE OPERATION
FILLING THE LUBE SYSTEM

Oil Bath System
ROUTINE MAINTENANCE
Adding Oil
Changing the Oil
Section 5 Lubrication Approved: PB

5.2-1 R1-01.03.13
Lube System Description Filling the Lube System
It is essential with oil bath lube systems that the Oil Bath System
proper oil level is maintained in the bearing housings. When the pump is shipped from the factory, the
The correct oil level is determined by the oil level bearings are protected with a coating of Shell Ensis
window on the side of the bearing housing, with the Oil No.158 rust preventive. Since this coating is oil-
level of the oil at the centre of the window. soluble, it is not normally necessary to flush the
The constant level oiler must be adjusted to provide bearing housings before introducing the lubricant.
the correct level inside the bearing housing with the However, if the pump has been stored longer than
pump not running. This is done by slackening the three months prior to start-up, or if it has been
locknut on the threaded oiler support sleeve, exposed to dusty or corrosive conditions, thoroughly
screwing the oiler and sleeve down to the lowest flush the bearing housings with kerosene or safety
position, then removing the ¼" level plug from the solvent before introducing the lubricant.
bearing housing lug which carries the oiler.
If no oil flows, add oil to the housing until a small
Routine Maintenance
quantity escapes. Adding Oil
The equipment operator should monitor the oil level
Having established the correct oil level in the and replenish the supply in the system whenever it is
housing, slowly unscrew the oiler until bubbles start observed to be low. If a sudden drop in the oil level
to rise in the oil bottle, then screw it down just far occurs, check for leaks.
enough to stop the bubbling. Wait five minutes and if
there are no further bubbles and no significant flow Changing the Oil
from the level drilling, tighten the locknut and refit the Oil is subject to gradual deterioration due to dirt and
level plug. moisture and, in time, the accumulated sludge will be
harmful to the bearings. Moisture in the oil caused by
NOTE! Further bubbles may rise for a short condensation will also contribute to accelerated
time after the pump is re-started. bearing wear. Thus, periodically the lube system
must be drained and flushed and refilled with new oil.
Recommended Bearing Lubricant The oil change interval will vary according to the
To ensure maximum bearing life, use a straight, well operating conditions of the pump. Under average
refined turbine-type neutral mineral oil for lubrication. conditions, the oil should be changed at the end of
The oil must not contain any free acid, chlorine, every six months of operation.
sulphur or more than a trace of free alkali. The
viscosity grade of the oil depends on the operating
temperature of the pump. For the viscosity grade of
oil used in this pump refer to Section 1 – Leading
Particulars.
Normal Temperature Operation
The lubricating oil for this pump is outlined within
Section 1 – Leading Particulars. Operating
temperatures are as Table 5.1.
TEMPERATURE ISO VG 32 ISO VG 46 ISO VG 68
H HH H HH H HH
OIL INLET (⁰C) 54 60 60 65 66 71

OIL OUTLET
77 82 82 87 88 93
(⁰C)
BALL BEARING
93 99 98 104 104 110
(⁰C)
SLEEVE (⁰C) 88 93 93 98 99 104
Table 5.1
Section 5 Lubrication Approved: PB

5.2-1 R1-01.03.13
Section 6
Replacement Parts
In order to avoid costly shutdowns, it is recommended that replacement parts are stocked on
site.
ClydeUnion Pump (CUP) recommends that only replacement parts supplied by CUP
should be used in a CUP pump.
The use of ClydeUnion Pump parts ensures that replacement components are manufactured
from the highest quality materials, to exacting tolerances and specifications, thereby assuring
safe, efficient, long lasting and maintenance free operation, under the service conditions for
which the pump was designed and built.
The service in which the pump is employed should determine the quantities and types of
replacement parts required.
If several duplicate pumps are installed, or if the service is critical, it is recommended that a
spare rotating element is stocked.
To order replacement parts, please provide the following information:
1. The PUMP SERIAL NUMBER as stamped on the nameplate.
2. The CROSS SECTION drawing number (included with this manual).
3. The specific PART NAMES as shown on the cross section drawing.
4. The specific PART NUMBERS as shown on the cross section drawing.
The recommended replacement part listing included in this manual provides additional and
detailed information specific to replacement parts for this pump.
All orders or enquiries for replacement parts should be addressed to:
ClydeUnion Pumps
Green Road
Penistone
Sheffield
ENGLAND
S36 6BJ
Section 6 Replacement Parts Approved: PB

6-1 R1-27.06.13
SPX > Clydeunion Spare Part & Interchangeability Record SPX Clydeunion DB Ltd Date Created: 08/12/16
Customers Commissioning & recommended maintenance spares for 2 years Green Road, Penistone SPX > Clydeunion SPIR number: PBS 48353
300-P-101 E
Equipment No.
(Tag Item No.) Sheffield Created By: SAM HALL
S36 6BJ Email: sam.hall@spxflow.com

10x12x20Y BB2 1 STG
Telephone: +44(0)1226 763311

Telephone: +44 (0) 1226 222 280
CUSTOMER NAME: AGIBA PETROLEUM COMPANY Fax: +44(0)1226 766535
SPX
CUSTOMER ADDRESS:
Model No. Fax: +44 (0) 1226 766 535
CUSTOMER PHONE / FAX:
CUSTOMER PO / REFERENCE NUMBER: 4500015760 SPX > Clydeunion
SPARES PURCHASE ORDER

Customer Quantities
CUSTOMERS STOCK CODE

Quantities
NUMBER OF IDENTICAL
Recommended by Site
Number Approved for

Recommended for 2
OE.30043416.01
PART POSITION ON
SECTION DRAWING
SPIR LINE NUMBER
Recommended for
NUMBER
Recommended by
UNIT OF MEASURE
SPX SECTIONAL
commissioning
years spares
Serial No. COMMENTS
contractor
DRAWING SPX > CLYDEUNION BOUGHT-OUT BOUGHT-OUT
Purchase
Engineer
DESCRIPTION OF PART MATERIAL SPEC
NUMBER PART NUMBER PART NUMBER SUPPLIER NAME
(Attach to SPIR)
NUMBER OF
PARTS
PUMPS IN
1
SET
2 1 EA 2 CONSTANT LEVEL OILER: TRICO - 8oz BOTTLE ZZ08672-001 / ZZ08673-001 22 OI0043NK40 N/A N/A NK40 - Steel 0 1
2 2 EA 2 CONSTANT LEVEL OILER TRICO WIRE CAGE-8OZ ZZ08672-001 / ZZ08673-001 23 OI0042NK40 N/A N/A NK40 - Steel 0 1
2 3 EA 2 BEARING: 7313.BG ZZ08672-001 17 BE7313BGNK35 N/A N/A NK35 - Steel 2 2
1 4 EA 1 BEARING LOCKWASHER: MB12 ZZ08672-001 18 BKMB12NK35 N/A N/A NK35 - Steel 1 1
1 5 EA 1 BEARING LOCKNUT: KM12 ZZ08672-001 19 BJKM12NK35 N/A N/A NK35 - Steel 1 1
1 6 EA 1 FAN: THRUST END(CCW PUMP) ZZ08672-001 11 ZZ03303-001NH01 N/A N/A NH01 - ALUMINIUM 0 1
4 7 EA 4 GASKET E90832-01 815-1 GAS2002046 N/A N/A AISI 316 SP. WD. w/Graphlex or Flexicarb 4 4
4 8 EA 4 GASKET E90832-01 815-2 GAS2002047 N/A N/A AISI 316 SP. WD. w/Graphlex or Flexicarb 4 4
1 9 EA 1 IMPELLER, DOUBLE ENTRY E90832-01 805 IMPUC9100801-----A N/A N/A AC22 - ASTM A487 CA6NM NACE 0 1
1 10 EA 1 RING,WEAR, CASING E90832-01 808-1 RINUC909610015---A N/A N/A AC12 - ASTM A743 CA15 (315-365 HB) 0 1
1 11 EA 1 RING,WEAR, CASING E90832-01 808-2 RINUC909610016---A N/A N/A AC12 - ASTM A743 CA15 (315-365 HB) 0 1
1 12 EA 1 SHAFT,PUMP E90832-01 820 SHAUD9796801-----A N/A N/A ASTM A434 CLASS BC (235HB MAX) NACE 0 1
1 13 EA 1 RETAINER,THRUST RING E90832-01 821-1 RETUB916400009---A N/A N/A AC14-ASTM A743 Grade CA 15 (235 HB max) 0 1
1 14 EA 1 RING,THRUST E90832-01 825-1 RINUB916410009---A N/A N/A AC14-ASTM A743 Grade CA 15 (235 HB max) 0 1
NUMBER OF PARTS PER PUMP
1 15 EA 1 KEY E90832-01 TBC KEY2001055 N/A N/A 0 1

5 16 EA 5 KEY E90832-01 TBC KS2424BB41 N/A N/A BB41 - BS 970 817 M40T 0 5
2 17 EA 2 LOCKNUT E90832-01 821-4 LOCUB9170800-----A N/A N/A BD41 - ASTM A276 T.316 Condition A 0 1
2 18 EA 2 THROWER E90832-01 821-3 THRUB9170700-----A N/A N/A BD41 - ASTM A276 T.316 Condition A 0 1
2 19 EA 2 RING,THRUST E90832-01 825-2 RINUB9170600-----A N/A N/A NF01 - TITANIUM 318A, COLD DRAWN WIRE 0 2
1 20 EA 1 KEY E90832-01 TBC KEY2001056 N/A N/A 0 1
1 21 EA 1 HOUSING,BEARING, JOURNAL (ROLL.EL) ZZ08673-001 3 HOUZZ07445007----A N/A N/A AB11 - ASTM A216 Gr.WCB 0 1
1 22 EA 1 COVER,BEARING ZZ08673-001 2 COVZZ07238005----A N/A N/A DB41-BS EN 10025 Gr S275JR 0 1
1 23 EA 1 RING,'0' ZZ08673-001 13 RIN2005044 N/A N/A JJ36 - Buna 'N' (Nitrile) 1 1
1 24 EA 1 THROWER, OIL INBOARD ZZ08673-001 4 THRZZ07239005----A N/A N/A DB41-BS EN 10025 Gr S275JR 0 1
1 25 EA 1 BEARING: 6219.C3 ZZ08673-001 15 BE6219C3NK35 N/A N/A NK35 - Steel 1 1
1 26 EA 1 BEARING LOCKWASHER: MB19 ZZ08673-001 16 BKMB19NK35 N/A N/A NK35 - Steel 1 1
1 27 EA 1 BEARING LOCKNUT: KM19 ZZ08673-001 17 BJKM19NK35 N/A N/A NK35 - Steel 1 1
1 28 EA 1 SEAL, OIL ZZ08673-001 1 SEA2001979 N/A N/A NG01 - BRONZE 0 1
1 30 EA 1 FAN ZZ08673-001 9 FANZZ07624001----A N/A N/A ALUMINIUM (ANTI-STATIC PLASTIC BLADES) 0 1
1 31 EA 1 HUB,FAN ZZ08673-001 10 HUBZZ07623005----A N/A N/A AG26 - ASTM B584 C93200 0 1
1 32 EA 1 GUARD FAN ZZ08673-001 6 GUADBB23152------A N/A N/A NH02 - Aluminium (non-Spark) 0 1
1 33 EA 1 GUARD FAN ZZ08673-001 7 GUADBB23154------A N/A N/A NH02 - Aluminium (non-Spark) 0 1
1 34 EA 1 HOUSING,BEARING, THRUST (ROLL.EL.) ZZ08672-001 3 HOUZZ07478003----A N/A N/A AB11 - ASTM A216 Gr.WCB 0 1
1 35 EA 1 COVER,BEARING ZZ08672-001 7 COVZZ07244001----B N/A N/A AB11 - ASTM A216 Gr.WCB 0 1
1 36 EA 1 COVER,BEARING ZZ08672-001 2 COVZZ07243001----B N/A N/A AB11 - ASTM A216 Gr.WCB 0 1
2 37 EA 2 O' RING: BS4518-1645-30 ZZ08672-001 15 OR4518-06JJ36 N/A N/A JJ36 - Buna 'N' (Nitrile) 2 2
1 38 EA 1 THROWER, OIL INBOARD ZZ08672-001 5 THRZZ07245001----A N/A N/A DB41-BS EN 10025 Gr S275JR 0 1
1 39 EA 1 RING,ABUTMENT ZZ08672-001 4 RINZZ07608001----A N/A N/A BB01 - BS970 709M40 Condition T 0 1
Revisions
1 Notes Comments Date
1 - Red text denotes fields to be completed by customer Revision A
Revision B
SPX SPIR Template - Matt Cartwright 2010 Revision C

SPX > Clydeunion Spare Part & Interchangeability Record SPX > Clydeunion Pumps Ltd Date Created: 08/12/16
Customers Commissioning & recommended maintenance spares for 2 years Green Road, Penistone SPX > Clydeunion SPIR number: PBS 48353
300-P-101 E
Equipment No.
(Tag Item No.) Sheffield Created By: SAM HALL
S36 6BJ
Email: sam.hall@spxflow.com
10x12x20Y BB2 1 STG
Telephone: +44(0)1226 763311

CUSTOMER NAME: AGIBA PETROLEUM COMPANY Fax: +44(0)1226 766535 Telephone: +44 (0) 1226 222 280
SPX
CUSTOMER ADDRESS:
Model No.
CUSTOMER PHONE / FAX: Fax: +44 (0) 1226 766 535
CUSTOMER PO / REFERENCE NUMBER: 4500015760 SPX > Clydeunion
Customer Quantities
CUSTOMERS STOCK CODE

Quantities
NUMBER OF IDENTICAL
Recommended by Site
Number Approved for

Recommended for 2
PART POSITION ON
OE.30043416.01
SECTION DRAWING
SPIR LINE NUMBER
Recommended for
Recommended by
UNIT OF MEASURE
SPX SECTIONAL
commissioning
years spares
Serial No. COMMENTS
contractor
DRAWING SPX > CLYDEUNION BOUGHT-OUT BOUGHT-OUT
Purchase
Engineer
DESCRIPTION OF PART MATERIAL SPEC
NUMBER PART NUMBER PART NUMBER SUPPLIER NAME
(Attach to SPIR)
NUMBER OF
PARTS
PUMPS IN
1
SET
1 40 EA 1 SHIM, BEARING ZZ08672-001 6 SHIZZ07607000----A N/A N/A JJ01 - Plastic 0 1
2 43 EA 2 TAPER PIN: No.8x4.1/2"LG. ZZ08672-001 26 A09252NK40-04 N/A N/A NK40 - Steel 0 1
1 44 EA 1 GUARD FAN ZZ08672-001 8 GUAZZ07246001----B N/A N/A NH02 - Aluminium (non-Spark) 0 1
1 45 EA 1 GUARD FAN ZZ08672-001 9 GUAZZ07247001----B N/A N/A NH02 - Aluminium (non-Spark) 0 1
2 46 EA 2 MECHANICAL SEAL ASSEMBLY E90832-01 823 MSA2001610 N/A N/A VARIOUS 2 2
8 47 EA 8 STUD, UNC N/A N/A STUDBA530638-----A N/A N/A GK11 - ASTM A193 B7 ZINC PLATED 0 2
48 EA 0
49 EA 0
50 EA 0
51 EA 0
52 EA 0
53 EA 0
54 EA 0
NUMBER OF PARTS PER PUMP
55 EA 0
56 EA 0
57 EA 0
58 EA 0
59 EA 0
60 EA 0
61 EA 0
62 EA 0
63 EA 0
64 EA 0
65 EA 0
66 EA 0
67 EA 0
68 EA 0
69 EA 0
70 EA 0
71 EA 0
72 EA 0
73 EA 0
74 EA 0
75 EA 0
76 EA 0
77 EA 0
78 EA 0
79 EA 0
Revisions
1 1 Notes Comments Date
1 - Red text denotes fields to be completed by customer Revision A
Revision B
Revision C
SPX SPIR Template - Matt Cartwright 2010
Section 7
Drawings
• Pump General Arrangement
• Pump P & ID
• Pump Wiring
• Pump Nameplate
• Mechanical Seal Cross Section Drawing
• Seal System GA
• Coupling GA
• Motor GA
Section 7 Drawings
Pump GA
ClydeUnion DB Limited are an approved ISO 9001:2008 & ISO/TS 29001:2011 company Registered by Lloyds Register Certificate No: LRQ 0902438 & LRQ 4009002
1 2 3 4 5 6
2 0 0. 0 0
F1 BO
5080
84 . 00
MAJOR CONNECTIONS
CUSTOMER CONNECTIONS
2 13 4
C1 DISCHARGE FLANGE: 10"-600# R.F ANSI FLANGE
6 0. 50
C6 3 C2 SUCTION FLANGE: 12"-600# R.F ANSI FLANGE
1 5 37
2 0. 0 0
C5
508 C3 PUMP DRAIN: 3/4" 600# R.F.
AUXILIARY CONNECTIONS
BI 15 . 00 42 . 50 42 . 50 4 2. 5 0 42 . 50 15 . 00 C4 PUMP VENT: 3/4" 600# R.F.
C5 PLAN 54 INLET: 3/4" 600# R.F
VIEW ON SEAL PLATES 38 1 1 08 0 1 08 0 1 0 80 1 08 0 3 81
C6 PLAN 54 OUTLET: 3/4" 60 0# R.F
A C7 . A
P LAN 5 4
S YS TE M .
AA CONSTANT LEVEL OILER
H D BO LT
HD B OL T
HD B OL T
HD B OL T
HD B OL T
BB .
5 8 .0 0
14 7 3
CC .
DD BASE DRAIN: 2" 150# R.F
EE ACCELEROMETER BRG. D.E: VERTICAL
FF ACCELEROMETER BRG. D.E: HORIZONTAL
GG ACCELEROMETER BRG. N.D.E: VERTICAL
6 .0 0 HH ACCELEROMETER BRG. N.D.E: HORIZONTAL
JJ RTD (BEARING D.E)
152
KK RTD (BEARING N.D.E INNER)
TYP
D I S C H.
1 5 .0 0
RTD (BEARING N.D.E OUTER)
1 . 50
LL
381
C5 C6
38
MM .
CL
NN .
PP .
F1 FLUSH INLET: 3/4" NPT (PLAN 11)
BI BARRIER IN
S E AL C O N N ' S
4 0. 0 0
BO BARRIER OUT
1 0 16
38 . 50
AA
9 78
AA . .
KK . .
GG EE
JB1 JUNCTION BOX (R.T.D)
JB2 JUNCTION BOX (VIBRATION)
B B
80 . 00
2 03 2
C
L P UM P , M OT OR & .
BASEPLATE
38 . 50
LL
40 . 00
1 01 6
9 78
FF JJ
HH
PUMP SPECIFICATIONS
SIZE: 10x12x20Y TYPE: BB2
No.STAGES: 1 SPEED: 2980 RPM
ROTATION ROTATION: CCW (AS SEEN FROM DRIVER)
S UC T .
JB 2 MECHANICAL SEAL: JOHN CRANE
1 . 50
JB1 C4 C3
38
TYPE: BDPFN
CL
2 EARTHING BOSSES COUPLING: METASTREAM
1 0 - 1 " HOL E S F OR 1 0 - HOL E S T A P P E D 1 . 0 0 "- 8 UNC D I A G ONA L L Y OP P OS I T E
36 . 00 B A S E HOL D I N G D OW N FOR LEVELLING BASEPLATE TYPE: TLKA-0750
91 4 BO LTS GUARDS: BRASS
69 . 20 11 2. 2 0 6. 78 DRIVER SPECIFICATIONS
4 4. 3 3 17 5 8 28 5 0 1 72 MAKE: SIEMENS
1 1 26 FRAME SIZE: TBA
3 4 .0 2 3 5. 1 7 9. 8 4
2 2. 00 30 . 00 KW: 1300 SPEED: 2980 RPM
86 4 8 93 2 50
SUPPLY (V/Ph/Hz) : 6600/3/50
& D IS CH
5 59 7 62 1 . 98 D BS E
L S UC T .
DIMENSIONAL PRINT: A5E38312708A
50 SUPPLIED BY: CLYDE UNION
C C
C
5 8. 0 0
1 4 73 LL GG
JJ
KK
EE
WEIGHTS (APPROX.)
PUMP: 4564 LBS 2070 KGS.
86.00 APPROX.
BASE: 6360 LBS 2885 KGS.

DRIVER: 20282 LBS 9200 KGS.
21 8 4
1 5 .5 0
1 5 .5 0
.COUPLING: 117 LBS 53 KGS.

39 4
39 4
C1 ANCILLARIES: 456 LBS 207 KGS.

P L A N 54
6 5. 0 0
1 6 51
S YS TE M CL CL TOTAL:- 31779 LBS 14415 KGS.
D R AIN P AN
1. 0 0
D I S C H. S UC T .
25
HH
C6 C5 C2 FF
C3 C 4
32 . 88
DD
9. 5 0
2 41
8 35
CUSTOMER DATA
15 . 50
15 . 25
3 94
3 87
USER: AGIBA PETROLEUM COMPANY

PURCHASER: AGIBA PETROLEUM COMPANY
SITE/CONTRACT: MELEIHA FIELD
BASEPLATE
L P UM P &
C4 2 2. 0 0 4 LIFTING LUGS PURCHASE ORD. 4500015760

DD M A NU F A C T UR E D
5 59 2 -S I D E ME MBE R S ITEM No: 300-P-101 E
F R OM 5 5 m m P L A T E
3 0 0 x 1 0 0 4 6 k g / m P FC
LIQUID PUMPED: CRUDE OIL
D C3 30 . 00 4 C R OS S M E M B E R S D
C
7 62 180x75x20 kg/m PFC T OP P L A T E S L OP E S PUMP SERIAL No: 30043416.01

. 1 2" P E R F O O T 5 CR O S S ME MBE R S
2 0 0 x 7 5 x 2 3 k g/ m P F C
03 'C2' DESCRIPTION
C HA N G E D THIS D RAW ING IS OW NED BY CLYD E UNION D B LIMITED AND
CAD
N o M a nual
IS C O N D IT I O N A L L Y L O A N E D T O T H E R E C I P IE N T W H O B Y
RECEIVING IT HAS AGREED NOT TO REPRODUCE OR COPY IT
TITLE: GENERAL ARRANGEMENT 10x12x20Y BB2
S R , 24 A U G 20 1 6 M o d if ic a t io n s IN WH OLE OR IN PAR T NOR TO FURNISH IT OR IN FORM ATION
Tolerance unless otherwise noted 02 U P D A T E D AS P E R DO N O T SC A L E FROM IT TO OTH ERS NOR TO MAKE ANY USE OF IT THAT IS Drawn: VK Date:24MAY16 DRAWING No. REV.
N O T T H E S U B J E C T O F W R I T T E N A G R E E M E N T B Y C L Y D E U N IO N
Pump Assembly Dimensions ±0.125" C US T OM E R
C O M M E NT S DB LIM ITE D AND TO R ETUR N IT UP ON R E QUE ST. Checked: TS Date:24MAY16
Piping Dimensions ±0.38"
S R , 19 J U L Y 2 01 6 P R O JE C T I O N R e f: - Scale:- Approved:TS Date:24MAY16 DBG-30043416.01 03
1 2 3 4 5 6 A3
Pump Unit P & ID
Pump Wiring Diagrams
Pump Nameplate Drawing
Clarification Response Form/Response to Comments
Customer: AGIBA Petroleum Co.
PO Number: 4500015760
SPX Pump Serial Number: 30043416.01
Pump Tag Number(s): TBC
Responded by: R Johnson Title: Projects Coordinator Date: 18.08.2016

Document Title: Pump Nameplate (D010-001) Rev No: 0
Item Page Reference Comment Description Comment Reply

1. NPSHR to be included. Incorporated
General 2. Rewording Capacity with Rated
Capacity.
Mechanical Seal Cross Section Drawing
MODIFICATIONS: A ORIGINAL ISSUE Matl
DRAWING
G No. ISSUE Drawing Number Description Material Qty Spare
ISSUE 'B' :- GA DRAWING APPROVED BY CUSTOMER WITH COMMENTS. ROTATION WAS CCW, CONNECTIONS ROTATED TO 12.5° ANGLE, SERVICE DETAILS & API PLAN UPDATED. SE(24/06/16).
Item
Code
ISSUE 'C' : MAX. CHAMBER DYNAMIC PRESSURE WAS 37 BARG. GCN 112893. (MKS 25/7/16).
1 67823-0388 9225 ROTARY SEAL RING REACTION BONDED SILICON CARBIDE 2 X
GA-190418 C
2 0000248 9549 O-RING FLUOROCARBON 4 X
DIRECTION OF NOTE :- ONLY PARTS ITEMISED TO BE SUPPLIED BY JOHN CRANE UK LTD. 3 901409-0309 9055 STATIONARY SEAL RING RESIN IMPREGNATED CARBON 2 X
ROTATION
4 1050/K02/751 3315 SSR CARRIER ASSEMBLY 316 STAINLESS STEEL /MONEL K500 2
2 X M12 NOTE : THIS SEAL IS SUITABLE FOR BOTH DRIVE END & NON-DRIVE END.
2 X M12 HOLE HOLES FOR 5 1050/K04/198 7510 ANTI-EXTRUSION CAP 25% GLASS FILLED PTFE 4 X
12° 12°
FOR LIFTING LIFTING PURPOSE NOTE :- BARRIER FLUID PRESSURE IS 60 BARG 6 71030500005 0550 CAP HEAD SCREW (M3 X 5) 316 STAINLESS STEEL 6
PURPOSES 'BO' 7 0000351 9549 O-RING FLUOROCARBON 2 X
4 X 1"-8UNC STUDS MAX. CHAMBER STATIC PRESSURE : 80 BARG
EQUISPACED 8 68594-0264 7510 ANTI-EXTRUSION WASHER 25% GLASS FILLED PTFE 2 X
ON A 224.99 (8.858") PCD MAX. CHAMBER DYNAMIC PRESSURE : 44.8 BARG 9 0400/K03/696 5080 BUSH POLYAMIDE-IMIDE POLYMER 4 X
10 18129-0182 5375 SPRING INCONEL X750 24 X
11 73934-0152 0552 CLIP AUSTENITIC CR-NI STAINLESS STEEL 2
12 H-0970M-1042 0550 SLEEVE 316 STAINLESS STEEL 1
45 °
14 H-0970M-1043 0550 INNER GLAND PLATE 316 STAINLESS STEEL 1
122.6 16 H-0970M-1044 0550 OUTER GLAND PLATE 316 STAINLESS STEEL 1
POSITION 'A' # 4.827"
114.3 17 0000263 9549 O-RING FLUOROCARBON 1 X
4.500" 75 18 H-0970M-1045 0550 FLOW GUIDE 316 STAINLESS STEEL 1
35 19 71030500010 0550 CAP HEAD SCREW (M3 x 10) 316 STAINLESS STEEL 4
111.3 56 1.378"
25 11.99 20 71081250020 0550 CAP HEAD SCREW (M8 x 20) 316 STAINLESS STEEL 4
# 0.984" ° 0.472" 21 W/29022/1/001 0550 SETTING PIECE 316 STAINLESS STEEL 4
12.5
22 72050800011 0550 HEX HEAD SCREW (M5 x 11) 316 STAINLESS STEEL 4
'F'
'A'
20 'BO'
2 X M12 HOLES
FOR EXTRACTION 21 'BO'
PURPOSES
22 CUSTOMER SCOPE
31.75 OF SUPPLY 'BI'
'BI' 1.25"
API682 Plan 11
VIEW ON ARROW 'A' Recirculation from pump discharge API682 Plan 54
through a flow control orifice to the seal. Pressurized external barrier fluid reservoir
7.94 ±0.01 or system supplying clean fluid to the seal
chamber.
SEAL ASS'Y NO. BILL OF MATERIALS NUMBER
10 7 4 2 6 11 18 2 15 11 6 12 2 4 7 10 ASSEMBLY 89776548
IN : Ø 105 mm
SEAL HEAD
52.61 20.1
ON SLEEVE
2.071" 0.79" OUT: Ø 105 mm SPARES KIT 89776552

DESCRIPTION ITEMS NUMBER
EQUIPMENT REFERENCE SEAL DATA
4 1/4-12 UN -2A R.H
O 266
100.25 ±0.08
25.4 OEM: API PLAN: API CODE:
97
96.99
3.8184" SHAFT
SPX 11/54 BDPFN
170.04
170
6.6929" BOX BORE
EQUIPMENT TYPE: INSTRUCTION MANUAL REF.
O 3.8189"
8 9 14 5 3 1 5 13 5 1 17 3 5 19 9 8 16
107.95
4.250"
PUMP
O 6.6945"
O 97.07 ±0.03 MODEL, FRAME / SIZE MATERIAL CODE:
SLEEVE
O
10x12x20Y / BB2,
SERIAL / DRAWING No.
D97919 02
KEYWAY DETAILS
ON SLEEVE CUSTOMER INFORMATION SERVICE DATA
CUSTOMER: FLUID:
CLYDEUNION PUMPS CRUDE OIL
P.O. NUMBER: PLANT ITEM NO: BARRIER FLUID:
4500141232 300-P-101E ISO VG10 ADDITIVE FEE MINERAL OIL
END USER: CHAMBER PRESSURE:
AGIBA PETROLEUM CO. 120 MIN / 350 RATED / 650 MAX PSIG
LOCATION: SUCTION PRESSURE:
# MODIFICATION TO PUMP 120 MIN / 350 RATED / 650 MAX PSIG
PLANT: DISCHARGE PRESSURE:
MELEIHA FIELD UPGRADE 300 MIN / 750 RATED / 950 MAX PSIG
REFERENCE DATA:DOR088068 PSD-9733 PROCESS TEMPERATURE:
NOTE :- SPACERS ARE FOR POSITIONING OF SAP No : 4000810728 20 MIN / 35 NORM / 50 MAX °C
SEAL FLUSH RATE: SHAFT SPEED: VAPOUR PRESSURE:
SEALS ONLY AND MUST BE MOVED TO
FLUID SYSTEM DRG: 2980 RPM 6-10 PSIA
POSITION 'A' AND TIGHTENED WITH HEX. HEAD IPROJECTS NO: SPECIFIC GRAVITY: VISCOSITY:
SCREWS BEFORE START UP.
'BI' 225277-UK 0.8-0.83 6 cSt
DE / NDE DRG NO:
CONNECTIONS :- SEAL SIZE: Ø97.00 mm
19.05 114.3 SEAL TYPE: RRDP TANDEM CARTRIDGE
Notes: 0.75" 4.5" SCALE DATE DRAWN CHECKED APPROVED DESIGN AUTH.
'F' : FLUSH CONNECTION (IN STUFFING BOX) Refer to John Crane
° 1.1:1 19-May-16 MKS SR - GB02EN
'BI' : 3/4" NPT BARRIER INLET CONNECTION (PLUGGED FOR TRANSIT). Seal and Installation Instructions 12.5
37.5 DRAWING No. ISSUE
'BO' : 3/4" NPT BARRIER OUTLET CONNECTION (PLUGGED FOR TRANSIT). for recommended practice
erty rights
Alll intellectual property r (including
g butt not
ot limited
limi to copyright
copyrigh and design
esig rights
ts whether
e registered oro unregistered)
u e d) in relation
t to
o this
h drawing together
her with the informatio
in n contained
d in this
is drawing (including butt not
ot limited
limi to know-how and confid tial information) is
confi enti GA-190418 C
prop prietary to
o John Crane. Reproduction
pr d n (whether
he in whole
w or in part)
art) or use
us in any
an way whatsoever
ever off this drawing or
o off any
ny information n contained therei
ein is prohibited except
exce t with
wi thee prior
p written
i consent
nt of John Crane.
Cr All rights in relation
n to
o this
hi drawing are e reserved.
A1
Seal System Drawing
ITEM QTY DESCRIPTION PART NO. MATERIAL MANUFACTURER MODEL NUMBER
1 1 MOTOR: 7.5 KW 2904 RPM 3/50/380V Ex de IIB T4 Gb ATEX LMO-XX29-AMX1 CS/PAINT ABB 3GKP 131 240-BDH IM3611 V18
2 1 PUMP - CIG, CI CASE LPM-40792-001 CS/316 SS IMO CIG-33016RDW
3 1 RESERVOIR ASSEMBLY: 40 GAL W/ CLN OUT 50 x 20 x 18 LBB-04L4-0011-M 304 SS JCFCG
4 1 STRAINER: SUCTION 1 1/4" NPT 100 MESH LFE-ASA6-T02 304 SS STAUFF TFS-120-0 / SUS-A-088-N20F-195-125-0
5 2 PRESSURE GAUGE: 100 MM/4" DIAL 0-1500 PSI/ BAR 1/2" NPT LPI-15K6-A32N0-MB 316 WT'D WIKA 233.30 GLYCERIN
6 3 BLOCK/BLEED VALVE: 1/2" FNPT x 1/2" MNPT SINGLE PORT LVI-4SP6-G01-M 316 SS PGI V-522-SCV
7 2 PRESSURE CONTROL VALVE: 3/4" NPT 400-1100 PSI LVR-CC661-F02-M CS/SS FULFLO SVS-4001-R/3SS
8 1 HILCO SIMPLEX FILTER 1" CL 600# RF PORTS, 1/2" VENT / DRAIN LFA-8006-LS01 316/L SS HILCO 22312-521202227
9 4 FILTER ELEMENT: 52312 SERIES FILTERS 10 MICRONS LFE-32532-001 EPOXY HILCO PH312-01-CG
10 1 MOTOR: .75 KW 1408 RPM 3/50/380V Ex de IIB T4 Gb ATEX LMO-7X14-AMX1 CS/PAINT ABB 3GKP 082 320-ASH IM1001 B3
11 1 HEAT EXCHANGER: AIR COOLED .75 KW 1400 RPM ASME LHX-A206-H003-ME 316 WT'D HAYDEN HAY050629-XA
12 1 BALL VALVE: 3/4" NPT (2 PIECE) LVB-6NN6-105-M 316 SS CONTROMATIC S-8000-LH-M3
13 2 BALL VALVE: 1/2" NPT (2 PIECE) LVB-4NN6-105-M 316 SS CONTROMATIC S-8000-M3
14 1 TRANSMITTER: PRESSURE IND. 1/2" FNPT ATEX HART 4-20 mA 0-4000 PSIG LPT-4K0P7-R019 316L WT'D ROSEMOUNT 3051TG4A2B21KB4KDQ4Q8QTM5
15 1 TRANSMITTER: DIFF PRESSURE IND ATEX HART 4-20 mA, 0-250 IN/H20 LDT-250H7-R082 316 WT'D ROSEMOUNT 3051CD2A02A1KM5KDS5Q4Q8QT
16 1 MANIFOLD VALVE: 5 VALVE 1/2 FNPT ROSEMOUNT LVI-4MV6-RM02 316 SS ROSEMOUNT 0305RC52B11B4L4
17 4 GATE VALVE: 1/2" NPT x SW CLASS 800 NACE LVG-4NS7-M0T00 316L SS OMB 1/2-810-F316L-12-THD-SW
18 1 CHECK VALVE: 3/4" SW CLASS 800 LVI-6CK6-8B04-M 316 SS BONNEY FORGE 3/4-HL-48L-SW-SL
19 1 GATE VALVE: 3/4" SW CLASS 800 LVG-6SS7-M0T00 316L SS OMB 3/4-810-F316L-12-SW
20 1 GAUGE: TEMPERATURE 1/2" NPT 0-250 F / -20-120 C LTI-45539-001 316 SS ASHCROFT 50EI60E060XCSSG
21 1 THERMOWELL: 1/2" P x 1/2" I U=6.0 LTW-45539-001-M 316 SS WIKA EZ#51000491
22 1 FILLER/BREATHER LMS-0FB6-E01 316 SS FLOW EZY AB-1010-3-SS
23 1 COUPLING, JAW 38 mm BORE x 10 mm KEY L110 LMS-25897-003 CS LOVEJOY 68514441335 (GRAINGER 1CXZ8) L110
24 1 SKID ASSEMBLY: 40 GALLON W/AIR COOLER LBD-00E1-0132 CS
25 1 RESERVOIR COVER ASSEMBLY 50 x 20 x 3/16 TK LBB-04C4-0032-M 304 SS JCFCG
26 1 MOTOR COUPLING: JAW 25mm x 8mm LMSM-HCP1-J0000 CS LOVEJOY 68514441906
27 1 COUPLING, JAW SPIDER LMS-0CSN-G03 BUNA LOVEJOY 68514411724
5 28 1 ADAPTER: PUMP/MOTOR, METRIC B14 132 FRAME TO 2 BOLT A STYLE LMS-0PA1-BS038 CS/PAINT BSF PD2-G785-A2-R01
29 1 CLEAN OUT COVER PLATE 11 x 11 x 3/16 THK. 9-1/2 B.C. LBD-00C4-0021 304L SS
PI 30 2 COVER ASS'Y B14 VERT MOTOR MOUNT W/ 3/4 COUPLINGS LBB-00C4-0010-M 304 SS
31 1 PIPE: 3/4" SCH 80 SMLS (SHOP CUT TO FIT) MPI-68S7 SA-312 316/L
G 6 32 1 PIPE: 1" SCH 80 SMLS (SHOP CUT TO FIT) MPI-88S7 SA-312 316/L
13 J 33 1 TUBING: 1/4" OD x 0.035" WALL SMLS (SHOP CUT TO FIT) MTU-2366 SA-213/A-269
17
31 A
8
K 13
40 40
19
14 5 41 41
18 LUBRICATOR DESIGN DATA

PIT PI
6 6
S S TEST BAR
FLUI
BARRIER FLUID:
B RIER FLUID:
SYNTHETIC OIL
ISO VG 10
7 SYSTEM PRESSURE:
PRESSUR 870 PSIG / 60 BAR
17 17 SYSTEM FLOW RATE: 9 GPM / 34L/MIN
11
40 40 LUBE SUPPLY TEMP:
TEM 118 DEG. F / 48 DEG C
SET @
1020 PSID B LUBE RET
R URN TEMP: 132 DEG. F / 56 DEG C
31
1 SET @ MOTOR ELECTRICAL RATING: EX D, E, IIB T4 GB
870 PSID MOTOR POWER: 7.5KW 3/50/380V
17 SEAL KIT
F E
D
22 29
M 7
H
M
SHIPPED LOOSE ESTI
ES MATED WEIGHT DRY: 1550 LBS. / 703 KG
SCHEDULE OF OPENINGS
10
15 A 3/4" 600# RF, BARRIER FLUID TO SEAL
B 3/4" 600# RF, BARRIER FLUID FROM SEAL
C 3/4" 300# RF, RESERVOIR DRAIN
LIT D FILLER / BREATHER W/S.S. MESH STRAINER
TI E 1" 300# RF, TANK FILL
PIPE ISO DETAIL F 3/4" 300# RF, TANK VENT
DRAWINGS
4 G 3/4" 600# RF, SPARE GEAR PUMP CONNECTION
ATM 2 LMA-69345-P01
TW H 1/2" NPT, HEAT EXCHANGER DRAIN
C LMA-69345-P02
LMA-69345-P03 J 1/2" NPT, FILTER VENT
LMA-69345-P04 K 1/2" NPT, FILTER DRAIN
12
16 LMA-69345-P05 L 10" DIA RESERVOIR CLEANOUT / DRAIN 3/4" NPT
REV BY DATE DRN BY
20 ASSEMBLY TOLERANCES DRAWING TITLE
33 3 AH
24 (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED) REV BY DATE DATE PRESSURE LUBRICATOR 9 GPM @ 60 BAR/ 870 PSI
NOTES:
21
VESSEL / MANIFOLD ± 1/4"
JOHN CRANE LEMCO 26 MAY 2016 40 GAL TANK, AIR COOLED HX, & SIMPEX FILTER
REV BY DATE CKD BY
PIPING STRING ± 1/2" KWB
1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES.
REV BY DATE
2931 East Apache Street DATE
2. ALL DIMENSIONS IN [ ] ARE IN MILLIMETERS. Tulsa, Oklahoma 74110
ALL OTHER CONN. ± 1/4" 20 SEP 2016
3. ALL DIMENSIONS IN ( ) ARE REFERENCE DIMENSIONS.
REV BY DATE Seal Support System SCALE DRAWING NO.
ANGULAR ± 0.5 DEG A ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION ADG 20 SEP 2016 NONE LMA-69345-001 SHEET 1 OF 3
BACKPRESSURE 7
CONTROL VALVE
19
8 7 PUMP
PROTECTION
5 VALVE
13
6
1 5 14
17
10 6 6
17 17
11
15
19 16
3
18 22
25
13 17
12
LUBRICATOR DESIGN DATA
24 BARRIER FLUID:
BARRIER FLUI SYNTHETIC OIL
TEST
TEST BAR
B RIER FLUID: ISO VG 10
SYSTEM
SYSTEM PRESSURE:
SYSTEM
SYSTEM FLOW RATE: 9 GPM / 34L/MIN
LUBE
LUBE SUPPLY TEMP:
LUBE
LUBE RET
MOTOR ELECTRICAL RATING: EX D, E, IIB T4 GB
MOTOR
OR POWER:
P 7.5KW 3/50/380V
ESTIMATED
ES MATED WEI
WE GHT DRY: 1550 LBS. / 703 KG
SCHEDULE OF OPENINGS
A 3/4" 600# RF, BARRIER FLUID TO SEAL
B 3/4" 600# RF, BARRIER FLUID FROM SEAL
C 3/4" 300# RF, RESERVOIR DRAIN
D FILLER / BREATHER W/S.S. MESH STRAINER
E 1 300# RF, TANK FILL
1"
F 3/4" 300# RF, TANK VENT
G 3/4" 600# RF, SPARE GEAR PUMP CONNECTION
H 1/2" NPT, HEAT EXCHANGER DRAIN
J 1/2" NPT, FILTER VENT
K 1/2" NPT, FILTER DRAIN
L 10" DIA RESERVOIR CLEANOUT / DRAIN 3/4" NPT
REV BY DATE DRN BY
ASSEMBLY TOLERANCES DRAWING TITLE
AH
(UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED) REV BY DATE DATE PRESSURE LUBRICATOR 9 GPM @ 60 BAR/ 870 PSI
NOTES: VESSEL / MANIFOLD ± 1/4"
REV BY DATE CKD BY
REV BY DATE
76 1/2 )
( 1944
75
( 1905 )
71
1803 O5/8 MOUNTING
C 3 1/4
2 32 82 HOLE 4 PLCS
51 813
25 F
635 C
15
F GND LUG 378
5 1/2 G
140
G 62 1/8 )
( 1578
ROTATION
58
( 1473 )
50 1/2 55
1283 1397
J K
38 1/2 )
( 979
20
28 3/4 )
( 729
21
A
27 1/2 )
( 698 D
12 3/4 H
324 8 1/8
E B 207
5 1/2 3 1/16
140 5 1/4 77 1 1/2
A 133 38
27 E
686
37 3/4
960 B
51 3/8
1304
ESTIMATED CG.
J ROTATION LUBRICATOR DESIGN DATA

G
67 A BARRIER FLUID:
BARRIER FLUI SYNTHETIC OIL
( 1701 )
TEST
TEST BAR
B RIER FLUID: ISO VG 10
23 SYSTEM
SYSTEM PRESSURE:
SYSTEM
SYSTEM FLOW RATE: 9 GPM / 34L/MIN
27 E F
38 ) LUBE
LUBE SUPPLY TEMP:
( 966 48 1/8
26 1221 LUBE
LUBE RET
2 MOTOR ELECTRICAL RATING: EX D, E, IIB T4 GB
38 3/8 )
( 976 28 MOTOR
OR POWER:
P 7.5KW 3/50/380V
33 1/4 ESTIMATED
ES MATED WEI
WE GHT DRY: 1550 LBS. / 703 KG
4 H 10 5/8 845 25
271 640
K 25 1/8 SCHEDULE OF OPENINGS
L 638 22 3/8
15 () 567 A 3/4" 600# RF, BARRIER FLUID TO SEAL
378 C B 3/4" 600# RF, BARRIER FLUID FROM SEAL
11 1/8 L
12 1/4 )
( 312 283 C 3/4" 300# RF, RESERVOIR DRAIN
6 3/8 H 7 5/8 D FILLER / BREATHER W/S.S. MESH STRAINER
5 7/8 192
149 TYP 162 5 3/4
146
E 1 300# RF, TANK FILL
1"
F 3/4" 300# RF, TANK VENT
GND LUG 10 3 G 3/4" 600# RF, SPARE GEAR PUMP CONNECTION
254 L 4X O 76 3 1/4
2X 316 SS 8 1/4 82
17 1/2 20 H C H 1/2" NPT, HEAT EXCHANGER DRAIN
445 508 GROUNDING 211
6 1/2 62 LUG J 1/2" NPT, FILTER VENT
165 1575 1/2 TYP K 1/2" NPT, FILTER DRAIN
TYP. TYP. O 13 L 10" DIA RESERVOIR CLEANOUT / DRAIN 3/4" NPT
REV BY DATE DRN BY
ASSEMBLY TOLERANCES DRAWING TITLE
AH
(UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED) REV BY DATE DATE PRESSURE LUBRICATOR 9 GPM @ 60 BAR/ 870 PSI
NOTES: VESSEL / MANIFOLD ± 1/4"
REV BY DATE CKD BY
REV BY DATE
Motor IOM
For employment in zone 1 or zone 2 (IEC/EN 60079-10-1)
0102
II 2G Ex d IIC/IIB T. Gb
LOHER VARIO
Induction motor
Type 1MV4/5 1PS4/5
Operating Instructions / Installation Instructions H-R 603d
Edition 06/2014
Answers for industry.

24.06.2014 13:34
V5.00
Introduction 1
Safety information 2
Description 3
Induction motor
Preparations for use 4
LOHER VARIO
1MV4/5 1PS4/5 Assembly 5
Electrical connection 6
Operating Instructions
Installation Instructions
Start-up 7
Operation 8
Maintenance 9
Spare Parts 10
Disposal 11
Service and Support A

For employment in zone 1 or zone 2 (IEC/EN
60079-10-1) Technical data and drawings B
0102
II 2G Ex d IIC/IIB T. Gb
Quality documents C
Edition 06/2014
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.
DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.
WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.
CAUTION
indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.
NOTICE
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be
used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property
damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified
personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding
potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:
WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or
approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.
Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication
may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described.
Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in
this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions.
Siemens AG Order number: H-R 603d Copyright © Siemens AG 2014.

Industry Sector Ⓟ 06/2014 Subject to change All rights reserved
Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Table of contents
1 Introduction.................................................................................................................................................11
1.1 About these instructions..............................................................................................................11
2 Safety information.......................................................................................................................................13
2.1 Information for the nominated person in control of the electrical installation..............................13
2.2 The five safety rules....................................................................................................................13
2.3 Qualified personnel.....................................................................................................................14
2.4 Safe handling..............................................................................................................................14
2.5 Use in hazardous areas..............................................................................................................16
2.6 Electrostatic sensitive devices.....................................................................................................17
2.7 Electromagnetic compatibility......................................................................................................18
2.8 Interference immunity..................................................................................................................18
2.9 Influence on the line power supply through a strongly irregular torque.......................................18
2.10 Interference voltages when operating the converter...................................................................19
2.11 Electromagnetic fields when operating electrical power engineering installations......................19
2.12 Ventilation....................................................................................................................................20
3 Description..................................................................................................................................................21
4 Preparations for use...................................................................................................................................27
4.1 Safety-related aspects to consider when configuring the plant...................................................27
4.2 Machines without final paint coating............................................................................................27
4.3 Corrosion protection for bare metal surfaces..............................................................................27
4.4 Ensuring adequate cooling..........................................................................................................28
4.5 Thermal motor protection ...........................................................................................................28
4.6 Interlock circuit for anti-condensation heating.............................................................................28
4.7 Interlock circuit for the external fan motor...................................................................................28
4.8 Noise emission............................................................................................................................28
4.9 Voltage and frequency fluctuations during line operation ..........................................................29
4.10 Rotational speed limit values.......................................................................................................30
4.11 System-inherent frequencies.......................................................................................................30
4.12 Torsional loading of the shaft assembly due to faults in the electrical supply.............................31
4.13 Switching high-voltage motors....................................................................................................31
4.14 Transport and storage.................................................................................................................32
LOHER VARIO 1MV4/5 1PS4/5

Operating Instructions 06/2014 5
Table of contents
4.14.1 Transport markings.....................................................................................................................32

4.14.2 Checking the delivery..................................................................................................................32
4.14.3 Checking the load handling attachments....................................................................................33
4.14.4 Lifting and transportation.............................................................................................................33
4.14.5 Attaching the rotor locking device...............................................................................................35
4.14.6 Storage for up to two years.........................................................................................................35
4.14.6.1 Storage conditions.......................................................................................................................35
4.14.7 Storage for between two and four years.....................................................................................36
4.14.7.1 Storage time................................................................................................................................36
4.14.7.2 Grease caps................................................................................................................................36
4.14.8 Storage at low temperatures.......................................................................................................36
4.14.8.1 Storing motors at temperatures down to -50° C..........................................................................36
4.14.8.2 Regreasing system......................................................................................................................37
4.14.9 Motors that are mounted together with the driven machine and transported..............................37
4.14.9.1 Storing motors together with the driven machine........................................................................37
4.14.10 Storage outdoors.........................................................................................................................37
4.14.11 Commissioning after storage.......................................................................................................37
4.14.11.1 Insulation resistance and polarization index..........................................................................37
4.14.11.2 Lubricating the roller bearings ...............................................................................................38
4.14.11.3 Regreasing roller bearings after storage periods of up to two years......................................38
4.14.11.4 Regreasing roller bearings after storage periods of between two and four years..................38
4.14.11.5 Releasing the rotor shipping brace before commissioning....................................................39
4.15 Converter operation.....................................................................................................................39
4.15.1 Insulated bearings when operating the converter.......................................................................41
5 Assembly....................................................................................................................................................45
5.1 Preparations for installation.........................................................................................................45
5.1.1 Safety instructions for installation................................................................................................45
5.1.2 Requirements for installation.......................................................................................................46
5.2 Lift the machine to where it will be installed, and position it........................................................47
5.2.1 Preconditions for correct alignment and secure attachment ......................................................47
5.2.2 Checking the load handling attachments....................................................................................47
5.2.3 Removing the rotor shipping brace.............................................................................................47
5.2.4 Mounting the output elements.....................................................................................................48
5.2.5 Lifting and transportation.............................................................................................................50
5.2.6 Removing anti-corrosion protection.............................................................................................52
5.3 Installing the machine..................................................................................................................53
5.3.1 Preconditions for smooth, vibration-free operation......................................................................53
5.3.2 Aligning the machine to the driven machine and mounting.........................................................53
5.3.2.1 Horizontal types of construction with mounting feet....................................................................53
5.3.3 Axial and radial forces ................................................................................................................54
5.3.4 Selecting bolts.............................................................................................................................54
5.3.5 Tightening torques for screw and bolt connections.....................................................................55
5.3.6 Recommended alignment accuracy............................................................................................56
6 Electrical connection...................................................................................................................................57
6.1 Preparation..................................................................................................................................57
6.1.1 Selecting cables..........................................................................................................................57
6.2 Connecting..................................................................................................................................58
6.2.1 Installing intrinsically safe circuits................................................................................................58

6 Operating Instructions 06/2014
Table of contents
6.2.2 Terminal boxes with type of protection "Ex d" ............................................................................58

6.2.3 Terminal boxes with type of protection "Ex e" ............................................................................59
6.2.4 Connecting the grounding conductor..........................................................................................60
6.2.5 Circuit diagram in the terminal box cover....................................................................................60
6.2.6 Terminal designation...................................................................................................................60
6.2.7 Connecting the machine for a specific direction of rotation.........................................................61
6.2.8 Terminal box................................................................................................................................61
6.2.9 Minimum air clearances..............................................................................................................62
6.2.10 Cable ends with wire end sleeves...............................................................................................63
6.2.11 Connecting cables with cable lugs..............................................................................................63
6.2.12 Tightening torques for cable glands ...........................................................................................64
6.2.13 Connecting aluminum conductors...............................................................................................65
6.2.14 Finishing connection work...........................................................................................................66
6.2.15 Internal equipotential bonding ....................................................................................................66
7 Start-up.......................................................................................................................................................67
7.1 Checks to be carried out prior to commissioning .......................................................................67
7.2 Insulation resistance and polarization index................................................................................68
7.3 Testing the insulation resistance and polarization index.............................................................69
7.4 Testing the cooling of the machine..............................................................................................71
7.5 Commissioning an external fan...................................................................................................71
7.6 Greasing the roller bearings prior to commissioning...................................................................72
7.7 Preventing overvoltages when switching high-voltage motors....................................................73
8 Operation....................................................................................................................................................75
8.1 Safety instructions during operation............................................................................................75
8.2 Current transformer.....................................................................................................................76
8.3 Power supply disconnection of the converter..............................................................................76
8.4 Machine overheating caused by dust..........................................................................................77
8.5 Switching on the machine...........................................................................................................78
8.6 Switching off the external fan .....................................................................................................78
8.7 Switching on again after an emergency switching-off.................................................................79
8.8 Stoppages...................................................................................................................................79
8.8.1 Avoidance of damage to roller bearings during stoppages.........................................................80
8.9 Decommissioning the machine...................................................................................................80
8.10 Re-commissioning the machine..................................................................................................80
8.11 faults............................................................................................................................................81
8.11.1 Inspections in the event of faults.................................................................................................81
8.11.2 Electrical faults............................................................................................................................81
8.11.3 Mechanical faults.........................................................................................................................82
8.11.4 Roller bearing faults....................................................................................................................82
8.11.5 Faults at the external fan.............................................................................................................83

Table of contents
9 Maintenance...............................................................................................................................................85
9.1 Inspection and maintenance.......................................................................................................85
9.1.1 Safety instructions for inspection and maintenance....................................................................85
9.1.2 Risk of explosion when cleaning with compressed air................................................................88
9.1.3 Inspections in the event of faults.................................................................................................88
9.1.4 First inspection............................................................................................................................88
9.1.5 General inspection......................................................................................................................89
9.1.6 Servicing the roller bearings........................................................................................................89
9.1.7 Bolt grade....................................................................................................................................89
9.1.8 Maintenance................................................................................................................................91
9.1.8.1 Explosion protection for machines with type of protection "Ex d"................................................91
9.1.8.2 Explosion hazard due to increased surface temperature............................................................92
9.1.8.3 Insulation resistance and polarization index................................................................................92
9.1.8.4 Regreasing intervals and types of grease for operating rolling-contact bearings.......................92
9.1.8.5 Alternative types of grease for the operation of roller bearings...................................................94
9.1.8.6 Cleaning the cooling air passages..............................................................................................95
9.1.8.7 Maintenance and repair for machines of protection type "Ex d" .................................................95
9.1.8.8 Maintaining terminal boxes..........................................................................................................97
9.1.8.9 Touch up any damaged paintwork..............................................................................................98
9.1.8.10 Repainting...................................................................................................................................98
9.2 Corrective Maintenance..............................................................................................................99
9.2.1 Extended motor marking.............................................................................................................99
9.2.2 Assembling the rolling-contact bearings....................................................................................100
10 Spare Parts...............................................................................................................................................103
10.1 Ordering data............................................................................................................................103
10.2 Anti-condensation heating.........................................................................................................104
11 Disposal....................................................................................................................................................105
11.1Introduction............................................................................................................................
Introduction ....105
11.2 National statutory regulations....................................................................................................105
11.3 Preparing for disassembly.........................................................................................................105
11.4 Dismantling the machine...........................................................................................................106
11.5 Disposal of components............................................................................................................106
A Service and Support.................................................................................................................................109
A.1 Siemens Service Center............................................................................................................109
A.2 RoHS - restricting the use of certain hazardous substances....................................................109
B Technical data and drawings....................................................................................................................111
B.1 Tightening torques for screw and bolt connections...................................................................111
C Quality documents....................................................................................................................................113
C.1 Declaration of incorporation of partly completed machinery.....................................................113
C.2 EC Declaration of Conformity....................................................................................................129
C.3 EC Declaration of Conformity, Zone 21 or 22...........................................................................132

Table of contents
C.4 IECEx certificate........................................................................................................................134

Index.........................................................................................................................................................135
Tables
Table 3-1 Marking for machines with Ex d type of protection for zone 1.....................................................22
Table 3-2 Marking for machines with Ex tb type of protection for zone 21..................................................22
Table 3-3 Marking for machines with Ex tc type of protection for Zone 22 without certificate....................23
Table 3-4 Machine design ..........................................................................................................................23
Table 3-5 Machine version with type of explosion protection Ex d..............................................................23
Table 3-6 Machine version with type of protection Ex tb or Ex tc................................................................24
Table 5-1 Tightening torques for bolted connections with a tolerance of ±10%..........................................55
Table 5-2 Overall flatness of the installation surfaces.................................................................................56
Table 5-3 Recommended alignment accuracy............................................................................................56
Table 6-1 Electrical data..............................................................................................................................58
Table 6-2 Determining the cross-section of the grounding conductor.........................................................60
Table 6-3 Terminal designations using the 1U1-1 as an example..............................................................60
Table 6-4 Tightening torques for standard cable glands [Nm] ................................................................65
Table 7-1 Stator winding insulation resistance at 40° C..............................................................................70
Table 8-1 Electrical faults .......................................................................................................................81
Table 8-2 Mechanical faults .....................................................................................................................82
Table 8-3 Roller bearing faults ...............................................................................................................82
Table 8-4 Cooling system faults ...............................................................................................................83
Table 9-1 Checks after installation or repair ...............................................................................................88
Table 9-2 Checks that have to be performed during the general inspection...............................................89
Table 9-3 Bolt grade BG071 to BG315 ....................................................................................................90
Table 9-4 Bolt grade BG315 to BG910.......................................................................................................90
Table A-1 Service numbers.......................................................................................................................109
Table B-1 Tightening torques for bolted connections with a tolerance of ±10%........................................111
Figures
Figure 4-1 Schematic representation of a single drive.................................................................................42

Figure 4-2 Schematic representation of a tandem drive...............................................................................43
Figure 5-1 Balancing type on the drive-end side..........................................................................................48
Figure 6-1 Schematic representation of connection using cable lugs..........................................................64

Table of contents

Introduction 1
1.1 About these instructions
These instructions describe the machine and explain how to handle it, from initial delivery to
final disposal of the equipment. Keep these instructions for later use.
Read these operating instructions before you handle the machine and follow the instructions
to become familiar with its design and operating principles and thus ensure safe, problem-free
machine operation and long service life.
If you have suggestions for improving the document, please contact the Service Center.
Text format features

The warning notice system is explained on the rear of the inside front. Always follow the safety
instructions and notices in these instructions.
In addition to the safety-related warning notices which you must read, you will find the text in
these instructions is formatted in the following way:
1. Handling instructions are always formatted as a numbered list. Always perform the steps
in the order given.
● Lists are formatted as bulleted lists.
– Lists on the second level are hyphenated.
Note
A Note is an important item of information about the product, handling of the product or the
relevant section of the document. Notes provide you with help or further suggestions/ideas.

Introduction

Safety information 2
2.1 Information for the nominated person in control of the electrical
installation
This machine has been designed and built in accordance with Directive 94/9/EC ("Explosion
Protection Directive") and is intended for use in industrial plants with potentially explosive
atmosphere. Commissioning in the European Community is forbidden until the plant into which
the machine will be installed has been shown to conform with this directive. Please observe
the country-specific regulations when using the machine outside the European Community.
WARNING
Commissioning prior to determining the conformance
If the machine is commissioned prior to determining the plant conformance, the explosion
protection of the plant is not guaranteed. An explosion can result. This can result in death,
serious injury or material damage.
Commission the machine only when the plant conformance with the explosion protection
directive has been confirmed.
2.2 The five safety rules

For your personal safety and to prevent material damage when carrying out any work, always
observe the safety instructions and the following five safety rules, according to EN 50110‑1
"Dead working". Apply the five safety rules in the sequence stated before starting work.
Five safety rules

1. Disconnect completely.
Disconnect the auxiliary circuits, for example anti-condensation heating.
2. Secure against reconnection.
3. Verify absence of operating voltage.
4. Carry out earthing and short-short-circuiting.
5. Provide protection against adjacent live parts.
To energize the system, apply the measures in reverse order.

Safety information
2.4 Safe handling
2.3 Qualified personnel

All work at the machine must be carried out by qualified personnel only. For the purpose of
this documentation, qualified personnel is taken to mean people who fulfill the following
requirements:
● Through appropriate training and experience, they are able to recognize and avoid risks
and potential dangers in their particular field of activity.
● They have been instructed to carry out work on the machine by the appropriate person
responsible.
2.4 Safe handling

Workplace safety depends on the attentiveness, care, and common sense of the personnel
who install, operate, and maintain the machine. In addition to the safety measures cited, as a
matter of principle, the use of caution is necessary when you are near the machine. Always
pay attention to your safety.
Also observe the following to prevent accidents:
● General safety regulations applicable in the country where the machine is deployed.
● Manufacturer-specific and application-specific regulations
● Special agreements made with the operator
● Separate safety instructions supplied with the machine
● Safety symbols and instructions on the machine and its packaging
WARNING
Live parts
Electric machines contain live parts.
Fatal or severe injuries and substantial material damage can occur if the covers are removed
or if the machine is not handled, operated, or maintained properly.
● Always observe the "five safety rules (Page 13)" when carrying out any work on the
machine.
● Only remove the covers using the methods described by these operating instructions.
● Operate the machine properly.
● Regularly and correctly maintain the machine.

Safety information
2.4 Safe handling
WARNING
Rotating components
Electric machines contain dangerous rotating parts.
Fatal or severe injuries and substantial material damage can occur if the covers are removed
or if the machine is not handled, operated, or maintained properly.
● Perform regular maintenance on the machine.
● Secure free-standing shaft ends.
WARNING
Hot surfaces
Electric machines have hot surfaces. Do not touch these surfaces. They could cause burns.
● Allow the machine to cool before starting work on the machine.
CAUTION
Hazardous substances
Chemical substances required for the setup, operation and maintenance of machines can
present a health risk.
Poisoning, skin damage, cauterization of the respiratory tract, and other health damage may
result.
● Read the information in these operating instructions and the product information supplied
by the manufacturer.
● Observe the relevant safety regulations and wear the personal protective equipment
specified.
CAUTION
Flammable substances
Chemical substances required for the setup, operation and maintenance of machines may
be flammable.
Burns and other damage to health and material may result.
● Read the information in these operating instructions and the product information supplied
by the manufacturer.
● Observe the relevant safety regulations and wear the personal protective equipment
specified.

Safety information
2.5 Use in hazardous areas
WARNING
Noise emissions
During operation, the machine's noise emission levels can exceed those permitted at the
workplace, which can cause hearing damage.
Take steps to reduce noise, such as introducing covers and protective insulation or adopting
hearing protection measures, so that the machine can be operated safely within your system.
2.5 Use in hazardous areas

Electrical systems in hazardous zones must be assembled, installed, and operated by the
applicable responsible persons in accordance with the applicable rules and regulations.
Note
The basic requirements relating to electrical systems and their operation in hazardous areas
are described, for instance, in EU Directive 1999/92/EC as well as in IEC / EN 60079-14.
Ignition hazards
The assessment of operating risks and local operating conditions and the necessary
monitoring methods must be clarified and made binding by the system operator in consultation
with the responsible supervisory authority. The required measures must be adhered to at all
times. The machine manufacturer cannot provide any generally applicable recommendations.
Please observe the information in these operating instructions.
Note
The basic requirements relating to the assessment of ignition hazards arising from electrical
equipment and their operation in hazardous zones are specified, for instance, in 94/9/EC and
1999/92/EC directives as well as in the IEC / EN 60079 series of standards.
If a third-party certification is available for the machine, then carefully comply with the technical
data defined in it and any special conditions.
The certificate must be available before commissioning.

Safety information
2.6 Electrostatic sensitive devices
2.6 Electrostatic sensitive devices
ESD protective measures
NOTICE
Electrostatic discharge
Electronic modules contain components that can be destroyed by electrostatic discharge.
These modules can be easily destroyed by improper handling.
To protect your equipment against damage, follow the instructions given below.
● Never touch electronic modules unless absolutely necessary in the course of maintenance
and repair procedures.
● If the modules have to be touched, the body of the person concerned must be
electrostatically discharged immediately beforehand and be grounded.
● Electronic modules should not be brought into contact with electrically insulating materials
such as plastic film, plastic parts, insulating table supports or clothing made of synthetic
fibers.
● Always place electrostatic sensitive devices on conductive bases.
● Always pack, store and transport electronic modules or components in conductive
packaging, e.g. metallized plastic or metal containers, conductive foam material or
domestic aluminum foil.
The necessary ESD protective measures for electrostatic sensitive devices are illustrated once
again in the following drawings:
(1) Sitting (2) Standing (3) Standing/sitting

a = conductive floor surface b = ESD table c = ESD shoes
d = ESD overall e = ESD wristband f = cabinet ground connection

Safety information
2.9 Influence on the line power supply through a strongly irregular torque
WARNING
Risk of explosion due to electrostatic discharge
Electrostatic discharge poses a potential ignition source. In an explosive atmosphere, there
is a risk of an explosion. This can result in death, serious injury or material damage.
Please comply with ESD protective measures.
2.7 Electromagnetic compatibility

This machine is designed in accordance with IEC/EN 60034 and when used as prescribed it
satisfies the requirements of European Directive 2004/108/EC on Electromagnetic
Compatibility.
2.8 Interference immunity

The machine fulfills the requirements regarding interference immunity in accordance with IEC/
EN 61000‑6‑2.
For machines with integrated sensors (e.g. PTC thermistors), the manufacturer of the complete
system must ensure sufficient interference immunity by selecting suitable sensor signal leads
and evaluation units.
2.9 Influence on the line power supply through a strongly irregular torque
A strongly irregular torque, for example with the drive of a reciprocating motor, forces a non-
sinusoidal motor current. The emerging harmonics can have an impermissible influence on
the line power supply via the connection lines.

Safety information
2.11 Electromagnetic fields when operating electrical power engineering installations
2.10 Interference voltages when operating the converter
WARNING
Interference voltages when operating the converter
When a converter is in operation, the emitted interference varies in strength depending on
the converter (manufacturer, type, interference suppression measures undertaken). On
machines with integrated sensors (e.g. PTC thermistors), interference voltages caused by
the converter may occur on the sensor lead. This can cause faults which can result in eventual
or immediate death, serious injury or material damage.
In order to avoid exceeding the limit values set for the drive system (machine and converter)
in IEC/EN 61000-6-3, the EMC information provided by the converter manufacturer must be
observed. You must put appropriate EMC measures in place.
2.11 Electromagnetic fields when operating electrical power engineering

installations
WARNING
Interference to electronic devices caused by electrical power equipment
Electrical power equipment generate electric fields during operation. Potentially lethal
malfunctions can occur in medical implants, e.g. pacemakers, in the vicinity of electrical power
equipment. Data may be lost on magnetic or electronic data carriers.
● It is forbidden for people with pacemakers to enter the vicinity of the machine.
● Protect the personnel working in the plant by taking appropriate measures, such as
erecting identifying markings, safety barriers and warning signs and giving safety talks.
● Observe the nationally applicable health and safety regulations.
● Do not carry any magnetic or electronic data media.

Safety information
2.12 Ventilation
2.12 Ventilation
NOTICE
Ventilation
● Do not obstruct ventilation.
● Prevent the air expelled by neighboring equipment from being immediately drawn in again.
● On the vertical type of machine construction with air intake from above, protect the air
inlets from the ingress of foreign bodies and water.
● If the shaft extension is facing upwards, liquid must be prevented from entering by moving
along the shaft.

Description 3
Applications
This electrical machine is designed for driving rotating machines in industrial environments
and also for energy conversion. It is characterized by a high level of safety, long lifetime, and
overall reliability.
The machine was designed in accordance with the ordering party's specification and may only
be used for the contractually agreed purpose.
Type of protection
This machine is constructed in the "explosion proof" type of protection (Ex d) in accordance
with IEC / EN 60079‑1. Therefore, it may be operated in hazardous areas of Zone 1 according
to IEC / EN 60079‑10‑1.
This machine is optionally available with type of protection "Protection through enclosure"
(Ex tc) according to IEC / EN 60079‑0 and IEC / EN 60079‑31.
This electrical machine corresponds to standards of the IEC / EN 60034, IEC / EN 60079–0
and IEC / EN 60079–31 series. Only operate the machine in hazardous areas, strictly
complying with the specifications of the responsible supervisory authorities. The relevant
supervisory authority is responsible for determining the hazard level of each area and
classifying the zones.
The type of protection as well as special regulations are stamped on the rating plate or in the
test certificate.
If the certificate number is supplemented by an X, to safely operate the machine observe the
special notes in the operating instructions or if available in the EC type examination certificate
or in the IECEx certificate of conformity.
Operation with a converter must be certified. It is essential that you observe the separate
manufacturer's information and instructions.

Description
DANGER
Explosion hazard from hybrid mixtures
Hybrid mixtures are mixtures of flammable dusts with explosive gas/air atmospheres which
can together create a dangerous explosive atmosphere if they occur at the same time.
Changes can arise in the safety characteristics here, such as a change in the zonal
classification, increase in the explosion pressure, reduction in the minimum ignition energy
and a reduction in the maximum temperatures to be observed.
An explosion can result. This can result in death, serious injury or material damage.
● For this reason, the relative characteristics must be considered both for gas (zones 0, 1
and 2) and for dust (zones 20, 21 and 22) where hybrid mixtures arise. It is necessary for
a competent assessor to determine in the individual case whether the parameters
determining ignition are unfavorably affected in a particular hybrid mixture.
● Motors with dual plates for G ("Gas") andD ("Dust") may only be used where these two
simultaneously occur after the user has first analyzed the properties of the hybrid mixture.
The roller bearing machines with Ex d type of protection can have the following Ex marking:
Table 3-1 Marking for machines with Ex d type of protection for zone 1
Directive Ex marking
Directive 94/9/EC with EC 0102
II 2 G Ex d IIC T3 to T6 G
Gb 0102
II 2 G Ex d IIB T3 to T6 Gb
type-examination certificate 0102
II 2 G Ex d e IIC T3 to T6 Gb 0102
II 2 G Ex d e IIB T3 to T6 Gb
0102
II 2 G Ex d ib IIC T3 to T6 Gb 0102
II 2 G Ex d ib IIB T3 to T6 Gb
0102
II 2 G Ex d e ib IIC T3 to T6 Gb 0102
II 2 G Ex d e ib IIB T3 to T6 Gb
IECEx-Scheme with Ex d IIC T3 to T6 Gb or Ex d IIB T3 to T6 Gb
Certificate of Conformity Ex d e IIC T3 to T6 Gb Ex d e IIB T3 to T6 Gb
Ex d ib IIC T3 to T6 Gb Ex d ib IIB T3 to T6 Gb
Ex d e ib IIC T3 to T6 Gb Ex d e ib IIB T3 to T6 Gb
Machines with type of protection Ex t can be marked as follows:
Table 3-2 Marking for machines with Ex tb type of protection for zone 21
Directive 94/9/EC with EC type-examination certificate 0102
II 2D Ex tb IIIC T... °C Db
IECEx-Scheme with Certificate of Conformity Ex tb IIIC T... °C Db

Description
Table 3-3 Marking for machines with Ex tc type of protection for Zone 22 without certificate
Directive 94/9/EC II 3D Ex tc IIIC T... °C Dc
II 3D Ex tc IIIB T... °C Dc
IECEx-Scheme with Certificate of Conformity Ex tc IIIC T... °C Dc
Ex tc IIIB T... °C Dc
Machine design
The regulations and standards used as the basis to design and test this machine are stamped
on the rating plate.
The machine design basically complies with the subsequent standards. Please refer to the EC
Declaration of Conformity for the versions of the harmonized standards referenced.
Table 3-4 Machine design
Feature Standard
Rating and performance IEC/EN 60034‑1
Degree of protection IEC/EN 60034‑5
Cooling IEC/EN 60034‑6
Type of construction IEC/EN 60034‑7
Terminal markings and direction of rotation IEC/EN 60034‑8
Noise emission IEC/EN 60034‑9
Starting characteristics, rotating electrical machines IEC/EN 60034‑12*
Vibration severity grades IEC/EN 60034‑14
Vibration limits DIN ISO 10816-3
* For machines in line operation only
See also
Quality documents (Page 113)
Additionally, the following standards apply to these explosion-protected machines:
Table 3-5 Machine version with type of explosion protection Ex d
Characteristic Standard
Type of protection Ex d IEC / EN 60079‑0
IEC / EN 60079‑1

Description
When this machine is optionally implemented with type of protection "Protection through
enclosure" (Ex t) according to IEC / EN 60079‑0 and IEC / EN 60079‑31, then the following
standards apply:
Table 3-6 Machine version with type of protection Ex tb or Ex tc
Characteristic Standard
Type of protection Ex tb or Ex tc IEC / EN 60079-0
IEC / EN 60079-31
Rating plate
The rating plate shows the identification data and the most important technical data. The data
on the rating plate and the contractual agreements define the limits of proper usage.
Rotor
The rotor has a squirrel cage rotor manufactured out of die-cast aluminum or a brazed copper
rotor. The rotor is dynamically balanced. The balance condition is stated on the shaft end face
or rating plate.
Motor enclosure with surface, hollow-rib or tube cooling

Depending on their size, the stator frame and bearing shields are manufactured out of cast
iron or steel. The fan cover is made of sheet steel. The stator frame surface has cooling ribs,
hollow ribs, or tubes and mounted terminal box.
Cooling for machines with surface cooling, hollow rib cooling or tube cooling
For machines with rib, hollow rib or tube cooling, the cooling air is drawn in through openings
in the fan cover. The air is blown over the surface or through the cooling tubes of the stator
frame. With hollow-fin or tube cooling, a closed cooling air circuit inside the motor assists with
heat dissipation.
Terminal boxes
In the motor terminal box, additional connecting terminals are available if required for
monitoring equipment. For larger machines, an additional terminal box can be optionally
mounted. You can see the number of available terminals in the circuit diagrams.

Description
Supplementary devices
Depending on the order, various supplementary devices can be installed or mounted. These
include sensors for bearing temperature monitoring or winding monitoring, for example.
Paint finish
The machine is painted according to the instructions in your order.
Monitoring equipment
Monitoring equipment is provided corresponding to what has been ordered. KTY83 and KTY84
semiconductor sensors are electrostatic sensitive devices (ESD). These elements can be
damaged by electrostatic discharge. Observe the ESD protective measures.
DANGER
Risk of explosion when used in Zone 21 or 22 as a result of the high surface temperature
This can result in death, serious injury, or material damage.
The optionally integrated PTC thermistors are only intended as additional protection for the
winding. They are not used to limit the maximum surface temperature of the frame (see the
data stamped on the rating plate). Prevent the maximum surface temperature from being
exceeded by maintaining the specified operating conditions.
External fan
The machine can be fitted with an external fan. For IC 666, there are two external fans. The
electrical connection data are stamped on the rating plate of the external fan.
Anti-condensation heating
The machine can be fitted with anti-condensation heating. The connection data is listed on an
additional plate on the machine.
Float switches and damp location electrode

The machine can be fitted with float switches and/or damp location electrodes.

Description
See also
Electrical connection (Page 57)

Preparations for use 4
Good planning and preparation of machine applications are essential in terms of keeping
installation simple and avoiding errors, ensuring safe operation, and allowing access to the
machine for servicing and corrective maintenance.
This chapter outlines what you need to consider when configuring your plant in relation to this
machine and the preparations you need to make before the machine is delivered.
4.1 Safety-related aspects to consider when configuring the plant

A number of residual risks are associated with the machine. These are described in the chapter
titled "Safety information" (Page 13) and in related sections.
Take appropriate safety precautions (covers, barriers, markings, etc.) to ensure the machine
is operated safely within your plant.
Observing the operating mode

Observe the machine's operating mode. Use a suitable control system to prevent overspeeds,
thus protecting the machine from damage.
4.2 Machines without final paint coating

For machines, which are only delivered with primer, you must paint them to comply with the
applicable guidelines for the specific application. The primer alone does not provide adequate
corrosion protection.
The paint used must fully comply with the requirements to avoid electrostatic charging (refer
to DIN EN 60079-0).
Note
Please contact the Service Center for recommendations relating to the paint finish.
4.3 Corrosion protection for bare metal surfaces

The lower side of the machine mounting feet or the flange surface is bare metal. Ensure that
there is adequate corrosion protection, e.g. using grease, sealing paste or a similar product.
The terminal box cover also has bare metal surfaces. Here, only use a suitable grease to
guarantee protection against corrosion.

Preparations for use
4.8 Noise emission
4.4 Ensuring adequate cooling

Ensure that the machine is sufficiently cooled by the cooling air flow at the installation site:
● Ensure that the cooling air can flow in and out unobstructed. The full air flow provided by
the fan is only possible if air can freely enter the impeller. Maintain a clearance of at least
1 x inlet diameter in the axial direction.
● Make sure that the machine does not draw in the hot discharged air again.
● For machines with a vertical type construction with an air intake from above, ensure that
the air inlets are protected against the ingress of foreign bodies and water.
4.5 Thermal motor protection

To protect against overheating, the machine is equipped with instrumentation to directly
monitor the motor temperature. Plan a corresponding circuit for monitoring.
4.6 Interlock circuit for anti-condensation heating

If the anti-condensation heating is operated while the machine is running, this can increase
the temperatures inside the machine.
● Install an interlock circuit that switches off the anti-condensation heating once the main
machine is switched on.
● Only operate anti-condensation heating when the machine is switched off.
See also
Machine overheating caused by dust (Page 77)
4.7 Interlock circuit for the external fan motor

For machines with external fans, install an interlock circuit that prevents the main machine
being switched on if the external fan is not operational.
4.8 Noise emission
CAUTION
Noise emission
Excessive sound pressure levels can lead to hearing impairment or hearing loss.
When assessing the noise level of the system, make due allowance for the noise emissions
from the machine. If necessary, take suitable noise protection measures for personnel.

4.9 Voltage and frequency fluctuations during line operation
4.9 Voltage and frequency fluctuations during line operation

Unless stated otherwise on the rating plate, the permissible voltage fluctuation is ± 10 % and
the permissible frequency fluctuation is ± 2 % in accordance with range B in IEC / EN 60034 1.
The following always applies. Under practical operating conditions a machine may sometimes
have to be operated outside the limits of Range B. Exceptions of this sort should be limited
with regard to the values that arise, how often and for how long they occur. Where possible
and within a reasonable time take corrective actions such as reducing the power. Such actions
can avoid thermal ageing leading to a reduction in the service life of the machine.
NOTICE
Overheating of the winding
Exceeding the permissible tolerances for voltage and frequency can lead to an impermissibly
high temperature rise in the windings and thus cause long-term damage to the machine.
Every machine must be protected against an inadmissible temperature rise. Observe the
following notes:
● Protect every machine according to IEC / EN 60079–14 using a current-dependent,
delayed, circuit breaker with phase failure protection corresponding to IEC / EN 60947 or
a similar device in all phases.
● Set the protective device to the rated current (value is stamped on the rating plate).
● Select the protective device so that the motor is thermally protected even with a locked
rotor.
● For explosion-protected electrical machines with type protection "Increased safety", also
monitor the starting (starting monitoring with EC type examination certificate according to
Directive 94/9/EC or IECEx–Scheme with Certificate of Conformity). When the rotor is
locked, the protective device must trip within the tE time (safe locked rotor time). This
requirement is satisfied if the tripping time is not longer than the specified tE time.
● Protect the windings in a delta connection in such a way that the tripping unit or relay is
connected in series with the winding phases. When selecting and setting the tripping unit,
define the rated value of the phase current. The phase current is 0.58 times the rated motor
current. If such a circuit is not possible, then additional protective measures are required,
e.g. thermal motor protection.

4.11 System-inherent frequencies
4.10 Rotational speed limit values
WARNING
Vibrations due to resonance
At over-critical speeds, machines encounter resonance within certain speed ranges. Such
vibrations can reach impermissibly high levels. This can result in death, serious injury, or
material damage.
● The controller must ensure that those speed ranges are blocked when the converter is in
operation. Refer to the "Electrical Data" section in the appendix for details of the blocked
speed ranges.
● The blocked speed ranges must be run through rapidly.
WARNING
Permissible speed
Excessive rotational speed can lead to serious damage to the machine. This can result in
death, serious injury, or material damage.
The controller must ensure that operation at impermissible speeds is prevented. Refer to the
"Electrical Data" section in the appendix for details of the speeds.
4.11 System-inherent frequencies
NOTICE
Machine damage caused by system resonances
The system consisting of the foundation and machine set must be configured and matched
in such a way that no system resonances can arise and result in the permissible vibration
levels being exceeded. Excessive vibrations can damage the machine set. The vibration limit
values according to DIN ISO 10816-3 must not be exceeded.

4.13 Switching high-voltage motors
4.12 Torsional loading of the shaft assembly due to faults in the electrical
supply
In the event of faults in the electrical supply, such as e.g. line switching operations with a
residual field or short circuit at the terminals, excessive air gap torques can occur, which can
lead to additional torsional loads on the drive train.
WARNING
Serious damage to the machine
If the configuration does not correctly recognize the mechanical torsional loadings of the shaft
assembly, this can lead to serious damage to the machine. This can result in death, serious
injury or material damage.
When planning the system, make due allowance for the maximum air gap torques that can
occur. This data can be found in the "Electrical Data" in the appendix, in the "Transient
Torques" data sheet, or by inquiring at the Service Center.
Note
The system planner is responsible for the complete shaft train.
See also
Technical data and drawings (Page 111)
4.13 Switching high-voltage motors

If vacuum circuit breakers and vacuum contactors are used, what are known as multiple
restrikes can occur when the machine is switched off. This depends on various factors, such
as:
● arc-extinguishing principle of the switch,
● size of the motor,
● length of the power supply cable,
● system capacitance, etc.
NOTICE
Switching overvoltages
In some cases, multiple restrikes can result in switching overvoltages which are too high
for the insulation of the motor stator winding. This occurs when high-voltage motors with
starting currents IA ≤ 600 A are disconnected during startup or following a blockage.
The peak voltages which arise as a result can damage the winding insulation.
If you are using vacuum circuit breakers and vacuum contactors, use an appropriate surge
suppressor, such as the Siemens 3EF (zinc oxide varistor with spark gap).

4.14 Transport and storage
Example
This current limit corresponds to the following upper power limits, depending on the relationship
between the starting current IA and rated current IN and on the voltage dip (up to approximately
20%) while the motor is starting up:
Rated voltage VN Power limit

3 kV 750 kW
6 kV 1500 kW
10 kV 2500 kW
A limiter to ground is installed in the switchgear between the circuit breaker and the cable
termination for each of the three conductors. The level of protection for the motor windings is
sufficient given the correct choice of limiters (rated motor voltage/response voltage).
4.14.1 Transport markings

The packing differs depending on the transport type and size. If not otherwise contractually
agreed, the packaging corresponds to the packing guidelines for International Standards for
Phytosanitary Measures (ISPM).
Comply with the images shown on the packaging. Their meaning is as follows:
This Fragile goods Keep dry Keep cool Center of Do not use Attach here
way up gravity hand hook
When carrying out any work on the machine, observe the general safety instructions and the
specifications contained in EN 50110‑1 regarding safe operation on electrical equipment.
4.14.2 Checking the delivery

The components are assembled on an individual basis. When you take receipt of the delivery,
please check immediately whether the scope of the delivery matches up with the
accompanying documents. No claims relating to defects/items missing from the delivery will
be accepted if they are submitted at a later date.
● Report any apparent transport damage to the delivery agent immediately.
● Immediately report any apparent defects/missing components to your contact partner.

These Operating Instructions are part of the scope of delivery; keep them in a location where
they can be easily accessed.
4.14.3 Checking the load handling attachments

Inspect the load handling attachments such as the load stands, lifting eyes and ring bolts and
also the lifting gear, before lifting the machine:
● Inspect the load handling attachments on the machine for possible damage. Replace any
load handling attachments that are found to be damaged.
● Check before use that the load handling attachments are correctly secured.
● When lifting the machine, use only approved and undamaged lifting gear of sufficient rated
capacity. Check these before using them.
WARNING
The machine can be dropped
If the load handling attachments and lifting gear are damaged or not correctly secured,
the machine may be dropped during lifting. This can result in death, serious injury or
material damage. Inspect the load handling attachments and lifting gear before use.
4.14.4 Lifting and transportation

● Persons driving cranes and fork lift trucks must hold appropriate qualifications.
● When lifting the machine, use only approved and undamaged sling guides and spreaders
of sufficient rated capacity. Check these before using them. The weight of the machine is
stated on the rating plate.

● When lifting the machine, refer to the information on the lifting plate:
– Comply with the specified spreading angles.
– Lift the machine without jerking it.
● When lifting, use only the load handling attachments on the stator casing, such as lifting
eyes or eye bolts.
WARNING
Transporting or lifting the machine
The machine or the machine set may be transported and lifted only using the load handling
attachments.
Otherwise, death, serious injury, or material damage may result.
1. Only use the load handling attachments on the stator frame to lift the motor.
2. Use suitable rope guidance or spreading devices. The weight of the machine is stated
WARNING
Center of gravity when transporting or lifting the motor
If the center of gravity of a load is not located centrally between the attachment points,
the motor can tip over or slip out of the lifting gear when it is being transported or lifted.
1. Always take account of the center of gravity when transporting or lifting the machine.
The machine's center of gravity is indicated in the relevant dimension diagram.
2. Observe the handling instructions on the motor when transporting it. If the center of
gravity is not located centrally between the attachment points, then position the hoisting
hook above it.
3. Be aware of the possibility of different loads on the sling ropes or lifting straps and the
carrying capacity of the lifting equipment.
Note
Store the rotor locking device
Be sure to store the rotor locking device. It must be remounted for possible disassembly and
transport.
Note
Place the machine in a secure and raised position
In order to obtain easy and safe access to the underside of the machine, place it in a secure
and raised position.

DANGER
Standing under suspended loads
If the lifting gear or load handling attachments were to fail, the machine could fall. This can
result in death, serious injury or material damage.
Never remain under or in the immediate vicinity of the machine when it is raised.
4.14.5 Attaching the rotor locking device
NOTICE
Bearing damage caused by vibration
If storage conditions are inappropriate there is a risk of bearing seizure damage. This can
result in material damage, such as damage to bearings caused by vibration.
● On machines that have been supplied with a rotor shipping brace, secure the rotor as per
the notes on transportation.
● Protect the machine against strong radial vibrations, since the rotor shipping brace might
not absorb these completely.
NOTICE
Bearing damage when being transported
If the customer has already mounted parts, for example coupling, belt pulley, etc., the bearing
can be damaged during transport.
● In this case, make sure that the customer uses a rotor shipping brace.
4.14.6 Storage for up to two years
4.14.6.1 Storage conditions
● Store the machines in a dry, dust-free room where the temperature is controlled. Special
packing is therefore not necessary. In all other cases, pack the machines in a plastic film
with a substance that absorbs moisture, e.g. Branogel, or in hermetically sealed welded
foil. Use a protective cover to protect against sun and rain.
● Store the machines only in vibration-free rooms in order to avoid consequential damage to
the bearings due to vibration at standstill.

WARNING
Risk of explosion due to damaged sealing materials
Storing the machine at temperatures that do not fall within the specified limits can damage
the material of the seals and cause them to fail. As a result, a potentially explosive gaseous
atmosphere can enter the machine and be ignited during commissioning. Explosions can
occur. This can result in death, serious injury or material damage.
The materials used are specially designed for the temperature range required by the
customer. Do not store the motor in conditions that lie outside the specified temperature limits.
The relevant temperature limits are specified on the rating plate.
4.14.7 Storage for between two and four years
4.14.7.1 Storage time

If machines are to be stored for between 2 and 4 years, then also observe the following:
When ordering, the manufacturer must know the storage time.
4.14.7.2 Grease caps

Grease caps must be available at the shaft outlet and at the terminal box cover. Do not rotate
the motor shaft before commissioning as the protective grease coating will be destroyed. If
rotating parts have to be turned, then apply a new protective coating of grease.
4.14.8 Storage at low temperatures
4.14.8.1 Storing motors at temperatures down to -50° C

If machines are stored at temperatures of down to -50° C, then also take into account the
following:
● The normal roller bearing grease of machines is suitable for operating temperatures of
between -30 °C and +130° C. Temperatures down to ‑50° C are harmless for the roller
bearing grease if the machine is non operational or is in storage.
For operation at -50 °C, the bearings have a special grease, e.g. Shell Aero Grease 7.
● Machines with regreasing system must be regreased when commissioning. Double the
amount of grease that is specified on the lubricant plate.

4.14.8.2 Regreasing system

● Motors with regreasing system must be regreased when commissioning. Double the
amount of grease that is specified on the lubricant plate.
4.14.9 Motors that are mounted together with the driven machine and transported
4.14.9.1 Storing motors together with the driven machine

● Before mounting the motors, grease the free parts of the shaft extension, as well as all
other bare metal parts, such as mounting foot surfaces, flange surfaces, terminal box and
cover contact surfaces. Attach caps filled with roller bearing grease to the shaft output gland
to provide protection against dust and humidity.
● Fill the terminal boxes of the machines with a substance that will absorb moisture, e.g.
Branogel.
● Store the machines in a dry, dust-free room where the temperature is controlled.
4.14.10 Storage outdoors
If the machine is stored outdoors, then the following should additionally be observed:
● Provide protective cover against the effects of sun and rain. Air must freely circulate to
avoid condensation forming.
● Every two months check the following:
– Free parts of the shaft extension and other bare metal parts, e.g. mounting foot surfaces
or the flange faces, terminal box and cover contact surfaces must be greased.
– Caps filled with grease attached to the shaft output gland to provide protection against
the ingress of dust and moisture are still effective.
4.14.11 Commissioning after storage
4.14.11.1 Insulation resistance and polarization index

Measuring the insulation resistance and polarization index (PI) provides information on the
condition of the machine. It is therefore important to check the insulation resistance and the
polarization index at the following times:
● Before starting up a machine for the first time
● After an extended period in storage or downtime
● Within the scope of maintenance work

The following information is provided regarding the state of the winding insulation:
● Is the winding head insulation conductively contaminated?
● Has the winding insulation absorbed moisture?
As such, you can determine whether the machine needs commissioning or any necessary
measures such as cleaning and/or drying the winding:
● Can the machine be put into operation?
● Must the windings be cleaned or dried?
Detailed information on testing and the limit values can be found here:
"Testing the insulation resistance and polarization index"
4.14.11.2 Lubricating the roller bearings

If you correctly store the machine for a longer period of time, it can be assumed that within a
period of two years, the grease in the bearings will not deteriorate.
● For motors with thermal class 155, for normal ambient temperatures, use a lithium-soap
roller bearing grease with a melting point of at least 180° C.
● For machines with thermal class 180, and for certain special machines, use the special
grease specified on the machine lubricant plate.
4.14.11.3 Regreasing roller bearings after storage periods of up to two years

● For machines with regreasing systems, briefly lubricate both bearings after commissioning
with the motor running as a precautionary measure.
● Grease type, grease quantity and relubrication intervals for the regreasing system are
stamped on a supplementary plate attached to the machine.
4.14.11.4 Regreasing roller bearings after storage periods of between two and four years
● For machines with regreasing system, lubricate machines immediately after commissioning
while the machine is running with approximately twice the grease quantity. This causes the
old grease to be spun out.
● Then regrease the bearings with the amount of bearing grease specified on the lubricant
plate.
Note
Increased bearing noise
Increased bearing noise can occur while the bearings are being run in The bearing noise is
not dangerous, if the operating temperature has not yet been reached and the noise is caused
by the viscosity and the dynamic viscosity of the bearing grease.

4.15 Converter operation
4.14.11.5 Releasing the rotor shipping brace before commissioning

If one is being used, release the rotor shipping brace before commissioning.
WARNING
Power supply disconnection of the converter in operation
Note that due to the loss of the power supply on the converter input side and due to the
stopping of the rotor, impermissibly high voltages are generated in the intermediate circuit of
the converter. Use an automatic circuit breaker between the motor and the converter in order
to prevent damage to the converter. At the same time, you must short-circuit the phases on
the motor.
Please also refer to the operating instructions for the frequency converter

Speed/torque characteristic for operation with a SINAMICS converter

The load characteristics show the permanent permissible load torque as a function of the speed
and the cooling method. The load torque is specified as a percentage referred to the maximum
torque according to the supplementary plate for converter operation.

00PD[

11V\QF

① Force ventilated, external and internal

② Surface cooled, self-ventilated
Converter operation
• If the motor design requires a special converter assignment, you can find the appropriate
supplementary data on the additional plate for the converter.
• Correctly parameterize the converter. Information about the parameters is available in the
operating instructions for the converter.
WARNING
Exceeding limit values
It is not permissible that the maximum speed and torque values stamped on the
supplementary plate for converter operation are exceeded.

Reducing bearing currents

Taking the following actions will reduce the bearing currents:
● Grounding: In addition to grounding the machines via the solid protective ground conductor,
supplement the high frequency grounding using braided flat copper straps or high frequency
stranded conductors. Ensure that the contacts cover a large area. Solid copper cables are
not suitable for high frequency grounding because of the skin effect. Use equipotential
bonding conductors between the motor and the driven machine and motor and
converter.
● Selecting and connecting the cable: As far as possible, use symmetrically arranged,
shielded connection cables with a common outer shield to improve the EMC characteristics.
The cable shielding, made up of as many strands as possible, must have good electrical
conductivity. Braided shields made of copper or aluminum are very suitable.
– The shield must be connected at both ends to the motor and the converter; unshielded
cable ends must be kept as short as possible.
– To ensure good discharging of high-frequency currents, provide contacting over a large
surface area: with 360° contacting at the converter, at the motor for instance with EMC
screw fastenings at the cable entries.
Measures to further reduce bearing currents

To specifically reduce and prevent damage caused by bearing currents, you must consider
the system as a whole, which comprises the motor, converter, and driven machine. The
following precautions help to reduce bearing currents:
● Setting up a properly interconnected grounding system in the system as a whole, with low
impedance for high-frequency currents
● Use iron cores mounted above the motor connecting cable at the converter output. The
iron cores reduce the common-mode components. The sales representative is responsible
for selection and dimensioning.
● Limit the voltage rate of rise by using an output filter to dampen harmonic components in
the output voltage
Note
Configuration information
Also observe the configuration information of the converter being used.
4.15.1 Insulated bearings when operating the converter
Operation with a medium-voltage converter with insulated coupling and insulated bearings
If the machine is driven by a medium-voltage converter, shaft grounding should be fitted at the
non-drive end, together with insulated bearings at both the drive end and the non-drive end.

The shaft grounding can be incorporated in the tachometer or implemented as a grounding

device.
Comply with the plates on the machine relating to bearing insulation and possible bridges.
Use an insulated coupling to connect the motor to the driven machine; otherwise the bearing
insulation will be bridged at the drive end. The consequence of that would be a circulating
current through the motor shaft and the surrounding grounding system.
WARNING
The shaft grounding must be functional
If the shaft grounding does not function correctly, the shaft can carry high voltages, which do
not dissipate quickly enough when the machine comes to a standstill. This can lead to death
or serious injury as a result of electric shock, or bearing damage caused by current flowing
through the bearing.
● Regularly check the shaft grounding and maintain it at the maintenance intervals. Follow
the operating instructions provided by the manufacturer for this.
① Driven machine ④ Insulated bearings

② Motor ⑤ Insulated tachometer fitting
③ Insulated coupling ⑥ Shaft grounding
Figure 4-1 Schematic representation of a single drive
WARNING
Do not bridge the insulation on the insulated bearing
In the case of the version with a shaft grounding device and insulated bearings on the drive
end and non-drive end, bridging the insulated bearing results in electric current flowing via
the machine enclosure and possibly via the coupling to the driven machine. This can lead to
death or serious injury as a result of electric shock, or bearing damage caused by current
flowing through the bearing.
● Use insulated couplings.
● Do not link the bearing insulation on the insulated bearing while the machine is operational.
● Keep the insulation points clean.

Tandem operation
If you connect two motors in series in "tandem operation", fit an insulated coupling between
the motor and the driven machine. It is not necessary to fit an insulated coupling between the
motors acting in tandem operation.
① Driven machine ④ Insulated bearings

② Motor ⑤ Insulated tachometer fitting
③ Insulated coupling ⑥ Shaft grounding
Figure 4-2 Schematic representation of a tandem drive


Assembly 5
When carrying out any work on the machine, observe the general safety instructions
(Page 13) and the specifications contained in EN 50110‑1 regarding safe operation on
electrical equipment.
5.1 Preparations for installation
5.1.1 Safety instructions for installation
WARNING
Danger caused by inappropriate fastening material
If screws of an incorrect property class have been selected or if they have been fastened to
an incorrect tightening torque, they may break or become loose. This will cause the machine
to move, which could damage the bearings. The rotor could smash into the machine
enclosure and machine parts could be flung out of place. This can result in death, serious
● Comply with the required property classes for screwed connections.
● Tighten the screwed connections to the specified tightening torques.
WARNING
Tensions on the fastening parts
If the machine has not been properly aligned, this will mean the fastening parts are subjected
to stress/distortion. Screws may become loose or break, the machine will move, machine
parts could be flung out of place. This can result in death, serious injury or material damage.
● Carefully align the machine to the driven machine.
NOTICE
Damage to the mounted parts
Mounting parts such as temperature sensors or speed sensors are attached to the machine
and could be ripped off or destroyed as a result of improper handling. This could lead to
machine malfunctions, extending even to total loss of the machine.
● Where necessary, use suitable steps when performing installation work on the machine.
● Do not stand on cables or attachments during installation. Do not use attachments as
steps.

Assembly
5.1 Preparations for installation
Note
Loss of conformity with European directives
In the delivery state, the machine corresponds to the requirements of the European directives.
Unauthorized changes or modifications to the machine lead to the loss of conformity with
European directives and the loss of warranty.
5.1.2 Requirements for installation

The following requirements must be satisfied prior to starting installation work:
● Staff have access to the operating and installation instructions.
● The machine is unpacked and ready for mounting at the installation location.
Note
Measure the insulation resistance of the winding before starting installation work
Wherever possible, measure the insulation resistance of the winding before starting
installation work. If the insulation resistance lies below the specified value, take
appropriate remedial measures. These remedial measures may necessitate the machine
being removed again and transported.
NOTICE
High temperatures
The motor components get very hot during operation. High temperatures can damage
mounting parts such as the cable insulation.
● Temperature-sensitive parts such as normal cables or electronic components must not
rest against or be attached to mounted machine parts.
● Only use heat-resistant mounting parts. The connecting cables and cable entries must be
suitable for the ambient temperature.
WARNING
Explosion hazard when making modifications to the machine
Substantial modifications to the machine are not permitted – or may only be performed by
the manufacturer. Otherwise an explosion can occur in an explosive atmosphere. This can
Please contact the Service Center, if necessary.

Assembly
5.2 Lift the machine to where it will be installed, and position it
5.2.1 Preconditions for correct alignment and secure attachment

Detailed specialist knowledge of the following measures is required in order to correctly align
and securely fit the equipment.
● Preparing the foundation
● Selecting and mounting the coupling
● Measuring the concentricity and axial eccentricity tolerances
● Positioning the machine
If you are not familiar with the prescribed measures and procedures, then you can make use
of the services offered by the local Service Center.
5.2.2 Checking the load handling attachments

Inspect the load handling attachments such as the load stands, lifting eyes and ring bolts and
also the lifting gear, before lifting the machine:
● Inspect the load handling attachments on the machine for possible damage. Replace any
load handling attachments that are found to be damaged.
● Check before use that the load handling attachments are correctly secured.
● When lifting the machine, use only approved and undamaged lifting gear of sufficient rated
capacity. Check these before using them.
WARNING
The machine can be dropped
If the load handling attachments and lifting gear are damaged or not correctly secured,
the machine may be dropped during lifting. This can result in death, serious injury or
material damage. Inspect the load handling attachments and lifting gear before use.
5.2.3 Removing the rotor shipping brace

If a rotor shipping brace is attached to the machine, remove it at the last possible moment,
for example, when you are ready to push on the output or drive element.
Note
Machines with an oil-injection interference fit and a center hole ≥ M56
An adapter is installed between the shaft and the rotor shipping brace on machines with an
oil-injection interference fit and a center hole ≥ M56. Remove this adapter together with the
rotor shipping brace.

Assembly
Note
Store the rotor locking device
Be sure to store the rotor locking device. It must be remounted for possible disassembly and
transport.
5.2.4 Mounting the output elements
Balance quality
The rotor is dynamically balanced. For shaft extensions with featherkeys, the balancing type
is specified using the following coding on the face of the drive end of the shaft:
● "H" means balancing with a half feather key
● "F" means balancing with a whole feather key.
Figure 5-1 Balancing type on the drive-end side

Assembly
Pushing on the power output elements

● Prerequisites:
– The coupling and/or the output element must be appropriately dimensioned for the
operating case at hand. The balance quality must satisfy the following requirements.
– Comply with the coupling manufacturer's instructions.
– Make sure that the balancing type of the transmission element correctly matches the
type of balance of the rotor.
– Use only ready drilled and balanced transmission elements. Check the hole diameters
and the balancing status before pulling them on. Thoroughly clean the shaft extension.
● Pulling on:
– Warm up the transmission elements to expand them before pulling them on. Select the
temperature difference for the heating process to suit the coupling diameter, fit and
material. See the coupling manufacturer's instructions.
– Power output elements may only be pushed on or pulled off with the correct equipment.
The transmission element must be pulled on in one continuous operation via the front
thread holes in the shaft or pushed on by hand.
– Do not strike it with a hammer, as this would damage the bearings.
Shaft extensions with feather key

To maintain the balancing quality, you have the following options:
● If the transmission element is shorter than the feather key with balancing type "H", then you
must machine off the section of feather key protruding from the shaft contour and
transmission element in order to maintain the balance quality.
● If the transmission element is drawn up on to the shoulder of the shaft, you must ensure
that the part of the coupling groove where the feather key is not inserted is taken into
consideration when balancing the coupling.
The following applies for all 2-pole machines and 4-pole machines with a frequency ≥ 60 Hz:
● The feather key must be shortened if the coupling hub is shorter than the feather key.
● The center of gravity of the coupling half should be within the length of the shaft end.
● The coupling used must be prepared for system balancing.
The number of poles of the machine is specified on the rating plate (in the designation of
the motor type).

Assembly
WARNING
The feather key can fall out
The feather keys are only locked against falling out during shipping. If a machine with two
shaft extensions does not have an output element on one shaft extension, the feather key
can fall out during operation.
Death or serious injury can result.
● Do not operate the machine unless the transmission elements have been pulled on.
● On shaft extensions without output element, make sure that the feather key cannot fall
out and shorten it by approximately half for balance type "H".
5.2.5 Lifting and transportation

● Persons driving cranes and fork lift trucks must hold appropriate qualifications.
● When lifting the machine, use only approved and undamaged sling guides and spreaders
of sufficient rated capacity. Check these before using them. The weight of the machine is
stated on the rating plate.

Assembly
● When lifting the machine, refer to the information on the lifting plate:
– Comply with the specified spreading angles.
– Lift the machine without jerking it.
● When lifting, use only the load handling attachments on the stator casing, such as lifting
eyes or eye bolts.
WARNING
Transporting or lifting the machine
The machine or the machine set may be transported and lifted only using the load handling
attachments.
Otherwise, death, serious injury, or material damage may result.
1. Only use the load handling attachments on the stator frame to lift the motor.
2. Use suitable rope guidance or spreading devices. The weight of the machine is stated
WARNING
Center of gravity when transporting or lifting the motor
If the center of gravity of a load is not located centrally between the attachment points,
the motor can tip over or slip out of the lifting gear when it is being transported or lifted.
1. Always take account of the center of gravity when transporting or lifting the machine.
The machine's center of gravity is indicated in the relevant dimension diagram.
2. Observe the handling instructions on the motor when transporting it. If the center of
gravity is not located centrally between the attachment points, then position the hoisting
hook above it.
3. Be aware of the possibility of different loads on the sling ropes or lifting straps and the
carrying capacity of the lifting equipment.
Note
Place the machine in a secure and raised position
In order to obtain easy and safe access to the underside of the machine, place it in a secure
and raised position.
DANGER
If the lifting gear or load handling attachments were to fail, the machine could fall. This can
Never remain under or in the immediate vicinity of the machine when it is raised.

Assembly
Requirement
The transmission element such as a coupling half has already been pulled on.
Roughly aligning the machine

● For horizontal positioning, push the motor sideways across the foundation. When doing so,
ensure that the axial position is maintained.
5.2.6 Removing anti-corrosion protection

Machined, bare metal surfaces of machine parts and small components such as screws, bolts,
wedges, feather keys, and dowel pins, are treated with an anti-corrosion agent.
Carefully remove the anti-corrosion agent and immediately start the installation work.
Bright surfaces on machine parts

● Use petroleum, petroleum ether, or a similar solvent or detergent to remove the anti-
corrosion coating from the machined surfaces of machine parts and from small components.
NOTICE
Paintwork damage
Make sure that the detergent or solvent does not come into contact with any painted
surfaces, as this could damage the lacquer.
● Use a suitable solvent to soften thick layers of anti-corrosion agent. Then push the softened
layers off using a piece of hardwood approximately 10 x 10 x 1 cm. Do not sand the
protective coating down or scrape it off.
NOTICE
Do not use metal tools.
Do not use metal objects such as scrapers, spatulas, or plates to remove the anti-corrosion
protection,
as this could damage the surfaces of the machine parts.
● Lightly oil the depreserved surfaces.

Assembly
5.3 Installing the machine
Thread and fastening parts

● Remove the anti-corrosion protection from bolts and tapered pins.
● Use the appropriate tap or cutting die to shave the tapped holes of machine parts and
threads of screws, etc. See the drawings for the relevant male and female thread
dimensions.
● Use dry compressed air to purge the shaved tapped holes.
● Lightly oil the depreserved threads.
Burrs and pressure marks

● Check the machine parts, as well as fastening and fixing elements, for burrs or pressure
marks. Use a smoothing file to carefully remove any such burrs/pressure marks.
● Only whetstones may be used to smooth finished surfaces.
5.3.1 Preconditions for smooth, vibration-free operation

Preconditions for smooth, vibration-free operation:
● Stable foundation design
● Precise alignment of the machine
● Correct balancing of parts to be fitted to the shaft end.
● Maintaining the vibration velocity according to ISO 10816‑3
5.3.2 Aligning the machine to the driven machine and mounting
5.3.2.1 Horizontal types of construction with mounting feet

1. Refer to any instructions for aligning the driven machine and those of the coupling
manufacturer.
2. Align the machines with coupling output to the driven machine in such a manner that the
center lines of the shafts are parallel with no offset. This ensures that no additional forces
affect their bearings during operation.
3. For the vertical positioning (x→0) place thin shims under the machine feet. The number of
shims should be kept as low as possible, i.e. stack as few as possible. This also prevents
the machine being subjected to any stress/distortion. If available, use the existing tapped
holes for the forcing-off bolts to somewhat raise the machine.

Assembly
4. When positioning the machine, ensure that a uniform axial gap (y→0) is maintained around
the coupling.
5. Fix the machine to the foundation. The choice of fixing elements depends on the foundation
and is the plant operator's responsibility.
Note
Machine expansion
When aligning, make allowance for the thermal expansion of the machine when the
temperature increases.
Details about the alignment accuracy can be found in the Section "Information about the
machine dimension drawing".
5.3.3 Axial and radial forces

You can obtain the permissible values for axial and radial forces by contacting the Siemens
Service Center or referring to the machine catalog.
NOTICE
Damage to bearings or the shaft
Large output masses and their centers of gravity outside the shaft extensions can lead to
resonance in operation. This can result in damage to the bearings and shaft.
Ensure that the permissible loads for the forces on the shaft extension are adhered to in
accordance with the catalog data or configuration data.
5.3.4 Selecting bolts

● Unless specified otherwise, use fixing bolts with at least strength class 8.8 to ISO 898‑1 to
ensure that the machine is securely mounted and to transmit the torque-generated forces.
● When selecting screws and designing the foundation, bear in mind the maximum forces
occurring in the event of a fault, such as short circuits or line switchovers in phase opposition
for example. Force values for the foundation can be found in the "Technical data and
drawings" section.
See also

Assembly
5.3.5 Tightening torques for screw and bolt connections

Bolt locking devices
● Refit nuts or bolts that are mounted together with locking, resilient, and/or force-distributing
elements with identical, fully-functional elements when re-assembling. Always renew keyed
elements.
● When screwing together threads secured with a liquid adhesive, use a suitable medium
such as Loctite 243.
● Always use suitable securing devices or removable adhesives (e.g., Loctite 243) when
installing fixing bolts with a clamping length of less than 25 mm. The clamping length is
taken as the distance between the head of the bolt and the point at which the bolt is screwed
in.
Tightening torques
The bolted connections with metal contact surfaces, such as end shields, bearing cartridge
parts, terminal box parts bolted onto the stator frame, should be tightened to the following
torques, depending on the thread size:
Table 5-1 Tightening torques for bolted connections with a tolerance of ±10%.
Case M4 M5 M6 M8 M10 M12 M16 M20 M24 M30 M36 M42 M48 M56
A 1.2 2.5 4 8 13 20 40 52 80 150 - - - - Nm
B 1.3 2.6 4.5 11 22 38 92 180 310 620 1080 1700 2600 4200 Nm
C 3 5 8 20 40 70 170 340 600 1200 2000 3100 4700 7500 Nm
Applications
The above-mentioned tightening torques apply for the following applications:
● Case A
Applies to electrical connections in which the permissible torque is normally limited by the
bolt materials and/or the current carrying capacity of the insulators, with the exception of
the busbar connections in case B.
● Case B
Applies to bolts screwed into components made from materials with lower property class
(e. g. aluminum) and to bolts with property class 8.8 according to ISO 898-1.
● Case C
Applies to bolts with property class 8.8 or A4-70 according to ISO 898-1, however only to
bolts screwed into components made from materials with higher property class, e.g. cast
iron, steel or cast steel.
Note
Non-standard tightening torques
Different tightening torques for electrical connections and bolted connections for parts with
flat seals or insulating parts are specified in the relevant sections and drawings.

Assembly
To avoid stressing the motor feet, the overall flatness of the installation surfaces must satisfy
the values in the following table:
Table 5-2 Overall flatness of the installation surfaces
Frame size Overall flatness of the installation surfaces

≤ 080
08 0.1 mm
090 - 355
35 0.2 mm
≥ 400
40 0.3 mm
If shims are necessary for height adjustment and to avoid stresses, make them out of
adequately sized pieces of flat rolled strip. Complete balancing of the rotor together with the
transmission element may be found necessary.
5.3.6 Recommended alignment accuracy

The alignment accuracy required depends essentially on the configuration of the overall
machine train. Observe the required alignment accuracy of the coupling manufacturer in all
cases when aligning the machine.
Table 5-3 Recommended alignment accuracy
Speed [rpm] Parallel offset [mm] Angular offset [mm per 100 mm
coupling diameter]
750 0.09 0.09
1500 0.06 0.05
3000 0.03 0.025

Electrical connection 6
Note
Service Center
If you require support when electrically connecting up the machine, please contact the Service
Center.
WARNING
Connected parts can loosen
If you use fixing elements made from the wrong material or apply the wrong tightening torque,
this could impair current transfer or cause connecting parts to become loose. Fastening
elements can work loosely, so that the minimum air clearances are no longer maintained.
Sparking formation may occur, in an explosive atmosphere it can lead to an explosion. This
could result in death, serious injury or material damage to the machine or even in failure,
which could in turn lead indirectly to material failure of the system.
● Tighten the screwed connections to the specified tightening torques.
● Observe any specifications regarding the materials from which fixing elements must be
made.
● When performing servicing, check the fastenings.
6.1 Preparation
6.1.1 Selecting cables

Take the following criteria into account when selecting the connecting cables:
● Rated current
● Rated voltage
● If required, service factor
● System-dependent conditions, such as ambient temperature, routing type, cable cross-
section as defined by required length of cable, etc.

Electrical connection
6.2 Connecting
● Requirements according to IEC/EN 60204‑1

● Requirements according to IEC/EN 60079-14 when used in Zones 1, 2 or 21, 22
● Configuration notes
6.2 Connecting
6.2.1 Installing intrinsically safe circuits

There must be potential equalization along the entire length of the intrinsically safe electrical
circuits when intrinsically safe circuits are involved.
A stranded wire is used as the potential equalizing cable. A copper braided strip is used to
ensure potential equalization between the cable entry plate and the terminal box enclosure.
Table 6-1 Electrical data
Non-intrinsically safe power circuit Um = 700 V alternating voltage

Intrinsically safe power circuit in "fail-safe" type of protection
Ex ib IIB/IIC, only connected to certified intrinsically safe circuits that are
galvanically isolated from ground.
Maximum values for total:
IIB IIC
e.g. at T4: Ui = 28 V Ui = 24 V
Ii = 300 mA Ii = 170 mA
Pi = 1,3 W Pi = 1,3 W
The effective internal inductance and capacitance are negligibly small.
The intrinsically safe circuits are safely galvanically isolated from all non-intrinsically safe
circuits up to a peak value for the rated voltage of 1000 V. Please refer to the additional plate
on the machine for the maximum values for "intrinsically safe power circuits".
6.2.2 Terminal boxes with type of protection "Ex d"

With terminal boxes of protection type "Ex d", the type and size of the cable entry threads and
the type of protection are specified on the terminal box.
WARNING
Loss of type of protection "Ex d" when using cable and conductor entries, piping systems as
well as screw plugs with a basic design.
An explosion can occur. This can result in death, serious injury, or material damage.
Use only cable entries with type of protection "Ex d", that have been tested and certified in
accordance with IEC / EN 60079–1 .

6.2 Connecting
WARNING
Special threads are closed with non-certified closures on delivery; this means that the type
of protection is no longer guaranteed.
An explosion may occur during operation. This can result in death, serious injury, or material
damage.
Replace the closures with cable entries that have been tested and certified in accordance
with IEC / EN 60079–1.
6.2.3 Terminal boxes with type of protection "Ex e"
WARNING
If the seal of the pressure relief flap (preset breaking point) in the lower section of the terminal
box is damaged, then the explosion type of protection is no longer guaranteed.
An explosion may occur during operation. This can result in death, serious injury or material
damage.
The damaged seal may only be repaired with original sealing material.
WARNING
No cable or line entries or simple designs of sealing plug may be used on terminal boxes
with the "Ex e" type of protection.
An explosion may occur during operation. This can result in death, serious injury or material
damage.
● Use only cable entries that have been tested and certified in accordance with
IEC / EN 60079–7 .
● Use only sealing plugs that have been tested and certified in accordance with
IEC / EN 60079–7 to close openings that are not to be used.
CAUTION
Working on terminal boxes of the "Ex e" type of protection with undrilled cable entry plate
This can result in death, serious injury or material damage.
Ensure that the cable entry plate is still strong enough after drilling the threads.

6.2 Connecting
6.2.4 Connecting the grounding conductor

The cross-section of the machine grounding conductor must comply with the installation
regulations and also with IEC / EN 60204-1.
Table 6-2 Determining the cross-section of the grounding conductor
External cable cross-section S Cross-section of the grounding conductor [mm²]

S ≤ 16 mm² S
16 mm² < S ≤ 35 mm² 16 mm²
S > 35 mm² S/2
A terminal strip for grounding is fitted either on the stator casing or on the flanged endshield,
depending on the frame size. The grounding point is marked.
The terminal strip is suitable for connecting stranded cables with cable lugs or connecting flat
straps. In addition, all motors have a PE terminal within the terminal box.
When connecting up the grounding conductor, ensure that the contact surface of the
connection is bare and protected against corrosion using a suitable agent, e.g. with acid-free
Vaseline.
6.2.5 Circuit diagram in the terminal box cover

Data on the connection and connecting the motor winding can be found in the circuit diagram
in the cover of the terminal box.
6.2.6 Terminal designation

According to IEC / EN 60034‑8, the following basic definitions apply to the terminal
designations for 3-phase machines:
Table 6-3 Terminal designations using the 1U1-1 as an example
1 U 1 - 1 Designation
x Index for pole assignment for pole-changing machines where applicable. A lower
index signifies a lower speed. Special case for split winding.
x Phase designation U, V, W
x Index for winding start (1) or end (2) or if there is more than one connection per
winding
x Additional indices for cases in which it is obligatory to connect parallel power feed
cables to several terminals with otherwise identical designations

6.2 Connecting
NOTICE
Machine damage
The machine will not be adequately cooled if it is operated other than how it was originally
ordered or with the incorrect direction of rotation. This can result in machine damage.
Observe the direction of rotation data on the nameplate.
6.2.7 Connecting the machine for a specific direction of rotation

If the machine has one shaft extension or two shaft extensions with different diameters, the
direction of rotation when looking at the front of the single or the thicker shaft extension is
defined as follows:
● If you are connecting power supply cords with a phase sequence of L1, L2, L3 at U, V, W,
the resulting rotation will be clockwise.
● If you transpose two connections, e.g. L1, L2, L3 at V, U, W, the resulting rotation will be
counter-clockwise.
Machines which must run only in one specific direction of rotation are marked with a direction
of rotation arrow.
6.2.8 Terminal box

● The number and size of the cable entry tapped holes can be found in the machine dimension
drawing.
● Only use cable entries that are suitable for the cable.
● Only use suitable cable entries and cables for the prevailing ambient temperature.
● Check the cable glands and cables to ensure that they are correctly sealed and firmly
seated.
● Correctly close and seal threads or holes that are not being used ensuring that the IP degree
of protection is maintained. The IP degree of protection is specified on the rating plate.
Please note the following points for explosion-protected machines:
● Replace the cable glands that are not being used by appropriately certified screw plugs.
● If you are using cable glands, use only appropriately certified cable glands with strain relief.
Comply with the installation and operation conditions specified in the certificate for these
cable glands and check that they have been fully complied with.

6.2 Connecting
Note
Undrilled entry plate
If the entry plate is undrilled, you should match the number and size of the cable glands to
the operating conditions. Not applicable for terminal boxes of the Ex d type of protection.
1. Unscrew the cable entry plate.

2. Drill the required number of holes or threads in the required size into the cable entry plate.
The thickness of the plate is selected in such a way as to give a sufficient number of turns
when the holes are tapped.
Please note that you are responsible for ensuring that the entry plate still has sufficient
strength after the holes have been drilled and tapped.
3. Mount the cable entry plate and the cables with the cable glands onto the terminal box.
After the cables have been inserted into the terminal box, tighten the cable glands and parts
for strain relief to the torque specified by the manufacturer.
4. Seal the screwed sockets on the cable glands in accordance with the degree of protection.
● For terminal boxes with type protection “Ex d”, the type and size of the entry threads in the
vicinity of the hole are specified.
● The cable entry must be suitable for the cable.
● Cable entries and cables must be suitable for the ambient temperature.
● Check the cable glands and cables to ensure that they are correctly sealed and firmly
seated.
● Ensure that the connections in the terminal box are carefully established and a reliable
protective conductor connection.
● Ensure that the power cables are strain relieved where they enter the terminal box.
● Keep the inside of the terminal box clean.
● For machines with free cable ends (there is no terminal box mounted on the machine)
connect the cable in an enclosure. If the connection is established in a hazardous zone,
then the housing must comply with the requirements of a recognized type of protection
according to IEC / EN 60079–0.
Use only sealing plugs, cable entries and conductor entries, that are certified and marked for
use in the respective hazardous area (the zone).
6.2.9 Minimum air clearances

When making electrical connections, maintain minimum air clearances for bare electrically live
components. The rated voltage can be found on the rating plate.

6.2 Connecting
Rated voltage Minimum air clearance

Up to 6.6 kV 60 mm
Up to 11 kV 100 mm
Up to 13.8 kV 140 mm
Minimum air clearances for bare electrically live parts
6.2.10 Cable ends with wire end sleeves

Preferably use end sleeves instead of soldering cable ends. Before connecting, correctly clamp
the end sleeve onto the cable to establish a connection capable of conducting current.
WARNING
Securely and reliably clamping and enclosing the end of the conductor
If the end of the conductor is not correctly enclosed by the end sleeve, but is clamped together
with it, then this can lead to overheating. The temperature class of the machine can be
exceeded. This can trigger ignition of an explosive mixture. This can result in death, serious
● Insert only one conductor end into each end sleeve. Attach the end sleeve correctly.
6.2.11 Connecting cables with cable lugs

1. Select the cable lugs according to the required cable cross-section and stud size.
The cable cross-section that can be connected is determined by the type of cable lug.
– Cable lug according to DIN 46234, from 25 to 240 mm2
– Cable lug according to DIN 46235, from 50 to 400 mm2
The range of external diameters for the connecting cable is limited by the cable entry that
is used. For data on this topic, see "Information on the dimension drawing".
Connect only one conductor per cable lug.
2. Insulate the conductor ends in such a way that the remaining insulation reaches almost up
to the cable lug.
3. Fasten the cable lug to the end of the conductor correctly, e.g. by squeezing.

6.2 Connecting
4. Note and check compliance with the minimum air clearances of the cable lug.
Voltage Minimum air clearance
Up to 6.6 kV 60 mm
Up to 11 kV 100 mm
Minimum air clearances for bare electrically live parts

5. Place the cable lug on the bolt as shown in the schematic diagram below. Take note of the
arrangement of any disconnecting link used, and tighten the contact and fastening nut to
a tightening torque of 40 Nm. When doing this, restrain the bolts so they do not twist.
1P
1P
22.10.2 / Contact nuts

22.10.3
22.43 Disconnecting link
Figure 6-1 Schematic representation of connection using cable lugs
See also
Minimum air clearances (Page 62)
6.2.12 Tightening torques for cable glands

● Tighten the cable gland and the parts of terminal box intended to act as a strain relief to
the appropriate torque as specified by the manufacturer after inserting the feeder cables.
The tightening torques depend on the cable gland used and the cable or wire used.
● Tighten the standard cable glands supplied with the motor in accordance with the following
table.

6.2 Connecting
Table 6-4 Tightening torques for standard cable glands [Nm]
Nominal size Cable gland for Ex e II Cable gland for Ex e / Ex d IIC

TypeHSK-M Type ADE 1F, ADE 4F R... / B...
Union nut Connection thread Union nut / connection Union nut / connection
thread thread
M12 x 1.5 5 7 7.5 -
M16 x 1.5 5 7 12.5 17
M20 x 1.5 5 7 20 23
M25 x 1.5 7 10 30 29
M32 x 1.5 7 10 55 33
M40 x 1.5 7 10 75 41
M50 x 1.5 7 10 100 50
M63 x 1.5 7 10 135 75
M75 x 1.5 - - 175 100
6.2.13 Connecting aluminum conductors

If you are using aluminum conductors, comply in addition with the following:
● Use only cable lugs that are suitable for connecting aluminum conductors.
● Immediately before inserting the aluminum conductor, remove the oxide layer from the
contact areas on the conductor and/or the mating piece, by brushing or filing.
● Then grease the contact areas immediately using neutral vaseline in order to avoid re-
oxidation.
NOTICE
Aluminum flow due to contact pressure
Aluminum flows following installation due to the contact pressure. The connection with
the clamping nuts can loosen as a result. The contact resistance would increase and the
current-carrying impeded; as a consequence the terminal box and the surrounding
components could burn. This could result in material damage to the machine or even in
total failure, which could in turn lead to indirect material damage to the system.
Retighten the clamping nuts after approximately 24 hours and then again after
approximately four weeks. Make sure that the terminals are de-energized before you
tighten the nuts.

6.2 Connecting
6.2.14 Finishing connection work

1. Before closing the terminal box, please check that:
– The electrical connections in the terminal box are tight and in full compliance with the
specifications above
– The motor is connected so that it rotates in the direction specified
– The inside of the terminal box is clean and free of any cable debris
– All gaskets and seals are intact
– Unused cable glands must be replaced with certified closures or closed with other
suitable closure types. Comply with the installation and operation conditions specified
in the certificate for these plug elements and check that they have been complied with.
– The pressure relief device is intact Depending on the type of terminal box being used,
the pressure relief device can be implemented either by sealing the slots or by using a
pressure relief diaphragm.
WARNING
Damaged pressure relief device
Water and foreign bodies can penetrate the enclosure if the pressure relief device is
damaged: The degree of protection of the terminal box is no longer guaranteed, a short-
circuit can occur, which can result in death, serious injury or material damage.
● Do not operate the machine with a damaged pressure relief device.
● Any damage may only be repaired after prior discussion with the person responsible
for the safety of the plant or system and only using original parts. Any damage may
only be repaired after prior discussion with the person responsible for the safety of
the installation and only by using original parts.
2. Close the terminal box.

See section "Tightening torques for screw and bolt connections" for the tightening torque
of the fixing bolts for the cover.
6.2.15 Internal equipotential bonding

The equipotential bonding between the ground terminal in the terminal box enclosure and the
motor frame is established via the terminal box metallic contact faces. The contact faces are
protected against corrosion.
The equipotential bonding is achieved by means of a stranded wire. A copper braided strip, a
stranded wire or a metal contact is used to ensure potential equalization between the cable
entry plate and the terminal box enclosure.

Start-up 7
Note
Service Center
Please contact the Service Center (Page 109), if you require commissioning support.
7.1 Checks to be carried out prior to commissioning

Once the system has been correctly installed, you should check the following prior to
commissioning:
Note
Checks to be carried out prior to commissioning
The following list of checks to be performed prior to commissioning does not claim to be
complete. It may be necessary to perform further checks and tests in accordance with the
specific situation on-site.
● The machine is undamaged.

● The machine has been correctly installed and aligned, the transmission elements are
correctly balanced and adjusted.
● All fixing screws, connection elements, and electrical connections have been tightened to
the specified tightening torques.
● The operating conditions match the data provided in accordance with the technical
documentation, such as degree of protection, ambient temperature, etc..
● Moving parts such as the coupling move freely.
● All touch protection measures for moving and live parts have been taken.

Start-up
7.2 Insulation resistance and polarization index
WARNING
Risk of losing the IP degree of protection as a result of damaged shaft sealing rings
Replace damaged components immediately.
● The grounding and equipotential bonding connections have been made correctly.
● The machine is connected so that it rotates in the direction specified.
● Appropriately configured control and speed monitoring functions ensure that the motor
cannot exceed the permissible speeds specified in the technical data. See also the system-
specific documentation.
● The minimum insulation resistance values are within tolerance.
● Minimum air clearances have been maintained.
● Any supplementary motor monitoring devices and equipment have been correctly
connected and are fully functional. Refer to the "Technical data and drawings" section for
more information.
● The values for "Alarm" and "Shut down" at the monitoring equipment are set to the values
listed in the "Explanatory text for the machine dimension drawing" section.
● All brakes and backstops are operating correctly.
Converter operation
● If the design of the motor requires connection to a particular converter type, the rating plate
will contain corresponding additional information.
● The converter is correctly parameterized. The parameterization data is specified on the
rating plate of the machine. Information about the parameters is available in the operating
instructions for the converter.
● The specified limit speed nmax is not exceeded. Limit speed nmin is not fallen below.
● The bearing insulation should be executed as shown on the plates.
7.2 Insulation resistance and polarization index


Start-up
7.3 Testing the insulation resistance and polarization index

WARNING
Hazardous voltage at the terminals
During and immediately after measuring the insulation resistance or the polarization index
(PI) of the stator winding, hazardous voltages may be present at some of the terminals.
Contact with these can result in death, serious injury or material damage.
● If any power cables are connected, check to make sure line supply voltage cannot be
delivered.
● Discharge the winding after measurement until the risk is eliminated, e.g. using the
following measures:
– Connecting the terminals with ground potential until the recharge voltage drops to a
non-hazardous level
– Connecting the connecting cable
Measure the insulation resistance

1. Before you begin measuring the insulation resistance, please read the manual for the
insulation resistance meter you are going to use.
2. Make sure that no power cables are connected.
3. Measure the insulation resistance of the winding in relation to the machine enclosure and
the winding temperature. The winding temperature should not exceed 40° C during the
measurement. Convert the measured insulation resistances to the reference temperature
of 40° C according to the formula in the following table. This thereby ensures that the
minimum values specified can be compared.
4. Read out the insulation resistance one minute after applying the measuring voltage.

Start-up
Limit values for the stator winding insulation resistance

The following table specifies the measuring voltage and limit values for the insulation
resistance. These values correspond to IEEE 43‑2000 recommendations.
Table 7-1 Stator winding insulation resistance at 40° C
VN [V] VMeas [V] RC [MΩ]

U ≤ 1000 500 ≥5
1000 ≤ U ≤ 2500 500 (max. 1000) 100
2500 < U ≤ 5000 1000 (max. 2500)
5000 < U ≤ 12000 2500 (max. 5000)
U > 12000 5000 (max. 10000)
Urated = rated voltage, see the rating plate

Umeas = DC measuring voltage
RC = minimum insulation resistance at reference temperature of 40° C
For a winding temperature of approx. 25° C, the minimum insulation resistances are 20 MΩ
(U ≤ 1000 V) or 300 MΩ (U > 1000 V). The values apply for the complete winding to ground.
Twice the minimum values apply to the measurement of individual assemblies.
Note the following:

● When measuring with winding temperatures other than 40 °C, convert the measuring value
to the reference temperature of 40 °C according to the following equations from IEEE
43-2000.
(1) RC Insulation resistance converted to 40 °C reference temperature
kT Temperature coefficient according to equation (2)
RC = KT · RT RT Measured insulation resistance for measuring/winding temperature T
in °C
(2) 40 Reference temperature in °C
10 Halving / doubling of the insulation resistance with 10 K
KT = (0.5) (40-T)/10 T Measuring/winding temperature in °C
In this case, doubling or halving the insulation resistance at a temperature change of 10 K

is used as the basis.
– The insulation resistance halves every time the temperature rises by 10 K.
– The resistance doubles every time the temperature falls by 10 K.
● Dry, new windings have an insulation resistance of between 100 and 2000 MΩ, or possibly
even higher values. An insulation resistance value close to the minimum value could be
due to moisture and/or dirt accumulation. However, the size of the winding, the rated voltage
and other characteristics affect the insulation resistance and may need to be taken into
account when determining measures.
● Over its operating lifetime, the motor winding insulation resistance can drop due to ambient
and operational influences. Depending on the rated voltage, the critical insulation resistance
value is to be calculated by multiplying the rated voltage (kV) by the specific critical
resistance value and then converted to the current winding temperature at the time of the
measurement, see previous table.

Start-up
7.5 Commissioning an external fan
Measuring the polarization index

1. To determine the polarization index, measure the insulation resistances after one minute
and ten minutes.
2. Express the measured values as a ratio:
PI = Rinsul 10 min / Rinsul 1 min
Modern measuring devices display these values automatically following the measurement.
For insulation resistances > 5000 MΩ, the measurement of the PI is no longer meaningful and
consequently not included in the assessment.
R(10 min) / R(1 min) Assessment

≥2 Insulation in good condition
<2 Dependent on the complete diagnosis of the insulation
NOTICE
Damage to insulation
If the critical insulation resistance is reached or undershot, this can damage the insulation
and cause voltage flashovers.
● Contact the Service Center.
● If the measured value is close to the critical value, you must subsequently check the
insulation resistance at shorter intervals.
Limit values of the anti-condensation heating insulation resistance

The insulation resistance of the anti-condensation heating with respect to the machine housing
should not be lower than 1 MΩ when measured at 500 V DC.
7.4 Testing the cooling of the machine

Cooling
● Check that the machine cooling is available for commissioning.
See also
Preparations for use (Page 27)
7.5 Commissioning an external fan

An external fan is suitable for use only in unidirectional operation; refer to the specification of
the direction of rotation on the fan cowl. It guarantees that the motor is cooled irrespective of
the motor speed or direction of rotation.

Start-up
7.6 Greasing the roller bearings prior to commissioning
If the cooling air is in open circulation, it must have only weak, chemically abrasive properties
and only a low dust content.
Checks before the first test run

Before the first test run, carry out the following checks:
● The external fan is correctly fitted and aligned. The gap between the impeller and the inlet
nozzle is uniform.
● All of the retaining elements and electrical connections are securely tightened.
● The grounding and equipotential bonding connections to the mains have been correctly
made.
● The air flow is not impeded or shut off by flaps, covers or similar.
● There are no foreign bodies in the fan enclosure.
● All protection measures have been taken to prevent accidental contact with moving or live
parts.
Performing the test run

1. Switch the external fan motor on and off briefly.
2. Compare the the direction of rotation of the external fan with the arrow indicating the
direction of rotation. If the direction of rotation and the arrow do not match, then switch two
of the three phases of the external fan motor.
7.6 Greasing the roller bearings prior to commissioning

● Regrease the roller bearings prior to commissioning if the machine has been out of
operation for more than a year. The shaft must rotate so that the new grease can be
distributed across the bearings.
● Regrease the roller bearings prior to commissioning in the following circumstances:
– When the machine has been in storage in favorable conditions, e.g. in dry rooms that
are free of dust and vibrations. This applies to the period between delivery and
commissioning, or longer periods of stoppage.
– If the machine has been in storage in unfavorable conditions for more than two years.
Note
Pay attention to the instructions on the lubricant plate.
● If the machine is equipped with grease removal valves, after relubricating, remove the
grease used by completely withdrawing the valve mounted at the bearing several times.
The machine must be operational while doing this.

Start-up
7.7 Preventing overvoltages when switching high-voltage motors
● If the machine is equipped with grease collection chambers, unscrew the grease collection
chambers after the interval specified on the plate with the motor stationary and remove the
spent bearing grease. If this is not done, the grease will clog and the bearings will overheat.
● Continually check the bearing temperature rise. When using the specified grease quality,
for a maximum room temperature of 40 °C, the maximum bearing temperature rise is 80 K.
Avoiding mechanical damage to bearings

Regularly inspect all machines for any mechanical damage. Especially observe that the
bearing replacement intervals and relubrication intervals, respectively grease change intervals
or oil change intervals specified by the machine manufacturer are maintained.
Replace the bearings once they have reached their nominal service life or verify that they are
mechanically in good working order as part of an inspection.
● Where bearings are sealed for life, there is a guarantee that the rated service life is achieved
only well after expiry of the service life of the grease in the bearing.
● The theoretical nominal service life of the bearings can be taken from the data sheet of the
machine if this was specified – or was specifically defined for mechanical design reasons
for a particular application.
● Where machines are subject to externally applied forces (e. g. the force on a drive belt or
axial forces arising from the driven machine), at the full loadings listed on the technical
specification the rated service life of the bearings is at least 20,000 hours.
● For all other machines, the rated service life of the bearings is at least 40,000 hours.
● For bearings with external oil supply, monitor the lubrication system to ensure that it is
operating correctly.

When commissioning high-voltage motors or switchgear for high voltage motors from 3 kV,
please observe the following:
NOTICE
Overvoltages caused by shutting down the machine during startup
Shutting down the machine during startup can cause overvoltages, which may cause damage
to the machine.
These consequences are independent of the motor size and quenching principle of the switch
used, i.e. they can also occur when using minimum oil,SF6- or air-blast switches.
● Avoid shutting down the machine during startup by, for instance, checking for errors in
the starting control or for excessively sensitive protection settings.
● Keep shutdowns during startup for checking the direction of rotation or other tests to an
absolute minimum.

Start-up

Operation 8
8.1 Safety instructions during operation
WARNING
All terminal boxes must be closed
Terminal boxes contain live electrical parts. Death, serious injury or material damage can
result if terminal box covers are removed.
When the machine is in operation, the terminal boxes must remain closed at all times.
Terminal boxes may be opened only when the machine is stopped and de-energized.
WARNING
Do not remove covers when the motor is running
Rotating or live parts are dangerous. Death, serious injury or material damage can result if
the required covers are removed.
Any covers that prevent live electrical or rotating parts from being touched, or that ensure
compliance with a particular degree of protection or are required for ensuring proper air flows,
and hence effective cooling, must not be opened during operation.
WARNING
Faults in operation
Deviations from normal operation such as increased power consumption, temperatures or
vibrations, unusual noises or odors, tripping of monitoring devices, etc., indicate that the
machine is not functioning properly. This can cause faults which can result in eventual or
immediate death, serious injury or material damage.
● Immediately inform the maintenance personnel.
● If you are in doubt, immediately switch off the motor, being sure to observe the system-
specific safety conditions!

Operation
8.3 Power supply disconnection of the converter
CAUTION
Fire hazard
Certain parts of the motor may reach temperatures above 50° C. Touching them can result
in burns.
● Check the temperature of the parts before touching them and take appropriate protective
measures if necessary.
8.2 Current transformer
CAUTION
Terminal boxes with current transformers
If you are using current transformers, make sure that the secondary circuit from the current
transformer is protected against unintentional opening while the equipment is in use.
8.3 Power supply disconnection of the converter
WARNING
Power supply disconnection of the converter in operation
Note that due to the loss of the power supply on the converter input side and due to the
stopping of the rotor, impermissibly high voltages are generated in the intermediate circuit of
the converter. Use an automatic circuit breaker between the motor and the converter in order
to prevent damage to the converter. At the same time, you must short-circuit the phases on
the motor.
Please also refer to the operating instructions for the frequency converter

Operation
8.4 Machine overheating caused by dust
DANGER
Explosion hazard from hybrid mixtures
Hybrid mixtures are mixtures of flammable dusts with explosive gas/air atmospheres which
can together create a dangerous explosive atmosphere if they occur at the same time.
Changes can arise in the safety characteristics here, such as a change in the zonal
classification, increase in the explosion pressure, reduction in the minimum ignition energy
and a reduction in the maximum temperatures to be observed.
An explosion can result. This can result in death, serious injury or material damage.
● For this reason, the relative characteristics must be considered both for gas (zones 0, 1
and 2) and for dust (zones 20, 21 and 22) where hybrid mixtures arise. It is necessary for
a competent assessor to determine in the individual case whether the parameters
determining ignition are unfavorably affected in a particular hybrid mixture.
● Motors with dual plates for G ("Gas") andD ("Dust") may only be used where these two
simultaneously occur after the user has first analyzed the properties of the hybrid mixture.
8.4 Machine overheating caused by dust
WARNING
Explosion hazard due to overheating of the machine caused by deposits of dust
Deposits of dust have a thermal insulation effect, which can lead to the machine overheating.
The maximum surface temperature of the machine cannot be adhered to. The dust can ignite,
resulting in an explosion. This can result in death, serious injury or material damage.
● Dust the machine regularly.
● Do not switch the machine on until the dust has been removed.
WARNING
Risk of explosion due to excessive bearing temperature
The surface temperature cannot be maintained within maximum permissible limits if the
bearing becomes too hot. The dust can ignite, resulting in an explosion. This can result in
death, serious injury or material damage.
● Always check the bearing temperatures.
● In addition to the current-dependent overload protection device located in the three phases
of the connecting cable, we recommend that you also monitor the temperature rise in the
machine with the aid of the temperature sensors built into the stator winding.
For the alarm and shutdown temperatures, see the "Explanatory text for the machine
dimension drawing" section.

Operation
8.6 Switching off the external fan
NOTICE
Excessive machine temperature
If the anti-condensation heating is operated while the machine is running, this can increase
the temperatures inside the machine. This can result in material damage.
● Make sure that the anti-condensation heating is switched off before the machine is
switched on.
● Only operate anti-condensation heating when the machine is switched off.
See also
Interlock circuit for anti-condensation heating (Page 28)
DANGER
Explosion hazard if the bridging is removed from the insulated bearing
Removing the factory-fitted bridging of the insulated bearing leads to potential differences
between the rotor and the grounded motor. This can cause the generation of sparks, which
especially in an explosive atmosphere can ignite surrounding dust or combustible gases.
Explosions can occur. There is also a risk of an electric shock. Death, serious injury, or
material damage will result.
Do not open the bridging of the bearing insulation during operation.
8.5 Switching on the machine

1. If at all possible, run the machine without load and check that it is running smoothly.
Maximum number of permissible consecutive starts for machines on the power supply:
Three cold / two warm
The start conditions for converter machines can be found in the catalog.
2. If it runs perfectly, connect a load.
3. If this is possible using the available measuring equipment, check the bearing and stator
winding temperatures.
8.6 Switching off the external fan

If the controller does not switch off the external fan automatically, switch it off when the machine
is stopped.

Operation
8.8 Stoppages
8.7 Switching on again after an emergency switching-off

● Check the motor before restarting the driven machine after an emergency off.
● Eliminate all the causes that have led to the emergency off
8.8 Stoppages
The stoppage is a shutdown for a period of time, during which the machine is stopped but
remains at the location of use.
Under normal ambient conditions, e. g. the stopped machine is not exposed to any vibration,
no increased level of corrosion, etc. in general, the following measures are necessary during
stoppages.
Measures when motors are at standstill and ready for operation

● For longer periods when the motor is not being used, either energize the motor at regular
intervals (roughly once a month), or at least spin the rotor.
● Please refer to the section"Switching on" before switching on to recommission the motor.
NOTICE
Damage due to improper storage
The motor can be damaged if it is not stored properly. If the motor is out of service for
extended periods of time, implement suitable anti-corrosion, preservation, and drying
measures.
When recommissioning the motor after a long period out of service, carry out the measures
recommended in the chapter entitled "Commissioning".
● If the controller does not do this automatically, switch on any anti-condensation heating
during stoppages. This will avoid the formation of condensation.
WARNING
Explosion hazard
If the anti-condensation heating is switched on directly after the machine is switched off, the
temperature class or the maximum surface temperature of the machine can be exceeded.
In an explosive atmosphere, there is a risk of an explosion. This can result in death, serious
Do not switch on the anti-condensation heating for at least one hour after the motor has been
switched off.

Operation
8.10 Re-commissioning the machine
8.8.1 Avoidance of damage to roller bearings during stoppages

Extended stoppages at the identical or almost identical resting position of the roller bearings
can lead to damage such as brinelling or formation of corrosion.
● During stoppages, regularly start the machine up for a brief period once a month, or at least
turn the rotor over several times.
If you have uncoupled the machine from the driven machine and secured the rotor with a
rotor shipping brace, then remove this before turning the rotor over or starting the machine
up.
Make sure that the resting position of the roller bearings after the rotor has been turned
over is different from what it previously had been. Use the fitted key or the coupling halves
as reference markers.
● During re-commissioning, refer to the information in the "Commissioning" section.
See also
Start-up (Page 67)
8.9 Decommissioning the machine
NOTICE
Damage as a result of an extended period out of service
If the machine is going to be out of service for longer than six months, then take the necessary
measures for preservation and storing. Otherwise damage to the machine will result.
Record the decommissioning steps. This log will be useful upon recommissioning.
8.10 Re-commissioning the machine

When you re-commission the machine, proceed as follows:
● Study the record made when the machine was decommissioned, and reverse the measures
that were taken for conservation and storage.
● Perform the measures listed in the "Commissioning" section.
See also
Start-up (Page 67)
Decommissioning the machine (Page 80)

Operation
8.11 faults
8.11 faults
8.11.1 Inspections in the event of faults

Natural disasters or unusual operating conditions, such as overloading or short circuit, are
faults that overload the machine electrically or mechanically.
Immediately perform an inspection after such faults.
Correct the cause of the fault as described in the respective remedial measures section. Repair
any damage to the machine.
8.11.2 Electrical faults
Note
If you are operating the motor with a converter, the operating instructions of the converter
must also be observed if electrical faults occur.
Table 8-1 Electrical faults
↓ Motor fails to start

↓ Motor accelerates sluggishly
↓ Rumbling noise during startup
↓ Rumbling noise during operation
↓ High temperature rise during no-load operation
↓ High temperature rise with load
↓ High temperature rise of individual winding sections
Possible causes of faults Remedial measures
X X X X Overload Reduce the load.
X Interrupted phase in the supply cable Check the switches and cables.
X X X X Interrupted phase in the feeder cable Check the switches and cables.
after switching on
X Mains voltage too low, frequency too high Check the power supply conditions.
X Mains voltage too high, frequency too low Check the power supply conditions.
X X X X X Stator winding incorrectly connected Check the winding connection in the terminal box.
X X X X Winding short circuit or phase short Determine the winding resistances and
circuit in stator winding insulation resistances. Carry out repair work after
consultation with the manufacturer.
X Incorrect direction of rotation Check the connection.

Operation
8.11 faults
8.11.3 Mechanical faults
Table 8-2 Mechanical faults
↓ Grinding noise
↓ Radial vibrations
↓ Axial vibrations
X Rotating parts grind Establish the cause and realign the parts.
X Stator or coupling not balanced. Disconnect the stator or coupling and rebalance.
If the machine has two shaft ends, and a transmission element is
only fitted to one end, secure the fitted key at the other end to
prevent it from being thrown out. If the rotor has balance type "H"
(standard type), the fitted key must be cut back to roughly half of its
length.
X Rotor out of true, shaft bent Consult the manufacturing plant.
X X Poor alignment Align the machine set; check the coupling. (1)
X Coupled machine not balanced Rebalance the coupled machine.
X Shocks from coupled machine Investigate the coupled machine.
X X Uneven running of gear unit Fix the gearing.
X X Resonance of the overall system Stabilize the foundation following consultation.
comprising motor and foundation
X X Changes in foundation Establish the cause of the changes and eliminate them if necessary;
realign the machine.
(1)
Take any changes into account when warming up the machine.
8.11.4 Roller bearing faults
Note
Damage to roller bearings can be difficult to detect in some cases. If in doubt, replace the
bearing. Use other bearing designs only after consulting the manufacturer.
Table 8-3 Roller bearing faults
↓ Bearing overheats
↓ Bearing "whistles"
↓ Bearing "knocks"
X High coupling pressure Align the machine more accurately.
X Belt tension too high Reduce the drive belt tension.
X Bearing contaminated Clean the bearing or replace it. Check the seals.
X High ambient temperature Use a suitable high-temperature grease.
X X Insufficient lubrication Grease the bearings as instructed.

Operation
8.11 faults
X X Bearing canted Properly install the bearing.

X X Insufficient bearing play Only after consultation with the manufacturer: Fit a bearing with
greater play.
X Excessive bearing play Only after consultation with the manufacturer: Fit a bearing with
lower play.
X X Bearing corroded Replace the bearing. Check the seals.
X Too much grease in bearing Remove surplus grease.
X Wrong grease in the bearing Use the correct grease.
X Friction marks on raceway Replace the bearing.
X Scoring (brinelling) Replace the bearing. Avoid any vibration at standstill
8.11.5 Faults at the external fan

The following table shows the possible causes of and remedial measures for faults on forced-
ventilated machines.
Table 8-4 Cooling system faults
↓ High temperature rise with load

X Wrong direction of rotation of the external fan Check the electrical connections to the external fan.
X External fan is not running Check the external fan and its connections.
X Reduced air flow Check the air ducts; clean the machine.

Operation
8.11 faults

Maintenance 9
Through careful and regular maintenance, inspections, and overhauls you can detect faults at
an early stage and resolve them. This means that you can avoid consequential damage.
Operating conditions and characteristics can vary widely. For this reason, only general
maintenance intervals can be specified here. Maintenance intervals should therefore be
scheduled to suit the local conditions (dirt, starting frequency, load, etc.).
Comply with the IEC / EN 60079‑17 standard during all service and maintenance work on the
machine.
Note
Service Center
Please contact the Service Center (Page 109), if you require support with servicing,
maintenance or repair.
9.1 Inspection and maintenance
9.1.1 Safety instructions for inspection and maintenance
WARNING
Rotating and live parts
Electric machines contain live and rotating parts. Fatal or serious injuries and substantial
material damage can occur if maintenance work is performed on the machine when it is not
stopped or not de-energized.
● Perform maintenance work on the machine only when it is stopped. The only operation
permissible while the machine is rotating is regreasing the roller bearings.
● When performing maintenance work, comply with the five safety rules (Page 13).

Maintenance
WARNING
Machine damage
If the machine is not maintained it can suffer damage. This can cause faults which can result
in eventual or immediate death, serious injury or material damage.
Perform regular maintenance on the machine.
CAUTION
Dust disturbances when working with compressed air
When cleaning with compressed air, dust, metal chips, or cleaning agents can be whirled up.
Injuries can result.
When cleaning using compressed air, make sure you use suitable extraction equipment and
wear protective equipment (safety goggles, protective suit, etc.).
NOTICE
Damage to insulation
If metal swarf enters the winding head when cleaning with compressed air, this can damage
the insulation. Clearance and creepage distances can be undershot. This may cause damage
to the machine extending to total failure.
When cleaning with compressed air, ensure there is adequate extraction.
NOTICE
Machine damage caused by foreign bodies
Foreign bodies such as dirt, tools or loose components, such as screws etc., can be left by
accident inside the machine after maintenance is performed. These can cause short circuits,
reduce the performance of the cooling system or increase noise in operation. They can also
damage the machine.
● When carrying out maintenance work, make sure that no foreign bodies are left in or on
the machine.
● Securely attach all loose parts again once you have completed the maintenance
procedures.
● Carefully remove any dirt.
Note
Operating conditions and characteristics can vary widely. For this reason, only general
intervals for inspection and maintenance measures can be specified here.

Maintenance
WARNING
Explosion hazard
Components within the machine may be hotter than the maximum permissible surface
temperature of the enclosure. In an explosive atmosphere, dust can ignite and an explosion
● Do not open the machine in an explosive and dusty atmosphere when it is still at normal
● Allow the machine to cool down before opening it.
● When disassembling, ensure that the parts necessary to seal the enclosure are not
damaged, for example seals, face/plane mating surfaces. Perform a new routine test for
the parts that have been repaired if these parts are crucial to ensure dust protection.
WARNING
Explosion hazard due to overheating of the machine caused by a layer of dust
Layers of dust thicker than 5mm can insulate the machine, resulting in overheating. The
maximum surface temperature of the machine cannot be adhered to. The dust can ignite,
resulting in an explosion. This can result in death, serious injury or material damage.
Dust the machine regularly. Do not allow dust layers thicker than 5 mm to build up on the
machine surface. Do not switch the machine on until the dust has been removed.
WARNING
Risk of explosion due to excessive bearing temperature
The surface temperature cannot be maintained within maximum permissible limits if the
bearing becomes too hot. The dust can ignite, resulting in an explosion. This can result in
death, serious injury or material damage.
● Always check the bearing temperature.
● In addition to the current-dependent overload protection device located in the three phases
of the connecting cable, we recommend that you also monitor the temperature rise in the
motor with the aid of the temperature sensors built into the stator winding.

Maintenance
9.1.2 Risk of explosion when cleaning with compressed air
WARNING
Risk of explosion when cleaning with compressed air
If you clean the machine with compressed air, plastic components may become statically
charged and ignite a potentially explosive atmosphere; an explosion can occur. This can
Do not use compressed air to clean plastic parts in an explosive atmosphere. When cleaning
the machine, make sure that the air in the vicinity of the motor is free of gas and dust.
9.1.3 Inspections in the event of faults

Natural disasters or unusual operating conditions, such as overloading or short circuit, are
faults that overload the machine electrically or mechanically.
Immediately perform an inspection after such faults.
9.1.4 First inspection

Perform the following checks after approximately 500 operating hours or one year, whichever
comes first:
Table 9-1 Checks after installation or repair
Check When the At

motor is standstill
running
The electrical parameters are maintained. X
The permissible bearing temperatures are not exceeded. X
The smooth running characteristics and machine running noise have not X
deteriorated.
The motor foundation has no cracks and indentations. (*) X X
(*) You can perform these checks while the motor is at standstill or, if required, while running.
Further checks
Further checks may be required if so specified in supplementary instructions or in accordance
with the plant-specific conditions.
NOTICE
If you detect any deviations during the inspection, you must rectify them immediately. They
may otherwise damage the motor.

Maintenance
9.1.5 General inspection

Check that the installation conditions are observed. We recommend that the following checks
are performed after approx. 16 000 operating hours or at the latest after two years:
Table 9-2 Checks that have to be performed during the general inspection
Checking When the At

motor is standstill
running
The electrical parameters are maintained X
The permissible bearing temperatures are not exceeded X
The smooth running characteristics and machine running noise have not X
deteriorated
The motor foundation has no cracks and indentations (*) X X
The machine is aligned within the permissible tolerance ranges X
All the fixing bolts/screws for the mechanical and electrical connections have X
been securely tightened
All the potential connections, grounding connections and shield supports are X
correctly seated and properly bonded
The winding insulation resistances are sufficiently high X
Any bearing insulation is fitted as shown on the plates and labels X
The CABLES and insulating parts and components are in good condition X
and there is no evidence of discoloring
(*) You can perform these checks while the motor is at standstill or, if required, while running.
NOTICE
If you detect any deviations during the inspection, you must rectify them immediately. They
may otherwise cause damage to the machine.
9.1.6 Servicing the roller bearings

When inspecting rolling-contact bearings, it is generally not necessary to dismantle the
machines. The motor only has to be dismantled if the bearings are to be replaced.
9.1.7 Bolt grade

Check that all the bolts for attaching the bearing shields, bearing cover, gland plates, and
terminal boxes are present and properly tightened. Replace damaged bolts with identical bolts
of a perfect quality.
Depending on the ambient temperature, only bolts with the bolt grade according to the following
table are permissible for motors without heating.

Maintenance
Table 9-3 Bolt grade BG071 to BG315
Type/size Bolt grade for ambient temperature Tu

≥ -40 °C -55 °C ≤ Tu < -40 °C
Standard Stainless steel bolts Standard
071, 080, 090, 100, 112, 132, 8.8 A4-70 A4-70
160, 180, 200,
200, 225,
225, 250,
250, 280,
280 315
180.B 8.8 A4-80 A4-80
Table 9-4 Bolt grade BG315 to BG910
Type/size Bolt grade for ambient temperature Tu

≥ -20 °C -40 °C ≤ Tu < -20 °C
Standard Stainless steel Standard Stainless steel
bolts bolts
315.B, 315.C, 315.D, 315.E 8.8 A4–70 8.8 A4–70
355.K, 355.L, 355.M, 355.N, 355.X 8.8 A4–70 8.8 A4–70
355.A, 355.B, 355.C, 355.D 8.8 A4–70 8.8 A4–80
400.K, 400.L, 400.M, 400.N, 400.X 8.8 A4–70 8.8 A4–70
450.K, 450.L, 450.M, 450.N, 450.X 8.8 A4–70 8.8 A4–80
500.K, 500.L, 500.M, 500.N, 500.X
560.K, 560.L, 560.M, 560.N, 560.X
630.K, 630.L, 630.M, 630.N, 630.X 8.8 A4–80 8.8 A4–80
710.A, 710.B, 710.C, 710.X 8.8 A4–70 8.8 A4–80
800.A, 800.B, 800.C, 800.D type of 8.8 A4–70 / A4-80 8.8 A4–80
protection IIB / IIC
910.A, 910.B, 910.C, 8.8 A4–70 8.8 A4–80
All machines marked in accordance with directive 94/9/EG must be regularly inspected for
mechanical damage that could constitute a risk of ignition in accordance with IEC / EN
60079‑17 .

Maintenance
● Comply with the following intervals:

– Bearing replacement intervals
– Relubrication intervals
– Grease replacement intervals
– Oil change intervals
● Roller bearing service life
– Replace the roller bearings once the nominal service life is reached. Alternatively, you
can verify they are free of mechanical damage as part of an inspection.
– In the case of roller bearings without a regreasing system, it is ensured that the nominal
service life will only be achieved clearly after achievement of the service life of the grease
in the bearings.
– The roller bearing service life under full specified load is at least 20 000 hours for
machines subject to radial or axial forces.
– The nominal roller bearing service life of machines which are not subject to any forces
is at least 40 000 hours.
● For roller bearings with external oil supply, monitor that lubrication is maintained.
9.1.8 Maintenance
9.1.8.1 Explosion protection for machines with type of protection "Ex d"
For explosion-protected motors with type of protection "flameproof enclosure" according to
IEC / EN 60079–0 and IEC / EN 60079–1, observe the following:
It is not permissible to subsequently machine or paint contact and mating surfaces of the parts
listed below:
● Stator frame
● End shields
● Bearing covers
● Motor shaft
● Gland plate
● Terminal box base
● Terminal box cover
● Gland plates for additional terminal boxes, where present
Keep these surfaces clean and protect them against corrosion by applying a thin coating of
grease. It is not permissible that any seals are fitted between the surfaces that guarantee that
flame is not transmitted.

Maintenance
9.1.8.2 Explosion hazard due to increased surface temperature
WARNING
Explosion hazard
Components within the motor may be hotter than the maximum permissible surface
temperature for the enclosure. In an explosive atmosphere, dust can ignite and an explosion
● Do not open the motor in an explosive and dusty atmosphere when it is still at normal
9.1.8.3 Insulation resistance and polarization index

9.1.8.4 Regreasing intervals and types of grease for operating rolling-contact bearings
Regreasing intervals
The regreasing intervals for roller bearings in operating hours and the grease types are stated
on the machine's lubricant plate. Regardless of the actual number of operating hours reached,

Maintenance
the machine must be regreased at least once a year. The lubrication information can be found
on the lubricant plate.
Note
Observe the regreasing intervals for the roller bearings
The regreasing intervals for roller bearings are different from the service/inspection intervals
for the machine. Failure to regrease the roller bearings at the specified intervals can result
in bearing damage.
Regreasing
The spent grease chamber is designed to accommodate the spent grease for a computed,
rated service life of 40000 operating hours.
● Clean the grease nipples before regreasing and then gradually press in an appropriate type
and amount of grease, as described on the lubricant plate. The shaft must then be rotated
so that the new grease can be distributed throughout the roller bearing. The roller bearing
temperature rises sharply at first, then drops to the normal value again after the excess
grease has been displaced out of the bearing.
– If the machine is fitted with grease removal sliders :
After the bearings have been regreased, with the motor running, the used grease should
be removed by pulling the slider fitted to the bearing to its stop several times.
– If the machine is fitted with grease collection chambers :
Unbolt the grease collection chambers at the intervals shown on the notice plate with
the motor stopped, and remove the used bearing grease. If this is not done, the grease
will clog and the bearings will overheat.
WARNING
Rotor can fall out
If the machine is in a vertical position, the rotor can fall out while work is being
performed on the locating bearing. This can result in death, serious injury or material
damage.
Support or relieve the rotor when carrying out work with the machine in a vertical
position.
Grease types
For the standard operating range, a grease for temperatures down to ‑20 °C is normally used
for the initial greasing of roller bearings. If the machine has been ordered for use in the

Maintenance
extended temperature range of below ‑20 °C, the permissible type of grease is indicated on
the lubricant plate.
Note
Grease quantity control
The grease quantity control only operates correctly if the specified greases are used. This is
specified on plates attached to the machine.
9.1.8.5 Alternative types of grease for the operation of roller bearings
In the following table, you will find a list of approved alternative types of grease.
Filling with oil for the first time Alternative permissible greases
Shell Gadus S2 V100 3 Aral Aralub HL3
BP Energrease LS3
Castrol Optimol Olista Longtime 3
Exxon Mobil Beacon EP3
EP
Mobilux EP3
OMV Signum L3
SKF LGMT 3
Shell Gadusrail S4 HS EUDB Currently no comparable grease with Dm*n≥1,000,000 is known.
(dt. Bezeichnung)
Shell Gadus S5 V42P 2.5(int.
Bezeichung)
Shell Gadus S5 V100 2 Exxon Mobil Mobilith SHC 100
Esso Unirex N3 Exxon Mobil Mobilgrease XHP 103
Shell Gadus S5 V100 2
Shell Gadus S3 T100 2 BP Energrease SY2202
Castrol Firetemp XT2
Chevron Grease SRI2
Klüber Petamo GHY 133N
SKF LGHP 2
Exxon Mobil Polyrex EM
Observe the following when changing over to an alternative type of grease that is permitted according
to the table:
Bearings with permanent lubrication:

● Completely remove the old grease from the bearing before regreasing it.
● Fill roller bearings completely with grease and cavities in the bearing cover only up to one
third.

Maintenance
Bearings with regreasing:

If complete replacement of grease and cleaning of the bearing is not possible, keep the
operating time to a minimum when different greases are mixed. To do this, thoroughly grease
the bearing when the machine is running with about twice the amount of grease until spent
grease has been removed from the greasing ducts. Then regrease 4x at intervals of ¼ of the
normal greasing interval. During this time, very carefully monitor the bearing locations involved.
Then resume the normal greasing intervals.
NOTICE
Damage due to mixing grease types
If you mix greases and oils with different soap or oil bases, then the lubricating properties
may no longer be guaranteed.
Mixing low-temperature grease with normal temperature grease can cause lumps to form in
the lubricant. The consequence can be damage to the roller bearings due to overheating.
Never mix greases that have different thickening agents and different base oils.
9.1.8.6 Cleaning the cooling air passages

● Regularly clean the cooling air passages through which the ambient air flows, e.g. using
dry compressed air.
NOTICE
Cleaning intervals depend on the degree of fouling
The frequency of the cleaning intervals depends on the local degree of fouling. The
machine will overheat if the cooling air ducts are polluted and the cooling air cannot flow
without obstruction.
Regularly check for pollution, and clean the cooling air ducts through which the ambient
air flows.
9.1.8.7 Maintenance and repair for machines of protection type "Ex d"
The machine marking based on IEC / EN 60079–0 was added with the "X" symbol.
Maintain the special conditions for repairs. The gap dimensions for the electric machine do not
comply with the standardized values in IEC / EN 60079–1. For repair work, obtain the gap
dimensions of the electrical machine from the manufacturer.
Perform maintenance, repair and modification work on explosion-protected machines in strict
compliance with the corresponding national health and safety legislation, the safety
instructions and descriptions in the general maintenance instructions.

Maintenance
Work influencing explosion protection must be carried out by the manufacturer or by a specialist
workshop for electrical machinery authorized by the manufacturer. This includes the following
operations, for example:
● Repairs to the stator or rotor windings and to the terminals
● Repairs to the ventilation system
● Repairs to the bearings
● Dismantling machines with flameproof enclosures
● Connection work carried out in the terminal box
The operations must be identified by an additional repair plate carrying the following
information:
● Date
● Company carrying out repair
● Type of repair
● Reference number of the repair technician regarding repair work
Testing after repair shall be carried out in accordance with EU directives.
DANGER
Gap dimensions
Changing ignition gap geometries (gap dimensions) as part of repair work according to the
minimum specifications of IEC / EN 60079–1 is not permissible.
Obtain the gap dimensions of the electrical machine from the manufacturer for the repair or
restoration of ignition gap geometries.
WARNING
Rotating or live parts
Live electrical parts are dangerous. Contact with them can cause death, serious injury or
material damage.
Before carrying out any maintenance work on the external fan, disconnect it from the mains,
particularly before opening the terminal box. Make sure that the device cannot be switched
back on.

Maintenance
Servicing the external fan

The external fan is essentially maintenance-free. However, dirt and dust deposits on the
impeller and the motor, particularly in the gap between the impeller and the inlet nozzle can
impair its function.
● Remove the dirt and dust deposits regularly; the intervals depend on how dirty the
surrounding area is.
● Make sure that the impeller is evenly cleaned, as irregular deposits can lead to an
imbalance.
Note
Flowrate
The full flowrate is only achieved if the inward flow of air to the impeller is unrestricted.
Servicing the external fan motor

● Perform an occasional visual inspection of the external fan motor and check it electrically
and mechanically every time the roller bearings are replaced.
● Replace permanently lubricated roller bearings in the external fan motor as specified in the
operating instructions for the external fan motor.
9.1.8.8 Maintaining terminal boxes
Requirement
The machine is de-energized.
Checking the terminal box

● Terminal boxes must be regularly checked for tightness, undamaged insulation, and tight
terminal connections.
● If dust or humidity have infiltrated the terminal box, this should be cleaned and dried
(particularly the insulators).
Check all the seals and sealing surfaces and address the cause of the leakiness.
● Check the insulators, connectors and cable connections in the terminal box.
● Replace the damaged components if necessary.
WARNING
Short-circuit hazard
Damaged components can cause short circuits, possibly resulting in death, serious
injuries and property damage.
Replace damaged components.

Maintenance
9.1.8.9 Touch up any damaged paintwork

If the paint is damaged, it must be repaired in order to protect the unit against corrosion.
Note
Paint system
Contact the Service Center (Page 109) before you repair any paint damage. They will provide
you with more information about the correct paint system and methods of repairing paint
damage.
Complete overpainting
The paint applied must conform to the requirements to avoid electrostatic charging. See
DIN EN 60079-0. The repair of painted surfaces of the non-conductive paint coating up to a
nominal coating thickness of 350 μm was investigated and is acceptable.
9.1.8.10 Repainting
WARNING
Repainting explosion-proof motors
The paint coat can become electrostatically charged where there is a thick coat. Electrostatic
discharges can occur. There is a risk of explosion if potentially explosive mixtures are also
present at this moment. This can result in death, serious injury or material damage.
You must comply with one of the following requirements when you repaint painted surfaces:
● Limit the total paint coating thickness according to the explosion protection group:
– IIB: Total paint coating thickness ≤ 2 mm
– IIC: Total paint coating thickness ≤ 0.75 mm for motors of group II (gas)
– III: Total paint coating thickness ≤ 0.45 mm for group III motors (dust)
According to tests, paint repair work up to the total paint coating thickness of the non-
conductive paint coating listed has also been examined and is harmless.
● Limit the surface resistance of the paint used:
– IIB, IIC, III: Surface resistance ≤ 1 GΩ for motors of groups II and III (gas and dust)
● Breakdown voltage ≤ 4 kV for explosion group III (dust only)

Maintenance
9.2 Corrective Maintenance
● Charge transfer limit:

– IIB: Limit value for the largest transferred charge < 30 nC
– IIC: Limit value for the largest transferred charge < 10 nC for group II motors (gas)
– III: Limit value for the largest transferred charge < 200 nC for group III motors (dust)
● Incapability, dangerous charge to be saved:
– IIB: Limit value for the maximum capacity ≤ 15 pF
– IIC: Limit value for the maximum capacity ≤ 5 pF for group II motors (gas)
– III: Limit value for the maximum capacity ≤ 10 pF for group III motors (dust)
Note
If the motor has to be transported, please observe the information and instructions in the
"Transport" section.
9.2.1 Extended motor marking

The machine marking based on IEC / EN 60079–0 was added with the "X" symbol.
Maintain the special conditions for repairs. The gap dimensions for the electric machine do not
comply with the standardized values in IEC / EN 60079–1. For repair work, obtain the gap
dimensions of the electrical machine from the manufacturer.
Perform maintenance, repair and modification work on explosion-protected machines in strict
compliance with the corresponding national health and safety legislation, the safety
instructions and descriptions in the general maintenance instructions.
Work influencing explosion protection must be carried out by the manufacturer or by a specialist
workshop for electrical machinery authorized by the manufacturer. This includes the following
operations, for example:
● Repairs to the stator or rotor windings and to the terminals
● Repairs to the ventilation system
● Repairs to the bearings
● Dismantling machines with flameproof enclosures
● Connection work carried out in the terminal box

Maintenance
The operations must be identified by an additional repair plate carrying the following
information:
● Date
● Company carrying out repair
● Type of repair
● Reference number of the repair technician regarding repair work
Testing after repair shall be carried out in accordance with EU directives.
DANGER
Gap dimensions
Changing ignition gap geometries (gap dimensions) as part of repair work according to the
minimum specifications of IEC / EN 60079–1 is not permissible.
Obtain the gap dimensions of the electrical machine from the manufacturer for the repair or
restoration of ignition gap geometries.
WARNING
Explosion hazard
Components within the motor may be hotter than the maximum permissible surface
temperature for the enclosure. In an explosive atmosphere, dust can ignite and an explosion
● Do not open the motor in an explosive and dusty atmosphere when it is still at normal
9.2.2 Assembling the rolling-contact bearings

● Extreme caution and attention to cleanliness are vital to installation. Observe the correct
assembly sequence of the components.
● Attach all components with the specified tightening torques.
Note
For further information about mounting the roller bearing, please refer to the catalog or
the information provided by the roller bearing manufacturer.

Maintenance
Procedure
1. Remove the required components and replace damaged components.
2. Remove any dirt from the components. Remove any grease and the remains of sealant or
liquid threadlocker.
3. Prepare the bearing journals:
– Lightly oil the inner ring seat.
– Grease the outer ring seat with solid lubricant such as the anti-fretting paste Altemp Q
NP 50.
4. Warm the roller bearing.
5. Push the inner ring of the warmed roller bearing onto the shaft. Avoid any blows that might
damage the bearing.
6. Make sure that the roller bearing is resting against the shaft shoulder or the second bearing.
Otherwise, axial vibrations may occur.
7. Fill the bearing to the top with the specified lubricating grease.
8. Warm the grease slinger and push it onto the shaft.
9. Locate the locking ring in the shaft groove or attach the bearing using the shaft nut.
10.Support the rotor for the installation of bearing housing or end shield.
11.Grease the bearing locations (bearing shield/bearing cartridge) with solid lubricant such as
the anti-fretting paste Altemp Q NP 50.
12.Use a suitable sealant when assembling.
13.Install the bearing shield or bearing housing together with the bearing shield.
14.Installed the outer bearing cover if one is being used.
15.Install the sealing elements:
V ring
Labyrinth sealing ring (special design)
See also
Tightening torques for screw and bolt connections (Page 111)
WARNING
Overheating of the rolling bearings
If the roller bearings are not regularly regreased, local overheating may be possible, and, as
a consequence, an explosion in an explosive atmosphere. This can result in death, serious
● Regrease the roller bearings regularly according to the lubrication plate.
● Implement bearing temperature monitoring if not yet in existence.

Maintenance

Spare Parts 10
10.1 Ordering data
When ordering spare parts, in addition to the precise designation of the spare part, specify the
motor type and the serial number of the motor. Ensure that the spare part designation matches
the designation in the spare part lists and add the associated part number.
Example:
Bearing shield, drive end (Part 105)
Machine type DNSL-450LN-02A
Serial number5154296
The machine type and serial number can be found on the rating plate data and in the technical
data. The serial number is also stamped on the end face of the shaft extension at the drive
end.
Terminal box
If several terminal boxes are mounted on the machine, please also indicate the type
designation of the terminal box in addition to details of part designation and part number
according to the legend, as well as type and serial number of the motor when ordering spare
parts.
Example
● Terminal box type
● Terminal box cover (part 20.30 )
● Serial number of the motor
● Machine type
Rolling-contact bearings
When ordering roller bearings, in addition to the bearing identification code, the supplementary
specifying code is also necessary for the bearing version. Both of these codes are stamped
on the lubricant plate and specified in the motor documentation, or can also be taken from the
installed bearings.
If roller-contact bearings with an insulated design are installed, use roller bearings of the same
type as spare parts. This will prevent any bearing damage being caused by bearing currents.

Spare Parts
10.2 Anti-condensation heating
WARNING
Risk of explosion
If you use parts other than the original spare parts, the type of protection can no longer be
guaranteed. This can result in an explosion during operation in a potentially explosive
gaseous atmosphere. This can result in death, serious injury or material damage.
● Use only original spare parts for explosion-proof machines; this also applies to
components such as seals, terminals, cables and cable entries. Should you have any
questions, please contact the Service Center .
● Commercially available equivalent standard parts such as screws may be used.
10.2 Anti-condensation heating
WARNING
Risk of explosion
If repairs to the anti-condensation heating are not carried out correctly, e.g. if unauthorized
or untested spare parts are used, this can result in explosions during operation in a potentially
explosive gaseous atmosphere. This can result in death, serious injury or material
damage.
Repairing and mounting the anti-condensation heating and the subsequent routine testing
must always be undertaken by experts from the Service Center, because this work requires
extensive specialist knowledge. Only authorized and tested spare parts may be used.

Disposal 11
11.1 Introduction
Protecting the environment and preserving its resources are corporate goals of the highest
priority for us. Our worldwide environmental management system to ISO 14001 ensures
compliance with legislation and sets high standards in this regard. Environmentally friendly
design, technical safety and health protection are always firm goals even at the product
development stage.
Recommendations for the environmentally friendly disposal of the machine and its components
are given in the following section. Be sure to comply with local disposal regulations.
11.2 National statutory regulations
Note
Observe national statutory regulations
When disposing of the machine or of waste that is created during the individual phases of
the life cycle, please observe the statutory requirements that apply in the country of use.
11.3 Preparing for disassembly

Disassembly of the machine must be carried out and/or supervised by qualified personnel with
appropriate expert knowledge.
1. Contact a certified waste disposal organization in your vicinity. Clarify what is expected in
terms of the quality of dismantling the machine and provision of the components.
2. Follow the five safety rules.
3. Disconnect all electrical connections and remove all cables.
4. Remove all liquids such as oil and cooling liquids. Collect the liquids separately and dispose
of them in a professional manner.
5. Detach the machine fixings.
6. Transport the machine to a suitable location for disassembly.

Disposal
11.5 Disposal of components
11.4 Dismantling the machine

Dismantle the machine using the general procedures commonly used in mechanical
engineering.
WARNING
Machine parts can fall
The machine is made up of heavy parts. These parts are liable to fall during dismantling. This
can result in death, serious injury or material damage.
Before you release any machine parts, secure them so that they cannot fall.
Components
The machines consist mainly of steel and various proportions of copper and aluminum. Metals
are generally considered to be unlimitedly recyclable.
Sort the components for recycling according to whether they are:
● Iron and steel
● Aluminum
● Non-ferrous metal, e.g. windings
The winding insulation is incinerated during copper recycling.
● Insulating materials
● Cables and wires
● Electronic waste
Process materials and chemicals

Sort the process materials and chemicals for recycling according to whether they are for
example:
● Oil
● Grease
● Cleaning substances and solvents
● Paint residues
● Anti-corrosion agent
● Coolant additives such as inhibitors, antifreeze or biocides
Dispose of the separated components according to local regulations or via a specialist disposal
company. The same applies for cloths and cleaning substances which have been used while
working on the machine.

Disposal
Packaging material
● If necessary, contact a suitable specialist disposal company.
● Wooden packaging for sea transport consists of impregnated wood. Observe the local
regulations.
● The foil used for water-proof packaging is an aluminum composite foil. It can be recycled
thermally. Dirty foil must be disposed of via waste incineration.

Disposal

A.1 Siemens Service Center
Contact for further information

Details regarding the design of this electrical machine and the permissible operating conditions
are described in these operating instructions.
Service numbers
If you wish to request local field service or order spare parts, or if you require answers to
technical queries or any additional information, please contact the relevant service number
below.
Please have the following machine data ready:
● Machine type
● Machine number
You can find this data on the rating plate of the machine.
Table A-1 Service numbers
Local field service Phone+49 (0)911 895

+49 7444 895 7
(0)911
Fax +49 (0)911 895 7445
7
Technical queries or additional Phone+49 (0)911 895
+49 7448 895 7
(0)911
information Fax +49 (0)911 895 7
7449
Spare parts and repairs Phone+49 (0)911 895
+49 7222 895 7
(0)911
Fax +49 (0)911 895 7223
7
Contact:
● http://www.siemens.com/automation/support-request (http://www.siemens.com/
automation/support-request)
● ld-service.i-cs@siemens.com (mailto:ld-service.i-cs@siemens.com)
A.2 RoHS - restricting the use of certain hazardous substances

In compliance with RoHS ("Restriction of certain Hazardous Substances" ) we replace
substances that are damaging to the environment by those that are not based on state-of-the-
art technology. In doing so, safety in operation and handling will take priority at all times.

Service and Support
A.2 RoHS - restricting the use of certain hazardous substances

Technical data and drawings B
B.1 Tightening torques for screw and bolt connections
Bolt locking devices
● Refit nuts or bolts that are mounted together with locking, resilient, and/or force-distributing
elements with identical, fully-functional elements when re-assembling. Always renew keyed
elements.
● When screwing together threads secured with a liquid adhesive, use a suitable medium
such as Loctite 243.
● Always use suitable securing devices or removable adhesives (e.g., Loctite 243) when
installing fixing bolts with a clamping length of less than 25 mm. The clamping length is
taken as the distance between the head of the bolt and the point at which the bolt is screwed
in.
Tightening torques
The bolted connections with metal contact surfaces, such as end shields, bearing cartridge
parts, terminal box parts bolted onto the stator frame, should be tightened to the following
torques, depending on the thread size:
Table B-1 Tightening torques for bolted connections with a tolerance of ±10%.
Case M4 M5 M6 M8 M10 M12 M16 M20 M24 M30 M36 M42 M48 M56
A 1.2 2.5 4 8 13 20 40 52 80 150 - - - - Nm
B 1.3 2.6 4.5 11 22 38 92 180 310 620 1080 1700 2600 4200 Nm
C 3 5 8 20 40 70 170 340 600 1200 2000 3100 4700 7500 Nm
Applications
The above-mentioned tightening torques apply for the following applications:

Technical data and drawings
B.1 Tightening torques for screw and bolt connections
● Case A
Applies to electrical connections in which the permissible torque is normally limited by the
bolt materials and/or the current carrying capacity of the insulators, with the exception of
the busbar connections in case B.
● Case B
Applies to bolts screwed into components made from materials with lower property class
(e. g. aluminum) and to bolts with property class 8.8 according to ISO 898-1.
● Case C
Applies to bolts with property class 8.8 or A4-70 according to ISO 898-1, however only to
bolts screwed into components made from materials with higher property class, e.g. cast
iron, steel or cast steel.
Note
Non-standard tightening torques
Different tightening torques for electrical connections and bolted connections for parts with
flat seals or insulating parts are specified in the relevant sections and drawings.

Quality documents C
C.1 Declaration of incorporation of partly completed machinery

Quality documents

Quality documents
Industry
Übersetzungen der Originalsprachversion / Translations of the Original language version

English
Declaration of incorporation of partly completed machinery
(in accordance with Annex II, Part 1, Section B of EC Directive 2006/42/EC Machinery Directive)
Manufacturer: Siemens AG
Address: Hans-Loher-Straße 32
94099 Ruhstorf a. d. Rott, Germany
Product denomination: The product name can be found on page1 of the document, underneath the address.
For the product denominated above, we confirm the following:

- The application and observance of the following specified health and safety requirements according to
Annex I of Directive 2006/42/EC, see page 1.
- Compilation of the relevant technical documentation in accordance with Annex VII, Section B of
Directive 2006/42/EC
We herewith engage to ensure that the person named below is authorized to compile the relevant technical
documentation and to present it on duly reasoned request to the relevant national authorities when necessary.
Name: see page 1
Address: see page 1
Form of presentation: see page 1
The product denominated above is exclusively intended for incorporation into a machine. Commissioning of the
partly completed machine shall be prohibited until an EC Declaration of Conformity to Directive 2006/42 EC,
Annex II, Part 1, Section A for a machine is available.
We confirm that the above-mentioned product is in conformity with the following standards:
DIN EN ISO 12100 (Output date 2011-03-01)
DIN EN 60204-1 (Output date 2007-06-01)
DIN EN 60204-11 (Output date 2001-05-01)
This declaration certifies the conformance with the directives specified, but is no guarantee of quality or
guarantee of durability in accordance with Section 443 of the German Civil Code (BGB).
The safety instructions of the product documentation supplied must be complied with.
The signatures of the authorized persons can be seen on page 1 of the document.
I DT LD AP LO Einbauerklärung-Rev5 Seite 2 von 15

Quality documents
Industry
Französisch
Déclaration d'incorporation d'une quasi-machine
(selon Annexe II, Partie 1, Paragraphe B de la Directive Européenne 2006/42/CE relative aux machines)
Fabricant : Siemens AG
Adresse : Hans-Loher-Straße 32
La désignation du produit se trouve en page 1 du document, en dessous de l'adresse.
Pour le produit désigné, nous certifions ce qui suit :
- L'application et le respect des prescriptions en matière de sécurité et de protection des personnes mentionnées ci-
dessous selon Annexe I de la Directive 2006/42/CE, see Page 1.
- L'établissement de la documentation technique pertinente conformément à l'Annexe VII, Paragraphe B de la
Directive 2006/42/CE
Nous déclarons par la présente que la personne désignée est habilitée à constituer la documentation technique pertinente et
à la remettre aux autorités nationales compétentes sur demande dûment motivée.
Le produit désigné est exclusivement conçu pour l'incorporation dans une machine. La mise en service de la quasi machine
est interdite tant que la déclaration CE de conformité à la Directive 2006/42/CE, Annexe II, Partie I, Paragraphe A n'est pas
présente.
Nous confirmons la conformité du produit susmentionné aves les normes suivantes : voir page 1.
La présente déclaration atteste la conformité aux directives mentionnées, mais ne saurait tenir lieu de garantie de propriétés
ni degarantie de durabilité au sens du paragraphe §443 BGB du code civil allemand.
Respecter les consignes de sécurité figurant dans la documentation produit fournie.
Les signatures des personnes habilitées sont en page 1 du document.
Spanisch
Declaración de incorporación de una cuasi máquina
(según anexo II, parte 1, sección B de la Directiva 2006/42/CE (directiva relativa a máquinas)
Fabricante: Siemens AG
Dirección: Hans-Loher-Straße 32
El nombre del producto puede leerse en la página 1 del documento, debajo de la dirección.
Por la presente certificamos lo siguiente para el producto mencionado:
- La aplicación y respeto de los requisitos de seguridad y salud contemplados en el anexo I de la Directiva
2006/42/CE que se indican seguidamente, see Page 1
- La elaboración de la documentación técnica pertinente según el anexo VII, sección B de la Directiva 2006/42/CE
Por la presente confirmamos que la persona que se indica a continuación está facultada para elaborar la documentación
técnica pertinente y transmitirla a las autoridades nacionales cuando éstas lo soliciten con la debida justificación.

Quality documents
Industry
El producto mencionado está destinado exclusivamente para su incorporación en una máquina. Se prohíbe la puesta en
servicio de una cuasi máquina hasta que se presente una declaración de conformidad CE con la Directiva 2006/42/CE,
anexo II, parte 1, sección A de la máquina final en la cual vaya a ser incorporada.
Por la presente confirmamos la conformidad del producto arriba indicado con las normas: ver página 1.
La presente declaración certifica los requisitos de las mencionadas directivas que se han aplicado y cumplido, pero no
representa una garantía de propiedad o durabilidad según el §443 del Código Civil alemán.
Es necesario respetar las consignas e instrucciones de seguridad que figuran en la documentación que
acompaña al producto.
Las firmas de las personas autorizadas pueden verse en la página 1 del documento.
Italienisch
Dichiarazione di incorporazione di quasi-macchine
(sec. Allegato II, Parte 1, Sezione B della Direttiva CE 2006/42/EG Direttiva Macchine)
Fabbricante: Siemens AG
Indirizzo: Hans-Loher-Straße 32
La denominazione del prodotto è riportata a pagina 1 del documento, sotto l'indirizzo.

In riferimento al prodotto indicato si dichiara quanto segue:
- Applicazione ed osservanza dei requisiti essenziali di sicurezza e di tutela della salute citati di seguito secondo
l'Allegato I della Direttiva 2006/42/CE, see Page 1.
- La documentazione tecnica specifica pertinente è stata compilata secondo quanto prescritto nell’Allegato VII,
Sezione B della Direttiva 2006/42/EG.
Con la presente ci assumiamo l’impegno di conferire alla persona nominata qui di seguito l’autorizzazione a compilare la
documentazione tecnica pertinente e di trasmetterla su richiesta adeguatamente motivata alle singole autorità nazionali.
Il prodotto indicato è destinato esclusivamente all’incorporazione in una macchina finale. La messa in servizio
della quasi-macchina è vietata finché non è munita della dichiarazione di conformità CE alla Direttiva
2006/42/EG, Allegato II, Parte 1, Sezione A per macchine.
Con la presente confermiamo la conformità del prodotto sopra nominato con le norme seguenti: vedi pagina 1.
Questa dichiarazione certifica la conformità con le direttive indicate, ma non costituisce una garanzia di qualità
o di durata ai sensi dell’articolo 443 BGB (codice civile tedesco).
Vanno osservate le avvertenze di sicurezza contenute nella documentazione di prodotto allegata.
Le firme delle persone autorizzate sono riportate a pagina 1 del documento.

Quality documents
Industry
Schwedisch
Försäkran för inmontering av en ofullständig maskin
(enligt bilaga II, del 1, avsnitt B i EG-direktiv 2006/42/EG maskindirektiv)
Tillverkare: Siemens AG
Adress: Hans-Loher-Straße 32
Produktbeteckningen kan läsas på sida 1 i dokumentet under adressen.

För den märkta produkten intygar vi följande:
- Följande nämnda säkerhetsoch hälsoskyddskrav enligt bilaga I i direktivet 2006/42/EG tillämpas och uppfylls, see
Page 1.
- Upprättandet av de speciella tekniska dokumenten enligt bilaga VII, avsnitt B i direktiv 2006/42/EG
Härmed intygar vi att den i det följande nämnda personen är befullmäktigad att sammanställa de relevanta
speciella tekniska dokumenten och vid behov efter motiverad begäran förmedla dessa till platserna i de
enskilda länderna.
Den märkta produkten är uteslutande avsedd för inmontering i en maskin. Idrifttagandet av den ofullständiga maskinen är
förbjudet tills en EG-försäkran om överensstämmelse med direktivet 2006/42/EG, bilaga II, del 1, avsnitt A för en maskin
föreligger.
Vi försäkrar överensstämmelsen av den ovan nämnda produkten med standarderna: se sidan 1.
Denna försäkren intygar överensstämmelsen med de nämnda direktiven men är inte någon beskaffenhets- eller
hållbarhetsgaranti enligt §443 BGB.
Säkerhetsanvisningarna i den bifogade produktdokumentationen ska beaktas.
Underskrifterna för de befullmäktigade personerna finns på sida 1 i dokumentet.
Finnisch
Puolivalmisteiden liittämisvakuutus
(EY-konedirektiivin 2006/42/EY liitteen II osan B mukaan)
Valmistaja: Siemens AG
Osoite: Hans-Loher-Straße 32
Tuotenimi on asiakirjan sivulla 1 osoitteen alla.

Vakuutamme, että nimetty tuote:
- Seuraavassa mainittujen turvallisuus- ja terveysvaatimusten soveltaminen ja noudattaminen direktiivin 2006/42/EY
liitteen I mukaisesti, see Page 1.
- noudattaa direktiivin 2006/42/EY liitteen VII osassa B annettuja erityisten teknisten asiakirjojen laatimista koskevia
määräyksiä

Quality documents
Industry
Sitoudumme siihen, että jäljempänä mainittu henkilö on täysivaltainen laatimaan erityiset tekniset asiakirjat ja tarvittaessa
perustellusta pyynnöstä toimittamaan ne kansallisille viranomaisille.
Nimetty tuote on tarkoitettu vain koneeseen asennettavaksi. Epätäydellisen koneen käyttöönotto on kielletty
siihen asti kunnes koneella on direktiivin 2006/42/EY liitteen II osan 1 kappaleen A mukainen EY-
vaatimustenmukaisuusvakuutus.
Vakuutamme, että edellä mainittu tuote on seuraavien standardien mukainen: ks. sivu 1.
Tämä vakuutus todistaa tuotteen noudattavan mainittuja direktiivejä mutta ei anna takuita laadusta tai kestävyydestä (§443
BGB).
Tuotteen mukana tulevien asiakirjojen sisältämiä turvallisuusohjeita on noudatettava.
Valtuutettujen henkilöiden allekirjoitukset ovat asiakirjan sivulla 1.
Dänisch
Erklæring til montering af en ufuldstændig maskine
(iht. bilag II, del 1, afsnit B i EF-direktivet 2006/42/EF Maskindirektiv)
Producent: Siemens AG
Adresse: Hans-Loher-Straße 32
Produktbetegnelsen kann læses på side 1 i dokumentet under adressen.

Vi bekæfter følgende i forbindelse med det betegnede produkt:
- Anvendelse og overholdelse af efterfølgende nævnte sikkerheds- o gsundhedskrav iht. bilag I i direktivet
2006/42/EF, see Page 1.
- Oprettelse af speciel teknisk dokumentation iht. bilag VII, afsnit B i direktivet 2006/42/EG
Hermed forpligter via os til at give den efterfølgende nævnte person fuldmagt til at oprette relevant teknisk dokumentation og
i tilfælde af behov overdrage den til enkelte statslige myndigheder efter anmodning.
Det betegnede produkt er udelukkende beregnet til montering i en maskine. Ibrugtagning af den ufuldstændige maskine er
forbudt, indtil der foreligger en EF-overensstemmelseserklæring til direktivet 2006/42/EF, bilag II, del 1, afsnit A til en
maskine.
Vi bekræfter overensstemmelsen af den ovennævnte produkt med normerne: se side 1.
Denne erklæring attesterer overensstemmelsen med de nævnte direktiver men er dog ingen egenskabs- eller
holdbarhedsgaranti iht. §443 BGB.
Sikkerhedshenvisningerne i den medleverede produktdokumentation skal overholdes.
Underskriften fra de berettigede personer kan ses på side 1 i dokumentet.

Quality documents
Industry
Niederländisch
Verklaring inzake de inbouw van een onvolledige machine
(volgens bijlage II, Deel 1, lid B van de EG-richtlijn 2006/42/EG Machinerichtlijn)
Adres: Hans-Loher-Straße 32
De productbenaming staat vermeld op pagina 1 van het document, onder het adres.
Voor het vermelde product bevestigen wij het volgende:
- De toepassing en de naleving van de volgende genoemde vereisten inzake veiligheid en gezondheid volgens
Bijlage I van de Richtlijn 2006/42/EG, see Page 1.
- De opstelling van speciale technische documenten volgens Bijlage II, lid B van de Richtlijn 2006/42/EG.
Hiermee verbinden we ons ertoe dat de hierna vermelde persoon gemachtigd is om de relevante, speciale technische
documenten samen te stellen en om deze indien nodig op gemotiveerd verzoek aan de staatsinstanties te bezorgen.
Het vermelde product is uitsluitend voor de inbouw in een machine bedoeld. De inbedrijfstelling van de onvolledige machine
is verboden tot een EG-conformiteitsverklaring volgens de Richtlijn 2006/42/Eg, Bijlage II, Deel 1, hooofdstuk A voor een
machine voorhanden is.

Wij bevestigen de conformiteit van het hierboven genoemde product met de normen: zie pagina 1.
Deze verklaring bevestigt de overeenstemming met de genoemde richtlijnen, maar geeft

geen garantie betreffende de gesteldheid of een houdbaarheidsgarantie volgens § 443 van het BWB.
De veiligheidsaanwijzingen van de meegeleverde productdocumentatie moeten in acht worden genomen.
De handtekeningen van de geautoriseerde personen zijn te zien op pagina 1 van het document.
Portugiesisch
Declaração para a montagem de uma máquina incompleta
(conforme Anexo II, Parte 1, Ponto B da Directiva CE 2006/42/CE relativa a máquinas)
Fabricante: Siemens AG
Endereço: Hans-Loher-Straße 32
A designação do produto pode ser consultada na página 1 do documento, por baixo do endereço.
Relativamente ao produto designado atestamos o seguinte:
- A aplicação e observância dos seguintes requisitos impostos à segurança e saúde, em conformidade com o anexo
I da Directiva 2006/42/CE, see Page 1.
- Elaboração da documentação técnica específica em conformidade com o Anexo VII, ponto B da Directiva
2006/42/CE

Quality documents
Industry
Pela presente nos responsabilizamos que a pessoa em seguida designada possui plenos poderes para elaborar a
documentação técnica específica e relevante e, se necessário, para transmitir as mesmas às entidades dos Estados-
Membros, caso seja justificadamente solicitada.
O produto designado serve exclusivamente para montagem numa máquina. A colocação em funcionamento da máquina
permanece interdita, até ser apresentada uma declaração de conformidade CE relativa à Directiva 2006/42/CE, Anexo II,
Parte 1, Ponto A relativamente a uma máquina.

Atestamos a conformidade do produto acima designado com as normas: ver página 1.
A presente declaração certifica a conformidade com as directivas designadas, no entanto, não constitui uma garantia de
qualidade ou de validade nos termos do §443 do BGB (código civil alemão).
As indicações de segurança da documentação do produto juntamente fornecida têm de ser respeitadas.
As assinaturas das pessoas autorizadas encontram-se na página 1 do documento.
Griechisch
Δήλωση για την εγκατάσταση ενός ημιτελούς μηχανήματος
(σύμφωνα με το παράρτημα II, μέρος 1, ενότητα B της οδηγίας 2006/42/ΕΚ σχετικά με τα μηχανήματα)
Κατασκευαστής: Siemens AG
Διεύθυνση : Hans-Loher-Straße 32
Η ονομασία προϊόντος είναι διαθέσιμη στη σελίδα 1 του εγγράφου, κάτω από τη διεύθυνση.
Για το ως άνω αναφερόμενο προϊόν βεβαιώνουμε τα εξής:
- Η εφαρμογή και τήρηση των παρακάτω απαιτήσεων ασφάλειας και υγείας συμφωνεί με το παράρτημα I της
Οδηγίας 2006/42/ΕΚ, see Page 1.
- Σύνταξη της ειδικής τεχνικής τεκμηρίωσης σύμφωνα με το παράρτημα VII, μέρος B της οδηγίας 2006/42/ΕΚ
Δια της παρούσης βεβαιώνουμε ότι το παρακάτω άτομο είναι εξουσιοδοτημένο να καταρτίσει τον οικείο τεχνικό φάκελο και
αν χρειαστεί να τον διαβιβάσει, μετά από δεόντως αιτιολογημένο αίτημα των εθνικών αρχών.
Το αναφερόμενο προϊόν προορίζεται αποκλειστικά για εγκατάσταση σε ένα μηχάνημα. Η έναρξη λειτουργίας του ημιτελούς
μηχανήματος απαγορεύεται πριν την προσκόμιση δήλωσης συμμόρφωσης ΕΚ ως προς την οδηγία 2006/42/ΕΚ, παράρτημα
II, μέρος 1, ενότητα A για το μηχάνημα.
Βεβαιώνουμε τη συμμόρφωση του παραπάνω προϊόντος με τα πρότυπα: βλ. σελίδα 1.
Η δήλωση αυτή επιβεβαιώνει τη συμμόρφωση με τις αναφερθείσες οδηγίες, ωστόσο δεν αποτελεί εγγύηση για τις ιδιότητες
του προϊόντος ή
τη διάρκεια ζωής του σύμφωνα με το §443 BGB.
Τηρείτε τις οδηγίες ασφαλείας που αναφέρονται στη συνοδευτική τεκμηρίωση του προϊόντος.
Οι υπογραφές των εξουσιοδοτημένων ατόμων βρίσκονται στη σελίδα 1 του εγγράφου.

Quality documents
Industry
Polnisch
Deklaracja dotycząca wbudowania niekompletnej maszyny
(zgodnie z załącznikiem II, część 1, ustęp B Dyrektywy WE 2006/42/WE w sprawie maszyn)
Adres: Hans-Loher-Straße 32
Oznaczenie produktu należy odczytać ze strony 1 dokumentu, pod adresem.

Dla oznaczonego produktu potwierdzamy, co następuje:
- Zastosowanie i przestrzeganie niżej wymienionych wymagań w zakresie bezpieczeństwa i ochrony zdrowia zgodnie
z załącznikiem I dyrektywy 2006/42/WE, see page 1.
- Sporz ądzenie specjalnej dokumentacji technicznej zgodnie z załącznikiem VII, ustęp B Dyrektywy WE 2006/42/WE
Niniejszym zobowiązujemy się, że niżej wymieniona osoba upoważniona jest do zestawienia istotnej, specjalnej
dokumentacji technicznej i przekazania jej w razie potrzeby na uzasadnione żądanie instytucji poszczególnych państw.
Oznaczony wyrób przeznaczony jest wyłącznie do wbudowania w maszynie. Uruchomienie niekompletnej maszyny jest
zabronione do momentu przedłożenia dla maszyny Deklaracji zgodności WE do Dyrektywy 2006/42/WE, załącznik II, część
1, ustęp A.
Potwierdzamy zgodność wyżej wymienionego produktu z normami: patrz strona 1.
Niniejsza deklaracja potwierdza zgodność z wymienionymi dyrektywami, nie jest jednak gwarancją jakości lub trwałości
zgodnie z §443 niemieckiego kodeksu cywilnego (BGB).
Należy przestrzegać wskazówek dotyczących bezpieczeństwa zawartych w dostarczonej dokumentacji wyrobu.
Podpisy osób uprawnionych widoczne są na stronie 1 dokumentu.
Litauisch
Ne iki galo sukomplektuotos mašinos montavimo deklaracija
(pagal 2006/42/EB Mašinų direktyvos II priedo 1 dalies B skirsnį)
Gamintojas: Siemens AG
Adresas: Hans-Loher-Straße 32
Gaminio pavadinimą galima rasti 1-jame dokumento puslapyje po adresu.

Patvirtiname, kad šiam gaminiui:
-T oliau nurodytų saugos ir sveikatos reikalavimų pagal Direktyvos 2006/42/EB I priedą naudojimas ir laikymasis, see
Page1.
- buvo parengti specialūs techniniai dokumentai pagal 2006/42/EB direktyvos VII priedą B skirsnį.

Quality documents
Industry
Šiuo mes patvirtiname, kad toliau nurodytas asmuo yra įgaliotas parengti svarbius specialius techninius dokumentus ir,
prireikus, pagrįstu reikalavimu pateikti juos atskirų valstybių įstaigoms.
Nurodytas gaminys skirtas tik montuoti į mašiną. Ne iki galo sukomplektuotą mašiną draudžiama pradėti eksploatuoti tol, kol
mašinai nebus suteikta EB atitikties deklaracija pagal 2006/42/EB direktyvos II priedo 1 dalies A skirsnį.
Mes patvirtiname, kad pirmiau nurodytas gaminys atitinka šiuos standartus: žr. 1 psl.
Šia deklaracija patvirtinamas atitikimas nurodytoms direktyvoms, tačiau nėra kokybės arba tinkamumo naudoti garantija
pagal Vokietijos Civilinio kodekso (BGB) 443 str.
Būtina atkreipti dėmesį į saugos nuorodas, pateiktas pristatytoje gaminio dokumentacijoje.
Įgaliotųjų asmenų parašai matomi 1-ajame dokumento puslapyje.
Lettisch
Iekārtas sastāvdaļas iebūvēšanas deklarācija
(saskaņā ar EK Direktīvas 2006/42/EK par mašīnām II. pielikumu, 1. daļu, B punktu)
Ražotājs: Siemens AG
Adrese: Hans-Loher-Straße 32
Produkta nosaukums ir izlasāms dokumenta 1.lappusē, zem adreses.

Attiecībā uz minēto izstrādājumu mēs apliecinām, ka:
-Š ādu tālāk minēto drošības un veselības prasību piemērošana un ievērošana saskaņā ar Direktīvas 2006/42/EK I.
Pielikumu, see Page 1.
- ir ievērotas speciālās tehniskās dokumentācijas atbilstoši Direktīvas 2006/42/EK
VII. pielikumam, B punktam
Ar šo mēs apliecinām, ka zemāk minētā persona ir tiesīga sastādīt nepieciešamās speciālās tehniskās dokumentācijas un
vajadzības gadījumā pēc pamatota pieprasījuma nodot tās atsevišķām valsts institūcijām.
Norādītais izstrādājums ir paredzēts vienīgi iebūvēšanai citā iekārtā. Iekārtas sastāvdaļas ekspluatācijas sākšana ir aizliegta
tik ilgi, līdz ir pieejama visas iekārtas EK deklarācija atbilstoši Direktīvas 2006/42/EK II. pielikumam, 1. daļai, A punktam.
Mēs apliecinām augstāk minētā izstrādājuma atbilstību kvalitātes standartiem: skatīt 1. lpp.
Šī deklarācija apliecina atbilstību minētajām direktīvām, tomēr tā nav uzskatāma par aprakstīto īpašību vai derīguma termiņa
atbilstības garantiju atbilstoši Vācijas Civilkodeksa (BGB) 443. pantam.
Ievērot klāt pievienotajā izstrādājuma dokumentācijā sniegtās drošības norādes.
Pilnvaroto personu paraksti ir redzami dokumenta 1. lappusē.

Quality documents
Industry
Estnisch
Deklaratsioon mittetervikliku masina paigaldamise kohta
(EÜ direktiivi 2006/42/EÜ Masinate direktiiv lisa II, osa 1, lõigu B alusel)
Tootja: Siemens AG
Aadress: Hans-Loher-Straße 32
Tootenimetuse leiate käesoleva dokumendi leheküljelt 1, aadressi alt.

Me kinnitame nimetatud toote kohta alljärgnevat:
- Alljärgnevalt mainitud ohutus- ja tervisekaitsenõudeid rakendatakse ning järgitakse vastavalt direktiivi 2006/42/EÜ
lisale I, see Page 1.
- Direktiivi 2006/42/EÜ lisa VII, lõigu B alusel spetsiaalsete tehniliste dokumentide koostamist
Käesolevaga võtame endale kohustuse, et alljärgnevalt nimetatud isik on volitatud koostama olulise tähtsusega spetsiaalseid
tehnilisi dokumente ning neid põhjendatud nõudmise korral üksikute riikide ametkondadele edasi andma.
Nimetatud toode on ette nähtud eranditult masinasse paigaldamiseks. Mittetervikliku masina käikuvõtmine on keelatud seni,
kuni masina kohta on olemas direktiivi 2006/42/EÜ, lisa II, osa 1, lõigu A alusel EÜ vastavusdeklaratsioon.
Me kinnitame ülalnimetatud toote vastavust normidele: vt lk 1.

Käesolev deklaratsioon tõendab kooskõla nimetatud direktiividega, ei kujuta endast aga omadusi või vastupidavust
sätestavat garantiid §443 BGB (Saksa tsiviilseadustik) alusel.
Kaasapandud tootedokumentatsioonis äratoodud ohutusjuhistest tuleb kinni pidada.
Allkirjaõiguslike isikute allkirjad on toodud ära käesoleva dokumendi leheküljel 1.
Tschechisch
Prohlášení o zabudování neúplného strojního zařízení
(podle Přílohy II, část 1., odstavec B Směrnice o strojních zařízeních 2006/42/ES)
Výrobce: Siemens AG
Adresa: Hans-Loher-Straße 32
Označení výrobku je uvedeno v dokumentu na straně č. 1 pod adresou.

Pro uvedený výrobek potvrzujeme následující:
- Aplikace a dodržování níže uvedených požadavků na ochranu zdraví a bezpečnost podle Přílohy I směrnice
2006/42/ES, see Page 1.
- Sestavení zvláštní technické dokumentace podle Přílohy VII, odstavec B Směrnice 2006/42/ES

Quality documents
Industry
Tímto se zavazujeme, že níže uvedená osoba je zplnomocněna sestavovat relevantní zvláštní technickou dokumentaci a
v případě potřeby a na odůvodněnou žádost ji předat úřadům jednotlivých zemí.
Uvedený výrobek je určen výlučně k zabudování do strojního zařízení. Zprovoznění neúplného strojního zařízení je
zakázáno do té doby, dokud pro strojní zařízení nebude k dispozici ES prohlášení o shodě k Směrnici 2006/42/ES, Příloha
II, část 1., odstavec A.
Potvrzujeme shodu výše uvedeného výrobku s normami: viz strana č. 1.
Toto prohlášení osvědčuje shodu s uvedenými směrnicemi, neposkytuje však záruku na kvalitu a životnost podle §443
německého občanského zákoníku (BGB).
Nutno dodržovat bezpečnostní pokyny uvedené v dodané dokumentaci k výrobku.
Podpisy oprávněných osob v dokumentu jsou patrné ze strany č. 1.
Slowakisch
Prehlásenie o zabudovaní neúplného strojového zariadenia
(podľa Prílohy II, časť 1., odsek B Smernice o strojových zariadeniach 2006/42/ES)
Výrobca: Siemens AG
Označenie výrobku je uvedené v dokumente na strane č. 1 pod adresou.

Pre uvedený výrobok potvrdzujeme nasledovné:
- Aplikácia a dodržiavanie nižšie uvedených požiadaviek na ochranu zdravia a bezpečnosť podľa Prílohy I smernice
2006/42/ES, see Page 1.
- Zostavenie osobitnej technickej dokumentácie podľa Prílohy VII, odsek B Smernice 2006/42/ES
Týmto sa zaväzujeme, že nižšie uvedená osoba je splnomocnená zostavovať relevantnú osobitnú technickú dokumentáciu a
v prípade potreby a na základe odôvodnenej žiadosti ju odovzdať úradom jednotlivých krajín.
Uvedený výrobok je určený výlučne na zabudovanie do strojového zariadenia. Sprevádzkovanie neúplného strojového
zariadenia je zakázané do doby, kým pre strojové zariadenie nebude k dispozícii prehlásenie ES o zhode so Smernicou
2006/42/ES, Príloha II, časť 1., odsek A.
Potvrdzujeme zhodu hore uvedeného výrobku s normami: pozri strana č. 1.
Toto prehlásenie potvrdzuje zhodu s uvedenými smernicami, neposkytuje však záruku na kvalitu a životnosť podľa §443
nemeckého občianskeho zákonníka (BGB).
Je nevyhnutné dodržiavať bezpečnostné pokyny uvedené v dodanej dokumentácii k výrobku.
Podpisy oprávnených osôb v dokumente sú zrejmé zo strany č. 1.

Quality documents
Industry
Ungarisch
Nyilatkozat nem teljes gép beépítéséhez
(a gépekről szóló 2006/42/EK sz. EU-irányelv B fejezet, 1. rész, II. melléklete szerint)
Gyártó: Siemens AG
Cím: Hans-Loher-Straße 32
A termékmegnevezést a dokumentum 1. oldalán, a cím alatt olvassa el.

Nevezett termékkel kapcsolatban igazoljuk a következőket:
- Az alább megnevezett biztonsági- és egészségi követelmények alkalmazása és betartása a 2006/42/EK irányelv I.
melléklete szerint, see Page 1.
- A 2006/42/EK irányelv B fejezet, VII. melléklete szerinti speciális műszaki dokumentumok elkészítését
Ezúton kötelezettséget vállalunk arra, hogy az alább megnevezett személy fel van hatalmazva arra, hogy a fontos, speciális
műszaki dokumentumokat összeállítsa és szükség esetén, megalapozott kérésre az egyes állami helyeknek átadja.
A nevezett termék kizárólag egy gépbe történő beépítésre szolgál. A nem teljes gép üzembe helyezése mindaddig tilos, míg
a 2006/42/EK irányelv A fejezet, 1. rész, II. melléklet szerint az EK megfelelőségi nyilatkozat egy gépre rendelkezésre nem
áll.
Ezennel kijelentjük, hogy a fent nevezett termék megfelel a következő szabványoknak: lásd az
1. oldalt.
Ez a nyilatkozat tanúsítja a nevezett irányelveknek való megfelelőséget, de semmilyen minőségi- vagy tartóssági garanciát
nem jelent a Német Polgári Törvénykönyv (BGB) §443-a szerint.
A csatolt termékdokumentációban szereplő biztonsági utasításokat figyelembe kell venni.
A jogosult személyek aláírásai a dokumentum 1. oldalán láthatók.
Slowenisch
Izjava za vgradnjo nepopolnega stroja
(v skladu z dodatkom II, del 1, poglavje B ES-direktive za stroje 2006/42/ES)
Proizvajalec: Siemens AG
Naslov: Hans-Loher-Straße 32
Oznako proizvoda je treba razbrati na strani 1 dokumenta, pod naslovom.

Za označeni proizvod potrjujemo naslednje:
- Uporaba in upoštevanje naslednjih navedenih varnostnih in zdravstvenih zahtev v skladu z dodatkom I Direktive
2006/42/ES, see Page 1.
- Izdelavo specialne tehnične dokumentacije v skladu z dodatkom VII, poglavje B Direktive 2006/42/ES

Quality documents
Industry
S tem v zvezi se zavezujemo, da je v nadaljevanju navedena oseba pooblaščena za sestavljanje relevantne specialne
tehnične dokumentacije in po potrebi za prenos ustreznih zahtev na mesta posameznih držav.
Opisani proizvod je predviden izključno za vgradnjo na stroj. Zagon nepopolnega stroja je prepovedan tako dolgo, dokler ni
predložena ES izjava o skladnosti z direktivo 2006/42/ES, dodatek II, del 1, poglavje A za stroj.
Potrjujemo skladnost zgoraj navedenega proizvoda s standardi: glej stran 1.
Ta izjava potrjuje skladnost z navedenimi direktivami, vendar pa ni garancija za samo sestavo ali garancija za vsebnost v
skladu z §443 BGB (nemški civilni zakonik).

Treba je upoštevati varnostna opozorila priložene dokumentacije proizvoda.
Podpisi pooblaščenih oseb so razvidni iz strani 1 dokumenta.
Rumänisch
Declaraţie de încorporare a unei maşini incomplete
(conform Anexei II, Partea 1, Secţiunea B din Directiva CE referitoare la maşini 2006/42/CE)
Producător: Siemens AG
Descrierea produsului este prezentată pe pagina 1 a documentului, sub adresă.

În legătură cu produsul menţionat confirmăm următoarele:
- Utilizarea şi respectarea normelor de siguranţă şi sănătate specificate în continuare, conform anexei I din Directiva
2006/42/CE, see page 1.
- Elaborarea documentaţiei tehnice speciale conform Anexei VII, Secţiunea B din Directiva 2006/42/CE
Prin prezenta ne angajăm să împuternicim persoana numită în continuare cu elaborarea documentaţiei tehnice speciale şi,
dacă este necesar, transmiterea acesteia la cererea îndreptăţită a autorităţilor naţionale.
Produsul menţionat este destinat exclusiv pentru încorporarea într-o maşină. Punerea în funcţiune a maşinii incomplete este
interzisă atâta timp cât nu există o Declaraţie de conformitate CE conform Directivei 2006/42/CE, Anexa II, Partea 1,
Secţiunea A pentru maşina respectivă.
Confirmăm conformitatea produsului mai sus menţionat cu următoarele norme: vezi pagina 1.
Această declaraţie atestă conformitatea cu directivele menţionate, însă nu reprezintă o garanţie a caracteristicilor sau
durabilităţii, în conformitate cu art. 443 din Codul Civil German (BGB).
Trebuie respectate indicaţiile de siguranţă din documentaţia livrată cu produsul.
Semnăturile persoanelor autorizate apar pe pagina 1 a documentului.

Quality documents
Industry
Bulgarisch
Декларация за монтаж в една неокомплектована машина
(съгласно приложение II, част 1, раздел B на EО-директива 2006/42/EО Директива за машините)
Производител: Siemens AG
Адрес: Hans-Loher-Straße 32
Обозначението на продукта може да се прочете на страница 1 на документа, под адреса.

За обозначения продукт ние потвърждаваме следното:
- Прилагането и спазването на посочените по-долу изисквания за безопасност и опазване на здравето
съгласно приложение I на директива 2006/42/EО, see page 1.
- Изготвянето на специална техническа документация съгласно приложение VII, раздел B на EО-директива
2006/42/EО
С настоящето се задължаваме, че посоченото по-долу лице е упълномощено да състави релевантните специални

технически документации и в случай на нужда при обосновано поискване да ги представи на службите в
съответните държави.
Обозначеният продукт е предназначен изключително за монтаж в машина. Пускането в експлоатация на
неокомплектованата машина е забранено, докато не е налице EО-декларация за съответствие към директива

2006/42/EО, приложение II, част 1, раздел A за машината.
Ние потвърждаваме съответствието на горепосочените продукти със стандартите: виж страница 1.
Тази декларация удостоверява съответствието с посочените директиви, но не е гаранция за характеристиката на

продукта или гаранция за трайност съгласно §443 от немския гражданско процесуален кодекс (BGB).
Трябва да се спазват указанията за безопасност от доставената документация на продукта.
Подписите на упълномощените лица се виждат на страница 1 на документа.

Quality documents
C.2 EC Declaration of Conformity

Quality documents
Anlage zur EG Konformitätserklärung

Druckfeste Kapselung „d”
Appendix to EC Declaration of Conformity
Flameproof Enclosure “d”
Gerät EG-Baumusterprüf- Gasgruppe Temperatur-

Equipment bescheinigung gas group klasse
Typ Alternativer Typ Lagerung EC-Type Examination temperature
IIB IIC
type alternative type bearing Certificate class
PTB 10 ATEX 1007 X x T3 - T6
1PS*07*-*****-****
D***-071**-** anti-friction BVS 11 ATEX E 053 X x x T3 - T6
1MD*07*-*****-****
BVS 13 ATEX E 129 X x x T3 - T6
PTB 09 ATEX 1091 X x T3 - T6
1PS*08*-*****-****
1MD*08*-*****-****
PTB 08 ATEX 1021 X x T3 - T6
1PS*09*-*****-****
1MD*09*-*****-****
_
PTB 09 ATEX 1087 X x T3 - T6
1PS*10*-*****-****
1MD*10*-*****-****
PTB 08 ATEX 1123 X x T3 - T6
1PS*11*-*****-****
1MD*11*-*****-****
PTB 08 ATEX 1119 X x T3 - T6
1PS*13*-*****-****
1MD*13*-*****-****
PTB 08 ATEX 1103 X x T3 - T6
1PS*16*-*****-****
1MD*16*-*****-****
PTB 09 ATEX 1044 X x T3 - T6
1PS*18*-*****-****
1MD*18*-*****-****
PTB 08 ATEX 1054 X x T3 - T6
1PS*20*-*****-****
1MD*20*-*****-****
PTB 08 ATEX 1107 X x T3 - T6
1PS*22*-*****-****
1MD*22*-*****-****
PTB 09 ATEX 1046 X x T3 - T6
1PS*25*-*****-****
1MD*25*-*****-****
PTB 09 ATEX 1070 X x T3 - T6
1PS*28*-*****-****
1MD*28*-*****-****
PTB 08 ATEX 1037 X x T3 - T6
1PS*31*-*****-****
1MD*31*-*****-****
DJS*-315**-** 1PS*31*-*****-**** anti-friction BVS 12 ATEX E 077 X x x T3 - T6
Rev. Q-1
Seite 2 von 3

Quality documents

Druckfeste Kapselung „d”
Flameproof Enclosure “d”
Gerät EG-Baum usterpr üf- Gasgru ppe Temp erat ur-

Equi pme nt besch eini gung gas gr oup klasse
Typ Alterna tive r Typ Lager ung EC-Type E xam inat ion temperatur e
IIB IIC
type alterna tive t ype bear ing Certifica te class
PTB 08 A TEX 1077 X x T3 - T6
PTB 08 A TEX 1078 X x T3 - T6
D*** -355**- ** 1PS*35*-***** -*** * anti-friction PTB 08 A TEX 1079 X x T3 - T6
BVS 11 AT EX E 003 X x x T3 - T6
PTB 07 A TEX 1060 X x T3 - T6
D*** -400**- ** 1PS*40*-***** -*** * anti-friction PTB 07 A TEX 1047 X x T3 - T6
_ D*T*-40 0* *-**
1PS 440*- *****-**** sleeve BVS 11 AT EX E 029 X x T3 - T6
D*V*-40 0** -**
PTB 07 A TEX 1068 X x T3 - T6
D*** -450**- ** 1PS*45*-***** -*** * anti-friction
D*T*-45 0* *-**
1PS 445*- *****-**** sleeve BVS 11 AT EX E 067 X x T3 - T6
D*V*-45 0** -**
PTB 08 A TEX 1035 X x T3 - T6
PTB 08 A TEX 1036 X x T3 - T6
D*T*-500 **-** PTB 07 A TEX 1074 X x T3 - T6
1PS*50*-***** -*** * sleeve
D*V*-50 0** -** BVS 10 AT EX E 142 X x T3 - T6
D*W*-500**-** 1PS*50*-***** -*** * anti-friction BVS 09 AT EX E 159 X x x T3 - T6
PTB 07 A TEX 1042 X x T3 - T6
PTB 07 A TEX 1043 X x T3 - T6
D*T*-560 **-** PTB 07 A TEX 1046 X x T3 - T6
1PS*56*-***** -*** * sleeve
D*V*-56 0** -** BVS 12 AT EX E 092 X x T3 - T6
PTB 06 A TEX 1028 X x T3 - T6
PTB 06 A TEX 1022 X x T3 - T6
D*T*-630 **-**
1PS*63*-***** -*** * sleeve PTB 07 A TEX 1075 X x T3 - T6
D*V*-63 0** -**
anti-friction PTB 09 A TEX 1009 X x T3 - T6
D*** -710**- ** 1PS*71*-***** -*** *
sleeve BVS 13 AT EX E 045 X x T3 - T6
PTB 09 A TEX 1078 X x T3 - T6
BVS 11 AT EX E 170 X x T3 - T6
D*Q*- 800** -** 1PS*80*-***** -*** * sleeve PTB 06 A TEX 1049 X x T3 - T6
D*Q*- 910** -** 1PS*91*-***** -*** * sleeve BVS 10 AT EX E 103 X x T3 - T6
Rev. Q-2
Seite 3 von 3

Quality documents
C.3 EC Declaration of Conformity, Zone 21 or 22

Quality documents
Industry

Geräte-Staubexplosionsschutz durch Gehäuse "t"
Equipment dust ignition protection by enclosure "t"
Gerät EG-Baumusterprüf- Gerät EG-Baumusterprüf-

Equi pm ent besche inigung Equipment bescheini gung
Typ Alternativ er T yp EC-Ty pe Examinati on Typ Alternativer Typ EC -Type E xami nation
type alternati ve ty pe Certi ficat e type alternative typ e Certificat e
A***-071 **-** A***-280 **-**
1PS*07*-*****-**** BVS 11 AT EX E 006 1PS*2 8*-*****-**** BVS 1 1 ATEX E 125
E***-071**-** E***-280 **-**
1PS*07*-*****-**** BVS 11 AT EX E 053 X 1PS*2 8*-*****-**** BVS 11 ATEX E 051 X
D***-071**-** D*** -280 **-**
1MD *07*-*****-**** BVS 13 AT EX E 129 X 1MD*28*-*****-**** BVS 12 ATEX E 029 X
A***-080 **-** A***-315 **-**
1PS*08*-*****-**** BVS 11 AT EX E 014 1PS *31*-*****-**** BVS 1 1 ATEX E 123
E***-080**-** E***-315 **-**
D***-080**-** D*** -315 **-**
A***-090 **-** A***-355 **-**
E***-090**-** E***-355 **-**
D***-090**-** D*** -355 **-**
A***-100 **-** A***-400 **-**
E***-100**-** E***-400 **-**
1PS*10*-*****-**** BVS 10 AT EX E 155 X
D***-100**-** D***-400 **-** 1PS *40*-*****-**** BVS 11 AT EX E 162 X
1MD *10*-*****-**** BVS 13 AT EX E 127 X
A***-112 **-**
1PS*11*-*****-**** BVS 11 AT EX E 112 D***-450 **-** 1PS *45*-*****-**** BVS 11 AT EX E 084 X
E***-112**-**
1PS*11*-*****-**** BVS 10 AT EX E 159 X A***-500 **-**
D***-112**-** 1PS *50*-*****-**** BVS 1 3 ATEX E 114
1MD *11*-*****-**** BVS 13 AT EX E 126 X E***-500 **-**
A***-132 **-** D***-*****-**
1PS*13*-*****-**** BVS 11 AT EX E 118 1PS****-*****-****
E***-132**-** A***-*****-** BVS 0 3 ATEX E 259
1PS*13*-*****-**** BVS 10 AT EX E 123 X 1MD* ***-*****-****
D***-132**-** E***-*****-**
1MD *13*-*****-**** BVS 13 AT EX E 099 X
A***-160 **-** Rev N-1
1PS*16*-*****-**** BVS 11 AT EX E 126
E***-160**-**
1PS*16*-*****-**** BVS 11 AT EX E 012 X
D***-160**-**
1MD *16*-*****-**** BVS 13 AT EX E 019 X
A***-180 **-**
1PS*18*-*****-**** BVS 11 AT EX E 010
E***-180 **-**
1PS*18*-*****-**** BVS 11 AT EX E 047 X
D***-180**-**
1MD *18*-*****-**** BVS 13 AT EX E 017 X
A***-200 **-**
1PS*20*-*****-**** BVS 11 AT EX E 005
E***-200**-**
1PS*20*-*****-**** BVS 11 AT EX E 020 X
D***-200**-**
1MD *20*-*****-**** BVS 13 AT EX E 012 X
A***-225 **-**
1PS*22*-*****-**** BVS 11 AT EX E 017
E***-225**-**
1PS*22*-*****-**** BVS 11 AT EX E 046 X
D***-225**-**
1MD *22*-*****-**** BVS 12 AT EX E 103 X
A***-250 **-**
1PS*25*-*****-**** BVS 11 AT EX E 034
E***-250**-**
1PS*25*-*****-**** BVS 11 AT EX E 030 X
D***-250**-**
1MD *25*-*****-**** BVS 11 AT EX E 045 X
Seite 2 von 2

Quality documents
C.4 IECEx certificate
C.4 IECEx certificate

If available, you can obtain the IECEx certificate on the Internet at the following address:
Http://iecex.iec.ch/iecex/iecexweb.nsf/home?openform (http://iecex.iec.ch/iecex/
iecexweb.nsf/Home?OpenForm)
TheIECEx ID for the IECEx certificate can be found on the rating plate of the machine or on
the extra plate for explosion protection.
1. Enter the IECEx ID in the "Quick access" field.
You then have access to the certificate.
2. If you scroll down completely to the bottom of the page shown, you can open the certificate
as a PDF file and download it.

Index
Correct usage, 24
Corrective maintenance
Initial inspection, 88
Cross-section of the grounding conductor, 60
Alternative types of grease , 94
Current transformer, 76
A D
Aligning, 52
Damage during transportation, 32
Prerequisites, 47
Delivery, 32
Alignment accuracy, 54
Direction of rotation, 61
Aluminum conductors, 65
Disassembly
Anti-condensation heating, 28, 78, 79
Disposal, 105
Insulation resistance, 71
Disposal
Mounting, 104
Chemicals, 106
Repairs, 104
Components, 106
Anti-corrosion agent
Removing, 52
Applications, 21
Assembly
E
Roller bearings, 100 Electrical faults, 81
Axial force, 54 Electromagnetic compatibility, 18
Axial gap, 54 Electromagnetic fields, 19
Emergency off, 79
Emitted interference, 19
B Equipotential, 66
Equipotential bonding conductor, 41
Balance quality, 48
ESD guidelines, 17
Bearing currents, 41
Ex marking, 22
Bearing insulation, 68
Exceeding the tolerances, 29
Bearing shipping brace, 39
Explosion hazard, 22, 77, 92, 100
Blocked speed ranges, 30
Bearing temperature, 77
Bolt grade, 90
Bridging the insulated bearing , 78
Bolt locking device, 55, 111
Dust deposits, 77
electrostatic discharge, 18
Layer of dust, 77
C Explosion Protection Directive, 13
Cable entries, 59 External fan, 25, 28
certified, 62 Commissioning, 72
Cable lugs, 63 Maintenance, 96
Center of gravity, 34, 51 Test run, 72
Checks to be carried out prior to commissioning, 67 turning off, 78
Circuit diagram, 60
Connecting cables
Selection of, 57 F
With cable lugs, 63
faults
Contact, 109
Mechanical, 82
Cooling system
Faults, 75
faults, 83
Cooling system, 83

Index
Electric, 81 Lubricant plate, 93

Inspection , 81, 88
Roller bearings, 82
Feather key, 50 M
Five safety rules, 13
Machine
Flammable substances, 15
Aligning to the driven machine , 53
Foundation forces, 54
Securing, 54
Machine design
IEC, 23
G Machine expansion, 54
General inspection, 89 Machine marking, 95, 99
Grease caps, 36 Maintenance
Grease types, 93 Maintenance intervals, 85
Mechanical faults, 82
Medium-voltage converter operation, 41
H Medium-Voltage Converters, 41
Minimum air clearances, 63, 64
Hazardous substances, 15
Mounting parts, 46
Hearing damage, 16
Hearing impairment, 28
High-voltage motor
Switching, 31, 73
N
Hot surfaces , 15 Noise emission, 28
Hybrid mixtures, 22, 77 Noise emissions, 16
Noise protection measures, 28
I
IECEx certificate, 134
O
Ignition hazard, 16 Operating mode, 27
Inspection Output element, 49
Faults, 81, 88 Overall flatness, 56
Installation Over-critical machine, 30
Initial inspection, 88 Overspeeds, 27
Insulated bearings, 42, 78 Overvoltage, 73
Insulated coupling, 41, 43
Insulation resistance, 37, 68, 92
Anti-condensation heating, 71 P
measure, 69
Paint finish, 25
Interference immunity, 18
Paint system, 98
Interference voltages, 19
Paintwork damage, 98
Interlocking circuit
Polarization index, 37, 68, 71, 92
Anti-condensation heating, 28
Positioning, 53
External fan, 28
Precision alignment, 54
Intrinsically safe circuits, 58
Preparations for assembly, 46
Pressure relief device, 66
Property class, 54
L
Lifting eye, 33, 34, 50, 51
Limit speed, 68 Q
Local field service
Qualified personnel, 14
Service numbers, 109

Index
Service numbers, 109

Terminal box, 103
R Spare parts ordering, 103
Speed, 30
Radial force, 54
Standard cable glands, 65
Rated voltage, 63
Stoppages, 79
Rating plate, 24
Roller bearings, 80
Re-commissioning, 80
Storage, 35
Regreasing, 93
Supplementary devices, 25
Regreasing interval, 93
Surge suppressor, 31
Regreasing system, 38
Switching off
Repainting, 98
Anti-condensation heating, 79
Residual risks, 27
Switching on, 78
Resonance, 30
Switching overvoltages, 31
Restriction of certain Hazardous Substances, 109
System resonances, 30
Risk of explosion, 36, 104
System-inherent frequencies, 30
Bearing temperature, 87
Cleaning with compressed air, 88
Layer of dust, 87
Spare parts, 104
T
RoHS, 109 Tandem operation, 43
Roller bearings Technical information
Assembly, 100 Service numbers, 109
faults, 82 Temperature class, 79
Greasing, 72 Temperature limits, 36
Rolling-contact bearing Terminal box
Replacement, 103 close, 66
Rolling-contact bearings Maintaining, 97
Inspection, 89 Terminal designation, 60
Rotating components, 15 Thermal motor protection, 28
Rotor shipping brace, 35 Tightening torques, 57
Remove, 47 Bolted connection, 55, 111
Standard cable glands, 65
Transporting, 34, 51
S Type of balancing, 48
Type of protection, 24, 59, 104
Safety instructions
Flammable substances, 15
Hazardous substances, 15
Hot surfaces, 15
U
Live parts, 14 Undrilled entry plate, 59
Maintenance work, 85
Rotating components, 15
Sealing plug V
certified, 62
Vibration values, 30
Selection of bolts, 54
Service numbers
Local field service, 109
Spare parts, 109
Technical information, 109
Shaft grounding, 42
Sound pressure, 28
Spare parts, 104

Index

AC EC-Declaration of Conformity (U161)
AB EC-Declaration of Conformity (U163)
AD Declaration of incorporation Loher LDX (U157)
Siemens AG
Industry Sector
Drive Technologies and Industry Automation
P.O. Box 4848
90327 NUREMBERG
GERMANY
www.siemens.com/drives
Mechanical Seal IOM
John Crane EAA
Engineered Sealing Systems
GB
Instruction ManualReference No.: IOM - GA-190418
Mechanical Seal
Type RRDP
Seal Type RRDP
John Crane Assembly Code 89776548
John Crane Drawing No. GA-190418
Manual Reference number (IM) IOM-GA-190418
Global Part Number 89776548
End user
Contractor
OEM
Customer PO Number
Plant Owner/Site/Unit
Plant Item Number
Service Name
(API & cat 3 seals ONLY)
Maximum Surface Temperature, zones
1,2,21 and 22 (ATEX, 94/9/EC)
This seal may only be installed, commissioned and maintained by an authorised plant machinery
specialist, paying close attention to these instructions and all other relevant regulations. Failure to do
this relieves the manufacturer from any liability or warranties.
In the interest of continuous development, John Crane reserves the right to alter designs and
specifications without prior notice.
For your nearest John Crane facility, please contact one of the locations below
John Crane International - Major Regional Centres

North America Europe Middle East, Africa, Asia Latin America
John Crane Inc. John Crane UK John Crane Middle East John Crane Brazil
North America Buckingham House P.O Box 61040 Av. Paulista, 475 - 16 andar
6400 Oakton Street 361-366 Buckingham Ave Dubai Bela Vista
Morton Grove Slough, England SL1 4LU United Arab Emirates 01311-980 Sao Paulo SP .
Illinois 60053 USA Brazil
Tel: 1- 847-967-2400 Tel: 44-1753-224000 Tel: 971-48839510 Tel: 55-11-3371-2500

Fax: 1-847-967-3915 Fax: 44-1753-224224 Fax: 971-4-883-7766 Fax: 55-11-3371-2599
Instruction Manual Author:
John Crane Document Source Local Address

Engineering Document Source Telephone Number
Document Source Fax Number
Instruction Manual Page: 2
of: 15
Type Edition 7.4
Contents
1 General........................................................................................................3
1.1 Introduction .................................................................................................3
1.2 Range of Application ...................................................................................3
2 Safety & Environment ...............................................................................3
2.1 Symbols ......................................................................................................3
2.2 Safety Instructions .......................................................................................3
2.3 Environmental Aspects................................................................................4
2.3.1 Company policy extract ..................................................................4
2.3.2 Recycling ........................................................................................4
3 Transportation and Storage .....................................................................5
4 Description of the Mechanical Seal .........................................................5
4.1 Construction ................................................................................................5
4.2 Function ......................................................................................................6
4.3 Operating Conditions...................................................................................6
5 Installation and Removal ..........................................................................6
5.1 Preparation for Fitting ..................................................................................6
5.2 Installation Tolerances ................................................................................7
5.2.1 Shape and Positional Tolerances ...................................................7
5.2.2 Surface Finish.................................................................................7
5.3 Installation ...................................................................................................7
5.3.1 Tightening Torques .........................................................................9
5.3.2 Lubricants .......................................................................................9
5.4 Seal Removal ..............................................................................................9
5.5 Installation and Removal of Shrink Discs (John Crane supply*) ................10
6 Commissioning and Decommissioning.................................................10
7 Maintenance/Repair ................................................................................13
7.1 Maintenance .............................................................................................13
7.2 Reconditioning ..........................................................................................14
7.3 Spare Parts ...............................................................................................15
8 Malfunction, Causes and Correction .....................................................15
9 Accompanying Documents ....................................................................15
of: 15
Type Edition 7.4
1 General
Danger
1.1 Introduction
Mandatory instructions
This Instruction Manual is provided to designed to prevent personal
familiarise the user with the seal arrangement injury or extensive damage.
and its use. The Instructions must be read
and applied whenever work is done on the ATTENTION Special instructions or
seal, and must be available to the operating information to avoid damage
and maintenance personnel. to the seal or its surroundings.
These instructions will help to avoid danger
and increase reliability. Note: Information for easy
installation and efficient
John Crane reserve the right to change the operation.
seal and specifications described in this
manual where it is necessary for technical Environmental Note
development and without prior notice. The
latest issue supersedes all previous versions.
1.2 Range of Application 2.2 Safety Instructions

Mechanical sealing systems are used for the
sealing of rotating shafts; they must be
operated within their performance limits (see ATTENTION
4.3 Operating Conditions).
Every working practice which compromises safety
is to be avoided.
If the process or operating In the event of an operating problem the
conditions are changed machinery must be switched off immediately and
from those referenced in made safe! Problems must be solved promptly.
this Manual, John Crane
A slight leakage will occur during normal seal
must be consulted to operation. Depending on the duty, this leakage
ensure the sealing system can appear as a gas, a liquid or a solid. In case of
is safe. a worn or defective seal the leakage will increase.
The leakage may be hazardous or toxic, and a
safe collection system is required.
Hot surfaces have to be protected against
2 Safety & Environment accidental contact.
The safety notes refer to the arrangement In order to avoid unforeseen hazards do not make
unauthorised changes to the fluid to be sealed,
supplied. They must be used in conjunction
the specified duty, or the seal parts.
with the relevant safety regulations for the
machine, auxiliary equipment, plant and
sealed fluid.
2.1 Symbols
The following symbols are used in this
Instruction Manual to highlight information of
particular importance:
of: 15
Type Edition 7.4
John Crane adopts the ‘Design For the

Environment’ (DFE) principle in making this
ATTENTION product. Using this product will benefit the
environment directly by:
Some mechanical seals are used in conjunction
with an auxiliary support system; this is clarified  Reducing waste of precious resources
by the flush plan description described on the seal
through decreasing the risk of leakage &
arrangement drawing. It is important for the safe
function of the seal that the support system is
minimising energy consumption
assembled and incorporated into the machine  Preventing pollution through controlling
before operation. This Instruction Manual should harmful emissions to the atmosphere
be read in conjunction with the appropriate
documentation for auxiliary systems and rotating  Preserving valuable materials
equipment. resources through the re-use of these
high quality durable seals due to their
Alarm systems are often included in the auxiliary ability to be refurbished.
support system and the operator must ensure
appropriate action is taken promptly in the event
of an alarm.
Maintenance with steel tools must be avoided in

the presence of substances classed as explosive
group IIc according to EN50014.
2.3.2 Recycling
If the machine is being used in a zone 21 or 22 Product refurbishment

regular cleaning of dust from exterior surfaces is This product has been designed for potential
required.
reuse. Depending on its post operation
condition, the seal may be repaired or rebuilt
It is dangerous to smoke while handling products
made from PTFE. for further use. All metal components may be
reused. The Primary & Mating Rings may be
Compounds containing PTFE, fluorocarbons and relapped and reused. Drive screws and
perfluoroelastomers should never be burnt as the springs are replaced. O-Rings must be
fumes and residues are highly toxic. If this replaced. Please consult John Crane for
accidentally occurs protective equipment should assessment of seal condition and its potential
be worn as hydrofluoric acid may be present. re-conditioning. Only qualified John Crane
Engineers at recognised John Crane
Follow the local relevant guidelines for the safe Customer Support Units should carry out re-
and environmentally friendly disposal of assembly conditioning & repair of this product
lubricants, supplied fluids and scrapped
components.
Disposal
2.3 Environmental Aspects When the product is considered to be beyond
economical repair and potential reuse, it
2.3.1 Company policy extract should be disposed of by environmentally
beneficial means. The product can be
“It is the policy of John Crane to manage its disassembled with ease.
business activities in an environmentally
responsible manner, comply with all relevant
laws and regulations, prevent pollution, and Scrapped components
continually improve its environmental
These should be handled with extra care due
performance, certification to the latest issue
to possible contamination. They should be
of ISO 14001 ensures compliance.”
recycled through local industrial recycling
plants.
of: 15
Type Edition 7.4
attention must be applied to the cleanliness

Special materials of the faces and condition of the elastomers.
Follow the local relevant guidelines for the Ensure preservatives and
environmentally friendly disposal of assembly ATTENTION cleaning agents do not affect
lubricants, supplied fluids and scrapped the elastomers.
components. Compounds containing PTFE, Once the seal is fitted on the
fluorocarbons and perfluoroelastomers should ATTENTION equipment and the position is
never be burned as the fumes and residues set using setting devices do
are highly toxic. Please refer to Safety not re-engage them for transportation and
Instructions- Section 2.2. storage.
Packaging
All packaging materials used are made from
recyclable, environmentally friendly 4 Description of the
materials. Mechanical Seal
When in doubt or for further information and
advice on this subject, please consult John
4.1 Construction
Crane. All mechanical seals are composed of the
same basic elements (also refer to the
installation drawing in Section 9).
3 Transportation and Storage
Transport and store the seal in its original
packaging.
To ensure seals remain in good condition
they should be stored in the following
environment:
 dry and dust-free
 ventilated at room temperature
 protected from direct effects of heat and
Fig. 1: Typical Pusher Mechanical Seal
ultraviolet light
Primary seal components
 elastomers require replacement after 60
months except Butyl rubber elastomers a) primary ring
that require replacement after 24 months b) mating ring
Secondary seal component
 for further information on elastomer
storage refer to US Aerospace Standard c) dynamic seal
SAE ARP 5316 d) static seal
If used seal parts are to be transported to the Spring component

manufacturer or a third party they have to be e) multiple spring
cleaned, decontaminated and require safe
Drive and retaining components
handling instructions externally attached. f) retainer
For additional information on transportation
and storage refer to John Crane document
I-Storage-E.
The sealing system does not require any
preservatives, it is resistant against all normal
environmental conditions.
If any machine, with an installed seal, has
been stored with preservatives before putting
it back into operation then seal must be
removed, cleaned and dried. Particular
of: 15
Type Edition 7.4
4.3 Operating Conditions

 Refer to data recorded on drawing and
Seal Data Sheet (if applicable) in Section
9 and referenced on the front page.
 If no data is available refer to John
Crane’s published Product Data Sheet
specific to the seal type used (see
www.johncrane.com), or consult John
Fig. 2: Typical Metal Bellows Mechanical Seal Crane direct.
Primary seal components The seal cartridge has been selected

to safely contain the maximum static
a) primary ring seal chamber pressure. Any change
b) mating ring from the original, specified pump
Secondary seal component operating conditions, including casing
c) static seal and/or piping hydrotest may
compromise this safe containment.
d) static seal Refer to the Seal Data Sheet specific
Spring component to the plant item or consult John
Crane for the maximum sealing-
e) metals bellows
pressure rating of the seal cartridge.
Drive and retaining components
f)compression collar
5 Installation and Removal
4.2 Function 5.1 Preparation for Fitting
The hydraulic pressure and the spring force
press the rotating and axially flexible primary  Check whether the seal is complete, clean
ring against the stationary mating ring. Wear and undamaged.
at the primary seal is minimised by a very thin  Clean all machinery abutments, sealing
lubricating film. Lubrication is provided by the and fitting surfaces (use only absorbent
sealed fluid; in the case of gas, the and fluff-free polishing cloth for cleaning).
mechanism is usually enhanced by spiral
grooves in order that the faces run non-  Remove any protective coatings.
contacting. Some liquid seals use macro  Check all relevant machinery dimensions,
features on the face to enhance lubrication and that correct chamfers (see fig. 3) exist
such as shallow slots and grooves (spiral on all leading edges. Refer to drawing in
grooves in the case of Upstream Pumping). Section 9.
With very low contact loads special seals can
be operated without a liquid lubricant. The 1,5 mm
leakage is minimised by flat lapping to a fine
surface finish.
Without the intended lubrication the 20°

seal face temperatures will increase 1 mm
and may provide an ignition source in Radius
a potentially explosive atmosphere.
Proper operation of the equipment
Fig. 3
and adherence to the
In the case of O-rings
recommendations in this Instruction
ATTENTION chamfer dimensions are
Manual and associated manuals will
related to the O-ring section.
prevent this occurring.
The dimensions in Fig 3
apply only for O-rings up to
3.53 mm (0.139 in).
of: 15
Type Edition 7.4
Section 9 and front page) for the

recommended eyebolt type and size. On
vertical shaft machines two linked collar
5.2 Installation Tolerances eyebolts should be used. Eyebolts are not
The performance and reliability of the sealing ordinarily a part of the scope of supply.
system is influenced by the installation  Where appropriate fully engage the
tolerances. Ensure that the tolerances do not specified eyebolt or eyebolts into the
exceed the required limits. tapped hole and connect to safe lifting
equipment.
5.2.1 Shape and Positional
Tolerances Eyebolts must meet the appropriate
Tolerance National Standards and their
Component Type
availability and use should be part of
Shaft to Housing Squareness 0.08 mm* a local QA programme.
Shaft to Housing Concentricity 0.13 mm
 Maintain cleanliness during fitting.
static ± 0.25 mm**
_______________________________
 Lubricate shaft with a suitable fluid in the
Shaft End Float Axial installation area.
dynamic ± 0.04 mm
 Lubricate the shaft and housing sealing
Shaft or Sleeve Ovality 0.05 mm
components with a suitable fluid (see
Housing to Shaft Runout 0.05 mm Section 5.3.2), also ensuring they maintain
* API requires <0.5 µm/mm of chamber bore, FIM. their correct position during fitting.
**Figure stated on general arrangement drawing
(Section 9) should take precedence EP-elastomer O-rings and
ATTENTION bellows are not resistant to
5.2.2 Surface Finish mineral oil or grease.
Seal Type Value

dynamic O-ring 0.3/0.8 µm Ra
(ground or polished) ATTENTION Silicone-elastomer O-rings
static O-ring <1.6 µm Ra (turned) are not resistant to silicone oil
or grease.
elastomer bellows 0.8/1.2 µm Ra (turned)
PTFE bellows 0.8/1.2 µm Ra (turned) When the sleeve is fixed to
dynamic and static 0.1/0.25 µm Ra ATTENTION the shaft by shrink disc, the
wedge (polished) area under the clamp must
be kept free of lubricant (see
Packing ring (static) 0.8/1.6 µm Ra (turned) Section 5.5).
5.3 Installation The seal faces should not be

ATTENTION lubricated with oil or grease
ATTENTION Carefully protect the lapped as this may prevent
sealing surfaces of primary introduction of the sealed
and mating rings during fitting. Minor fluid in operation, leading to
damages to sensitive surfaces, such as overheating and failures.
scratches and chips, reduce the sealing
effectiveness of the mechanical seal.
 Ensure the seal arrangement is orientated
Carry out fitting according to the correctly, according to the housing,
installation drawing (section 9 and front pipework, and shaft connections (e.g.
page) and with the following procedure:
studs, keyways, pins and drive holes).
 A tapped hole on the top of the gland plate
is provided for those cartridges requiring
additional mechanical lifting assistance.
Refer to the Installation Drawing (see
of: 15
Type Edition 7.4
On double-ended pumps casing. In the case of hot pumps where

ATTENTION ensure the drive-end and thermal growth is known to be a problem,
non-drive-end seals are allowance can be made by offsetting the
appropriately selected. shaft by the required amount. Remove the
collar set screws and using a drill of
clearance size, drill through to mark the
 Slide the seal assembly over the shaft centre of each screw. The shank of the drill
and into position. should be protected by masking tape to avoid
If a flexible graphite seal is damaging the threads. Remove the seal
ATTENTION used as the shaft/sleeve seal assembly and using a drill 2mm larger,
remove this before sliding the dimple the shaft to the full diameter. Carefully
seal assembly into position. remove all burrs to avoid damaging the seal
Re-insert the flexible-graphite sleeve. Refit set screw with a suitable thread-
seals and retain with the lock liquid, located into the shaft dimple.
follower. Tighten the
hexagonal-head follower If setting devices are used,
screws and when the follower ATTENTION they must be disengaged
is located in its final position after the seal is fixed securely
tighten the radial set screws in place in its final position.
(see warning below for high They can then be disengaged
temperature metal bellows and locked securely or
seals. appropriately stored.
On double ended pumps the

If a pumping scroll is included and is drive collar set-screws or
ATTENTION
externally exposed, extreme care sleeve drive component must
must be taken in handling due to the be tightened after the bearing
sharp edges that are required in this brackets have been fitted.
component. It is recommended that When the seal is radially
protective gloves are worn whenever located from the shaft (no
these devices are handled, either gland spigot) the gland nuts
during installation or removal. must also be tightened after
 Tighten bolts, nuts and fasteners evenly the bearing brackets have
to the torque levels indicated in the been fitted.
installation drawing. If not indicated refer
to Section 5.3.1. Torque levels for gland  If possible check for freedom of
plate studs or bolts must conform to those movement by hand turning the shaft.
given in the relevant rotating equipment
manual. Check on all pipework, hoses and fittings:
For cartridge seal designs that do not  Remove and discard any plastic plugs
have a metal-to-metal contact used during transit.
between the gland plate and the seal
chamber face it is important they are  Ensure correct location, alignment and
aligned and the axial gap between support
them is equal around its
 Ensure all porting is correctly connected
circumference. This can be checked
and the intended fluids flow at the correct
with a gap gauge.
flow rate. Refer to installation drawing (see
Section 9) and relevant rotating equipment
ATTENTION manual or P & ID.
For high temperature metal bellows seals
e.g., 1604, 2609, 3609 etc the pump shaft  Ensure correct size pipework and
may need dimpling to ensure adequate drive. specification.
Check on the drawing in Section 9. If required  All unused connections must be plugged
bolt the seal assembly to the pump back with the as-supplied metal pipe plugs.
plate and finish assemble the pump so that Check whether drain connection should be
the shaft is in its final position relative to the open or piped to a collection area.
of: 15
Type Edition 7.4
 During assembly to the machine all These torque values are important for
pipework and plug connections to seal the safe operation of the seal
gland plate or chamber ports must have assembly and sleeve retention.
the threads sealed with a sealant suitable Retention calculations assume a
for the service. maximum shaft hardness of 38HRC
 Ensure all pipework on liquid barrier/buffer (353HB, 372HV). If the shaft surface
systems and cooling circuits are orientated has a higher hardness specification
to ensure effective venting. contact John Crane for advice.
 Visually check for any damage and leaks.
5.3.1 Tightening Torques 5.3.2 Lubricants

The following lubricants are recommended by
Tightening Torques [Nm] (u 0.125 lubricated) John Crane
Socket Socket Socket
Thread Size Setscrew Setscrew Setscrew Lubricant Note
Size Code (ASTM A453- (316) (High Tensile elastomeric O- Silicone grease, Apply very thinly by
Gr 660 C) Steel (14.9) rings except (Chloride Free) hand
- lubricated - lubricated - lubricated silicon rubber potable water or
Part Code Part Code Part Code & 2800 seals glycerine
Size/305/712 Size/305/001 Size/305/050 O-rings of PTFE paste Apply very thinly by
silicone rubber hand
M4 77** 1.5 2.3 Elastomeric O- Du Pont Krytox® Apply very thinly by
M5 78** 3 4.5 rings on 2800 FG24 (NSF-H1 Food hand
M6 79** 6 4 7.5 series seals grade lubricant)
Bolts, screws, Molybdenum or nickel Apply with brush or
M8 80** 15 11 18 nuts and based anti-seize by hand
M10 81** 30 16 36 fasteners compound
M12 82** 50 40 60 Elastomer Potable water or Apply with sprayer
bellows on glycerine
M14 83** shaft
M16 84**
M20 86** If the lubricant may be in contact with
1/4 - 20 35** 6 4.5 8.8 a food or beverage an NSF-H1 or
5/16 - 18 36** 10 17.5 equivalent specification is required.
3/8 - 16 37** 13.5 30
7/16 - 14 38** 32 48
1/2 - 13 39** 45 69
5.4 Seal Removal
Ensure that the decommissioning instructions
Thread Size Steel Screw Steel Screw
as given in Section 6. have been carried out.
Size Code (Class 12.9) (316 A4-70) Work on the seal must only be carried
- lubricated - lubricated out when the machine is stationary,
Part Code Part Code and secured against any unforeseen
Size/301/050 Size/301/001 start-up.
M4 77** 4.5 2
M5 78** 9.4 4 Removal is essentially the reverse procedure
M6 79** 16 6,5 to installation.
M8 80** 38 16
Refit seal setting devices
M10 81** 77 32 ATTENTION
M12 82** 135 55
prior to removal.
M14 83** 215 90
M16 84** 340 140
M20 86** 663 275 Note: Some seals are supplied with threaded
extraction holes in the gland plate. Insert
suitable extraction bolt.
of: 15
Type Edition 7.4
5.5 Installation and Removal of

Shrink Discs (John Crane  If the outer and inner rings have not
supply*) separated, remove some screws and
insert them in the neighbouring extraction
screw threads.
Outer Ring  The shrink disc may have to be cleaned
and re-greased before re-assembly (use a
Locking Screw grease containing MoS2 on the shrink disc
cones and locking screws).
Inner Ring
Sleeve
6 Commissioning and
Shaft Decommissioning
grease-free
Note before start-up:
 If the seal cartridge requires auxiliary
Installation systems for its reliable operation refer to
The shrink disc is supplied ready to be the separate Instruction Manuals for
installed on the sleeve, and should not be advice on the installation, operation,
dismantled prior to the initial installation. function/alarm setting and maintenance of
the system or systems.
 Degrease sleeve bore and shaft!
 Ensure transit plugs are removed and
 Slide seal assembly over the shaft. Low seal drain connections are correctly piped
viscosity lubricants can be used. or open.
 Tighten all locking screws uniformly in a  Ensure valves controlling circulation,
clockwise sequence, over several flush, quench and buffer or barrier topping
revolutions. It is advisable to tap the up systems are correctly positioned.
outside surface of the outer ring Check, where appropriate, flow rates for
occasionally to free any amount of Plans 32, 54, 62, and 72 are at the
misalignment or jamming that may occur. required values.
Check the correct full tightening torque of
all screws!* (see installation drawing in If a heat exchanger is included in the
Section 9) support system and isolating valves
are used in the coolant supply, a
 Refer to the machine manufacturer’s pressure relief valve should be
instructions if not of John Crane supply. incorporated between the isolating
Do not tighten the locking valves.
ATTENTION screws until the shaft is in its
correctly set operating  Ensure the seal chamber and/or barrier,
position buffer and cooling circuits are fully
vented. (Not necessary on 2800 range of
 Make sure that outer and inner rings are seals). This is particularly important on
aligned. This is a visual check on the Upstream Pumping designs if a localised
effectiveness of the shrink disc. If not, closed-loop system is used; it is
loosen and repeat above installation recommended the equipment shaft is
procedure spun for a short time and static venting
repeated to ensure all gas is removed
from the circuit.
Removal
 Remove rust, which may have formed on
Regular venting may be
the shaft in front of the sleeve. ATTENTION needed during commissioning
 Loosen all locking screws uniformly, in a on Plan 23, particularly on
clockwise sequence; initially about a vertical equipment.
quarter turn per revolution only. Do not
remove screws from the threads.
of: 15
Type Edition 7.4
 If the seal is unidirectional, check the

To minimise any ignition hazard it is
correct rotation direction.
important to ensure seal flush rates,
With liquid lubricated seals avoid dry temperatures, and cooling water
running under any circumstances, as flow rates are to specification.
it will damage the seal and may result
in a hazard. (Not relevant to 2800
range of seals and dry containment In case of pressurised or unpressurised
seals). double seals note:
Ensure that if a bearing is  Auxiliary barrier systems are designed to

ATTENTION fitted as part of the seal service mechanical seals by cooling,
assembly the Instructions on lubricating and pressurising; they must be
the Installation drawing (see operated within their performance limits. If
Section 9 and front page) are the barrier system is not supplied by John
applied. Crane check the system and specification
supplied meet the seal’s requirements for
It is advisable to pressurise reliable operation. Refer to the system
ATTENTION the machine and check for Instruction Manual.
static leaks before starting it  The barrier or buffer liquid must be clean,
dynamically. with stable properties over the operating
temperature and pressure conditions, and
For hot duties (above 150°C) not constitute a hazard or introduce
ATTENTION ensure pump has been potential damage to the environment. If a
brought up to operating mineral oil is to be used it is
temperature prior to start-up. recommended it be free of any additives
Rapid axial differential (e.g. anti-wear, anti-foaming, anti-
thermal growth between shaft corrosion etc) as these may damage the
and pump casing could result rubbing seal face. The liquid should have
in seal malfunction. good lubricating properties, a viscosity <
15cSt @ 40°C and be compatible with the
If a Piping Plan 52, 75 or 76 is process fluid. The viscosity should ideally
ATTENTION connected to a flare header be between 1 and 10 cSt at the working
ensure the connection is kept temperature. ISO 21049 and API 682 (3rd
isolated until the pump is Edition) also offer advice on the selection
primed. of barrier liquids. It is recommended John
Crane is contacted for more detailed
If a water test has been advice on barrier or buffer liquids and a
ATTENTION applied when flexible graphite formal approval sought.
seat/mating ring seals are
Properties of buffer or barrier liquids
used, they must be replaced
may be the source of flammable or
or thoroughly dried before use
explosive hazards. In Europe, Plan
on a hydrocarbon service
53A barrier liquids classified as Group
above 100 oC
1 in the Pressure Equipment Directive
(97/23/EC) or described in
67/548/EEC, 96/56/EC, 96/54/EC,
Check the correct setting and must not be used without formal
operation of electrical warning approval from John Crane.
systems associated with seal
operation.  During the start-up of the machine in cold
ambient conditions the barrier or buffer
Before start-up, ensure that all viscosity should not exceed 150 cSt. If this
personnel and assembly equipment cannot be ensured the liquid is to be
have been moved to a safe preheated.
distance, that guards are fitted and
there is no contact with rotating
parts.
of: 15
Type Edition 7.4
 Interconnecting pipework between the Care should be exercised to ensure

system and the gland plate must be the the Maximum Allowable Working
correct specification and its length, bend Pressure (MAWP) is not exceeded
radii, numbers of bends must be as during filling and pressurization.
recommended in the system Manual. They
must all be continuously rising to aid High ambient temperatures and solar
venting. radiation can increase the pressure
on Plan 53A and 53B Barrier systems.
Effective seal cooling is achieved by When normal barrier pressures are
maintaining adequate buffer or barrier close to the seal maximum dynamic
liquid flow rate. This is strongly sealing pressure or system MAWP
influenced by the system pipework measures must be taken to eliminate
resistance and any trapped gas in it. the risk. Fit a sun-shade and consult
Recommendations must be applied. John Crane for alternative setting
options.
 The seal barrier auxiliary system must be
pressurised before priming the machine. Under some circumstances very low
ambient temperatures can result in
ATTENTION Cleanliness of the barrier oil the pressure in Plan 53A and 53B
and cleanliness of the supply Barrier systems to reduce below the
pipework for gas barrier seal chamber pressure. With a Plan
systems or liquid top-up 53A ensure the pressurizing gas
systems will have a direct system isolation valve is never left
affect on seal reliability. closed. If a 53B system is operated
with the ‘fill isolation valve’ closed
ATTENTION The machine should not be (note, some auto-fill systems operate
pressurised suddenly. with this valve open) there is a risk of
low ambient temperatures causing the
If the machine is to be barrier pressure to drop below the
ATTENTION
pressure tested the auxiliary chamber pressure. An alternative gas
barrier system must first be charge pressure is then required;
pressurised. consult John Crane.
The barrier pressure should be set at ATTENTION Special gas pre-charge

least 1 bar above the maximum seal precautions are advisable
chamber pressure. If a low-pressure when commissioning the
switch or alarm is fitted to the system accumulator in a Plan 53B.
ensure it is set above the maximum Consult the System
seal chamber pressure and below the Instruction Manual.
barrier pressure; it must have an
adequate pressure difference
between its set point and the barrier  The cooling water outlet temperature
pressure to allow the switch to reset. should be < 50oC. If not, check that the
For gas seals the barrier pressure cooling water inlet temperature is low and
must be 2 bar for 2800E, 2800ER & that the flowrate is correct.
2800XA, 3 bar for 2800BD &2800XP  The buffer or barrier settlement
and 5 bar for 2800HP above the temperature when in service should
maximum seal chamber pressure, typically be < 80oC (measured at the seal
unless other values have been given. exit connection). Some systems sealing
The maximum barrier pressure should hot process liquids may need to operate
be within the published seal above this temperature; suitable warnings
operational limits. and personal protection must then be
Consult the System Instruction applied.
Manual for pressure and alarm
settings.
of: 15
Type Edition 7.4
 When using thermosiphon systems, 7 Maintenance/Repair

ensure that the circuit minimises flow
restrictions and can be effectively vented. 7.1 Maintenance
Contact John Crane for more information.
Carry out the following procedures for
When the machine is trouble free operation:
ATTENTION stopped, the seal system Check daily:
pressure should be
maintained until the machine  that the connections are leak free
itself is unpressurised.  seal leakage rate and any change
from normal leakage rates.
Notes on decommissioning  barrier gas flow for 2800 range of
seals
The seal chamber must be completely
depressurized and drained of process  Condition of alarm signals
liquid before the seal is removed. If  Possible blockage of any strainers,
the process vapour is hazardous the magnetic filters, cyclones or any
equipment casing must be purged other particle filters used.
with an inert gas before working on  Vibration levels in the machine.
the seal.
Vibration levels are a good indicator
If the equipment has been used on of the condition of the machine and
toxic or hazardous fluids, ensure all high levels can have a direct affect on
precautions are taken to avoid seal and bearing life e.g.
personnel hazards, such as correct - Operation of the machine beyond its
decontamination. Note, fluid is often Allowable Operating Range (AOR)
trapped during draining and may exist will increase vibration unacceptably.
outside the seal. The relevant rotating - Sleeve retention set screws can be
equipment manual should be loosened by high vibration.
consulted to check for any special - Worn bearings can develop into
precautions. catastrophic seal and machine
failure.
If a Plan 23 is used the cooling loop Monitoring vibration levels and
must be completely drained of changes can minimise the risk of a
process liquid before the seal is hazard.
removed. If the heat exchanger does
not naturally drain and the process If the seal leakage is a
liquid is hazardous a gas purge must ATTENTION process gas this may be
be applied through the coil to displace difficult to measure. If it is a
the liquid to a suitable drain point. hydrocarbon an Organic
Vapour Analyser may be
Buffer and barrier liquid may be used and EPA Method 21
contaminated with process fluid. applied (contact John Crane
When draining ensure all precautions for the detail). Alternatively it
are taken to avoid personnel hazards. is advised the machine is
In a barrier system it is important to regularly pressure tested
remove all contamination; flushing every 9000 h of operation.
with a suitable liquid is recommended.
Ensure drained buffer and barrier
liquids are disposed of in a safe and  in addition for double seals check;
environmental manner.  barrier/buffer liquid level
For removal instructions refer to Section  barrier/buffer liquid temperature
5.4  barrier/buffer pressure
of: 15
Type Edition 7.4
 in addition for Upstream Pumping seals Where the seal is externally

with a Plan 54 that includes an in-line filter ATTENTION mounted and there is visibility
check the differential pressure across the of the condition of the seal
filter is within the design specification. face wear this should be
checked monthly.
 in addition for dry containment seals Replacement is advised after
 For dry contacting containment 75% of the wear allowance
seals (S48SC, 48SC, SBOP & has been used.
ECS) a monthly check with a 1.0
bar gas test is recommended.  Coalescing filters on 2800 range systems
 check monthly buffer gas flow when require either replacement or regular
applied, maintenance with the machine out of
 Wear parts for dry contacting service. Consult the system Instruction
containment seals require Manual.
replacement after 24000 hrs  Check and adjust torque on external drive
dynamic operation. collar set screws annually.
 Check monthly, where appropriate, flow
rates for Plans 32, 54, and 62 are at the Shaft temperature fluctuations, over a
required values. period of time, may reduce the
original set screw friction. This is a
Steadily increasing leakage rate risk on all pumps with a process
normally indicates a seal failure temperature >150oC (300oF). Refer to
condition and attention is required. If Section 5.3.1
the fault cannot be remedied a repair Vibration from unplanned or poor
will be required. equipment operation and high levels
of start/stop can, over a period of
If buffer or barrier liquid systems need time, loosen set screws.
replenishment this should only be
done with fill systems that exclude air  When repairing the rotating machine
ingress and/or prevent gas leakage to ensure all dimensions controlling the
the atmosphere. radial location of the seal in relation to the
In some regions where conformance shaft are as specified by the machine
with TA Luft is required, gas and manufacturer.
steam may only be discharged in Excessively damaged, corroded or
small, controlled amounts. worn parts that control the radial
location of the shaft to the casing may
Be careful not to overfill the result in contact between rotating and
ATTENTION reservoir of a Plan 52 with stationary parts of the seal. This can
buffer liquid as it may result in a serious hazard.
damage the inner seal.
If an auto top-up system is 7.2 Reconditioning

ATTENTION used with a Plan 53A, B or C The mechanical seal will always require
be careful not to over reconditioning after operation. In order to
pressurise the barrier circuit. maximise reliability, and minimise safety
risks, it is strongly recommended that used
If a bearing is included as seals are returned to John Crane for
ATTENTION part of the seal assembly rebuilding to as-new specification (essential
ensure grease or oil is for 2800 range of seals). Alternatively ask for
applied at the replenishment John Crane service personnel to visit site.
periods advised on the
Installation drawing (see
Section 9 and front page)
of: 15
Type Edition 7.4
It is the responsibility of the 9 Accompanying Documents

equipment user to ensure that any
 Seal Installation Drawing. See front sheet
parts being sent to a third party have
for specific drawing reference number.
appropriate safe handling instructions
or decontamination certification  Seal Data Sheet (if applicable)
externally attached to the package.
Without this information there will be a
refusal to handle the goods. (A blank
decontamination certificate is
available from John Crane).
Rebuilding seals to as-new specifications

must be carried out by qualified personnel.
Note: It is recommended that a low

pressure integrity test is
carried out after repair and
before installation on the
machine.
7.3 Spare Parts

Only John Crane spare parts should be used
to recondition seals.
It is advised to stock on site a spare seal
cartridge or the minimum replacement parts
shown on the installation drawing (Section 9).
The order codes for spare parts can be found
in the parts list on the installation drawing.
(Section 9 and the front page). In the case of
the 2800 range of seals only complete
cartridges should be stored.
The following data is necessary for spare part
orders:
seal assembly code
part description
component code
quantity
8 Malfunction, Causes and

Correction
John Crane must be consulted in the event of
any malfunction of the sealing installation or
sealing system. Excessive leakage rate,
premature failure, high relative temperatures
are all considered examples of abnormal
malfunction.
Coupling IOM
I-TLKS 0310 Foreword
TM
Metastream These instructions are provided to familiarise the user with the
coupling and its designated use. These instructions must be read and
TLKS Coupling applied whenever work is carried out on the coupling and must be kept
Fitting & Maintenance Instructions available for future reference.
ATTENTION These instructions are for the fitting, operation and
maintenance of the coupling as used in rotating equipment
and will help to avoid danger and increase reliability. The
FIGURE 1 information required may change with other types of
equipment or installation arrangements. These instructions
must be read in conjunction with the instruction manuals
for both the driver and driven machinery.
If the coupling is to be used for an application other than that originally
intended or outside the recommended performance limits, John Crane
must be contacted before its installation and use.
Any warranty may be affected by improper handling, installation, or
use of this coupling. Contact the company for information as to
exclusive product warranty and limitations of liability
If questions or problems arise, contact your local John Crane
sales/service engineer or the original equipment manufacturer as
appropriate.
A ATTENTION John Crane couplings are precision products and must
4 be handled appropriately. Take particular care to avoid
damage to spigots, mating faces, hub bores, keyways
and membranes. Do not excessively compress the
REFERENCE DESCRIPTION REFERENCE DESCRIPTION coupling membranes during assembly. Refer to Table 1
1 Transmission Unit 5 Guard Ring for compression limits. (X)
2 Driver Hub 6 Spacer
These instructions are written for standard catalogue products,
3 Driven Hub 7 Membrane Pack generally designed in accordance with the drawing shown.
4 Hub Bolts 8 Drive Bolt
Metastream is the registered trademark of John Crane
Safety Instructions Storage
The following designations are used in the installation instructions to If the coupling is not to be used immediately, it should be stored away
highlight instructions of particular importance. from direct heat in its original packing.
IMPORTANT is used for items of particular concern when using the All documentation supplied with the coupling should be retained for
coupling. future reference.
Spares
ATTENTION where there is an obligation or prohibition concerning
the avoidance of risk. When requesting spares always quote the full designation of the
coupling
! where there is an obligation or prohibition

concerning harm
The following spares can be purchased from John
Crane.
t l d t th i t
The usual extent of supply comprises 1. Set of hub bolts (4) (please specify standard or/and large hubs)
2. Hubs, bored to your requirement or unbored (2, 3)
1. A factory assembled transmission unit, comprising 2-off guard rings 3. Complete
Complete transmission unit, balanced or unbalanced(l)
(5), 1 –off spacer (6), 2-off membrane packs (7) plus fasteners and 4. Membrane pack including drive bolts and guard ring assemblies
fixings(8) (5, 7, 8)
2. Dr Driver hub
3. Dr Driven hub
4. 2 sets of bolts (4) to assemble the transmission unit to the two hub
flanges
IMPORTANT If a general arrangement drawing is supplied
with the coupling then all data indicated on that
drawing takes precedence ov er information included in
these instructions.
INSTALLATION Taper Bore with Keyed Drive

Remove coupling from packaging and carefully inspect for signs of 1. Fit the hub onto the shaft without the key(s). Lightly hammer the hub
damage. Pay particular attention to the hub bores and the spigot/recess with a soft faced mallet to ensure metal to metal contact takes place.
location features, which should be free from burrs and other damage. 2. Measure the distance from the end of the shaft to the face of the hub
using a depth micrometer.
INSTALLATION OF HUBS 3. Securely mount a dial gauge onto the inboard hub flange and set to
zero.
4. If necessary remove the hub and fit the key(s) which should be a tight
! Prior to installing the coupling, ensure that the machinery is
made safe. Hubs must be adequately supported during
installation to avoid accidental damage should they slip.
5.
sliding fit in the keyway with a small clearance at the top of the key.
Refit the hub and draw up the shaft to the correct axial position
indicated by the dial gauge. The hub may have to be heated to
achieve the required interference. See Figure 2. Note that the hub
Ensure the hub bore and mating shaft are clean. face may not be flush with the shaft end when taper bores are used.
Parallel Bore with Keyed Drive
FIGURE 2
The hub is usually installed with the hub face and shaft end flush.
1. Measure the shaft diameter and hub bore to confirm the

correct fit.
2. For clearance fits, install the key(s) into the shaft keyway and with a
little lubrication on the shaft, slide the hub onto the shaft. The key
should be a tight sliding fit in the keyway with a small clearance at
the top of the key. Secure the hub to the shaft in the correct axial
position with one or more grub screws.
3. John Crane recommend a light interference fit for most applications
and it may be necessary to apply heat to assist fitting of such hubs.
A warm oil bath will usually be adequate. DO NOT use spot heat or
exceed 175 degrees centigrade as this may cause distortion. A
thermal heat stick can be used to estimate the temperature before
quickly sliding the hub onto the shaft. A suitable stop will ensure the
correct axial position is located.
Taper Hubs Mounted by Oil Injection
1. Ensure that fillets and corner radii of mating surfaces, oil
distribution and drainage grooves are well rounded and free from
burrs.
2. Thoroughly clean all contact surfaces and smear the tapered FIGURE 3
surfaces with oil.
3. Fit the hub onto the shaft. RECESS
4. Fit the oil injection equipment, axial stop and mounting tools. TIR
Consult the arrangement drawing and the oil injection system
suppliers' instructions.
Fit and secure the axial ram or hydraulic nut BEFORE
injecting oil between the components. FACE
5. Inject oil between the components until the required mounting
TIR
pressure is reached, or it leaks out at the ends of the mating
surfaces.
6. By means of the mounting tools, position the hub in the correct axial The hub face should be set such that the maximum run-out does not
position, injecting oil during this operation. exceed 0.00008mm per mm of hub flange diameter or 0.025 mm TIR,
7. Release the oil pressure. whichever is greater.
8. Remove the mounting tool and oil injection equipment.
9. Assemble the locking washer and lock-nut to shaft end if applicable. The hub location recess should be set so the maximum run-out does
not exceed 0.00008mm per mm of recess diameter or 0.012 mm TIR,
whichever is greater.
Unbored Hubs
Adapters
John Crane recommend a light interfer ence fit for key ed hubs and shafts
[e.g. a K7/m6 fit]. The finished bore size can be calculated from the For machines having an integral flanged shaft, the flange may be
measured shaft diameter. machined to suit the bolting configuration of the coupling transmission
unit. Alternatively, the coupling may be supplied with a customised
When setting up the hub to machine the bore use the hub location recess flange adapter. Refer to the specific general arrangement drawing for
and face as datum surfaces, as shown in Figure 3. location and mounting details.
Shaft Alignment
or with the John Crane "Lase-A-Lign" shaft alignment kit.
Further details are available from John Crane on request.
Align the centre lines of the DRIVING and
DRIVEN machine shafts as follows: 5. Recheck the DBSE after the shafts have been aligned.
1. Move the equipment into position 6. Axial shims (together with a shim carrier in some cases) may be
2. Check for any soft foot and correct before supplied on applications where it is difficult to accurately set a
commencing alignment. predetermined shaft end separation [DBSE]. This is often the case
3. With one machine firmly bolted down, set where one or both of the hubs are taper bored. Where this feature is
the distance between shaft ends (DBSE) supplied, the thickness of shims [plus carrier if applicable] are added
according to the drawing or catalogue to the free length of the transmission unit so that the combined
dimension. length is equal to the measured distance between the hub flange
faces, making any allowance for known shaft movements. Note - it is
IMPORTANT DBSE should be measured between the inner best to measure the transmission unit when it is in a gagged
face of the hubs and should not be taken as the length condition.
of the transmission unit at its outer periphery. DBSE
may not be equal to the precise distance between shaft IMPORTANT The misalignment tolerances quoted in literature
ends. In particularly, the faces of taper bored hubs may and on draw ings, allow for dy namic conditions and
not be flush with the shaft end. Refer to Figure 4. variations. For the best service from the coupling, John
Crane recommend that installed misalignment is no
4. Align the shaft centre lines both horizontally and vertically by aligning more than 10% of the maximum allow able
the hub flanges. JOHN CRANE recommend the reverse periphery misalignment, allowance being made for any
method for accurate alignment. This can be done using dial gauges anticipated mov ements w hich w ill occur during
operation (eg. Thermal movements on hot pumps).
INSTALLATION OF THE TRANSMISSION UNIT 5

5. Measure dimension 'A (see Figure 1) on the
transmission unit. Check against the minimum and
1. Check spigot and recess locations on the hubs maximum value in Table 1.
and transmission unit for damage 6. Rotate the machinery two or three times slowly to
The transmission unit must be ensure it moves freely.
adequately supported during 6
installation to avoid accidental Hub tightening torque values apply to oil lubricated threads
damage should it slip.
Maximum angular misalignment = 0.33 degrees up to
3600rpm. 0.25 degrees above 3600rpm.
2. It may be necessary to compress the
transmission unit w hilst sliding it betw een the
hubs. Facilities are provided to make this FIG.5 X 9
easier. The spacer flanges are drilled (4 holes TABLE 1
in each flange) to allow compression bolts (ref. Couplin Standard Standard Large Large Min gap Coupling Dim’n Dim’n Dim’n Hub
9) to be threaded into the guard ring.
Tightening evenly w ill compress the g Hub Hub Hub Hub X Max Axial 'A' (Min) 'A' 'B' Jacking
transmission unit until clearance between the Size Bolt Size Tightening Bolt Tightening mm Deflection mm (Max) mm Bolt
hub spigots and length of the transmission unit Torque Size Torque +/- mm mm Size
is achieved, allow ing installation. (see Figure Nm Nm
5). Minimum gap of X should not be less than 300 M8 35 M12 120 9.1 1.4 10.1 10.3 82 M6
the values show n in Table 1, unless indicated 500 M10 65 M12 120 9.4 1.7 10.9 11.2 102 M6
otherwise on the general arrangement 750 M12 120 M14 180 10.1 1.9 11.6 11.9 120 M6
drawing.
1050 M12 120 M14 180 10.7 2.2 12.3 12.7 136 M6
IMPORTANT 1500 M14 180 M16 280 11.9 2.4 13.8 14.2 153 M8
Always remove the compression bolts as soon 2000 M16 280 M16 280 13.4 2.7 15.4 15.8 171 M8
as the transmission unit is in position, before 2600 M16 280 - - 14.6 3.0 16.7 17.2 183 M8
fully tightening the hub bolts.
3350 M14 180 - - 15.3 3.2 17.7 18.2 205 M8
3. Align the hub/transmission unit flanges if 4250 M14 180 - - 16.1 3.5 18.6 19.2 220 M8
they have been match marked 6010 M16 280 - - 17.3 3.9 20.1 20.7 250 M8
4. Fit the hub bolts and tighten these evenly to 8500 M16 280 - - 19.8 4.4 23.0 23.7 276 M8
locate the transmission unit, ensuring the 9013 M16 280 - - 23.1 5.0 26.7 27.5 320 M8
spigots enter their recesses squarely. Bolt- 9017 M16 280 - - 25.2 5.5 29.2 30.0 348 M16
threads should be lubricated with oil and 9021 M16 280 - - 28.1 6.0 32.4 33.4 378 M16
tightened in a "diametrically opposite" 9036 M16 280 - - 34.3 7.1 39.4 40.5 460 M16
sequence to the torque values shown in
Table 1. 9049 M16 280 - - 37.7 7.9 43.4 44.7 507 M16
OPERATION, INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE Failures are rare and can generally be attributed to excessive
misalignment or / and severe torsional overload. In all cases of coupling
Before starting the machinery, ensure that all failure, the cause should be identified and corrected before replacing the
necessary safety procedures are being observed coupling.
and coupling guards are fitted. It is possible to repair the coupling by fitting a replacement disc pack
assembly or replacing the entire transmission unit.
Routine examination should include a periodic check on the
tightness of fasteners and visual inspection of transmission To replace the transmission unit, remove the hub bolts and then withdraw
components for signs of fatigue or wear. the transmission unit using the compression bolts feature in the spacer as
If the coupled machinery is disturbed at any time, shaft alignment appropriate. It may be necessary to use the jacking holes provided in
should be re checked. Alignment checking is recommended if a each hub to push the spigot off the guard ring. (See Table 1).
deterioration of installation alignment during service is suspected.
Maintenance work must only be carried out by Transmission unit must be adequately supported during
suitably qualified personnel when the equipment is removal to avoid accidental damage should it slip.
stationary and has been made safe.
TM
ATTENTION When repairing John Crane Metastream flexible
membrane couplings, only John Crane approved
parts should be used.
Metastream is a registered trademark of John Crane

Metastream™
EEC Directives – Page 4 of 6
94/9/EC (ATEX95/100a) & 2006/42/EC (Machinery Directive)
This section refers to couplings which bear the CE and ATEX* required markings:
CE / ATEX marking
All couplings which comply with CE and ATEX legislation will be marked as shown. This will
be etched on the spacer element of the transmission unit.
εx IM2 εx II 2GD T6 M17 1SS, UK. 07

Note 07 is the year of manufacture and will change.
• Operation in aggressive atmospheres

The following components contain non-metallic materials. Confirm compatibility or provide
suitable protection if the coupling is to operate in an aggressive atmosphere.
- The hub electrical insulation. (if supplied option) - reinforced thermosetting plastic.
- Limited end float bearings. (if supplied option) – PTFE based plastic.
- Composite spacer tube. (if supplied option) – reinforced thermosetting plastic.
Temperature classification of Metastream couplings
Metastream metal membrane couplings from John Crane supplied in conformance with
Directive 94/9/EC have to the following classification when used in accordance with
instructions and information supplied. For Standard ambient temperature –20 to 40oC
Metastream T series and L series couplings, using the disk type flexible elements, are
covered by type certificate Sira 02ATEX9403
Metastream M series couplings, using the diaphragm type flexible elements, are covered by
type certificate Sira 02ATEX9404
Where Metastream metal membrane couplings from John Crane are required for use in
higher ambient temperatures, John Crane Ltd certifies that the equipment complies with the
temperature classification range listed in table 1 and in all other respects complies with the
type certificates.
I M2 II 2GD T# (amb. *C)
Table 1.
Max T Max. Surface
ambient Class temperature
o o
C # C
150 T3 200
90 T4 135
55 T5 100
40 T6 85

Metastream™
John Crane
31, Nash Road
Trafford Park
Manchester
M17 1SS
United Kingdom
T: +44 (0) 161 872 2484
Declaration of Conformity F: +44 (0) 161 872 1654
www.johncrane.com
EEC Directive 94/9/EC of 23

03.1994 and resultant legislation
and standards
We, the manufacturers – John Crane UK Ltd, – confirm that the explosion-prevention
requirements have been implemented for
Metastream® metal-membrane couplings

Equipment complies with the requirements of directive 94/9/EC. It is in accordance with
article 1 3. (a) of the directive and the fundamental Health and Safety requirements of Annex
II, are fulfilled.
The current Type-Examination certificates for the couplings are:-
‘T’ & ‘L’ series - Sira 02ATEX9403

‘M’ series - Sira 02ATEX9404
The technical Documentation is deposited with the designated Notified body in accordance
with article 8 1. (b) (ii) the Directive 94/9/EC:
SIRA Test & Certification Ltd

Hazardous Area Centre, Rake Lane
Eccleston, Chester, CH4 9JN
England
Signed: Date: 1st January 2010
P.D. Carlisle (Product Line Director - Couplings)

Metastream™
John Crane
31, Nash Road
Trafford Park
Manchester
M17 1SS
United Kingdom
T: +44 (0) 161 872 2484
F: +44 (0) 161 872 1654
www.johncrane.com
Declaration of Incorporation
E.C. Machinery Directive (2006/42/EC)
Section 1.0 - Machinery Description:

Flexible Power Transmission Ring and Diaphragm Form Membrane
Couplings
Types:
M, H, T, L Series
Section 2.0 - Applicable Harmonised Standards

ISO13709 (API 610) for centrifugal pumps
ISO14691 couplings for - General-purpose applications
ISO10441 (API 671) (opt) couplings for - Special-purpose applications
Section 3.0 - Declaration:

We, John Crane declare that under our sole responsibility for the supply of
the machinery defined in Section 1.0 above, the said machinery parts are
intended to be incorporated into other machinery or assembled with other
machinery to constitute machinery as covered by this Directive.
The machinery parts, covered by this declaration must not be put into
service until the machinery into which it is to be incorporated has been
declared in conformity with the provisions of the Directive.
Signed: Date: 3rd Sept 2009
P. D. Carlisle (Product Line Director – Couplings)

VFD IOM
This documentation pertains to
Order number: 0001483667-000020
Agiba Petroleum
Agiba Petroleum
SINAMICS PERFECT HARMONY GH180

Medium-Voltage Drive
Type 6SR41022ND417FG0-Z
Edition 09/2016
siemens.com
07.09.2016 13:44
V13.00
Introduction 1
Safety Notes 2
Description 3
SINAMICS PERFECT HARMONY
GH180
Preparing for Use 4
Medium-Voltage Drive
6SR41022ND417FG0-Z 5
Assembly
Electrical Connections 6
Commissioning 7
Operation 8
Maintenance 9
Spare Parts 10
Disposal and Recycling 11
This documentation pertains to Service and Support A

Order number: 0001483667-000020
Agiba Petroleum Technical Data B

Agiba Petroleum
Quality C
Abbreviations D
Edition 09/2016
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.
DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.
WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.
CAUTION
indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.
NOTICE
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be
used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property
damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified
personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding
potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:
WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or
approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.
Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication
may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described.
Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in
this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions.
Siemens AG Document order number: 0001483667-000020 Copyright © Siemens AG 2016.

Process Industries and Drives Ⓟ 09/2016 Subject to change All rights reserved
Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Table of contents
1 Introduction.................................................................................................................................................13
1.1 About these instructions.........................................................................................................13
1.2 Text format features...............................................................................................................14
1.3 Warning symbols on the device.............................................................................................15
1.4 Introduction............................................................................................................................16
2 Safety Notes...............................................................................................................................................17
2.1 General Safety Information....................................................................................................17
2.2 Safety Concept.......................................................................................................................18
2.3 Observing the Five Safety Rules............................................................................................19
2.4 Safety Information and Warnings...........................................................................................20
2.5 ESD-sensitive Components...................................................................................................22
2.6 Electromagnetic Fields in Electrical Power Engineering Installations ...................................24
2.7 Information for nominated persons in control of an electrical installation...............................25
2.7.1 Security information...............................................................................................................25
3 Description..................................................................................................................................................27
3.1 Cabinet Details.......................................................................................................................27
3.1.1 Supply Scope ........................................................................................................................27
3.1.2 Input / Output Section............................................................................................................27
3.1.3 Cell Section............................................................................................................................27
3.1.4 Control Section.......................................................................................................................28
3.1.4.1 Control Section.......................................................................................................................28
3.1.4.2 Control Door Cabinet Components........................................................................................30
3.1.5 Cooling Section......................................................................................................................32
3.1.6 Description of the components...............................................................................................35
3.1.6.1 Internal wiring with halogen-free cables.................................................................................35
3.1.6.2 CE certificate..........................................................................................................................35
3.1.6.3 EMC filter...............................................................................................................................35
3.1.6.4 Ethernet port connection mounted on the door (option G47) ................................................36
3.1.6.5 Electrical door interlocks........................................................................................................36
3.1.7 Description of the option codes..............................................................................................36
3.1.7.1 Control voltage AC 12 V internal (option K69).......................................................................36
3.1.7.2 Control voltage DC 24 V for digital inputs/outputs (option K73).............................................36
3.1.7.3 Cabinet anti-condensation heating, temperature-monitored (option L55)..............................37
3.1.7.4 Pt100 evaluation unit with 6 inputs and 2 analog outputs (option L93)..................................37
3.1.7.5 Gland plates (option M35)......................................................................................................38
3.1.7.6 IP42 degree of protection (option M42)..................................................................................38
3.1.7.7 Redundant fan (Option M61).................................................................................................38
3.1.7.8 Controlled outgoing circuit for auxiliary equipment 230 V 1 AC or 120 V 1 AC (option N35)......38
3.1.7.9 Motor-side grounding switch (option N45).............................................................................39
SINAMICS PERFECT HARMONY GH180 6SR41022ND417FG0-Z Agiba Petroleum Agiba Petroleum

Operating Instructions Rev.201609071344 N-H91483667020001 5
Table of contents
4 Preparing for Use.......................................................................................................................................41

4.1 Requirements for installation location....................................................................................41
4.2 Checking on delivery..............................................................................................................42
4.3 The purpose of shock and tilt indicators.................................................................................43
4.4 Monitoring the Transport........................................................................................................44
4.5 Transportation........................................................................................................................47
4.5.1 Transporting the cabinet units................................................................................................47
4.5.2 Transport Using a Crane........................................................................................................48
4.5.3 Transport Using a Fork Lift Truck...........................................................................................49
4.5.4 Definition of a packed and unpacked device..........................................................................51
4.5.5 Transport markings................................................................................................................51
4.5.6 Transport requirements..........................................................................................................51
4.5.7 Take the center of gravity into account..................................................................................52
4.5.8 Transport with a fork-lift truck.................................................................................................52
4.5.9 Transport with a crane...........................................................................................................53
4.5.10 Using lifting rods.....................................................................................................................54
4.5.10.1 Force absorption....................................................................................................................54
4.5.10.2 Using lifting rods.....................................................................................................................54
4.6 Receiving and Unpacking......................................................................................................56
4.6.1 Receiving...............................................................................................................................56
4.6.2 Unpacking..............................................................................................................................56
4.7 Off-Loading............................................................................................................................58
4.7.1 Off-Loading............................................................................................................................58
4.8 Transportation and Handling..................................................................................................59
4.8.1 Transporting the cabinet units................................................................................................59
4.8.2 Transport Using a Crane........................................................................................................60
4.8.3 Transport Using a Fork Lift Truck...........................................................................................61
5 Assembly....................................................................................................................................................63
5.1 Protective Earthing Bars Connection.....................................................................................63
5.2 Assembly instructions............................................................................................................64
5.2.1 Requirements for the installation location..............................................................................64
5.2.2 Required tools........................................................................................................................64
5.2.3 Combining several Transport Units........................................................................................64
5.2.4 Unlocking the Power Section Doors manually.......................................................................65
5.2.5 Connecting the Transport Units and Power Section Cables..................................................66
5.2.6 Connecting the Transport Units.............................................................................................68
5.2.7 Connecting the Power Section...............................................................................................69
5.2.8 Installing the Fans (IP42).......................................................................................................70
5.2.9 Closing the Cabinet Units.......................................................................................................71
5.2.10 Connecting the Interface Terminals.......................................................................................71
6 Electrical Connections................................................................................................................................73
6.1 General Electrical ..................................................................................................................73
6.2 Installation External Wiring ...................................................................................................74
6.3 Grounding, Cabling, and Shielding Recommendations.........................................................76

6 Operating Instructions Rev.201609071344 N-H91483667020001
Table of contents
6.4 Electromagnetic compatibility.................................................................................................79

6.5 Terminal Blocks......................................................................................................................81
6.6 Cable Gland Plates Removal and Installation Guidelines......................................................82
6.7 Closing the make-proof grounding switch..............................................................................83
6.8 E-Stops..................................................................................................................................85
6.9 Circuit Breaker (provided by the customer)............................................................................86
7 Commissioning...........................................................................................................................................87
7.1 RCD Compatibility..................................................................................................................87
7.2 Cell Reforming.......................................................................................................................88
8 Operation....................................................................................................................................................89
8.1 Operating the Drive................................................................................................................89
8.2 Major Drive Faults and Alarms...............................................................................................90
8.2.1 Faults / Alarms Types / Responses.......................................................................................90
8.2.2 External Serial Communications Related Faults....................................................................91
8.2.3 Input Transformer Temperature Related................................................................................91
8.2.4 Modulator Related Cell Faults................................................................................................92
8.2.5 Low Voltage Power Supply Related Faults............................................................................92
8.2.6 User Faults and Alarms..........................................................................................................92
8.2.7 User Defined Faults...............................................................................................................93
8.2.8 Input Line Disturbance Faults and Alarms.............................................................................93
8.2.9 Motor Output Related Faults and Alarms...............................................................................94
8.2.10 Dedicated I/O For Input Protection.........................................................................................96
8.2.11 Dedicated I/O For Input Protection (NXGpro)........................................................................97
8.2.12 Input Over-Voltage Fault........................................................................................................97
8.2.13 Speed Rollback......................................................................................................................98
8.2.14 Disabling the Speed Rollup....................................................................................................98
8.2.15 Synchronous Transfer Related Faults....................................................................................99
8.2.16 Unexpected Output Conditions..............................................................................................99
8.2.17 Fault Reset...........................................................................................................................101
8.3 General Troubleshooting Information...................................................................................102
8.3.1 Handling General Cell and Power Circuitry Faults...............................................................102
8.3.2 Cell Over Temperature Faults..............................................................................................104
8.3.3 Overvoltage Faults...............................................................................................................105
9 Maintenance.............................................................................................................................................107
9.1 Safety instructions for maintenance.....................................................................................107
9.2 Door Access.........................................................................................................................110
9.2.1 Unlocking the doors.............................................................................................................110
9.2.2 Closing the make-proof grounding switch............................................................................110
9.3 Preventive Maintenance.......................................................................................................112
9.3.1 Inspection.............................................................................................................................112
9.3.2 Preventive Maintenance Checklist.......................................................................................112
9.3.3 Visual Inspections................................................................................................................113
9.3.3.1 Equipment for visual inspections..........................................................................................113
9.3.3.2 Checking the isolating clearances........................................................................................113

Table of contents
9.3.3.3 Checking hoisting solenoids and security bolts....................................................................114

9.3.3.4 Checking the plug connections............................................................................................114
9.3.3.5 Checking the cable and screw terminals..............................................................................114
9.3.3.6 Checking the filter mats........................................................................................................114
9.4 Touch-Up Paint....................................................................................................................115
9.5 Cleaning...............................................................................................................................116
9.5.1 Contact for Cleaning Measures............................................................................................116
9.5.2 Removing Dust Deposits......................................................................................................116
9.6 Repair and Replace.............................................................................................................117
9.6.1 Safety-relevant Checks........................................................................................................117
9.6.2 Maintenance and Earthing Procedure..................................................................................118
9.6.3 Part Replacement ...............................................................................................................120
9.6.4 Replacing the Filter Mats.....................................................................................................120
9.6.5 Replacing the Control Fuse..................................................................................................122
9.6.6 Replacing the Door-Mounted Keypad and Operator Panel..................................................123
9.6.7 Removing the Power Cell Procedure...................................................................................124
9.6.8 Returning the Power Cell to Siemens..................................................................................127
9.6.9 Replacing the Compact Flash Card (NXGII)........................................................................128
9.6.10 Installing Peferct Harmony Power Cells...............................................................................129
9.6.11 Replacing Cell Input Power Fuses.......................................................................................129
9.6.12 Replacing Cell Input Power Fuses Assembly......................................................................131
9.6.13 Printed Circuit Board Replacement Procedure (NXGII).......................................................132
10 Spare Parts...............................................................................................................................................137
10.1 Spare parts list.....................................................................................................................137
11 Disposal and Recycling............................................................................................................................143
11.1 Disposing of Device Components........................................................................................143
11.2 Disposing of Packaging........................................................................................................144
A Service and Support.................................................................................................................................145
A.1 Siemens Industry Online Support (order documentation)....................................................145
B Technical Data..........................................................................................................................................147
B.1 Standards and regulations...................................................................................................147
B.2 Storage, Transport and Operation Ambient Conditions.......................................................148
B.3 Power Cell Specifications.....................................................................................................150
B.3.1 Power Cell Specifications Table ..........................................................................................150
B.4 System Specifications..........................................................................................................152
B.4.1 15 Cell System Specifications..............................................................................................152
B.4.2 24 Cell System Specifications..............................................................................................154
B.5 Output Filters Data...............................................................................................................155
B.5.1 9 Cell Output Filter, Capacitance.........................................................................................155
B.5.2 12 Cell Output Filter, Capacitance ......................................................................................156
B.5.3 15 Cell Output Filter, Capacitance.......................................................................................156
B.5.4 24 Cell Output Filters, Capacitance.....................................................................................157
B.5.5 9 Cell Output Filter, Inductance............................................................................................158
B.5.6 12 Cell Output Filter, Inductance..........................................................................................159

Table of contents

B.6 Ingress Protection (IP) Ratings............................................................................................162
B.7 Technical data and drawings...............................................................................................164
B.7.1 Plant-specific data................................................................................................................164
B.7.2 Layout diagrams, dimension drawings.................................................................................170
B.7.2.1 Layout diagram....................................................................................................................170
B.7.2.2 Dimension drawing...............................................................................................................177
B.7.3 Circuit diagrams and charts.................................................................................................183
B.7.3.1 Interconnection diagram.......................................................................................................183
B.7.3.2 Circuit manual......................................................................................................................187
C Quality......................................................................................................................................................249
C.1 CE Marking and Directives for SINAMICS PERFECT HARMONY GH180 Products..........249
C.1.1 CE Marking on Power Drive Systems (PDS).......................................................................249
C.1.2 Directives that apply to the Power Drive System (PDS)......................................................251
C.1.3 CE Marking..........................................................................................................................252
C.2 Motor Compatibility..............................................................................................................253
C.3 IEEE 519 Conformance.......................................................................................................255
C.4 Quality documents...............................................................................................................257
C.4.1 EC declaration of conformity................................................................................................257
C.4.2 Factory certificate of Electromagnetic Compatibility............................................................267
C.4.3 Routine test certificate..........................................................................................................276
D Abbreviations............................................................................................................................................279
D.1 Abbreviations.......................................................................................................................279
Glossary...................................................................................................................................................285
Index.........................................................................................................................................................297
Tables
Table 3-1 Outgoing circuit for auxiliary equipment (option N35).................................................................39

Table 3-2 T-X30 terminal strip for connecting auxiliary equipment.............................................................39
Table 6-1 Drive Torque Specifications (Zinc-Plated Hardware and Electrical Connections Only)..............74
Table 6-2 Drive Torque Specifications (Stainless Steel Hardware, Mechanical Connections)...................75
Table 6-3 Control Signal Cabling General Guidelines.................................................................................78
Table 8-1 Fault / Alarm Types and Responses...........................................................................................90
Table 8-2 External Serial Communication Related Faults...........................................................................91
Table 8-3 Input Transformer Temperature Related Faults and Alarms Table.............................................91
Table 8-4 Modulator Related Faults and Alarms ........................................................................................92
Table 8-5 Low Voltage Power Supply Related Faults.................................................................................92
Table 8-6 Input Line Disturbance Faults and Alarms .................................................................................93
Table 8-7 Motor Output Related Faults and Alarms....................................................................................94
Table 8-8 Speed Rollup Control Flags........................................................................................................99

Table of contents
Table 8-9 Synchronous Transfer Related Faults Table...............................................................................99

Table 8-10 Operation Mode Displays -- Line 1............................................................................................100
Table 8-11 Mode of Operation, Mode Displays -- Line 2 ...........................................................................100
Table B-1 Standards and conformity.........................................................................................................147
Table B-2 General Ambient Conditions.....................................................................................................148
Table B-3 Power Cell Frame Size 1 ..........................................................................................................150
Table B-4 15-Cell System Parameters......................................................................................................152
Table B-5 24-Cell System Parameters......................................................................................................154
Table B-6 9-Cell Output Filter, Capacitance (40-260A).............................................................................155
Table B-7 12-Cell Output Filter, Capacitance............................................................................................156
Table B-10 9-Cell Output Filter, Inductance.................................................................................................158
Table B-11 Twelve Cell Output Filter, Inductance.......................................................................................159
Table B-12 Fifteen Cell Output Filter, Inductance........................................................................................160
Table B-13 Twenty-Four Cell Output Filter, Inductance...............................................................................161
Table D-1 Commonly Used Abbreviations.................................................................................................279
Figures
Figure 2-1 ESD Protective Measures...........................................................................................................23

Figure 3-1 Multi-Language Keypad and Display Interface............................................................................30
Figure 3-2 Cabinet anti-condensation heating..............................................................................................37
Figure 4-1 Transport Indicators....................................................................................................................44
Figure 4-2 Back view....................................................................................................................................48
Figure 4-3 Proper Fork Lift Handling and Dimensions..................................................................................50
Figure 4-4 Example Illustration of centers of gravity.....................................................................................52
Figure 4-5 Sticker.........................................................................................................................................54
Figure 4-6 Securing the lifting rods...............................................................................................................55
Figure 4-7 Back view....................................................................................................................................60
Figure 4-8 Proper Fork Lift Handling and Dimensions..................................................................................62
Figure 5-1 Combining power cell cabinet and transformer cabinet (back view)...........................................65
Figure 5-2 Orifice for opening the doors manually........................................................................................66
Figure 5-3 Connecting the transport units....................................................................................................68
Figure 5-4 Installing the fans........................................................................................................................70
Figure 5-5 Example: Back view of power cell cabinet (without fans)............................................................71
Figure 5-6 Connecting the interface terminals..............................................................................................72
Figure 6-1 Grounding of cable shields when multiple sections (or splices) are used...................................77
Figure 6-2 Make-proof grounding switch......................................................................................................84

Table of contents
Figure 8-1 Keypad Mode Display.................................................................................................................99

Figure 8-2 Excessive Drive Loss Protection...............................................................................................106
Figure 9-1 Make-proof grounding switch....................................................................................................111
Figure 9-2 Output Cable to Motor...............................................................................................................118
Figure 9-3 DC Bus View.............................................................................................................................126
Figure 9-4 Location of CompactFlash card on the Control Microprocessor Board.....................................128
Figure 9-5 Cut-Out View of Fuse Assembly...............................................................................................131
Figure 9-6 Master Control Chassis.............................................................................................................134
Figure C-1 Power Drive System..................................................................................................................250
Figure C-2 Overview of PDS containing the SINAMICS PERFECT HARMONY BDM and CDM...............251
Figure C-3 CE Mark....................................................................................................................................252
Figure C-4 Results: Harmonic Voltage Factor for 9 Cell Air-Cooled Principle............................................253
Figure C-5 Results: 9-Cell - Harmonic Current Distortion (TDD < %) ........................................................255

Table of contents

Introduction 1
These instructions describe the drive and explain how to handle it, from initial delivery to final
disposal of the equipment. Keep these instructions for later use.
Read these instructions before you handle the drive and follow the instructions. The
instructions contain information about the safe handling of the drive as well as its components
and modules. They provide information on assembling, installing, and maintaining the
equipment properly.
If you have suggestions for improving the document, please contact our Service Center.

Introduction
1.2 Text format features
1.2 Text format features
Text format features

The warning notice system is explained on the rear of the inside front. Always follow the safety
instructions and notices in these instructions.
In addition to the safety-related warning notices which you must read, you will find the text in
these instructions is formatted in the following way:
1. Handling instructions are always formatted as a numbered list. Always perform the steps
in the order given.
● Lists are formatted as bulleted lists.
– Lists on the second level are hyphenated.
Note
A Note is an important item of information about the product, handling of the product or the
relevant section of the document. Notes provide you with help or further suggestions/ideas.

Introduction
1.3 Warning symbols on the device
1.3 Warning symbols on the device

Please observe the warning symbols attached to the device. The warning symbols have the
following meaning:
Warning symbol Meaning

Warning: Voltage
Warning: Hot surface
General warning symbol: Observe the explanations about the hazard on the
device labels.
For transportation, observe the "transportation markings" on the device packaging.

Introduction
1.4 Introduction
1.4 Introduction
About This Manual

This manual provides customer documentation for the SINAMICS PERFECT HARMONY
GH180 Variable Frequency Drive (VFD).
The content of this manual provides standard information as well as descriptions of all available
options for this product line. The contents also provides safety warning and notes, preparation
for use, assembly/installation, electrical, commissioning, operation, maintenance, spare parts,
and disposal information. The latter pages of this manual contain appendices for specific
technical documents, support services information, technical drawings, and other relevant data.
This manual is intended for use by trained personnel having unique job functions and
qualifications since there are areas on the VFD that are hazardous and therefore may cause
death or serious bodily harm to personnel and also cause serious damage to the Drive.
The manual is also intended for use by planners, project engineers, installation personnel,
programmers, commissioning personnel, operators, service and maintenance personnel.
This documentation contains the most important safety-related information for the SINAMICS
PERFECT HARMONY GH180 VFD. It is important supplementary information, but is not a
replacement for the operating instructions nor the other product documentation on your CD.
WARNING
Familiarity with the Product Documentation
Only the complete product documentation will allow you to assemble and install the
equipment, to put it into operation and to maintain it correctly and safely.
Incorrect work on the equipment can result in death, severe injury or material damage.
Always refer to the operating instructions when working on the equipment. You will find the
operating instructions and other equipment information about your product that you will need
on the CD supplied with the Drive.
Variable Frequency Drive Introduction

A variable frequency drive (VFD) system controls the rotational speed and torque of an
alternating current (AC) electric motor by adjusting the frequency and voltage of the electrical
power supplied to the motor. In an AC motor, frequency determines the motor speed.

Safety Notes 2
2.1 General Safety Information
Proper Use
SINAMICS PERFECT HARMONY GH180 medium voltage drives must always be installed in
closed electrical operating areas. The drive is connected to the industrial network via a circuit-
breaker.
The specific transport conditions must be observed when the equipment is transported. The
equipment shall be assembled/installed and the separate cabinet units connected properly by
cable and/or busbar in accordance with the assembly/installation instructions. The relevant
instructions regarding correct storage, EMC-compliant installation, cabling, shielding and
grounding and an adequate auxiliary power supply must be strictly observed. Fault-free
operation is also dependent on careful operation and maintenance.
The power sections are designed for variable-speed drives use with synchronous and
asynchronous motors. Operating modes, overload conditions, load cycles, and ambient
conditions different to those described in this document are allowed only by special
arrangement with the manufacturer.
Commissioning should only be carried out by trained service personnel in accordance with the
commissioning instructions.
System components such as circuit-breaker, transformer, cables, cooling unit, motor, speed
sensors, etc., must be matched to VFD operation. System configuration may only be carried
out by an experienced system integrator.
See also
Safety instructions for maintenance (Page 107)

Safety Notes
2.2 Safety Concept
2.2 Safety Concept

The medium-voltage variable frequency drive (VFD) and its components are subject to a
comprehensive safety concept which, when properly implemented, ensures safe installation,
operation, servicing, and maintenance.
The safety concept encompasses safety components and functions to protect the device and
operators.
The VFD is also equipped with monitoring functions to protect external components.
The VFD operates safely when the interlock and protection systems are functioning properly.
Nevertheless, there are areas on the medium-voltage drive that are hazardous for personnel
and that can cause material damage if the safety instructions described in this section and
throughout the product documentation are not strictly observed.

Safety Notes
2.3 Observing the Five Safety Rules
2.3 Observing the Five Safety Rules

There are five safety rules that must always be observed to assure not only personal safety,
but to prevent material damage as well. Always obey safety-related labels located on the
product itself and always read and understand each safety precaution prior to operating or
working on the drive.
The five safety rules:
1. Disconnect the system.
2. Protect against reconnection.
3. Make sure that the equipment is de-energized.
4. Apply grounding means.
5. Cover or enclose adjacent components that are still live.
DANGER
Danger Due to High Voltages
High voltages cause death or serious injury if the safety instructions are not observed or if
the equipment is handled incorrectly.
Potentially fatal voltages occur when this equipment is in operation which can remain present
even after the VFD is switched off.
Ensure that only qualified and trained personnel carry out work on the equipment.
Follow the five safety rules during each stage of the work.

Safety Notes
2.4 Safety Information and Warnings
DANGER
Hazardous Voltage!
● Always follow the proper lock-out/tag-out procedures before beginning any maintenance
or troubleshooting work on the VFD.
● Always follow standard safety precautions and local codes during installation of external
wiring. The installation must follow wiring practices and insulation systems as specified in
IEC 61800-5-1.
● Hazardous voltages may still exist within the VFD cabinets even when the disconnect
switch is open (off) and the supply power is shut off.
● Only qualified individuals should install, operate, troubleshoot, and maintain this VFD. A
qualified individual is "a person, who is familiar with the construction and operation of the
equipment and the hazards involved."
● Always work with one hand, wear electrical safety gloves, wear insulated electrical hazard
rated safety shoes, and safety goggles. Also, always work with another person present.
● Always use extreme caution when handling or measuring components that are inside the
enclosure. Be careful to prevent meter leads from shorting together or from touching other
terminals.
● Use only instrumentation (e.g., meters, oscilloscopes, etc.) intended for high voltage
measurements (that is, isolation is provided inside the instrument, not provided by isolating
the chassis ground of the instrument).
● Never assume that switching off the input disconnector will remove all voltage from internal
components. Voltage is still present on the terminals of the input disconnector. Also, there
may be voltages present that are applied from other external sources.
● Never touch anything within the VFD cabinets until verifying that it is neither thermally hot
nor electrically alive.
● Never remove safety shields (marked with a HIGH VOLTAGE sign) or attempt to measure
points beneath the shields.
● Never operate the VFD with cabinet doors open. The only exception is the control cabinet
which contains extra low voltages (ELV).
● Never connect any grounded (i.e., non-isolated) meters or oscilloscopes to the system.
● Never connect or disconnect any meters, wiring, or printed circuit boards while the VFD
is energized.
● Never defeat the instrument’s grounding.
● When a system is configured with VFD bypass switchgear (e.g. contactors between line
and motor, and VFD and motor), these switches should be interlocked so that the line
voltage is never applied to the VFD output if the medium input voltage is removed from
the VFD.

Safety Notes
WARNING
Potential Arc Hazard
● Arcing can result in damage to property, serious injury and even death.
● The equipment has not been tested and rated for arc flash protection.
● Avoiding arc hazard risks is dependent upon proper installation and maintenance.
● Incorrectly applied equipment, incorrectly selected, connected or unconnected cables, or
the presence of foreign materials can cause arcing in the equipment.
● Follow all applicable precautionary rules and guidelines as used in working with medium
voltage equipment.
● The equipment may be used only:
– for the applications defined as suitable in the technical description.
– in combination with equipment and components supplied by other manufacturers which
have been approved and recommended by Siemens.
Additional safety precautions and warnings appear throughout this manual. These important
messages should be followed to reduce the risk of personal injury or equipment damage.
WARNING
Obey Rules to Avoid Risk of Death
● Always comply with local codes and requirements if disposal of failed components is
necessary.
● Always ensure the use of an even and flat truck bed to transport the VFD system. Before
unloading, be sure that the concrete pad is level for storage and permanent positioning.
● Always confirm proper tonnage ratings of cranes, cables, and hooks when lifting the VFD
system. Dropping the cabinet or lowering it too quickly could damage the unit.
● Never disconnect control power while medium voltage is energized. This could cause
severe system overheating and/or damage.
● Never store flammable material in, on, or near the drive enclosure. This includes
equipment drawings and manuals.
● Never use fork trucks to lift cabinets that are not equipped with lifting tubes. Be sure that
the fork truck tines fit the lifting tubes properly and are the appropriate length.

Safety Notes
2.5 ESD-sensitive Components
Guidelines for Handling Electrostatic Sensitive Devices (ESD)
NOTICE
ESD Sensitive Equipment
● Always be aware of electrostatic discharge (ESD) when working near or touching
components inside the VFD cabinet. The printed circuit boards contain components that
are sensitive to electrostatic discharge. Handling and servicing of components that are
sensitive to ESD should be done only by qualified personnel and only after reading and
understanding proper ESD techniques. The following ESD guidelines should be observed.
Following these rules can greatly reduce the possibility of ESD damage to printed circuit
board (PCB) components.
● Always transport static sensitive equipment in antistatic bags.
● Always use a soldering iron that has a grounded tip. Also, use either a metallic vacuum-
style plunger or copper braid when desoldering.
● Ensure that anyone handling the printed circuit boards is wearing a properly grounded
static strap. The wrist strap should be connected to ground through a 1 Megohm resistor.
Grounding kits are available commercially through most electronic wholesalers.
● Static charge build-up can be removed from a conductive object by touching the object
with a properly grounded piece of metal.
● When handling a PC board, always hold the card by its edges.
● Do not slide printed circuit boards (PCBs) across any surface (e.g., a table or work bench).
If possible, perform PCB maintenance at a workstation that has a conductive covering that
is grounded through a 1 Megohm resistor. If a conductive tabletop cover is unavailable, a
clean steel or aluminum tabletop is an excellent substitute.
● Avoid plastic Styrofoam™, vinyl and other non-conductive materials. They are excellent
static generators and do not give up their charge easily.
● When returning components to Siemens Industry, Inc. always use static-safe packing.
This limits any further component damage due to ESD.
Components that can be destroyed by electrostatic discharge (ESD)
NOTICE
Electrostatic discharge
Electronic components can be destroyed in the event of improper handling, transporting,
storage, and shipping.
Pack the electronic components in appropriate ESD packaging; e.g. ESD foam, ESD
packaging bags and ESD transport containers.
To protect your equipment against damage, follow the instructions given below.

Safety Notes
● Avoid physical contact with electronic components. If you need to perform absolutely
essential work on these components, then you must wear one of the following protective
gear:
– Grounded ESD wrist strap
– ESD shoes or ESD shoe grounding strips if there is also an ESD floor.
● Do not place electronic components close to data terminals, monitors or televisions.
Maintain a minimum clearance to the screen (> 10 cm).
● Electronic components should not be brought into contact with electrically insulating
materials such as plastic foil, plastic parts, insulating table supports or clothing made of
synthetic fibers.
● Place components in contact with ESD-suited materials e.g. ESD tables, ESD surfaces,
ESD packaging.
● Measure on the components only if one of the following conditions is met:
– The measuring device is grounded with a protective conductor, for example.
– The measuring head of a floating measuring device has been discharged directly before
the measurement.
The necessary ESD protective measures for the entire working range for electrostatically
sensitive devices are illustrated once again in the following drawings. Precise instructions for
ESD protective measures are specified in the standard DIN EN 61340-5-1.
1 Sitting
2 Standing
3 Standing/sitting
a Conductive floor surface, only effective in conjunction with ESD shoes or ESD shoe grounding
strips
b ESD furniture
c ESD shoes or ESD shoe grounding strips are only effective in conjunction with conductive floor‐
ing
d ESD clothing
e ESD wristband
f Cabinet ground connection
Figure 2-1 ESD Protective Measures

Safety Notes
2.6 Electromagnetic Fields in Electrical Power Engineering Installations
2.6 Electromagnetic Fields in Electrical Power Engineering Installations
WARNING
Electromagnetic fields "electro smog" when operating electrical power engineering
installations
Electromagnetic fields are generated during operation of electrical power engineering
installations.
Electromagnetic fields can interfere with electronic devices, which could cause them to
malfunction. For example, the operation of heart pacemakers can be impaired, potentially
leading to damage to a person's health or even death. It is therefore forbidden for persons
with heart pacemakers to enter these areas.
The plant operator is responsible for taking appropriate measures (labels and hazard
warnings) to adequately protect operating personnel and others against any possible risk.
● Observe the relevant nationally applicable health and safety regulations. For example, in
Germany, "electromagnetic fields" are subject to regulations BGV B11 and BGR B11
stipulated by the German statutory industrial accident insurance institution.
● Display adequate hazard warning notices on the installation.
● Place barriers around hazardous areas.
● Take measures, e.g. using shields, to reduce electromagnetic fields at their source.
● Ensure personnel are wearing the appropriate protective gear.

Safety Notes
2.7 Information for nominated persons in control of an electrical installation
2.7 Information for nominated persons in control of an electrical

installation
2.7.1 Security information

Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the
secure operation of plants, systems, machines and networks.
In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is
necessary to implement – and continuously maintain – a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial
security concept. Siemens’ products and solutions only form one element of such a concept.
Customer is responsible to prevent unauthorized access to its plants, systems, machines and
networks. Systems, machines and components should only be connected to the enterprise
network or the internet if and to the extent necessary and with appropriate security measures
(e.g. use of firewalls and network segmentation) in place.
Additionally, Siemens’ guidance on appropriate security measures should be taken into
account. For more information about industrial security, please visit:
http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity
Siemens’ products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more secure.
Siemens strongly recommends to apply product updates as soon as available and to always
use the latest product versions. Use of product versions that are no longer supported, and
failure to apply latest updates may increase customer’s exposure to cyber threats.
To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS
Feed under:
http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity

Safety Notes
2.7 Information for nominated persons in control of an electrical installation

Description 3
3.1 Cabinet Details
3.1.1 Supply Scope

Standard Scope of Supply
The scope of supply for the air-cooled SINAMICS PERFECT HARMONY GH180 VFD System
Basic unit consists of multiple sections:
● Input / Output section
● Transformer section
● Cell section
● Control section
● Blowers
The standard core VFD enclosure is NEMA 1 Ventilated, and is provided with top and bottom
cable access plates, hinged doors with either mechanical or electrical key interlocks, and IP21
degree of protection. Please refer to the Options section of this manual to view other available
choices for items such as IP42 degree of protection, redundant cooling, etc.
3.1.2 Input / Output Section
Input / Output Section

● The Input / Output section primarily houses the line (L1-L3) side and load (T1-T3) side
connections.
● The bus connections are accessible by way of both top and bottom gland plates.
● The I/O section also contains a protective earth (PE).
3.1.3 Cell Section

The basic electrical diagrams for all SINAMICS PERFECT HARMONY GH180 systems are
similar. One of the most critical components of the drives is the power cell. The cell voltage
is 750V. Depending on the operating load voltage, 9, 12, 15, or 24 cells are used to develop
the multi-level PWM output waveform.
Each power cell input side is configured as a 6-pulse diode rectifier. Terminals are supplied
with power via a secondary winding of the transformer. The DC output of the rectifier is filtered

Description
3.1 Cabinet Details
via the capacitor bank and supplies power to a single-phase converter on the output side.
Output terminals of each cell are connected in series in each phase group.
Note
Discharging the DC Link
The power cells include discharge resistors to dissipate stored energy after the input voltage
is removed. The power cell DC bus voltage decays to less than 50 VDC in less than 10 minutes.
3.1.4 Control Section
3.1.4.1 Control Section
Coordinated Input Protection Scheme

The SINAMICS PERFECT HARMONY GH180 product uses the NXG controller with an
integral I/O system. The Control System continuously measures input currents and voltages
to the drive's input transformer and also protects against transformer secondary side faults
that cannot be seen by typical primary protection relaying.
Information such as efficiency, power factor, and harmonics are available to the user. Thus, it
is required that the drive input switchgear, if not supplied as standard, is interlocked to the
control system so that input medium voltage can be interrupted upon the rare event of such a
fault.
DANGER
Secondary Circuit Fault
It is required that the drive medium voltage switchgear be interlocked to the control system
so that the input medium voltage can be interrupted upon the rare event of such a fault.
Failure to integrate a medium voltage circuit breaking device, or contactor, may cause death,
serious personal injury, and damage to the drive.
The drive's medium voltage input switchgear (i.e. circuit breaker or contactor) trips when the
dry contact output, supplied standard with each drive, changes state. A change of state occurs
when the drive's input power and power factor do not fall within the range of designated hard-
coded normal operating conditions.

Description
3.1 Cabinet Details
7%
09,3%UHDNHU(QDEOH 3% ,'21;*,, /)5

0'2871;*SUR

① Ratings PB4E-Stop:
600 VAC, 10 Amp Cont., 12 Amp make, 1.2 Amp break
② Digital Outputs:
230 VAC, 1 AC
③ LFR N.C. Contacts:
30 VDC and 120 VAC, 10 A
100 VDC, 0.5 A
240 VAC, 7.5 A
If the drive exhibits excessive losses or reactive power, the NXG I/O digital output (IDO-14 in
NXGII / M1-DOUT in NXGpro) is opened and the dedicated NXG I/O digital output (IDO-15)
is closed as a one-shot pulse that latches the LFR coil. This action causes the Normally Closed
(N.C.) LFR contact to OPEN.
DANGER
MV IP Breaker Enable
This contact must be integrated with input switchgear to deactivate the drive input medium
voltage up on the rare event of a secondary circuit fault.
● Contacts close = Permissive to close breaker
● Contacts open = Trip breaker
Failure to integrate this contact as specified may cause death, serious personal injury and
damage to the drive.
Terminal Blocks
The Drive uses 8mm, 600 V terminal blocks fro the auxiliary input three-phase voltage (used
primarily for blower control). These terminals accept #8 - #22 AWG wire.
The single-phase control terminal blocks accept #12 - #22 AWG wire.
Auxiliary Voltage Transformer

The auxiliary voltage transformer steps customer-supplied three-phase auxiliary voltage down
to a single-phase 120 V for use with an NXG controller.

Description
3.1 Cabinet Details
Fuses
Three control fuses (2 primary, 1 secondary) located in the control wireway section of the drive
enclosure, protect the 500 VA transformer.
Note
Selection Option Code K79
With the selection of Option K79 (Auxiliary and Control Voltage Supply) is selected, there is
no Auxiliary Transformer installed. The customer supplies voltage to the drive.
3.1.4.2 Control Door Cabinet Components
Multi-Language Keypad
Multi-Language Keypad and Display Interface
2Q5HGZKHQFRQWUROSRZHU 2Q5HGZKHQIDXOWHGEOLQNV 2Q5HGZKHQGULYHLV

LVVXSSOLHG 5HGZKHQDODUPLVDFWLYHRU UXQQLQJ
XQDFNQRZOHGJHG
'LVSOD\[
FKDUDFWHUV 6WDWXVLQGLFDWRUV
5HG/('V
0RGHVRIRSHUDWLRQ
$XWRPDWLF .H\SDG
0DQXDO6WDUW
0DQXDO6WRS
Figure 3-1 Multi-Language Keypad and Display Interface

Description
3.1 Cabinet Details
Note
Potential Reduction in Keypad Capabilities for NXGII Control
Eagle control software before version 5.0 is compatible with the multi-language keypad, but
has reduced capabilities.
Eagle control software at version 5.0 or later is required to fully utilize the language display
capabilities of the multi-language keypad.
Keypad Details
Keypad Functions and Details

Use the keypad to:
● navigate through the menu system
● activate control functions
● reset the system after faults have occurred
● edit parameter values
● enter security access codes
● place the system in automatic, manual or stop mode.
Accessing Control Parameters and Functions via the Keypad

Use the keypad and display interface to access the control parameters and functions of the
drive.
Parameters are organized into logical groups and are accessible via a menu structure.
1. Navigate through the menu structure to the desired parameters, to view or edit parameters.
2. Use navigation arrow keys or special key sequences as short cuts. A summary of these
key sequences is given later in this chapter.
3. Use the [SHIFT] key in conjunction with the 10 numeric keys and the [ENTER] key to access
9 common system menus, a help display function and a [CANCEL] key.
Assigning Functions to the Keypad

The keypad contains 20 keys. Each of these keys has at least one function associated with it,
some keys have more functions. The following sections give descriptions and uses of each of
the keys on the keypad, as well as the diagnostic LEDs and the built-in display.

Description
3.1 Cabinet Details
CAUTION
Keypad Operation
Although the drive comes standard with a keypad interface, and the menu system is secured
with multiple, programmable password levels, for security or other reasons, the drive is
capable of running without the keypad. Switching components during operation may cause
personal injury or impair system functions. Never add or remove the keypad with power
applied to the control.
Off-Local-Remote Selector Switch

The Off-Local-Remote Selector is the default three-position mode select switch that is
mounted on the front of the Drive. If the switch is in the OFF position, the inverter output is
inhibited. If the switch is in the Remote position, the control uses either a Remote 4-20 mA DC
speed demand or a Network demand, depending on how the project SOP is written. Local
mode operation occurs if SW1 is not in the OFF or Remote position; and, the speed demand
is set by the Keypad operator .
Ethernet Port
Ethernet Port is included on the front door. It can be used for debugging or uploading/
downloading to and from the NXG Controller.
3.1.5 Cooling Section
Cooling System Components

The cooling system consists of several parts including blower(s). Each blower has three
suitably rated Class J time delay fuses, or a three-phase circuit breaker, that feeds an optional
line reactor.
Cooling System Function

The cooling system functions as follows:
● The line reactor connects to a motor starter that is controlled through the SOP of the NXG
controller.
● The output of the motor starter connects to a quick disconnect plug associated with that
blower.

Description
3.1 Cabinet Details
● The default SOP logic is such that upon energizing the control power, the blower operates
immediately.
● If the SOP logic controller detects a FAULT feedback, the redundant blower(s) is started
or else the drive trips on an ALL BLOWERS LOST fault, and the drive must be manually
reset. If the redundant blower also fails, the drive trips on ALL BLOWERS LOST fault.
Blowers
All SINAMICS PERFECT HARMONY GH180 air-cooled drives are force air-cooled. The
blower(s) are always shipped separately from the core enclosure.
An extremely important part of the installation process is making provisions for exhausting the
heat that is generated by the operation of the drive. Although the drive is highly efficient, there
may be as much as a 4.0% energy loss emitted in the form of heat from inside the system
cabinetry. This heat must be transmitted to the outdoor air or into the structure of the building
at a rate fast enough to prevent the ambient temperature from rising above the rated conditions.
Note
Air Inlet Cooling
The system integrator ensures proper cooling is provided at the air inlet of each drive.
The drive is a parallel path forced air-cooled system using electronically-commutated or across-
the-line blower(s). Each of the cells and the transformer are cooled in series or in parallel by
centralized exhaust blower(s). Parallel air cooling allows each component to have the same
inlet air temperature (close to the drive’s ambient temperature) independent of the other
components. The cell section has multiple inlet paths, generally feeding 1½ cells. The
transformer section has multiple air inlet paths. The transformer is baffled to force air through
the secondary coils and around the winding.
The cell section and transformer section exhaust air into an air duct. Each cell’s input and
output power connections are made at the rear of the cell via blind-mate power plugs. The
male connecting bus is located in line with the exhaust air of the cell. For systems with
mechanical cell bypass, the contactors are mounted on an additional bus, located in the rear
common exhaust air plenum. All of the bus and the contactors are therefore forced-air cooled,
but at an elevated ambient due to cell and transformer losses. Two phases of each cell’s inputs
are fused. The fuse ambient is the same as the drive’s ambient air temperature.
If redundant blowers are required, a cover plate is removed from the top of the enclosure and
a redundant blower cage assembly is installed. Dampers are installed at the base of the
redundant blower cage to prevent reverse air flow. The dampers are opened and closed based
on differential air pressure. The blower cage assembly design consists of a steel frame with
mesh on three sides (duct interface jobs require alternative pre-engineered blower cage).
Air is exhausted out of the front and sides of the cage. Air is not exhausted out of the back or
top of the cage (with the exception of rear duct cage).
Note
Upon customer request, design for a front or rear duct exhaust can be engineered. Contact
Siemens.

Description
3.1 Cabinet Details
A fault contact is wired into the NXG control I/O. If a redundant blower is selected, the control
cycles the blower periodically (generally every seven days) and toggles them upon receiving
a FAULT feedback from the blower.
NOTICE
Never energize the drive without operational blowers providing air flow.
The drive contains components that have losses in the IDLE state. Without air flow, these
losses may heat up components and eventually damage the drive over time.
Applying Medium Voltage without air flow will result in a trip from the Coordinated Input
Protection Scheme.
To remove the unit's latent heat, Siemens recommends running the blower for ten minutes
after removing Medium Voltage.
See also
Preparing for Use (Page 41)
Air-to-Air Heat Exchanged (W41) Drive Preparation
NOTICE
To avoid serious personal injury, accidental death, or major property damage, read and follow
all safety instructions in manual provided with heat exchanger. Maintain all safety labels in
good condition. If necessary, replace labels using provided part numbers.
Use of an air-to-air heat exchanger is an alternative solution to use of fans in air-cooled drives.
Whenever heat exchanger cooling method is selected by customer, the fans shipping split are
not required. Additional parts such as plenums and exhaust hood may be required. Some of
these parts may be shipping splits depending upon each specific design. Refer to project
specific outline and assembly drawings provided by Siemens for more detail.
Follow procedures in this manual and other respective manuals delivered with the drive for
additional information about handling, installation, commissioning and maintenance of drive.
Heat Exchanger
The heat exchanger may be shipped with or without the drive. It usually ships in multiple
shipping splits.
Before starting any work on the unit, be sure to review the heat exchanger manual. While
working with heat exchangers some items may require special attention. The following items
include, but are not limited to, those listed below:
● Initial inspection (including fans and blades)
● Handling
● Installation
● Sealing or water-proofing
● Ductwork installation

Description
3.1 Cabinet Details
Note
Refer to the heat exchanger manual for more details related to handling, assembly and start-
up of heat exchanger.
Heat exchanger units require periodic maintenance. This includes but is not limited to the areas
listed below:
● Ductwork seals
● Drains
● Filters
● Ambient air stream
● Drive cooling air stream
Note
Refer to the heat exchanger manual for details related to heat exchanger maintenance.
3.1.6 Description of the components
3.1.6.1 Internal wiring with halogen-free cables

The internal wiring of the drive consists entirely of halogen-free cables. The insulating materials
and the color coding correspond with the following IEC standards:
● EN50178/VDE0160 (IEC62103)
● EN60204-1/VDE0113-1 (IEC60204-1)
3.1.6.2 CE certificate
The drives manufactured in Nuremberg, Germany are always in conformance with CE.
This includes:
● EMC filter
● Electrical door interlock
3.1.6.3 EMC filter

The EMC filter is located behind the disconnector switch for the 3-phase control current. The
metal cable entry is used to insert the customer's input power cables and connect them to the
control current disconnector switch.

Description
3.1 Cabinet Details
3.1.6.4 Ethernet port connection mounted on the door (option G47)

Ethernet Port is included on the front door. It can be used for debugging or uploading/
downloading to and from the NXG controller.
3.1.6.5 Electrical door interlocks
Personnel protection
The electrical door interlock system prevents access to the energized sections in the drive as
long as hazardous voltages are present. This system also prevents the drive from being
switched on until all doors of the energized sections in the drive are closed.
It is possible to monitor the internal or external grounding switch (options N44, N45) .
For detailed information concerning the closing procedure refer to: Closing the make-proof
grounding switch (Page 110).
3.1.7 Description of the option codes
3.1.7.1 Control voltage AC 12 V internal (option K69)

The drive has an integrated control circuit transformer.
For further details see: Circuit diagrams and charts (Page 183)
3.1.7.2 Control voltage DC 24 V for digital inputs/outputs (option K73)

The drive is prepared for control voltage for DC 24 V.
For further details see: Circuit diagrams and charts (Page 183)

Description
3.1 Cabinet Details
3.1.7.3 Cabinet anti-condensation heating, temperature-monitored (option L55)

The anti-condensation heating is used at low ambient temperatures and high levels of humidity
to prevent condensation. The number of cabinet heaters installed depends on the number of
cabinet panels. A constant minimum temperature in the cabinet is ensured as the temperatures
of the anti-condensation heaters are automatically monitored using a thermostat. The anti-
condensation heating is controlled using a bimetallic switch that can be adjusted.
Figure 3-2 Cabinet anti-condensation heating
For further detail see Technical data and drawings. (Page 164)
3.1.7.4 Pt100 evaluation unit with 6 inputs and 2 analog outputs (option L93)
The Pt100 evaluation unit can monitor up to six sensors. The limit values can be programmed
by the user for each channel. In the
standard setting, the measuring channels are divided into two groups of three channels each.
With motors, for example, three Pt100 can be monitored in the stator windings and two Pt100
in the motor bearings. Channels that are not used can be suppressed using appropriate
parameter settings.

Description
3.1 Cabinet Details
The output relays are integrated into the internal fault and shutdown circuit of the drive.
Additionally two freely programmable analog outputs (0/4 mA to 20 mA and 0/2 V to 10 V) are
available.
Note
The analog outputs are not evaluated by the controller.
For further details see: Interconnection diagram.
3.1.7.5 Gland plates (option M35)

With this option the gland plate for input/output power is made of aluminum.
Note
Gland plates for control cables always are made of aluminum.
3.1.7.6 IP42 degree of protection (option M42)

This option increases the degree of protection of the converter from IP22 to IP42. Additional
close-meshed grilles where the air comes in and goes out prevent the ingress of solid matter
with diameters > 1.0 mm.
See also
Installing the Fans (IP42) (Page 70)
3.1.7.7 Redundant fan (Option M61)

To increase the plant availability, the drive can be fitted with an additional, redundant fan. If a
fan in the drive cabinet fails, the redundant fan is switched in by the drive controller without
this causing the drive. This prevents production failures or interruptions. The replacement of
the defective fan can be postponed to the next planned stoppage.
3.1.7.8 Controlled outgoing circuit for auxiliary equipment 230 V 1 AC or 120 V 1 AC (option N35)
This option provides a controlled output that is protected via the motor circuit breaker and is
used for operating external auxiliary equipment (e.g. separately-driven fan for motor, pumps,
and oil supplies).

Description
3.1 Cabinet Details
The contactor is energized by means of an ON command on the converter. The OFF command
deactivates the contactor.
Table 3-1 Outgoing circuit for auxiliary equipment (option N35)
Controlled outgoing circuit for auxiliary equipment Setting range of the motor circuit breaker
120 V 1 AC, 60 Hz, max. 1 KW
230 V 1 AC, 50 Hz, max. 1.2 KW
Table 3-2 T-X30 terminal strip for connecting auxiliary equipment
Supplying the auxiliary voltage Outgoing circuit for auxiliary equip‐ Feedback: auxiliary equipment ON
ment
Terminal Connector Terminal Connector Terminal Connector
.T–X30:6 L1 .T–X30:3 L1 .T–X30:1 Relay contact
.T–X30:7 L2 .T–X30:4 L2 .T–X30:2 max. 60 V DC
.T–X30:8 L3 .T–X30:5 L3
Note
The infeed required for the drive power supply must be provided externally.
3.1.7.9 Motor-side grounding switch (option N45)

Under the following circumstances, operating modes can occur for which there is the danger
that the motor returns power to the converter:
● Operating mode / variant of the load machine, e.g. drive group with gas turbine
● Type of drive machine, e.g. permanently excited motor
resulting in hazardous voltages.
When the make-proof grounding switch is closed, this option allows motor-driven make-proof
grounding switches that ground the motor-side output voltage to be controlled automatically.
The motor-driven make-proof grounding switches are installed in an additional cabinet.
For safety reasons, the converter controller prevents the make-proof grounding switches from
being switched when voltage is still present. Activation is integrated in the protection and
monitoring sequence of the converter.

Description
3.1 Cabinet Details

Preparing for Use 4
4.1 Requirements for installation location
SINAMICS PERFECT HARMONY GH180 medium voltage drives must always be installed in
closed electrical operating areas.
The operating areas must be dry and free of dust. The air supplied must not contain any
electrically conductive gas, vapors, or dust which could impair operation.
For information about permissible ambient and installation conditions, see the "Technical
specifications" section.

Preparing for Use
4.2 Checking on delivery
4.2 Checking on delivery
Checking on delivery for completeness

The drive systems are put together on an individual basis. When you take receipt of the
delivery, please check immediately whether the items delivered are in accordance with the
accompanying documents. Siemens will not accept any claims relating to items missing from
the delivery and which are submitted at a later date.
● Report any apparent transport damage to the delivery agent immediately. Never
commission a damaged motor.
● Report any apparent defects/missing components to the appropriate Siemens office
immediately.
The safety instructions are part of the scope of supply; keep them in a location where they can
be easily accessed.

Preparing for Use
4.3 The purpose of shock and tilt indicators
4.3 The purpose of shock and tilt indicators
The purpose of shock and tilt indicators

The unit is equipped with shock and tilt indicators to monitor for damage during transit. It is
essential that you check the shock and tilt indicators before commissioning the unit.
WARNING
Tripped shock and tilt indicators
Safe operation of the device is not guaranteed if the shock or tilt indicator has tripped
(responded)
● If one of the indicators has tripped, do not start commissioning.
● Inform Technical Support . Only specialist Siemens technicians/engineers can
recommend appropriate measures.
Note
Warranty
If one of the shock or tilt indicators has been tripped, then warranty is no longer valid from this
time onwards.

Preparing for Use
4.4 Monitoring the Transport

Converter cabinets are equipped with shock and tilt indicators to monitor damages during
transportation. The indicators can be removed after transport and commissioning.
Placement of the Indicators

Tip Indicators are placed in the upper third on the inside of the lockable doors.
Shock Indicators are placed in the lower range on the inside of the lockable doors.
7LS,QGLFDWRU
PP
6KRFN,QGLFDWRU
Figure 4-1 Transport Indicators

Preparing for Use
Proofing the Indicators before Commissioning

It is imperative to proof the indicators before commissioning the converter.
If there is any reaction of the indicator no further steps of commissioning are allowed to be
done.
The Indicators look like this, if they did not react:
,IWKHDUURZVKRZV
ZKLWHDERYHWKLV
OLQHWKHWLSLQGLFDWRU
GLGQRWUHDFW
$OORIRIWKHVHDUURZVDUHUHG
WKHLQGLFDWRUGLGQRWUHDFW
The Indicators look like this, if they did react:
,IWKHDUURZVKRZV
EOXHDERYHWKLVOLQH
WKHWLSLQGLFDWRUGLG
UHDFW
,IRQHRIWKHVHDUURZVJRWEODFN
WKHLQGLFDWRUGLGUHDFW

Preparing for Use
WARNING
Inform Technical Support (Hotline)
Only Siemens technical experts can advice appropriate or initiate necessary actions.
Commissioning the converter without inspection through Technical Support can not
guarantee save operating of the converter. Death or severe personal injury, as well as
property damage may result.
The warranty is exposed from this point of time on.
Inquiries can be made worldwide at three Technical Support Centers.

Telephone inquiries
● Europe and Africa time zone:
Tel.: +49 (0)180 50 50 222
If your order is managed by Siemens Nürnberg, please contact Mr. Josef Proesl first:
Tel: +49 911 433 9096
● Asia and Australia time zone:
Tel.: +86 1064 719 990
● America time zone:
Tel.: +1 423 262 2522
If your order is managed by Siemens Pittsburgh, please contact Mr. Dave Yerger first:
Tel: +1 724 339 8189
On the Internet worldwide:
www.siemens.com/automation/support‑request
The contacts may change. Please find the current contact partners in the Siemens AG A&D
service catalog:
www.automation.siemens.com/partner

Preparing for Use
4.5 Transportation
4.5 Transportation
4.5.1 Transporting the cabinet units

When the transport units are transported with a crane, note that force is applied via the
supporting frame of the cabinet. The supporting frame remains on the unit. The device is
mounted at the installation site via the supporting frame.
WARNING
Inadequately dimensioned lifting rods
Inadequately dimensioned lifting rods are liable to bend or break. The converter could drop
off the crane as a result, causing death, serious injury, or material damage.
Use suitable lifting rods for transportation. The weight of the converter is indicated on the type
plate.
CAUTION
Incorrect lifting
If the transport unit is lifted incorrectly, this can damage the decorative trim, cabinet doors,
or fans.
Protect the cabinet and protruding parts against damage. Always lift the transport units with
the appropriate spreading devices or hoisting tackle.
Procedure
1. Push the lifting rods through the holes.
2. Place the sling ropes on the ends of the lifting rods and secure the ends of the lifting rods
using the splint.
3. To lift the transport unit, use single sling ropes or two ropes with a cross stitch. Attach the
crane rope to the ends of the lifting rods and then lift the cabinet. Avoid displacing the center
of gravity or distorting the cabinet. When suspended, the cabinet must be parallel to the
ground.

Preparing for Use
4.5 Transportation
4.5.2 Transport Using a Crane
NOTICE
Minimum clearance between crane and cabinet
A minimum clearance of 51 ´´ (1.3 m) must be maintained to avoid deformation of the drive
cabinet.
If this minimum clearance cannot be maintained, spreader bars of suitable strength must be
used.
Drives up to 1 750 kVA, and a weight of approximately 7 000 kg (one transport unit)
Figure 4-2 Back view

Preparing for Use
4.5 Transportation
Drives from 2 000 kVA and approximately 7 100 kg weight (two transport units)

① Transformer cabinet (back view)

② Cell cabinet (back view)
4.5.3 Transport Using a Fork Lift Truck
Drives from 2 000 kVA and approximately 7 100 kg weight

If you use a fork lift truck, be sure that the tines keep the following measurements:
● Tine Length at least 40 " (1 000 mm) long
● Tine width maximum 7 " (180 mm)

Preparing for Use
4.5 Transportation
● Tine height maximum 2 " (50 mm)

● The tine spacing must be adjustable from 30 " to 50 " (760 mm to 1 270 mm)
WARNING
Transportation in accordance with proper procedures
The transport unit/cabinet is heavy. The center of gravity is in the upper half of the cabinet.
The equipment can tip over if it is not transported correctly or if the means of transport
used is not permittted.
Death, serious injury, or material damage can result.
Ensure that the transport unit/cabinet is only transported by trained personnel using a
permitted means of transport and permitted lifting equipment. The equipment must always
be positioned the right way up and must not be tipped.
6LGH
)RUN/LIW
7LQHVSDFLQJPXVWDGMXVWIURP 7UXFN
vvWRvvWRPP
:RRGHQ
%ORFN &*
7LQHZLGWKLVvvPPPD[ 6LGH

7LQHKHLJWKLVvvPPPD[
)RUN/LIW
7UXFN &*
7LQHOHQJKWPXVWEHDWOHDVW
vvPPORQJ
Figure 4-3 Proper Fork Lift Handling and Dimensions

Preparing for Use
4.5 Transportation
4.5.4 Definition of a packed and unpacked device

The terms are defined as follows in the following part of the instructions:
● "Transportation unit" refers to the unit before it has been unpacked
● "Cabinet" refers to the unit after it has been unpacked
4.5.5 Transport markings

The packing differs depending on the transport type and size. If not otherwise contractually
agreed, the packaging corresponds to the packing guidelines for International Standards for
Phytosanitary Measures (ISPM).
Comply with the images shown on the packaging. Their meaning is as follows:
This Fragile goods Keep dry Keep cool Center of Do not use Attach here
way up gravity hand hook
4.5.6 Transport requirements

● Persons driving cranes and fork-lift trucks must hold appropriate licenses.
● You must observe the specifications to avoid transport damage to the enclosure and you
must maintain the permissible climatic conditions during operation in accordance with
IEC 60721-3-1/2/3. Please also observe the "Technical specifications" instructions.
● When lifting the converter, use only approved and undamaged sling guides and spreaders
of sufficient rated capacity. Check these before using them. The weight of the converter is
specified on the rating plate.
● When lifting, refer to the information on the lifting plate or in "Technical data and drawings."
Comply with the specified spreading angles.
NOTICE
Avoid vibrations
Significant vibration during transportation and shocks when setting down can damage the
equipment.
Avoid vibrations and shocks.

Preparing for Use
4.5 Transportation
4.5.7 Take the center of gravity into account
WARNING
Non-observance of center of gravity specifications
The cabinet is heavy. The center of gravity can be in the upper half of the cabinet. The unit
can tip over if you transport it incorrectly – or if you use transport equipment that is not
permitted for the purpose. This can result in death, serious injury or material damage.
● Ensure that only trained personnel transport the device with approved transport equipment
and lifting tools.
● Observe the center of gravity specifications. A label or stamp is attached to each
transportation unit and precisely shows the center of gravity of the cabinet.
● Do not tilt the device or allow it to fall.
The following figure shows the centers of gravity as an example: Carefully note the centers of
gravity when performing any lifting or installation work.
)URQWYLHZ 6LGHYLHZ
Figure 4-4 Example Illustration of centers of gravity
4.5.8 Transport with a fork-lift truck
WARNING
Use of non-approved fork-lift trucks
If the forks are too short, this can cause the transport unit/cabinet to tip over resulting in death,
serious injury, or damage to the cabinet.
The forks of the truck must protrude at the rear of the transport pallet. The floor panels of the
transport units will not support a load.
Only use fork-lift trucks approved for this purpose to transport the units.
When the transport units are transported or moved with a fork-lift truck, the force is absorbed
through the transport pallet.

Preparing for Use
4.5 Transportation
Observe the following for a safe transport:

● Transport the transport unit/cabinet with the greatest care.
● Choose the lowest transport height possible. The pallet may not touch the ground. Always
transport the cabinet in an upright position.
● Avoid driving over bumps.
4.5.9 Transport with a crane
WARNING
Improper transport
If the transportation unit is not properly transported with a crane, the transportation unit /
cabinet could fall or tip over This can result in death, serious injury or material damage.
Make sure that you read the safety information about transportation and the information
provided on the transportation unit (e.g. center of gravity specifications).
WARNING
Use of inappropriate cross-arms
If inappropriate cross-arms are used, the transport unit or cabinet can tip over. This can result
in death, serious injury or material damage.
Observe the specifications provided in DIN EN 13155 on crossbars.
WARNING
If the lifting gear or load suspension devices were to fail, the transportation unit / cabinet could
fall. Death, serious injury, or material damage can result.
Do not stand underneath or near to a raised load.
Observe the following for a safe transport:

● When using a crane to transport the equipment, keep to the permissible lifting capacity.
Carefully observe the center of gravity.
● If the cabinet center of gravity is off-center, use suitable and undamaged suspension
equipment, e.g. a cross beam. The lifting beam reduces the pressure on the device and
prevents damage.
● If the cabinet has eye hooks, use them. In such cases, do not use any lifting rods.

Preparing for Use
4.5 Transportation
4.5.10 Using lifting rods
4.5.10.1 Force absorption

During transportation with a crane, force is absorbed by the supporting frame of the cabinet.
The supporting frame remains on the unit. The device is mounted at the installation site via
the supporting frame.
4.5.10.2 Using lifting rods
WARNING
off the crane as a result, This can result in death, serious injury or material damage.
Use suitable lifting rods for transporting. The weight of the cabinet is indicated on the rating
plate.
NOTICE
Improper lifting
or fans.
Protect the cabinet and protruding parts against damage.
Always lift the transport units with the appropriate spreading devices or hoisting tackle.
Procedure
1. If there are several holes, select which holes to use based on the center of gravity.
Figure 4-5 Sticker

Preparing for Use
4.5 Transportation
3. Place the sling ropes on the lifting rods so they are close to the cabinet. Secure the ends
of the lifting rods using the splint.
Figure 4-6 Securing the lifting rods
crane rope to the lifting rods so it is close to the cabinet.
5. Lift the cabinet. Avoid shifting the center of gravity or distorting or damaging the cabinet.
When suspended, the cabinet must be parallel to the ground.

Preparing for Use
4.6 Receiving and Unpacking
4.6.1 Receiving
The receiving procedure consists of the following steps:
1. Verify that the proper items have been shipped.
2. Inspect all items for damage that may have occurred during shipping, handling, or storage.
3. File a claim with the shipping carrier if any damage is present.
4.6.2 Unpacking
Note
Comply with All On-Site Requirements
Siemens recommends that the operating areas be dry and free of dust. The air supplied should
not contain any electrically conductive gas, vapors, or dust, which could impair operation.
Upon receipt of the drives:

1. Perform a visual inspection to assure shipment is undamaged.
2. Verify that all items are received.
3. Carefully remove the plastic and stretch wrap, and all load securing devices.
4. Do not remove the packaging until immediately prior to installation.
5. If equipment will not be placed in operation after installation, cover louvers and external
openings to prevent entry of dust, moisture, and contaminants. In addition to covering
louvers and openings, Siemens recommended covering the equipment cabinet with a tarp
or protective cover.
6. Inspect the equipment for any enclosure / cabinet damage such as cabinet deformation,
damaged welding, filters and rubber gaskets, lose or missing hardware and broken louvers.
7. If no shipment damage claims required, discard the packaging material in accordance with
the applicable country-specific guidelines and rules.
8. Inspect the equipment for any internal component damage such as insulators, air baffles,
barriers and hardware.
9. Prior to commissioning, protect the cabinets against dust, moisture, and contaminants by
covering the ventilation opening and keeping the doors closed.
10.Do not remove crane instructions from the cabinet(s).

Preparing for Use
Note
Damage During Shipment
If damage occurs during shipment, contact the shipping carrier to file a claim. For technical
assistance, call Technical Support - Worldwide Centers (800-333-7421).

Preparing for Use
4.7 Off-Loading
4.7 Off-Loading
4.7.1 Off-Loading
Due to the size and weight of the SINAMICS PERFECT HARMONY GH180 components, it is
important to carefully plan all handling operations when off-loading equipment. Siemens
recommends that prior considerations be made for ceiling heights, door widths, and ease of
installation in advance of receipt of equipment.
Off-loading from the truck is often the most critical operation because of the limited access.
Advance planning and coordination among the manufacturer, the carrier, the installation
contractor, and the owner are vital.
Prior to Moving the Unit

Before moving the unit, verify the following:
● The unit doors are closed/installed
● The unit is in an upright position
● The unit is stabilized to prevent tilting
● Each cell’s locking latches are tie-wrapped in an upright position

Preparing for Use
4.8 Transportation and Handling
4.8.1 Transporting the cabinet units

When the transport units are transported with a crane, note that force is applied via the
supporting frame of the cabinet. The supporting frame remains on the unit. The device is
mounted at the installation site via the supporting frame.
WARNING
off the crane as a result, causing death, serious injury, or material damage.
Use suitable lifting rods for transportation. The weight of the converter is indicated on the type
plate.
CAUTION
Incorrect lifting
or fans.
Protect the cabinet and protruding parts against damage. Always lift the transport units with
the appropriate spreading devices or hoisting tackle.
Procedure
2. Place the sling ropes on the ends of the lifting rods and secure the ends of the lifting rods
using the splint.
crane rope to the ends of the lifting rods and then lift the cabinet. Avoid displacing the center
of gravity or distorting the cabinet. When suspended, the cabinet must be parallel to the
ground.

Preparing for Use
4.8.2 Transport Using a Crane
NOTICE
Minimum clearance between crane and cabinet
A minimum clearance of 51 ´´ (1.3 m) must be maintained to avoid deformation of the drive
cabinet.
If this minimum clearance cannot be maintained, spreader bars of suitable strength must be
used.
Drives up to 1 750 kVA, and a weight of approximately 7 000 kg (one transport unit)
Figure 4-7 Back view

Preparing for Use
Drives from 2 000 kVA and approximately 7 100 kg weight (two transport units)

① Transformer cabinet (back view)

② Cell cabinet (back view)
4.8.3 Transport Using a Fork Lift Truck
Drives from 2 000 kVA and approximately 7 100 kg weight

If you use a fork lift truck, be sure that the tines keep the following measurements:
● Tine Length at least 40 " (1 000 mm) long
● Tine width maximum 7 " (180 mm)

Preparing for Use
● Tine height maximum 2 " (50 mm)

● The tine spacing must be adjustable from 30 " to 50 " (760 mm to 1 270 mm)
WARNING
Transportation in accordance with proper procedures
The transport unit/cabinet is heavy. The center of gravity is in the upper half of the cabinet.
The equipment can tip over if it is not transported correctly or if the means of transport
used is not permittted.
Death, serious injury, or material damage can result.
Ensure that the transport unit/cabinet is only transported by trained personnel using a
permitted means of transport and permitted lifting equipment. The equipment must always
be positioned the right way up and must not be tipped.
6LGH
)RUN/LIW
7LQHVSDFLQJPXVWDGMXVWIURP 7UXFN
vvWRvvWRPP
:RRGHQ
%ORFN &*
7LQHZLGWKLVvvPPPD[ 6LGH

7LQHKHLJWKLVvvPPPD[
)RUN/LIW
7UXFN &*
7LQHOHQJKWPXVWEHDWOHDVW
vvPPORQJ
Figure 4-8 Proper Fork Lift Handling and Dimensions

Assembly 5
5.1 Protective Earthing Bars Connection
DANGER
Grounding the Drive
The VFD must be grounded to allow safe operation.
If not sufficiently grounded during operation, the protection and monitoring functions can fail.
Death, serious injury, or material damage will result.
● Always take the appropriate precautions and observe the five safety rules before carrying
out any work on the converter.
● Follow these steps when grounding the machine:
– Make the connections to the PE busbars within a cabinet.
– Ensure that the connections to the PE busbars are made over several cabinets.
– Set up the ground connection for the whole plant immediately.
Connecting the Protective Earthing (PE) Bars (for several cabinets)
Note
Each cabinet in the lineup is bonded together, generally via 1/0 cable.

Assembly
5.2 Assembly instructions
5.2.1 Requirements for the installation location

For details about the mounting, refer to the dimension drawing.
5.2.2 Required tools

The following tools are required for mechanical and electrical installation (commercially
available, insulated mechanics' tools):
● Spanner or socket spanner, width across flats 10
● Spanner or socket spanner, width across flats 13
● Spanner or socket spanner, width across flats 16/17
● Spanner or socket spanner, width across flats 18/19
● Socket wrench with nut size 30
● Torque wrench up to 250 Nm
● Size 1/2 screwdriver
● Screwdriver Torx T20
● Screwdriver Torx T30
● Cross-tip screwdriver size 2/3
● Cordless screwdriver with Torx set
● Diagonal cutter
CAUTION
Mechanical damage
Stress that occurs during transport may exert mechanical pressure on the components.
Material damage can result.
● Align the cabinet units precisely to avoid sheering forces when connecting the basic units.
● Ensure that the ground on which the converter is to be installed is level and horizontal.
5.2.3 Combining several Transport Units
Prerequisites
Before combining the transport units, adhere to the transport instructions.

Assembly
Procedure
1. Loosen for each back wall the eight screws (M6 x 20).
2. Remove the back walls.
3. Position the transport units next to each other.
4. Connect the power section cables.

Figure 5-1 Combining power cell cabinet and transformer cabinet (back view)
NOTICE
No transportation with crane or fork-lift truck after screwing units together
Specify the place of installation of the converter discreetly prior to installing the transport
units.
Once the transport units have been screwed together, it is no longer permitted to transport
them by crane or fork-lift truck.
5.2.4 Unlocking the Power Section Doors manually

Since the doors are interlocked electromagnetically, they do not unlock because the auxiliary
voltage supply is missing.
In this case, the doors can only be unlocked manually. Each transport unit is therefore provided
with a fitting cabinet key.

Assembly
Opening the power section doors manually
Figure 5-2 Orifice for opening the doors manually
1. Loosen and remove the screw ① that is marked with an adhesive label. Located beneath
it is the opening for unlocking the door.
2. Insert the screwdriver into this opening and press the interlock bolt behind it backwards.
3. While holding the interlock bolt pressed down, insert the cabinet key into the intended
opening ② and unlock the power unit door.
4. You can then open the power unit door.
5.2.5 Connecting the Transport Units and Power Section Cables
Procedure
1. With several transport units, the power section cables are pulled back into the first transport
unit for transport. On site, pull the power section cables out of the cable duct.
2. Connect the power section cables to the appropriate lugs (M8 x 20, M = 15 Nm). The lugs
are located on the rear of the converter; each lug and the associated power section cable
have identical markings to prevent wrong connection.

Assembly
3. Connect the transport units as described in detail in "Connecting the Transport Units".
4. At the bottom of the transport units, connect them by using the screws (M20 x 55,
M = 215 Nm).
%DFNYLHZ

6LGHYLHZ
[0

$$
$$
D E
0[ 0[
0 1P 0 1P
D E
0[
0 1P E
0[
0 1P
D
0[
[

Assembly
5.2.6 Connecting the Transport Units
Assembly Material
The following assembly material is included for connecting the transport units:
● Self-adhesive sealing strips
● Hexagon head screws
● Contact washers
Connecting the Transport Units

① Hexagon head screws

② Contact washer
③ Self-adhesive sealing strip
④ Hexagonal weld nut
⑤ Transport units
Figure 5-3 Connecting the transport units
Perform the following steps to connect the transport units:

1. Affix the self-adhesive sealing strip.
2. Align the cabinet units.
3. Place the contact washers onto the hexagon head screws and insert these into the holes.
4. Tighten the nuts to connect the transport units. Make sure that the tightening torque is
correct (T = 88 Nm)!

Assembly
5.2.7 Connecting the Power Section
Description
With several transport units, the power section cables ② are pulled back into the first transport
unit for transport and must be pulled out of the cable duct ③ on site and connected to the
appropriate lugs ①. The lugs are located on the rear of the converter; each lug and the
associated power section cable have identical markings to prevent wrong connection.

; =

Assembly
5.2.8 Installing the Fans (IP42)
Procedure
1. Raise and place the fan housing on the transport unit.
2. Tighten the screws of the fan housing (M6 x 16, M = 10 Nm).
3. Position the IP42 roof and tighten the screws (M6 x 16, M = 10 Nm).
4. Connect the fans. The terminals (-X32) for the power supply to the fans are located at the
top underneath the fans.
Figure 5-4 Installing the fans
See also
IP42 degree of protection (option M42) (Page 38)

Assembly
5.2.9 Closing the Cabinet Units
Procedure
1. Insert the back walls into all cabinet units.
2. Tighten for each back wall eight screws (M6 x 20, M = 10 Nm).
Figure 5-5 Example: Back view of power cell cabinet (without fans)
5.2.10 Connecting the Interface Terminals
Description
As appropriate to the design of the cabinet unit, the sockets for the interface wiring are located
on the front left.
The other cabinet unit has matching connectors for the sockets located at the exactly the same
position.
Insert the connector ② into the appropriate socket ①.

Assembly
Figure 5-6 Connecting the interface terminals

Electrical Connections 6
6.1 General Electrical
Standard Work Practice

Prior to performing any type of electrical work on the equipment, be sure to read and
understand all vendor supplied information and all information presented in the Safety Notes
chapter of this manual.

Electrical Connections
6.2 Installation External Wiring

Customer-supplied medium voltage cables enter an access plate in the top or bottom.
Customer-supplied low-voltage cables (#8 - #22 AWG) for the control enter an access plate
in the top or bottom. Refer to the project drawings for exact locations.
The input and output medium voltage terminals (L1, L2, L3 and T1, T2, T3) are offset from one
another and have two NEMA one-hole pattern configurations (vertical and horizontal) to
facilitate top or bottom cable termination.
OBJECT
VFD INPUT OUTPUT PROTECTIVE CON‐
DUCTOR
9 cells 1x120 mm2 1x120 mm2 70 mm²
40 - 140 A 1x250 MCM 1x250 MCM 2/0 AWG
9 cells 2x150 mm² 1x150 mm² 70 mm²
200 - 260 A 2x300 MCM 1x300 MCM 2/0 AWG
Maximum 9 cells 2x240 mm² 2x240 mm² 70 mm²

Cross-Section of Exter‐ 315 - 375 A 2x500 MCM 2x500 MCM 2/0 AWG
nal Wires 12 cells 2x150 mm² 1x150 mm² 70 mm²
40 – 260 A 2x300 MCM 1x300 MCM 2/0 AWG
12 cells 2x240 mm² 2x240 mm² 70 mm²
315 – 375 A 2x500 MCM 2x500 MCM 2/0 AWG
15 cells 2x240 mm² 2x240 mm² 70 mm²
40 – 260 A 2x500 MCM 2x500 MCM 2/0 AWG
24 cells 2x240 mm² 2x240 mm² 70 mm²
40 – 260 A 2x500 MCM 2x500 MCM 2/0 AWG
Note
Individual conductor breakdown for three-conductor single-core cables
The SINAMICS PERFECT HARMONY GH180 drive design is best accommodated for single-
conductor single-core medium voltage cables.
Table 6-1 Drive Torque Specifications (Zinc-Plated Hardware and Electrical Connections Only)
Standard Torque Chart

Fastener Size Tightening Torque
English (Metric)
2-56 (M2) 3.0 in-lb
4-40 (M3) 6.0 in-lb
6-32 (M3.5) 12.0 in-lb
8-32 (M4) 22.0 in-lb
10-32 (M5) 36.0 in-lb
1/4-20 (M6) 70.0 in-lb
1/4-20 (M6) elec 100.0 in-lb
1/4-28 70.0 in-lb

Standard Torque Chart

English (Metric)
5/16-18 155.0 in-lb
(M8) 80.0 in-lb
3/8-16, 3/8-24 275.0 in-lb
(M10) 180.0 in-lb
1/2-13 (M12) 672.0 in-lb
5/8-11 112.0 ft-lb
3/4-10 198.0 ft-lb
1 500.0 ft-lb
Note
Input Conductor Sizing
Be sure to size the input conductors appropriately for the particular application, taking into
account the length of the input power feed as well as local electrical code and local standards.
Labels located near the connections recommend the use of 75○ C conductors.
Table 6-2 Drive Torque Specifications (Stainless Steel Hardware, Mechanical Connections)
Standard Torque Chart (with Loctite 243 or 248 applied)

English (Metric)
3-48 (M2.5) 2.0 in-lb
4-40 (M3) 3.8 in-lb
5-40 6.5 in-lb
6-32 (M3.5) 6.5 in-lb
8-32 (M4) 8.0 in-lb
10-32 (M5) 21 in-lb
1/4-20 (M6) 41.0 in-lb
5/16-18 (M8) 112.0 in-lb
3/8-16 (M10) 201.0 in-lb
7/16-14 320.0 in-lb
1/2-13 (M12) 444.0 in-lb
9/16-12 (M14) 576.0 in-lb
5/8-11 (M16) 936.0 in-lb
3/4-10 (M18) 1296.0 in-lb
(M20) 2952.0 in-lb
7/8-9 (M22) 1980.0 in-lb
(M24) 4800.0 in-lb
1-8 (M27) 2916.0 in-lb

6.3 Grounding, Cabling, and Shielding Recommendations

The following fundamental information and guidelines facilitate compliance with the EMC
directives.
Note
We recommend that EMC is planned for the entire plant.
Electromagnetic compatibility
NOTICE
Non-compliance with Local Safety Regulations
Understand and obey all local safety regulations with regards to grounding.
Recommendations do not supersede safety grounding regulations.
VFD Grounding
The variable frequency drive as a whole should be bonded to the facility ground using the
following two methods;
● Bond the VFD at one point only using the shortest cable length. The VFD cabinet to facility
ground connection shall be properly sized per local codes or regulations.
– The connection can be made in the VFD either in the input cabinetry or in the output
cabinet.
– In the event of ground faults, the peak current and duration are much greater for the
input than the output. Therefore, it is preferable to ground the VFD in the input cabinet
to minimized the fault current flowing through the cabinet to cabinet connections.
● If a grounding grid is available under the VFD, the VFD cabinet can be solidly grounded to
the facility ground structure at multiple points.
Neither the SINAMICS PERFECT HARMONY GH180 transformer primary neutral point on the
input, nor the medium voltage output neutral point, shall be bonded to ground.
If used, the precharge winding shall be resistance grounded.
Motor Grounding
The motor case must be bonded to facility ground using the shortest cable length.
Bearing Currents:
● If machine induced bearing currents are of concern, then isolated bearings on the non-drive
end of the motor shaft can be implemented
● Siemens recommends using a shaft ground brush on the drive-end of the motor shaft when
concerns exist regarding whether the rotating load or the drive could cause harmful bearing
currents.
● The encoder must be electrically isolated from the motor shaft.

VFD Output Cables

The following recommendations apply when the VFD is grounded to the facility ground though
a single connection at either the input cabinet or at the output cabinet:
● Ground output cable shield connections only on the VFD end using short lead lengths,
preferably shorter than 24 in (61 cm). Multiple ground connections on output cables can
cause circulating currents that may elevate the potential on the ground bus in the VFD
cabinet. The elevated potential could introduce noise into the control section of the VFD.
● It is not necessary to ground the cable shields at the motor end, unless a customer specific
safety requirement exists.
● When multiple cable sections are used in series, each cable section should have its VFD
end of the shield grounded. Refer to the figure Grounding of cable shields when multiple
sections (or splices) are used.
Figure 6-1 Grounding of cable shields when multiple sections (or splices) are used.
When the VFD is solidly grounded to the facility ground structure at multiple points, the following
recommendations apply:
● Shield connections of the output cables may be grounded at both ends using short lead
lengths, preferably shorter than 24 in (61 cm).
● The cable shields at the motor end may be grounded.
● When multiple cable sections are uses in series, then each cable section may have the
shield connections grounded at both ends.
VFD Input Cables

The input cable shields may be grounded at either end. Consult the local codes and regulations
for guidance.
Encoder Feedback, Analog I/O, and Digital I/O Signals into the VFD
● Fully shielded cable must be used for analog I/O and low voltage (<50V) digital I/O wiring
to the VFD. For isolated I/O, the shield must be grounded at only the VFD. Twisted pair
should be used for applications using differential signaling or when the return path of the
signal is also present.
– The shield grounding termination point should be at the point of cable entry to the cabinet.
– The shield grounding termination point should be at the customer terminal strip.
● 120 VAC digital I/O driven by semiconductor based switches (not dry contacts) must use
twisted shielded pair with a return path per signal.
● Check customer-side wiring should be checked for 'ground loops' (should be avoided).

● Do not run cable with MV wiring. Siemens recommends running the cable in a separate
metal conduit.
● Run digital and analog signals separately, running them in separate metal conduit from
each other and from the power wiring.
Note
Minimum shielding assumes foil shield with drain wire. Siemens recommends using double
shielding using foil and braid.
● The shield connections of all the WAGO I/O need to have a common point on the drive
end. Test shield connection (using ohm meter) to verify a good connection.
● Encoder applications assume a galvanically isolated encoder using HTL quadrature output.
Table 6-3 Control Signal Cabling General Guidelines
Signal Type Cable Recommended Termination Point

AI Twisted Shielded Pairs *
VFD
AO Twisted Shielded Pairs* VFD
DI (24V) Twisted Shielded Pairs VFD
DI (120V) Twisted Shielded Pairs VFD
DO( 24V) Twisted Shielded Pairs VFD
DO (120V) Twisted Shielded Pairs VFD
CR3 (24V) Twisted Shielded Pairs VFD
CR3 (120V) Twisted Shielded Pairs VFD
Encoder Twisted Shielded Pairs* VFD**
Notes:
*
Best Practice is to use cable with double shielding
**
Special Handling: Both ends must never be grounded together
All signals specified in the above table are galvanically isolated
References: GAMBICA Variable Speed Drives and Motors; Installation Guidelines for Power Drive Systems Fourth Edition,
2012
VFD Customer 3-Phase Control Cabling

The 3-phase control cable wiring to the VFD must use fully shielded cable with shield grounded
at the VFD only,
Each customer input section is supplied with a ground pad (lug).

Cable installation
● Cables that are subject to or sensitive to interference should be laid as far apart from each
other as possible.
● The distance between the electric power cable and signal cable should be > 20 cm. The
converter-specific information applies to power cables. You can find further information on
power cables under "Connecting power cables".
● When the cables are routed close to ground potential, the immunity to interference is
increased. For this reason, you are advised to lay these cables along edges and at ground
potential.
● Ground the reserve cores on at least one end.
● In order to avoid additional locations where interference can be coupled in, long cables
should be shortened or routed where there is little interference.
● If conductors or cables conduct signals of different classes, then the conductors and cables
must cross at a right angle. This especially involves sensitive and noisy signals.
– Class 1:
Unshielded cables for ≤ 60 V DC
Unshielded cables for ≤ 25 V AC
Shielded analog signal cables
Shielded bus and data cables
Operator panel interfaces, incremental/absolute encoder cables
– Class 2:
Unshielded cables for > 60 V DC and ≤ 230 V DC
Unshielded cables for > 25 V AC and ≤ 230 V AC
– Class 3:
Unshielded cables for > 230 V AC/V DC and ≤ 1000 V AC/DC
– Class 4:
Unshielded cables for > 1000 V AC/DC
Shield connection
● Do not use cable shields to conduct current. In other words, cable shields must not
simultaneously act as neutral or PE conductors.
● Apply the cable shield so that it covers the greatest possible surface area. Use ground
clamps, ground terminals or ground screw connections.
● Avoid extending the cable shield to the grounding point using a wire. This reduces the shield
effectiveness by up to 90%.
I/O connection
● Create a low-impedance ground connection for additional cabinets, system components,
and distributed devices with the largest possible cross-section (at least 16 mm²).
● Ground unused lines at one end in the cabinet.

● Choose the greatest possible clearance between the power and signal cables (at least 20
cm). The greater the distance over which the cables are routed in parallel, the greater the
clearance must be. You must install additional shields if sufficient clearance cannot be
maintained.
● Avoid unnecessarily long cable loops.
● Surge suppressors, e.g. RC elements or varistors must be connected to the operating coils
for contactors and relays in the converter.
● In order to reduce noise/interference entering or exiting via the cable, filter auxiliary voltages
in the control cabinet.

6.5 Terminal Blocks
6.5 Terminal Blocks
Terminal Blocks
Refer to the Control Section of this manual for specific information about terminal blocks.
Note
Spare Terminal Availability
Consult Siemens for customized systems requiring additional terminals.
DANGER
Electrical Hazard!
Standard safety precautions and local codes must be followed during installation of external
wiring.
Protection separation must be kept between extra low voltage (ELV) wiring and any other
wiring as specified in the CE safety standard IEC61800-5-1.

6.6 Cable Gland Plates Removal and Installation Guidelines
6.6 Cable Gland Plates Removal and Installation Guidelines
Cable Gland Plates Removal and Installation Guidelines

Removal of gland plates is necessary to complete input and output power cable installation.
Gland plates are attached to the drive enclosure and can be removed by unfastening the
hardware.
Gland Plate Installation Preparation and Procedure:

1. Place the unfastened hardware in a safe place to allow for quick retrieval when re-installing
the gland plates.
2. Fit the cable entries with a proper water-tight seal.
3. If cable size permits, make holes for drilling cable entries.
4. Do not drill the gland plate while it is still mounted to the enclosure.
NOTICE
Gland Plate Drilling
Do not drill the gland plate while it is mounted to the enclosure.
Drilling the plate while it is mounted leads to metal dust accumulation on sensitive electronics
that are located inside of the unit, which may cause loss of component integrity and possibly
affect system operability.
Gland Plate Drilling Guidelines

1. Take care not to damage the rubber gasket seal material during the drilling process
2. Fit the cable entries with a proper water-tight seal.
3. Ensure that gland plates are properly fastened to the drive with the original hardware.
4. Be sure to check the integrity of the rubber gasket seal prior to installing the gland plate.
Note
Maintain IP Rating of Enclosure
To maintain the IP rating of the enclosure / cabinet, a proper gasket seal is required.
Inspect for any damaged gasket prior to and after installing the gland plates.

6.7 Closing the make-proof grounding switch

The converter is optionally equipped with make-proof grounding switches (N44 or N45).
The make-proof grounding switches can be closed when the doors have been closed and the
following prerequisites are fulfilled:
● The DC link voltage must be de-energized.
● The EMERGENCY-OFF switch on the cabinet unit must be activated.
● The key-operated switch on the converter must be set to the OFF position.
● A delay time of 10 minutes must have expired.
If the auxiliary voltage fails completely, the make-proof grounding switch cannot be closed.
The doors are secured by the electrical door magnet system and can be opened only after the
make-proof grounding switch is closed.

Procedure
1. Take the socket spanner, which can be found in the tool set, and turn it from position "O"
to position "I". The red dot marks the current position.
Figure 6-2 Make-proof grounding switch
2. The contacts are closed and the voltage DC link is grounded.
CAUTION
Grounding while the system is live
You must note the following to prevent injury or material damage:
For operation, the make-proof grounding switch must be deactivated and the grounding
switch lever must be removed before the voltage is switched on. The interlock mechanism
is thus activated.
This prevents grounding while the system is live, which could cause a DC link short-circuit.

6.8 E-Stops
6.8 E-Stops
E-Stop incorporation into the Coordinated Input Protection Scheme is discussed in the section
of this manual titled Control.
See also
Control Section (Page 28)

6.9 Circuit Breaker (provided by the customer)
6.9 Circuit Breaker (provided by the customer)

To ensure adequate protection for VFDs, the circuit breaker provided by the customer must
fulfill the following requirements:
● The maximum time between when the circuit breaker trips, to when a no-current state (I=0)
is reached, is 100 ms.
● The circuit breaker must be equipped with an undervoltage tripping function.
● The circuit breaker is enabled by the VFD closed-loop controller. It must never be switched
on by any other method when connected to the VFD input transformer.
● An overcurrent protection device is provided to protect the VFD transformer.

Commissioning 7
7.1 RCD Compatibility
Residual Current Device Compatibility
CAUTION
RCD Incompatibility
Connecting this device to a power supply protected by a residual-current device can result
in damage to property and minor personal injury.
This product can produce a DC current in the grounding conductor.
When using a Residual-Current Device (RCD) in cases where direct or indirect contact can
be made, only a Type-B RCD shall be permissible on the line side of this product. If this is
not possible, an alternative means of protection must be applied. Isolation from the
environment through double or reinforced insulation, or isolation from the power supply using
a transformer, is an example of alternative means of protection.
Note
The master mechanical interlock key (K1) must be coordinated with the input voltage
switchgear. Please refer to the section of the manual titled Option Codes that is located in the
Description chapter. The relevant option codes are M08, M09, M10, and M38.

Commissioning
7.2 Cell Reforming
7.2 Cell Reforming

No Load Conditions
When an aluminum electrolytic capacitor is stored under no load conditions for a long period
of time, its leakage current tends to increase. If the storage temperature is high, the leakage
current will increase substantially. This is due to a drop in the withstand voltage of the dielectric
caused by the reaction of the anode oxide layer with the electrolyte. At this point the capacitor
should not be subjected to full voltage until the leakage current returns to its initial level, which
can be done by reforming the electrolyte. Reforming can be done by applying a voltage that
is slowly increased to maximum over a period of several hours, with current limited to rated
leakage current.
If capacitors have been out of service for more than 24 months, they must be reformed.
NOTICE
Reform Capacitors Schedule
If capacitors have been out of service for more than 24 months, they must be reformed. This
will assure the electrolytics are not not in a degraded state and will perform at the level needed
for optimal drive performance.
Power Cell Capacitor Reform

The capacitors can be reformed with the cell in or out of the drive. If reformed out of the drive,
each cell must be reformed one-at-a-time. If reformed in the drive, then all the cells can be
formed at the same time.
WARNING
Unqualified personnel are NOT permitted to reform cells.
Only qualified personnel may perform cell reforming. Potential electrical hazards and physical
injury, including death, can occur when the voltage is applied to a Power Cell that is outside
of the Cell Cabinet enclosure.
Please contact the Siemens factory for further information about the Power Cell Reforming.

Operation 8
8.1 Operating the Drive
When operating the drive, be sure to read and understand all safety warnings as detailed in
the Safety Notes chapter of this manual. Obey all warnings and safety material presented in
each chapter.
DANGER
Qualified Personnel ONLY
Only trained personnel may operate a SINAMICS PERFECT HARMONY GH180. Improperly
operating the drive can cause damage to property, serious injury, and possible death.

Operation
8.2 Major Drive Faults and Alarms

The control senses all drive faults and alarms, either from direct hardware or via software
algorithms.
Use the following tables to quickly locate major causes of fault conditions. The tables also list
the type of drive response, if it is a fault (F), alarm (A), or both (F/A), and whether it can be
enabled or disabled using the SOP program (SOP), Menu, or if it is permanently enabled, i.e.
fixed in software.
Refer to the Fault / Alarm Types and Responses table, to determine the drive response for the
various fault and alarm conditions:
Table 8-1 Fault / Alarm Types and Responses
Type Drive Responses

Fault ● All IGBT gate drivers are inhibited.
● Motor coasts to stop.
● The fault is logged. Refer to the Fault Log Menu (6210).
● The fault is displayed on the front panel.
● The keypad fault LED is ON.
● Most faults are logged to the Event Log.
User Faults ● The motor either ramp stops or coast stops depending on the content of the system program.
● The fault is logged. Refer to the Fault Log Menu (6210).
● The fault is displayed on the front panel.
● The keypad fault LED is ON.
● User defined faults are logged to the Event Log.
Alarm ● The drive does not necessarily revert to the idle state via a coast or ramp stop unless specifically
required to by the system program.
● The alarm is logged. Refer to the Fault Log Menu (6210).
● The alarm is displayed on the front panel.
● The keypad fault LED flashes.
8.2.1 Faults / Alarms Types / Responses

Existing fault or alarm conditions are annunciated on the keypad. The NXG Control software
and hardware sense faults and alarms and store them within the fault logger and the event
logger.
The cell control system logic, located on the cell control board in each output power cell, senses
cell faults. Each power cell has its own sense circuitry. The NXG Control software interprets
the cell faults and displays them and logs them based on the faulted cell and the specific fault
within the cell.
All sensed faults immediately inhibit the drive from running and remove power from the drive
to the motor. Some user-defined faults can control the drive response via the system program.
Alarms are annunciated and logged but usually do not inhibit the drive from operation.

Operation
Refer to the Fault / Alarm Types and Responses table found in the preceding section of this
manual.
8.2.2 External Serial Communications Related Faults
Table 8-2 External Serial Communication Related Faults
Display Name Actual Name Type Enable Cause

Tool Communication same SOP SOP Tool is not communicating to drive
Keypad Comm Loss Keypad Communica‐ SOP SOP Drive is not communicating to keypad.
or tion Loss
or
Drive Not Communicating
Drive Not
Communicating
Network 1 Communication same SOP SOP The drive is not communicating with the active
external network 1
Network 2 Communication same SOP SOP The drive is not communicating with the active
external network 2
8.2.3 Input Transformer Temperature Related
Table 8-3 Input Transformer Temperature Related Faults and Alarms Table

Xformer OT alarm Transformer Over‐ A SOP Drive initiated alarm when the
Temperature XformerOverTempAlarm1_O SOP flag is set true
Alarm and the XformerOverTempAlarm1En_O flag is
true to enable it. The default is an alarm and it can‐
not be changed. This is used in the standard SOP
for drives as an alarm.
Xformer OT trip alarm Transformer Over‐ A SOP Drive initiated alarm when the
Trip Alarm and the XformerOverTempAlarm2En_O flag is
Xformer OT fault Transformer Over‐ A SOP Drive initiated alarm when the
Fault and the XformerOverTempAlarm2En_O flag is
Xfrm cool OT trip alarm Transformer Cool A SOP Drive initiated alarm/fault when the
OverTemperature XformerWaterTempHigh_O SOP flag is set true
Trip Alarm and the XformerWaterTempHighEn_O flag is
not be changed. This is used in the Standard SOP

Operation
8.2.4 Modulator Related Cell Faults

The Modulator Related Faults and Alarms table provides the fault / alarm as displayed, the
complete fault / alarm name when actual display shows abbreviated nomenclature, the fault/
alarm type, the enable status and potential causes.
Table 8-4 Modulator Related Faults and Alarms
Display Name Actual Name Type Enable Potential Cause

Modulator Configuration same F Fixed The software detected a problem when attempting
to initialize the modulator.
Modulator Board Fault same F Fixed The software detected a modulator board fault
Cell Fault/Modulator same F Fixed Modulator has an undefined fault from a cell. Cell
shows fault but the fault is undetectable
Bad Cell Data same F Fixed Cell data packet mode bits incorrect.
Cell Config Faults Cell Configuration Fault F Fixed Modulator cell configuration does not agree with
menu setting of installed cells
Modulator Watchdog Flt Modulator Watchdog F Fixed Modulator detected that the CPU stopped communi‐
Filter cating with it.
Loss of Drive Enable same F SOP Modulator detected loss of drive enable.
8.2.5 Low Voltage Power Supply Related Faults
Table 8-5 Low Voltage Power Supply Related Faults

Hall Effect Pwr Supply Hall Effect Power F Fixed One (or both) of the supplies that power the Hall
Note: NXG has a single power Supply Effects on the drive output has failed.
supply.
Power Supply Same F Fixed The chassis power supply has indicated a loss of
power. This can either be due to loss of AC or a
failed power supply.
8.2.6 User Faults and Alarms

User faults occur due to conditions defined in the system program. User faults are displayed
on the keypad in the form of user defined fault #n, where n equals 1 to 64. The faults can also
be displayed using user-defined text strings. Most user-defined faults are written to respond
to various signals from the Wago I/O, such as the analog input modules (through the use of
comparators), as well as the digital input modules.
A copy of the system program is required to specifically define the origin of the fault. The flag
UserFault_1 is used to display the event of a blower fault. Note that the string pointer
UserText1 is used to display the specific fault message. If this string pointer is not used, then
the fault displayed would be "User Defined Fault #1."

Operation
8.2.7 User Defined Faults
Fault Display Type Enable Potential Causes

User defined fault (64) F/A SOP Cause
The UserFault_1 through UserFault_64 flags in the system program
have been set to the value "true". These can be set up as either faults
or alarms, and the message can be defined via the SOP.
8.2.8 Input Line Disturbance Faults and Alarms

The Input Line Disturbance Faults and Alarms table provides the fault / alarm as displayed,
the complete fault / alarm name when actual display shows abbreviated nomenclature, the
Table 8-6 Input Line Disturbance Faults and Alarms
Display Name Actual Name Type Enable Potential Causes

Input Phase Loss same A Fixed Loss of input phase.
Input Ground same A Fixed The estimated input ground voltage is greater than the
limit set by the ground fault limit in the drive protection
menu.
Line Overvoltage 1 same A SOP The drive-input RMS voltage is greater than 110% of
the drive rated input voltage.
Note: This alarm can be caused by a transient condi‐
tion, and may not be present when making the meas‐
urements.
Line Overvoltage 2 same A SOP The dive input RMS voltage is greater than 115% of the
drive rated input voltage.
Note: Refer to Line over voltage 1 section above. Val‐
ues greater than 4.37 VRMS will trigger this alarm.
Line Overvoltage Fault same F SOP The drive-input RMS voltage is greater than 120% of
the drive rated input voltage.
Note: Refer to line over voltage 1 section above. Values
greater than 4.56 VRMS will trigger an alarm or trip,
depending on the SOP.
Medium Voltage Low 1 same A SOP The drive-input RMS voltage is less than 90% of the
Note: This alarm can be caused by a transient condi‐
tion, and may not be present when making the meas‐
urements.
Medium Voltage Low 2 same A Fixed The drive-input RMS voltage is less than 70% of the
Note: Refer to "Medium voltage low 1" section above.
The threshold is 2.66 V.

Operation
Display Name Actual Name Type Enable Potential Causes

Medium Voltage Low Flt Medium Voltage F Fixed The drive-input RMS voltage is less than 55% of the
Low Fault drive rated input voltage.
Note: The fault will not occur, even after the threshold
condition is met, until the first cell fault occurs. This fault
is then logged and associated cell faults ignored. Refer
to "Medium voltage low 1" section above. The threshold
is 2.09 V.
Input One Cycle same F/A Fixed (1) Possible fault on the secondary side of the trans‐
or former
Excessive Iinput Reactive or
Current (2) Inrush current is too high, thus creating a nuisance
fault.
Input phase imbal Input Phase Im‐ F/A SOP Drive input line current imbalance is greater than the
balance setting in the phase imbalance limit parameter in the
drive protection menu.
Note: During pre-charge, if so equipped, it is normal for
phases to be imbalanced.
8.2.9 Motor Output Related Faults and Alarms

The Motor Output Related Faults and Alarms table provides the fault / alarm as displayed, the
complete fault / alarm name when actual display shows abbreviated nomenclature, the fault/
Table 8-7 Motor Output Related Faults and Alarms

Over Speed Alam same A SOP The motor speed is greater than 95% of the over
speed parameter setting (1170) in the limits menu
(1120). An improperly set-up or mistuned drive usu‐
ally causes this fault
Over Speed Fault same F Fixed The motor speed exceeds the over speed setting
(1170) parameter in the lrmits menu (1120). An im‐
properly set-up or mistuned drive usually causes
Output Ground Fault same A Fixed This fault is caused due to an output ground fault
condition, when the estimated ground voltage ex‐
ceeds the ground fault limit parameter (1245) in the
motor limits menu
Encoder Loss same Menu Menu The software has detected an encoder signal loss
due to a faulty encoder or faulty encoder interface
Mtr Tem Over-Load 1 Motor Tempera‐ A SOP Motor temperature or motor current, depending on
ture (or Motor choice of over-load method, are above over-load
Current) Over- pending setting
Load 1
Mtr Tem Over-Load 2 Motor Tempera‐ A SOP Motor temperature or motor current, depending on
ture (or Motor choice of over-load method, are above over-load
Current) Over- setting.
Load 2

Operation

Mtr Tem Over-Load Fault Motor Tempera‐ F Fixed Motor temperature or motor current, depending on
ture (or Motor choice of over-load method, has exceeded the over-
Current) Over- load setting for the time specified by the over-load
Load Fault timeout parameter.
Motor Over Volt Alarm Motor Over Volt‐ A SOP If motor voltage exceeds 90% of the motor over‐
age Alarm voltage limit in the motor limit menu.
Motor Over Volt Fault Motor Over Volt‐ F SOP The measured motor voltage exceeds the threshold
age set by the motor trip volts (1160) parameter in the
Fault limits menu (1120). An improperly set-up or tuned
drive usually causes this fault. This could include
the secondary tap setting. A high line condition can
also cause this.
IOC Instantanteous F Fixed Drive instantaneous over-current (IOC) faults usu‐
Over Current ally result when the signal from test point IOC on
the system interface board exceeds the level set by
the drive IOC setpoint (7110) parameter in the input
protect menu (7000).
Under Load Alarm same A SOP The torque producing current of the drive has drop‐
ped below a preset value set by the user.
Under Load Alarm same F Menu This fault usually indicates a loss of load condition
when the torque producing current of the drive has
dropped below a preset value set by the user for
the specified amount of time.
Output Phase Imbal Output Phase A Fixed The software has detected an imbalance in the mo‐
Imbalance tor currents.
Output Phase Open same A SOP The software has detected an open phase condition
at the drive output to the motor. Generally, if this
occurs, the problem is with the feedback. A true
open output phase will result in an IOC trip.
In Torque Limit same A SOP This alarm is issued when the drive is in speed roll‐
back, due to a torque limit condition, for more than
one minute.
In Torq Limit Rollback In Torque Limit F/A SOP This fault or alarm, depending on the SOP program,
Rollback is issued when the drive is in speed rollback, due
to a torque limit condition, for more than 30 minutes.
Minimum Speed Trip same F/A SOP Motor speed is below the zero speed setting (2200).
This is either due to a motor stall condition, if speed
demand is higher than the zero speed setting, or a
low speed demand condition, where speed demand
is lower than the zero speed setting.
Loss of Field Current same F/A SOP This occurs only with synchronous motor control
due to field exciter failure or loss of power to the
exciter.

Operation

Failed to Magnetize same F/A SOP This occurs only with induction motors due to high
magnetizing current or poor power factor. The trip
occurs when Ids or magnetizing current is greater
than 80% of rated current for a duration greater than
5 times the flux ramp rate parameter setting.
With induction motors, this trip should normally oc‐
cur only when starting, either due to incorrect stator
resistance (ID 1080) and cable resistance (ID 2940)
settings, i.e. settings that are higher than actual val‐
ue are not good, or due to the incorrect setup of the
spinning load. Once the motor is magnetized and
running, such an event is unlikely to occur.
Back EMF Timeout same F Fixed The software timed out waiting for the motor back
EMF voltage to decay to a safe level for bypass or
turn-on (drive enable). The safe voltage is the
amount of voltage that the drive can support. The
back EMF is the motor voltage when the drive is not
active. If an induction machine has a long time con‐
stant, or if a synchronous machine has not disabled
its field, and in either case the machine is spinning,
the timeout threshold will cause a fault. This is also
possible for parallel drives connected to a single
motor.
8.2.10 Dedicated I/O For Input Protection

Dedicated I/O for Input Protection (NXGII)
The drive NXGII software controls the I/O involved with input protection. No intervention is
required for activating this usage other than selecting one of these cell types. For drives other
than SINAMICS PERFECT HARMONY GH180 6SR4, and 6SR3, the parameter "Dedicated
Input Protect" (ID 7018) can be used to enable the same protection if the system I/O board is
installed and the inputs and outputs are wired properly. The SOP flags that would normally be
associated with these inputs and outputs are disabled, and have no effect when the associated
cells are selected.
These are the inputs and outputs dedicated in this manner to the input protection algorithm.
● IDO_14 - The M1 permissive allows the circuit to close M1 (to be completed by the
customer). This opens with an input protection fault and closes after the input protection
fault is reset (including the LFR). When opened, causes a trip to the MV breaker.
● IDO_15 - This delivers a one second pulse to trip the LFR with an input protection fault.
● IDI-3E - LFR Status – (Input protection) reports the status of the LFR (Latch Fault Relay).
Additionally, for 6SR42 systems:
● Operation of IDO_14 or IDO_15 result in the operation of relay contact "Trip Input MV" at
the customer control signal interface within the drive.

Operation
8.2.11 Dedicated I/O For Input Protection (NXGpro)

Dedicated I/O for Input Protection (NXGpro)
The drive NXGpro software controls the I/O involved with input protection. No intervention is
required for activating this usage other than selecting one of these cell types. For drives other
than SINAMICS PERFECT HARMONY GH180 6SR4, and 6SR3, the parameter "Dedicated
Input Protect" (ID 7018) can be used to enable the same protection if the system I/O board is
installed and the inputs and outputs are wired properly. When dedicated I/O is used, the
parameter "Drive Has Input Breaker" must be set to "Yes" or the system will not allow the
breaker to close. The SOP flags that would normally be associated with these inputs and
outputs are disabled, and have no effect when dedicated I/O is enabled.
These are the inputs and outputs dedicated in this manner to the input protection algorithm.
● M1_DOUT - The M1 permissive allows the circuit to close M1 (to be completed by the
customer). This opens with an input protection fault and closes after the input protection
fault is reset (including the LFR). When opened, causes a trip to the MV breaker.
● IDO_15 - This delivers a one second pulse to trip the LFR with an input protection fault.
● IDI-3E - LFR Status – (Input protection) reports the status of the LFR (Latch Fault Relay).
Tamper Resistant Input Protection (NXGpro)

The "Tamper Resistant Input Protection" feature :
1. Tests the proper functioning of the input circuit breaker (ICB). The ICB must function
correctly or the drive will be inhibited thereby preventingdrive operation.
2. Requires the completion of a test to verify that the input circuit breaker is operating correctly
and is able to remove medium voltage within a specified timeframe.
● The test must be performed and successfully passed before the drive will be permitted to
run.
● The test must be run once initially and will rerun automatically any time the system opens
the input breaker.The result of the test is stored in nonvolatile memory in the NXGpro control
so that the test need not be performed every time the system is repowered.
● If this test is not performed and successfully passed, the drive will be inhibited and will notbe
permitted to run.
● This test must be performed and successfully passed if the NXGpro DCR rack is replaced.
– To run this test, apply medium voltage and activate parameter "Test TRIP
Response" (ID 7126). This function will measure the ICB response time.
The input breaker will open during the test and removal of medium voltage
within the required time period will be verified. Parameter "Input Breaker
Open Time" (ID 7125) may be used to adjust the maximum allowable
breaker opening time.
8.2.12 Input Over-Voltage Fault

Beginning with Version 5.1.0 release, the Input Over-Voltage Fault will create an Input
Protection (IP) fault.

Operation
This fault is hard-coded such that if the input line voltage exceeds 120%, a fault is created.
This is only true for Dedicated I/O IP protection. SOP based IP must include the Input Over-
voltage (LineOverVoltageFault_I) fault in the IP logic.
8.2.13 Speed Rollback

The Speed Rollback is a feature of the speed regulator. The feature prevents windup of the
integrator term when the regulator enters the non-linear state of being in torque limit.
The output of the regulator, which is the torque current reference, is clamped to one of the
torque limits. This sets the internal indicator as to whether the minimum limit or maximum limit
is the active limit. The integrator is prevented from winding up any further past the limit.
In the command generator algorithm, the speed ramp output (the speed regulator input) is
"rolled back" so that it maintains the speed regulator in saturation (at the clamp limit) but then
resets the ramp internal storage to at that level. This allows for a smooth transition when the
limiting condition is removed. In recovery, the ramp will then continue on from that point, to the
desired speed demand until the speed regulator is satisfied and the output speed matches the
desired speed. This action prevents a sudden speed or torque step should the torque limiting
source (usually the load) suddenly change, thus allowing a smooth transition from the non-
linear operating condition.
8.2.14 Disabling the Speed Rollup

Speed Rollback (rollup) is a normal process during ramp stopping. However, not all processes
are conducive to the speed rollback operation when the drive is in a regen limit.
Other processes may find it unacceptable when the torque limit occurs during the regeneration
quadrant in the motor, resulting in what has been termed "Speed Rollup". This is when the
torque limit is preventing the motor from regening too quickly. The ramp is still affected, but
the ramp output will be forced to go up in speed to get to the equilibrium point of the speed
reference (the input of the speed regulator) to maintain the regulator just inside the saturation
point.
This is generally true if the load is slowing down more than the speed ramp, resulting in a regen
condition of the motor. The ramp will "rollup" to prevent the speed error from climbing too high.
This type of load is referred to as an "over-hauling" load. An example might be a pump with a
large column of liquid or a draft fan with air flow pushing back on the blade. These would tend
to push the motor in the reverse direction requiring the drive to "regen" to a stop before going
forward.
Note
Four-Quadrant Capability
The SINAMICS PERFECT HARMONY GH180 is NOT a four-quadrant capable drive.

Operation
Two SOP flags can be used to identify, or disable this condition.
Table 8-8 Speed Rollup Control Flags
Speed Rollback Control Flag Description

DisableSpeedRollup_O This flag disables the speed rollback completely – for both minimum and max‐
imum limits (in motoring and in regeneration of the motor)
SpeedRollupActive_I This flag is set when the regen limit is in effect and a rollup condition exists.
A special condition can occur in lightly loaded drives - usually on test stands where small
motors are used on a much bigger drive, or if a transorb in the output voltage feedback goes
bad. With rollup in this case, the drive can be seen as "running away" with the speed reference
going higher than the commanded speed (Speed Demand). Disabling Speed Rollup will
eliminate this condition.
8.2.15 Synchronous Transfer Related Faults
Table 8-9 Synchronous Transfer Related Faults Table

Up Transfer Failed same A SOP Time-out has occurred from request to up sync transfer
complete.
Down Transfer Failed same A SOP Time-out has occurred from request to down sync transfer.
Phase Sequence same F/A SOP Sign of input frequency and operating frequency are oppo‐
site. This will prohibit a transfer but is not fatal for normal
operation. This fault needs to be enabled via the system
program flags for transfer operations..
8.2.16 Unexpected Output Conditions

In some cases, the Perfect Harmony™ VFD will revert to operating conditions that limit the
amount of output current, output speed, or output voltage, but with no apparent fault condition
displayed. The most usual causes of these conditions are described in the subsections that
follow.
Keypad Mode
The keypad mode displays can sometimes be used to troubleshoot the cause of the output
limitation. The modes are displayed in two lines at the left of the keypad display as shown in
the following figure:
)LUVW/LQH 02'( '(0' )5(4 530 ,727

6HFRQG/LQH +$1'
Figure 8-1 Keypad Mode Display
The following two tables list the mode displays for the first and second lines, respectively. The
first column of the tables lists the abbreviated message that is shown on the display of the

Operation
drive. The second column lists descriptions of the operating modes. Further descriptions of
possible limit situations and troubleshooting tips are listed in the subsections that follow.
Table 8-10 Operation Mode Displays -- Line 1
Actual Diisplay Description

FRST Fault reset is active.
TLIM Menu torque limit is active.
SPHS A single phase on the MV input has occurred, drive limited.
UVLT The drive is experiencing an input under-voltage torque limit.
T OL The thermal overload is active, limiting drive torque.
F WK Motor is operating in a field-weakened condition. Torque is limited but current is not.
C OL A cell overload limit has been reached.
NET1 A torque limit from Network1 is active.
NET2 A torque limit from Network2 is active.
ALIM A torque limit from analog input is active.
EALM A torque limit from an external analog input is active.
ENLM A torque limit from a network input is active.
EMLM A torque limit from a menu setting is active.
RLBK A torque limit is active and the speed demand input from the ramp has been rolled back.
RGEN A motor is in regen mode—power dissipated in motor losses.
F WK The motor is operating in a field—power dissipated in motor losses.
BRKG The motor is in dual frequency braking mode.
BYPS At least one cell is in bypass.
PRCH Drive precharge is active.
OLTM Open loop test mode control algorithm used.
MODE Default for display line 1 if no other conditions exist.
Table 8-11 Mode of Operation, Mode Displays -- Line 2
Display Description
NOMV Medium voltage is off or there is no feedback.
INH The drive is in an inhibit mode (CR3 signal is missing).
OFF The drive is in the idle state—ready to run.
MAGN The motor is being magnetized—no torque output.
SPIN The drive is performing a spinning load catch of the motor (startup with motor turning).
UXFR The drive is performing a synchronous transfer of the motor to the line.
DXFR The drive is performing a synchronous transfer of the motor from the line.
KYPD The drive is in the run state with speed command from the keypad.
TEST The drive is in the speed test mode.
LOS The drive is running with the primary speed reference signal lost.
NET1 The drive is running with the speed signal from network1.
NET2 The drive is running with the speed signal from network2.

Operation
Display Description
AUTO The SOP "AutoDisplayMode_0" flag is set to true—speed reference is usually from an
analog signal selected by the SOP.
HAND Default running mode—speed reference is selected by the SOP and
"AutoDisplayMode_0" is set to false.
BRAK The drive is in the stop state with dual frequency braking active.
DECL The drive is in the ramp stop state—speed is ramping down.
COAS The drive is in the coast stop state—drive output is forced off.
TUNE The drive is in the auto tune state—auto tuning is active.
If the mode display shows rollback mode (RLBK), then the Perfect Harmony™ VFD is
attempting to reduce the output speed due to a torque limit condition.
8.2.17 Fault Reset

Manual Reset
To reset a fault manually, use the <FAULT RESET> key on the keypad. Return the drive to
the run condition by performing manual start or by forcing the RunRequest_I equal to "true".
Auto Reset
Certain faults can be reset automatically if enabled by the auto fault reset enable (7120). Refer
to Table " Auto re-settable faults" below, for a list of auto re-settable faults shown in Appendix
D. These are fixed and not adjustable. If reset is successful, then drive will return to the run
state automatically only if the RunRequest_I is maintained at the value "true". The <FAULT
RESET> key of the keypad can acknowledge alarms.

Operation
8.3 General Troubleshooting Information
8.3.1 Handling General Cell and Power Circuitry Faults
General Cell and Power Circuitry Faults

The types of faults addressed in this section include the following:
● capacitor sharing faults
● blocking failure faults
● switching failure faults.
● AC fuse(s) blown faults
● control power faults
● device out of saturation (OOS) faults
● bypass failed faults
● VDC undervoltage faults
WARNING
Electrical Shock Hazard (MV Present)
Prior to working on the equipment as discussed in the following paragraphs, refer to the secion
of this manual titled, Safety Notes.
Because MV is present, only qualified personnel are permitted to work on this equipment.
Failure to to use qualified personnel may result in death, serious personal injury, and damage
to the equipment.
Note
Cell Replacement
The power cell is the lowest replaceable unit by customer.
When a power cell must be replaced, contact Siemens Industry, Inc. Technical support. See
the section of this manual titled, Contacts and Technical Support.
Handling Capacitor Sharing Faults

The cell capacitor bank is made up of from two to three series capacitor banks. Circuitry on
the CCB measures the voltage on each section and if the voltages are off by any amount, the
fault is set. This indicates that under load the capacitors are not sharing load evenly and could
be the result of faulty capacitors or loose connections.
Course of Action
● Fix or replace damaged or defective components.

Operation
Handling Blocking Failure Faults

Blocking failures occur when IGBTs short due to perforation of their junction caused by
excessive current, i.e. high current density. This may be a result of out of saturation conditions
and frequent trips. The device will need to be replaced when the cell is removed for service.
A defective gate driver may be the root cause. A faulty CCB or bad data from the CCB could
give a faulty indication of this fault.
Course of Action
● Replace damaged or defective parts.
Handling Switching Failure Faults

Switching failures occur when a device opens or fails to turn on. It could also be caused by a
defective gate drive or a damaged device. Also, a defective CCB or modulator board could
give a faulty indication.
Course of Action
● Replace defective parts.
Handling AC Fuse(s) Blown Faults

These faults are caused by the blowing of the power fuses on the front end of the cell.
Course of Action
Check the fuses and replace any that are blown—more than one could be out. Replace
defective or damaged parts.
Handling Control Power Faults

This fault is caused when one or more of the control fuses that supply power to the CCB are
blown. This is rarely seen because the CCB is supplied by two circuits: the control power supply
bridge and the DC link. If Control Power Fault is observed, the AC fuses might also be blown.
Course of Action
● Replace the defective or damaged parts.
Handling Q1-Q4 OOS (Out Of Saturation) Faults

Out of saturation faults occur when the transistor junction is depleted of charge carriers
resulting in a higher junction resistance. This in turn created a larger voltage drop and more
losses in the transistor which can lead to premature failure. The cause of the OOS can be a
defective gate driver board or a high di/dt transition on the device. The gate board is designed
with circuitry to detect the larger voltage drop when the device should be on, shutting down
the device in a fault condition. The fault can also be caused by a defective CCB or noise on
the CCB.
Course of Action
● The exact cause needs to be determined before pulling a power cell out of service.

Operation
Handling Failed Bypass Faults

This fault results from the failure of a cell to go into bypass when faulted. The cause can be
from a defective modulator board, bad link between the modulator and the MV bypass board,
a defective MV bypass board or supply, or a defective bypass contactor.
Course of Action
● Find and replace the faulty components.
Handling VDC Undervoltage Faults

The undervoltage fault occurs when the voltage drops below the threshold of the detection
circuitry on the CCB. This can be the result of a low MV level coupled with a high current
drainage by the load, or simply as an excessive load that may give a momentary dip in current.
It can also occur if one of the AC power fuses fails under load.
Course of Action
● Check the cell fuses and check the historic log for line dips.
● Correct the problem before continuing operation. A faulty CCB could give a false indication
as well.
● Replace defective or faulty parts.
8.3.2 Cell Over Temperature Faults
Cell Over Temperature Faults

Cell overtemperature faults are typically caused by problems in the cooling system. Use the
following steps to troubleshoot this type of fault:
Course of Action
1. Check the cooling system for proper flows and temperatures.
2. Inspect cell cooling paths for kinked hoses or major leaks.
3. Be sure all cell cabinet manifold valves are fully open.
4. Check that the blowers are working properly.
5. Check ambient temperature.
6. Verify that all cabinet doors are shut to ensure proper air flow.

Operation
8.3.3 Overvoltage Faults
Overvoltage Faults
An Overvoltage Fault is usually caused by an improperly set-up or tuned drive. Use the
following steps to troubleshoot this type of fault.
Course of Action
1. Verify that the motor and drive nameplate settings match parameters in the motor parameter
menu (1000) and drive parameter menu (2000).
2. Reduce the regen torque limit parameters (1200, 1220, 1240) in the limits menu (1120).
3. Reduce flux regulator proportional gain (3110) and flux regulator integral gain (3120)
parameters in the flux control menu (3100).
4. If the failure is occurring in bypass mode, increase the energy saver minimum flux (3170)
parameter in the flux control menu (3100) to at least 50%.
5. If the measured signals from the previous section seem to be correct, change the modulator
board.
Excessive Drive Losses

The Excessive Drive Loss protection guards against low-level fault currents. Drive losses are
calculated as the difference between the measured input and output powers, and compared
against reference losses. The reference losses are defaulted to 5.0% during "Idle" State and
to 7.0% during "Run" State. When the calculated losses exceed the reference losses, a drive
trip is issued and this condition is annunciated as "Excessive Drive Losses." In addition to this
response, a digital output is set low in the System Operating Program (SOP), which in the
default drive configuration is used to open the input disconnect device. The fixed reference
limit is low enough to detect a fault in one set of transformer windings, and at the same time
is large enough to avoid nuisance trips. When the drive is not supplying power to the motor,
the losses in the system are primarily due to the transformer; the fixed limit is then lowered to
increase the sensitivity of the protection routine.
In earlier software versions up to Version 2.22, the protection was such that when the
calculated losses exceeded the reference losses for more than one second, a trip was
generated. For software Versions 2.30 and higher, an inverse power loss function is
implemented for Excessive Drive Loss protection. The plot in Figure "Excessive Drive Loss
Protection" shows the time to trip as a function of calculated losses for Liquid and Air Cooled
Drives. The plot contains two curves, one of which is used when the drive is in "Idle" State
(i.e., medium voltage is applied, but the motor is not being operated) while the second curve
(slightly longer time to trip) is used during the "Run" State.
The excessive drive loss algorithm is always enabled.
Note
The excess drive loss algorithm is disabled with a decay curve during power-up, and also
during precharge.

Operation

7LPHWRWULSV

5XQ6WDWH

,GOH6WDWH

'ULYH/RVVHV
Figure 8-2 Excessive Drive Loss Protection
Protection Scheme Reset Procedure
DANGER
Reset Protection Scheme Caution
Failure to obey all safety precautions may cause death and equipment damage and drive
failure. Prior to resetting the protection scheme, read the section of this manual titled Major
Drive Faults and Alarms, and then contact Siemens technical personnel.
Resetting the protection scheme

1. In the control tub, reset the LFR using SW2 or keyed reset pushbutton. The LFR N.C.
contacts are immediately reclosed.
2. Initiate a "Drive Fault Reset". The control will not re-close IDO_14 (NXGII) or M1_DOUT
(NXGpro) if the fault conditions still exist. Refer to the section of this manual Dedicated I/O
for Input Protection.
DANGER
MV IP Breaker Enable
This contact must be integrated with input switchgear to deactivate the drive input medium
voltage. upon the rare event of a secondary circuit fault. Failure to do so may result in
death, and equipment damage.
● Contacts close = Permissive to close breaker
● Contacts open = Trip breaker
Note
Given the amperage rating of the components used in the coordinated input protection
scheme, an additional customer pilot relay may be required.

Maintenance 9
9.1 Safety instructions for maintenance
Observe the general safety instructions for all work on the drive.
WARNING
Improper maintenance and repairs
Improper maintenance and repairs can result in death and serious physical injury. Only
qualified maintenance and installation personnel may perform repairs.
WARNING
Defective seals
When working on the device, seals at the doors, roof panels as well as front, rear and side
panels can be damaged. Operating the device with defective seals can result in death, serious
Replace the defective seals before commissioning. Observe the environmental conditions
stated in the technical data.
WARNING
High voltages from external supplies
Magnetizing and demagnetizing equipment that is fed from an external voltage source can
cause high voltages on the drive. This voltage can result in death or serious injury.
Ensure that no voltage from external feeds exists before commencing maintenance and repair
work.
WARNING
High voltage when anti-condensating heating is operational
The anti-condensation heating system is used when the drive is switched off due to production
downtime or maintenance. For this reason, the heating is supplied with voltage from a
separate line supply. When the supply voltage for the anti-condensation heating is connected,
dangerous voltages are present in the cabinet unit. The dangerous voltages are even present
with EMERGENCY OFF or when the main switch is open.
This voltage can cause serious injury.
Observe the five safety rules. (Page 19)

Maintenance
WARNING
Hot anti-condensation heating surface
When the temperature control limit value is reached the anti-condensation heating is switched
on. Once activated, the anti-condensation heating can generate a great deal of heat. Contact
can result in serious injury, such as skin burns.
Make sure that the anti-condensation heating cannot be touched.
For safe maintenance access, make sure the anti-condensation heating is switched off and
has cooled down before starting the work.
CAUTION
Risk of falling
Climbing onto the cover of the anti-condensation heating represents a risk of injury.
Therefore, do not use the anti-condensation heating system to help you get to the top of the
cabinet.
NOTICE
Non-approved spare part
Using non-approved spare parts can affect the function of the equipment and damage it. Third-
party spare parts and unapproved spare parts may not meet the requirements. Therefore,
only use spare parts that have been approved by the manufacturer.
NOTICE
Foreign bodies in the drive
If, after installation and maintenance work, foreign bodies are left in the drive, this can damage
it when switching on. Before switching on, check as to whether there are any foreign bodies
in the drive. Remove any foreign bodies.
NOTICE
Contamination
Contamination and dirt can damage the device.
Visually inspect the equipment at least once per year. For more information, please refer to
the section "Visual inspections".
Qualified personnel in line with the relevant safety regulations must remove dust deposits
inside the cabinet at regular intervals, or at least once a year.

Maintenance
Note
The actual intervals at which maintenance procedures are to be performed depend on the
environmental and operating conditions. Define maintenance intervals for the drive which
reflect your plant-specific environmental and operating conditions and meet your availability
requirements. When doing so, take the prescribed maintenance intervals into consideration,
as well as the instructions for repairing and replacing installed components. See also Visual
Inspections (Page 113).
Note
as well as the instructions for repairing and replacing installed components.
Note
Siemens offers its customers support in the form of a service contract. For further details,
contact your regional office or sales office.
Note
Inform the manufacturer about each maintenance job that has been carried out and about each
spare part replacement for the purposes of a reliability analysis.

Maintenance
9.2 Door Access
9.2 Door Access
9.2.1 Unlocking the doors

The drive can be locked either mechanically or electromechanically.
Opening the Power Unit Doors

The doors must not be opened until the following statuses are present:
● The DC link voltage has been de-energized
– DC Bus Voltage Indicator LED, located on the front of each cell's Cell Control Board,
must NOT be illuminated. An illuminated DC bus voltage-indicator LED shows that more
than 50 Vdc is present on the DC bus. This indicator light may not be visible until the cell
doors are opened.
– Do not touch, remove or service the cell if the indicator is illuminated
● The EMERGENCY-OFF switch on the cabinet has been activated.
● The key-operated switch on the drive has been set to the OFF position.
● A delay time of 10 minutes has expired.
● The make-proof grounding switches (option codes N44 or N45) are closed (they can be
closed only after waiting 10 minutes).
● Use the K1 key (option codes M08, M09, M10, M38) from the OPEN breaker to allow
release of the K2 door keys.
Opening the Door for the Control Cabinet

The standard drive can be opened during operation.
9.2.2 Closing the make-proof grounding switch

The converter is optionally equipped with make-proof grounding switches (N44 or N45).
The make-proof grounding switches can be closed when the doors have been closed and the
following prerequisites are fulfilled:
● The DC link voltage must be de-energized.
● The EMERGENCY-OFF switch on the cabinet unit must be activated.
● The key-operated switch on the converter must be set to the OFF position.
● A delay time of 10 minutes must have expired.
If the auxiliary voltage fails completely, the make-proof grounding switch cannot be closed.
The doors are secured by the electrical door magnet system and can be opened only after the
make-proof grounding switch is closed.

Maintenance
9.2 Door Access
Procedure
1. Take the socket spanner, which can be found in the tool set, and turn it from position "O"
to position "I". The red dot marks the current position.
Figure 9-1 Make-proof grounding switch
2. The contacts are closed and the voltage DC link is grounded.
CAUTION
Grounding while the system is live
You must note the following to prevent injury or material damage:
For operation, the make-proof grounding switch must be deactivated and the grounding
switch lever must be removed before the voltage is switched on. The interlock mechanism
is thus activated.
This prevents grounding while the system is live, which could cause a DC link short-circuit.

Maintenance
9.3 Preventive Maintenance
9.3.1 Inspection
The purpose of an inspection is to ascertain and evaluate the current status of the equipment.
An inspection mainly comprises visual checks. Inspections should be carried out based on a
schedule that meets the needs of the special ambient conditions at the site of installation. The
following servicing and inspection instructions are used as the basis for regular inspection of
the equipment.
9.3.2 Preventive Maintenance Checklist

Use the following table as a guide for performing preventive maintenance tasks.
Maintenance Performed by: Frequency Comments

Clean the cabinet Operator As required Visual check, clean if required.
(exterior).
Clean the cabinet Operator Annually Visual check, clean if required.
(interior).
Check the electrical Operator After 1 year Check the cable and screw termi‐
connections (exter‐ and then every 6 months nals regularly to ensure that they
nal power and test or as needed are secure. If they are not secure,
connections) and tighten them according to specifi‐
check the cable/ cations.
screw terminals.
Check the internal Operator After 1 year Visual check, clean if required.
connections. and then every 6 months
or as needed
Carry out inspection Operator Annually See the specifications in the oper‐
and visual check. ating manual.
Check the software. Siemens service per‐ Whenever parameters
sonnel are changed
and then every 5 years.
Measure the capaci‐ Siemens service per‐ After 3 years
tors. sonnel and then every 2 years.
Check operation of Siemens service per‐ After 3 years
bypass contactors sonnel and then every 2 years.
(if installed).
Visually inspect the Operator Annually
insulation
Check the filters Operator Every 6 months or as To replace the filter mats, follow
needed this instruction (Page 120).
Dampers Operator Every 6 months Visual checks for cracks and for
damaged or loose parts.

Maintenance
Note
installation conditions (cabinet environment) and the operating conditions.
Siemens offers its customers support in the form of a service contract. For further details,
contact your regional office or sales office.
9.3.3 Visual Inspections
9.3.3.1 Equipment for visual inspections

You require the following basic equipment to carry out the visual checks and maintenance
work:
● Mirror
● Flashlight
● Torque wrench for tightening screws
NOTICE
Contamination
Contamination and dirt can damage the device.
Visually inspect the equipment at least once per year. For more information, please refer to
the section "Visual inspections".
Qualified personnel in line with the relevant safety regulations must remove dust deposits
inside the cabinet at regular intervals, or at least once a year.
Note
as well as the instructions for repairing and replacing installed components.
See also Visual Inspections (Page 113).
9.3.3.2 Checking the isolating clearances

● Slight, dry, non-conducting contamination is permitted.
● Remove contamination caused by dust in conjunction with high humidity.

Maintenance
9.3.3.3 Checking hoisting solenoids and security bolts

● Check the hoisting solenoids and security bolts at regular intervals.
● Replace defective hoisting solenoids and security bolts before (re)commissioning.
9.3.3.4 Checking the plug connections

Regularly check the plug connections to ensure they are seated correctly and the contacts are
not corroded.
Note
The fiber-optic cables for the gating boards must be properly inserted in the connectors.
9.3.3.5 Checking the cable and screw terminals

● Check the cable and screw terminals regularly to ensure that they are secure.
● Tighten the screws if necessary. When doing this, comply with the specified torques.
● Check the cabling for defects.
● Replace any defective parts immediately.
9.3.3.6 Checking the filter mats

● Check the air filters in the cabinet doors for pollution.
● Clean the filter mats or replace them if the air flow is obstructed. To replace the filter mats,
follow this instruction (Page 120).

Maintenance
9.4 Touch-Up Paint
9.4 Touch-Up Paint
Touch -Up Paint

Use touch-up paint, as needed, on any rusty or exposed parts on the cabinet enclosure. Clear
surface of any rust prior to painting.

Maintenance
9.5 Cleaning
9.5 Cleaning
9.5.1 Contact for Cleaning Measures

If contamination occurs, contact Siemens customer service. Refer to Appendix Service and
Support.
Note
Proper Cleaning Agents
Be sure to use cleaning agents that do not cause corrosion. Using cleaning agents that may
cause corrosion can produce unwanted equipment damage.
9.5.2 Removing Dust Deposits

Dust Deposits
Dust deposits inside the cabinet unit must be removed at regular intervals (or at least once a
year) by qualified personnel in line with the relevant safety regulations.
The unit must be cleaned using a brush and vacuum cleaner, and dry compressed air (max.
1 bar) for areas that cannot be easily reached.
The ventilation openings in the cabinet must never be obstructed. The fan must be checked
to make sure that it is functioning correctly.
Ventilation
The ventilation openings in the cabinet must never be obstructed, The fan must be checked
to ensure that it is functioning properly.
Cable and Terminal-Screws

● Check the cable and terminal-screws regularly to ensue that they are secure. Tighten them
if necessary.
● Check for cabling defects.
● Immediately replace any defective parts.

Maintenance
9.6 Repair and Replace
9.6.1 Safety-relevant Checks
WARNING
Visual Check of Cable Insulation
Improperly laid or damaged cables and incorrectly attached cable shieldings can heat up in
places and cause fires or short-circuits wherever they make contact.
● Make sure that the cable shields are intact and insulate any that are damaged.
● Make sure that a short-circuit cannot occur on the power cables due to failure of the
insulation as a result of incorrect cable installation.
Note
Component Replacement
Unless otherwise indicated by Siemens, always replace components with the same part
number and revision level.
Note
Drive Failure
When the power supply is switched off, data about error message statuses is lost.
Inadequate diagnostic and error rectification measures can result in damage to the Drive.
For additional technical support, please contact the Siemens Service Center.
Note
Door Interlock Failure
Please contact Siemens Service Center for technical support.

Maintenance
9.6.2 Maintenance and Earthing Procedure
Maintenance and Earthing Procedure
WARNING
Qualified Personnel Only
Due to the modularity of the SINAMICS PERFECT HARMONY GH180 VFD design, the
Maintenance and Earthing Procedure does not cover all variations of equipment types or
installations. Siemens strongly recommends that only qualified personnel be allowed to
perform maintenance on SINAMICS PERFECT HARMONY Systems.
Maintenance and Earthing Procedure

1. Stop drive operation, either through remote or local controls.
2. De-energize input voltage by opening incoming switchgear and locking to OPEN position
with mechanical interlock. Apply lock-out/tag-out principles as required by local code.
3. De-energize control voltages for synchronous motor field/exciter controls.
4. Wait ten minutes to allow stored energy to dissipate from the drive and until the door
interlocking system has been released.
WARNING
Discharging Resistors
The power cells include discharge resistors to dissipate stored energy after the input
voltage is removed. The power cell DC bus voltage decays to less than 50 VDC in less
than 10 minutes.
Ensure to follow all safety precautions to avoid risk of death, serious personal injury, and
equipment damage.
5. If applicable, close all make-proof grounding switches and lock into the CLOSE position.
Figure 9-2 Output Cable to Motor
6. Observe the cell control board voltage LEDs by removing the interlock key from the input/
output switchgear and opening the cell sections door(s).
7. When none of the cell LEDs are lighted, the voltage at the input and output terminals has
fallen below 50 V. Use ancillary AC voltage sensing devices to confirm the drive is de-
energized.
8. Apply Green/Yellow insulated gournd cables from L1/L2/L3 and T1/T2/T3 to protective
earth, P.E.

Maintenance
9. Perform maintenance as required.

10.After the DC Bus LED is extinguished, verify with an appropriately sized multimeter that the
DC bus is 0 Vdc.
DANGER
Possible Residual Charge
After the LED is extinguished, the capacitors inside the cell may contain a residual charge
that can lead to a lethal shock hazard. The input voltage to the cells is 750 Vac that can
produce a DC potential of 1,060 Vdc on the DC Bus
11.Connect a temporary grounding cable to the exterior metal case of the cell. Be sure to use
a cable that is long enough to reach from the cell to the cell lifter and to the floor in front of
the equipment or work bench. Use appropriate PPE and be sure not to touch any bare bus
bars while removing the cell. Note that the power cells do not have any bolted power
connections.
12.Remove the fiber optic connection
13.Route in the Panduit to prevent breaking or damaging the connector
14.Remove the outer chassis hardware and remove the chassis top cover to expose the power
electronics.
15.Remove the grounding device.
16.Close the doors in reverse sequence, and replace interlock key into input switchgear.
4
)$8/7
/,1.21
4
4
4
)LEHU2SWLF '&%XV9ROWDJH,QGLFDWRU
!9'&

Maintenance
9.6.3 Part Replacement

Replacement of component parts may be the best method of troubleshooting when spare parts
are available. When any sub-assembly is to be replaced, always check that the part number
of the new unit matches that of the old unit (including the revision letter).
● Failures traced to individual PC boards within the Control Cabinet are best serviced by
replacement of the entire board.
● Failures traced to individual power cells are best serviced by replacement of the entire cell.
NOTICE
Proper Disposal of Failed Components
The disposal of any failed components (capacitors, etc.) must be done in accordance with
local codes and requirements.
9.6.4 Replacing the Filter Mats

Convection-cooled drives are equipped with filter mats to prevent dangerous dust deposits
from accumulating on the power unit components.The filter mats are fitted to the exterior of
the cabinet doors, which means that they can be replaced with the doors closed.
WARNING
Danger of arcing through dust deposits
Dust deposits on the components of the power unit can reduce the clearances and creepage
distances and form conductive connections between current-conducting parts. This can result
in the formation of arcs. Arcing can result in damage to property, serious injury and even
death.
Dust can enter the cabinet, for example, through open doors or via the air drawn in by the
cabinet fans. Ensure that no dust enters the cabinet when replacing the filter mats.
● Keep all doors of the drive closed.
● Replace the filter mats separately for each segment to keep the time required to a
minimum.
● If necessary, switch off the drive and the cabinet fan if you are unable to ensure the values
for the degree of contamination (see Storage, Transport and Operation Ambient
Conditions (Page 148)).

Maintenance
Intervals for replacing the filter mats
Note
It is not permissible to operate the device with contaminated filter mats.
If you do not observe the intervals for replacing contaminated filter mats, the drive may be shut
down due to premature thermal overheating.
Clean or replace the filter mats every six months or if an adequate air intake is no longer
ensured.

① clean filter mat

② contaminated mat
Note
Determining empirical values for intervals
Proceed as follows to determine the empirical values for replacement:
● Inspect the filter mats two weeks after commissioning. If no (or only slight) contamination
is apparent, inspect the filter mats again after four to eight weeks.
● When doing so, observe the general ambient conditions for operation (see Storage,
Transport and Operation Ambient Conditions (Page 148)).
Procedure
Ensure that no dust enters the cabinet when replacing the filter mats.
Keep all doors of the drive closed.

Maintenance

① Louvered ventilation grill

② Filter mat
1. Pull the louvered ventilation grille ① out towards you.

2. Remove the filter mat ②.
Note
IP20 degree of protection
Without a filter mat the degree of protection of the ventilation opening is reduced from IP21 /
IP41 to IP20.
3. If there is slight contamination, clean the filter mat at a suitable location. Dispose of the
heavily soiled filter mat in the correct manner. Use a new filter mat
4. Insert the filter mat into the frame of the ventilation opening.
5. Carefully place the louvered cover over the frame.
6. Ensure that the cover fits firmly into place again.
7. Replace the filter mats separately for each segment.
9.6.5 Replacing the Control Fuse

To replace the Control Fuse:
1. Power down the System as detailed in the Maintenance and Earthing Procedure section
of this chapter.
2. Power down all low voltage feeds (24 V-690 V) to the drive.
3. Place the Control Power Disconnect Switch (DSI), located in the blower control ciricuit, into
the OPEN position. Follow the site requirements for Lock Out Tag Out (LOTO).
Note
All control fuses are installed in fuse holders that provide a visual indication of open fuses.

Maintenance
4. Use an appropriately sized AC voltage detector to ensure that all power is removed to the
fuses being serviced.
Note
The Drive can accommodate up to a 690 Vac power for the blowers.
5. Open the fuse holder and replace the fuse with a suitably rated spare fuse.
Note
Use customer specific documentation to identify both the voltage and current rating of the
fuse
6. Close the fuse holder and check the resistance with an ohm meter to validate that a proper
connection has been made.
See also
Maintenance and Earthing Procedure (Page 118)
9.6.6 Replacing the Door-Mounted Keypad and Operator Panel

To replace the Door-Mounted Keypad:
1. Switch off the main circuit breaker.
2. Open the cabinet.
To replace the Operator Panel:

1. Remove the Macrolon cover
2. Disconnect the ribbon cable at J2 from the operator panel
3. Unscrew the four hexagon-head screws
4. Pull out the operator panel to the front
5. Fit a new operator panel.
6. Screw in the four hexagon-head screws
7. Reconnect the ribbon cable at J2 on the operator panel
8. Reattach the Macrolon cover

Maintenance
9.6.7 Removing the Power Cell Procedure
How to Remove Power Cells

The DC bus voltage-indicator LED shows that more than 50 V DC is present on the DC bus.
This indicator light is located on the front of each cell’s Cell Control Board and may not be
visible until the cell doors are opened.
To remove the Power Cells:
● Power down the system, obeying all standard electrical and safety instructions.
DANGER
Lethal Voltages
Even when the system is powered down, power may still be present at the power cell's
DC bus. The recommended waiting time before opening the doors or removing covers is
10 minutes.
● Open the doors, or remove covers, to access the power cells.

● Make sure that the DC bus LED is unlit.
DANGER
Lethal Voltages
The cell should not be touched, removed, or serviced if the indicator is illuminated.The
cell chassis is not grounded and when energized can float to lethal voltages. Touching
the ungrounded chassis will result in death and damage to equipment.
● Connect a temporary grounding cable to the exterior metal case of the power cell that is
long enough to reach from the power cell to the cell lifter, and to the floor in front of the
equipment or work bench. Use appropriate PPE, and be sure not to touch any bare bus
bars while removing the power cell.
CAUTION
Existing Voltage May Still Be Present
An LED that is not extinguished indicates that power is present. Even if an LED is
extinguished, voltage may still be present and must be checked with an appropriately sized
multimeter.
The power cells include discharge resistors to dissipate stored energy after the input
voltage is removed. The power cell DC bus voltage decays to less than 50 VDC in less
than 10 minutes
Connecting a temporary grounding cable to the exterior metal case of the power cell that
still has voltage present, can cause personal injury and damage to the equipment.
● Remove the fiber optic from the CCB as follows:

Maintenance
● Be sure to wear Cat 1 gloves.

● Grab the two locking latches and pull down to a horizontal position to release the power
cell. When the latches are pulled down to the horizontal position, the power cell will move
forward approximately 1/2 inch.
● Still holding the latches, pull the power cell approximately one-third of the way out of its
slot. Do NOT lift up or pull down on the cell, but rather let it slide on the polyethylene-coated
mounting rails.
● Using the Siemens cell lifter (Siemens P/N A1A163496.08), slide the cell completely out of
its slot and onto the lifter.

Maintenance
● Once on the lifter (or work bench), remove the outer chassis hardware to lift off the chassis
top cover to expose the power electronics
● Measure the residual DC bus voltage between the plates as shown below, taking care not
to inadvertently short the distance with the meter terminals. Verify the voltage is low
(<50 Vdc) or zero potential, personnel may place a temporary shorting lead across the DC
bus as a precaution.
W/V and
2/3 Bleeder
Bleeder and
WHT Harness Wire
Connections
WHT and
1/3 Bleeder
%XV
%XV
Grey and "-" Bleeder

BLK and "+" Bleeder
Figure 9-3 DC Bus View
WARNING
Dangerous Potential Level
The DC potential of a VFD Power Cell is 1060 Vdc across the DC bus. If a value >50 Vdc
is read, immediately STOP work on the cell. Properly lock out the work area and contact
Siemens personnel.
Possible death, serious injury to personnel and damage to equipment is possible,
See also
Maintenance and Earthing Procedure (Page 118)

Maintenance
9.6.8 Returning the Power Cell to Siemens

To ship the cell back to the factory be sure to package the cell as shown below.
Fill bottom of box with Instapak Place cell into box on top of Fill sides and top with Insta‐
sealed air foam in bag packag‐ foam. Be sure that the locking pak sealed air foam packag‐
ing material. latches are pointed up. ing material. Before cooling,
close box lid to form top.
Check for air pockets and fill
as needed. Seal box and ship.

Maintenance
9.6.9 Replacing the Compact Flash Card (NXGII)

Copy the stored data of the old CompactFlash card to the new original Siemens card. Refer
to the following figure.
)ODVK'LVN
Figure 9-4 Location of CompactFlash card on the Control Microprocessor Board
Perform the following steps to replace the CompactFlash card.

1. Remove the fiber-optic link from the fiber-optic control board.
2. Remove the enclosure cover from the control card rack.
3. Remove the power cable and the SUB-D cable.
4. Loosen the fastener screw on the card.
5. Withdraw the card from the control card rack.
6. Remove the old Compact Flash card.
7. Insert the new Siemens CompactFlash card.
8. Reinsert the card back into the control card rack.
9. Retighten the fastener screw on the card.
10.Reconnect the power cable and the SUB-D cable.

Maintenance
11.Reattach the enclosure cover to the control card rack.

12.Reconnect the fiber-optic link to the fiber-optic control board.
9.6.10 Installing Peferct Harmony Power Cells

To Install the Power Cell:
1. Using the Siemens cell lifter, line up the power cell with its slot.
2. Push the cell into its slot. Do not lift up on the cell, but instead let it slide in on the
polyethylene-coated mounting rails.
3. Make sure that the cell latches are above the ledge of the cell rail, and align the locking
latches with the corresponding rail notches, as shown below.
4. Push up on the latches until they are vertical.

5. Reinstall the Fiber Optic.
9.6.11 Replacing Cell Input Power Fuses

A label is located on the left side of the fuse block that shows all approved replacements. Only
two phases of each transformer secondary (power cell input) are fused.

Maintenance
Blown Cell Input Power Fuse Indicator

Each fuse has visual blown indication, making it easy to diagnose a fuse’s condition. Fuses
are forced air cooled for longer life and less thermal stress.
The fuses are mounted external to the cell. This not only reduces the size of the cell, but also
allows for the fuses to be located in an accessible location. They primarily provide secondary
short circuit protection and are sized to accommodate power cell charging currents upon initial
energizing.
Note
Matching Fuses
A mixture of the approved fuse vendors are permitted in terms of fuse replacement as long as
any two fuses protecting the secondary windings are matched (i.e., FA1A and FA1C should
be from the same vendor).
Note
Recommended Time Limit for Fuse Replacement
As a preventive maintenance measure for drives that experience daily inrush events, Siemens
recommends replacing all power fuses that have been in operation for ten years.
Note
Primary and E-Rated Fuses
The core drive does not include primary fuses. When E-rated fuses are required, choose the
smallest rating greater than or equal to the transformer’s primary nameplate current value (e.g.,
1000 KVA / (1.732 * 4160 V) = 139 A, use 150E fuses).

Maintenance
9.6.12 Replacing Cell Input Power Fuses Assembly

Assembly
Figure 9-5 Cut-Out View of Fuse Assembly
Fuse Location for 9-Cell and 12-Cell Systems

The secondary fuse block is located either in the front of the transformer section or the right
hand side of the transformer cabinet.
Fuse Location for 15-Cell and 24-Cell Systems

The fuses are located on the left hand side of the cell cabinet behind the front control.
Cell Input Power Fuse Replacement Procedure
To replace an open Cell Input fuse:

1. Power down the System, obeying all standard electrical and safety instructions. Refer to
the section titled Maintenance and Earthing Procedure located in this chapter of the manual.
2. Open the doors to access the Cell Input Fuse section.
Note
This section varies based on the drive output voltage and cell size. The customer specific
documentation shall be referenced to locate the Cell Input Fuse.

Maintenance
3. Use an appropriately sized AC voltage detector to ensure that the power is removed.
WARNING
Electrical Hazard
The secondary rating of the air-cooled transformer to the input of the cell power fuse is
750 Vac. Qualified personnel must obey all safety precautions. Risk of death, serious
personal injury, and eqipment damage can occur.
4. Use the appropriate tools to remove the bolts holding the power cable to the fuse mounting
feet.
Note
40 A - 140 A cells will most likely have a M8 bolt while 200 A - 260 A cells will most likely
have a M10 bolt.
5. Remove the open fuse and replace with a spare Cell Input Power Fuse.
6. Re-apply the power cable connections and apply a new torque mark to the bolt.
Note
Torque the M8 bolt connections to 17 Nm (13 ft-lb) and torque M10 bolt connections to
31 Nm (23 ft-lb).
9.6.13 Printed Circuit Board Replacement Procedure (NXGII)

Follow the procedures as indicated in the following sections when replacing
● PCB(s) on Digital Card Rack
● Signal Conditioning Board
● I/O Breakout Board
Digital Card Rack

1. Power down the system, following the standard shut-down procedure.
2. Use an appropriately sized AC voltage detector to ensure all power is removed to the control.
Note
The drive can accommodate up to a 240 VAC power for the control.

Maintenance
3. Prior to servicing any printed circuit board (PCB), ensure proper ESD protection is followed.
– All circuit boards shipped by Siemens are done so in an ESD protective bag. They must
stay inside this bag during transport and storage. They can only be removed after placing
the bag on a dissipative ESD workbench surface.
– Before removal from the ESD protective bag, the personnel handling the PCB must be
properly grounded. Proper grounding is accomplished by using a heel grounder on a
dissipative floor surface or a wrist strap connected to a proper ground.
Note
ESD sensitive components can be identified by symbols being present on the
component or the component packaging.

Maintenance
4. The controller has a digital card rack (DCR) with 8 slots. It is mounted within the respective
control tub. The following PCB locations, from right to left when facing the unit, are within
the Digital Card Rack.
– Slot 1: Keypad Interface Board
– Slot 2: Single Board Computer (CPU) Board
– Slot 3: BGA Digital Modulator Board
– Slot 4: Fiber Optic Interface Board (6600 V and 10000 V unit only)
– Slot 5: DB37 Connector
– Slot 6: System I/O Board
– Slot 7: DB50 Connector
– Slot 8: Communication Board with up to two (2) Anybus Module(s)
7REUHDNRXWERDUG
7RVLJQDOFRQGLWLRQLQJERDUG
&RPPXQLFDWLRQVERDUG 7REUHDNRXWERDUG
%*$GLJLWDOPRGXODWRUERDUG
$Q\EXV
PRGXOHV
.H\SDGDGDSWHU
ERDUG
6\VWHP,2ERDUG
)LEHURSWLFLQWHUIDFH
ERDUG
1HZPLFURSURFHVVRUERDUG
1HZSRZHUVXSSO\
Figure 9-6 Master Control Chassis
5. Identify which board requires service, and disconnect all connections to that specific board.
The board may include fiber optic cables, 50-pin connectors, 37-pin connectors, ribbon
cables, and a wire harness.
6. Use a Phillips-head screwdriver to remove the screws holding the PCB into the ISA bus on
the backplane. Remove the PCB.
Note
Slide the PCB slowly out of the DCR being sure not to bend the board.

Maintenance
7. Install the spare PCB.

Note
Slide PCB into slot and be sure it seeds in the backplane firmly being careful not to bend
the board.
8. Replace all of the removed screws, connectors, and cables.

Note
It is imperative that fiber optic connectors are installed back into their original location.
Failure to do so may lead to catastrophic damage. Validation can be performed using an
external light source and checking both ends of the fiber for transmission.
The system /O Board has two 50-pin cables tied to it. Care needs to be taken to ensure
proper reconnection. Catastrophic damage may occur if improperly connected.
9. Place the removed PCB into the empty ESD protective bag if the PCB is being returned to
Siemens for analysis.
Signal Conditioning Board and I/O Breakout Board

1. Power down the system, following the standard shut-down procedure.
2. Power down all low voltage feeds (24 V-690 V) to the drive.
Note
Low voltage feeds vary per customer design. The customer specific documentation shall
be referenced to identify all low voltage feeds.
3. Use an appropriately sized AC voltage detector to ensure all power is removed to the control.
Note
The drive can accommodate up to a 240 VAC power for the control.

Maintenance
4. Prior to servicing any printed circuit board (PCB), ensure proper ESD protection is followed.
– All circuit boards shipped by Siemens are done so in an ESD protective bag. They must
stay inside this bag during transport and storage. They can only be removed after placing
the bag on a dissipative ESD workbench surface.
– Before removal from the ESD protective bag, the personnel handling the PCB must be
properly grounded. Proper grounding is accomplished by using a heel grounder on a
dissipative floor surface or a wrist strap connected to a proper ground.
Note
ESD sensitive components can be identified by symbols being present on the
component or the component packaging.
5. The signal conditioning board (SCB) and the input/output breakout board (IOB) are din-rail
mounted within the respective control tub.
Note
The customer specific documentation shall be referenced to identify the location of the
SCBr the IOB.
6. Identify which board requires service and disconnect all connections to that specific board.
The board may include 50-pin connectors, 37-pin connectors, ribbon cables, a wire
harness, and single control wire connections.
Note
All control wire terminations require a flat-head screwdriver for removal.
7. Use a flat-head screwdriver to depress the two tabs on the board for removal of the PCB
from the din-rail.
8. Install the spare PCB on the din-rail.
9. Replace all of the removed connectors, ribbon cables, and wire harnesses.
10.Place the removed PCB into the empty ESD protective bag if the PCB is being returned to
Siemens for analysis.

Spare Parts 10
10.1 Spare parts list

Spare Parts
Spare Parts List
Device Designation Order no. Quantity

Product Description
-S31 3LD2003-0TK53 1
EMERG. STOP SWITCH 3-POLE
IU=16, P/AC-23A AT 400V=7.5KW
FRONT MOUNTING
FOUR-HOLE MOUNTING
ROTARY ACTUATOR RED/YELLOW
(EMERG. STOP)
3LD9201-1A 1
TERMINAL COVER 4-POLE
FOR SWITCH 3LD2, 16A
-K40 3RH2122-1FB40 1
CONTACTOR RELAY, 2NO+2NC,
DC 24V, W/ INTEGRATED DIODE,
SIZE S00, SCREW TERMINAL
-K52, -K53, -K54, -K55 3RS1800-1HW01 4

COUPLING RELAY IM
INDUSTRY-STANDARD ENCLOSURE
3 COS, HARD GOLD-PLATED
WIDE VOLTAGE RANGE
24 V TO 240 V AC/DC
SCREW TERMINALS
-K38 3RT1024-1AG20 1
CONTACTOR, AC-3 5.5 KW/400 V,
AC 110V 50/60HZ,
3-POLE, SIZE S0,
SCREW CONNECTION
-V38 3RT1926-1BC00 1
VARISTOR, AC 48-127V, DC70-150V
SURGE SUPPRESSOR,
FOR MOUNTING ONTO CONTACTORS
SZ. S0...S3
-K31, -K32 3RT2016-1FB41 4

-K33, -K34 CONTACTOR, AC-3, 4KW/400V, 1NO,
DC 24V, W. INTEGRATED DIODE
3-POLE, SZ S00
SCREW TERMINAL
-K38 3RT2024-1FB40 1
CONTACTOR, AC-3, 5.5KW/400V,
1NO+1NC, DC 24V,
W.INTEGR.DIODE
3-POLE, SZ S0
SCREW TERMINAL
-Q31, -Q32 3RV2011-1FA10 4

-Q33, -Q34 CIRCUIT-BREAKER SZ S00,
FOR MOTOR PROTECTION, CLASS 10,
A-RELEASE 3.5...5A, N-RELEASE
65A,
SCREW CONNECTION,
STANDARD SW. CAPACITY
-Q3 3RV2411-1CA10 1
CIRCUIT-BREAKER SZ S00,
FOR TRANSFORMER PROT.
A-RELEASE 1.8...2.5A, N-RELEASE
52A
SCREW CONNECTION,
STANDARD SW. CAPACITY
Agiba Petroleum Agiba Petroleum

SIEMENS AG N-H91483667020001 EL AC

Spare Parts
Spare Parts List

Product Description
-S3 3SB3000-1HA20 1
22MM PLASTIC ROUND
ACTUATOR:
EMERGEN.-STOP MUSHR.PUSHB. 40MM
LATCH.W. ROT.-TO-UNLATCH MECH.
WITH HOLDER
RED
3SB3400-0E 2
ACTUATOR-/INDICATOR COMPONENT
CONTACT BLOCK
WITH 2 CONTACTS
SCREW TERMINAL, 1NC, 1NC
-S2 3SB3500-4MD01 1
22MM METAL ROUND
ACTUATOR:
CES KEY-OPER.SWITCH WITH 2 KEYS
MOMENTARY CONTACT TYPE
2 SWITCH POSITIONS O-I
LOCK NO SSG 10, REMOVAL POS. O
WITH HOLDER
-S1 3SB3608-2DA11 1
22MM METAL ROUND
COMPLETE UNIT COMBINATION:
SELECTOR SWITCH
LATCHING
3 SWITCH POSITIONS I-O-II
NON-ILLUMINATED
SCREW TERMINAL, 2X1NO+1NC
WITH HOLDER
BLACK
3SB3921-0AK 1
ACCESSORY / SPARE PART
FOR PLASTIC-/METAL PROGRAM
ROUND, 22MM:
FOR MOUNTING ON FRONT PLATE
PROTECTIVE COLLAR FOR
MUSHR.PUSHBUTTON WITHOUT
KEY-OPER.SWITCH, YELLOW
3SB3922-0AV 1
INSCRIPTION ACTUATOR/INDICATOR
FLAT LABEL HOLDER FOR
INSCRIPTION LABEL FOR STICKING
LABEL SIZE 12.5 X 27 MM
BLACK
-K41 3TH4364-0BB4 1
CONTACTOR RELAY 64E EN 50 011
6NO+4NC, SCREW TERMINALS
DC OPERATION
DC SOLENOID SYSTEM DC 24V
-V41 3TX7402-3R 1
SURGE SUPPRESSOR RC ELEMENT
WITH WIRE SPACER
AC 24 TO 48V/DC 24 TO 70V
F.MOUNTING TO THE COIL TERMINAL
FOR CONTACTORS SIZE 0 TO 2
-Z1 3TX7522-3G 1
SURGE SUPPRESSOR
VARISTOR FOR SNAPPING ON
DC 24 TO 70V
FOR CONTACTOR SIZE 8 TO 12

N-H91483667020001 EL AC SIEMENS AG

Spare Parts
Spare Parts List

Product Description
5ST3010 2
AUXILIARY SWITCH
1NO+1NC FOR MCB 5SL, 5SY, 5SP,
ON-OFF-SW. 5TL1,
RCBO 5SU1, RCD 5SV
-F4 5SY6106-7 1
CIRCUIT BREAKER 230/400V
6KA, 1-POLE, C, 6A, D=70MM
-F38 5SY7210-7 3
-F38 CIRCUIT BREAKER 400V
-F40 15KA, 2-POLE, C, 10A, D=70MM
-G1 6EP1334-2BA20 1
SITOP PSU100S 24 V/10 A
STABILIZED POWER SUPPLY
INPUT: 120/230 V AC
OUTPUT: 24 V/10 A DC
WARRANTY PERIOD 24 MONTHS FROM DATECODE
"EO" (OCTOBER 2014)
-E51, -E52, -E53, -E54, -E55 6SL3760-2AL55-0CA0 5

ANTI-CONDENSATION HEATING
-K21, -K22, -K51 6SL3760-2AX30-0AA0 3

SPARE PART
FOR SINAMICS
CLAMP RELAY
PLC -RSC- 24DC / 21-21
-K23 6SL3958-6RC01-0AA0 1
PHOENIX RELAIS PLC-BSC
24V DC 1 PDT
-Q2 . 6SL3984-6PX02-0AA0 1
EARTH SWITCH WITH AUXILIARY
SWITCH 3CX5006-1A
2 NC CONTACTS , 2 NO CONTACTS
SAP-MATERIAL 632489
-A93 6SL3985-6LC00-0AA0 1
PT100 EVALUATION UNIT, ZIEHL
TR600 FOR SINAMICS
-A40 6SL3995-6LX80-0AA0 1
BIMETALLIC SWITCH
FOR SINAMICS MEDIUM-VOLTAGE
FOR SINAMICS MEDIUM-VOLTAGE
CONVERTERS
-Y12 . 6SL3998-6PX00-0AA0 1
STROKE MAGNET
GY032 24V 0,38A 3/RAD500N
6SR0900-0FA02-0AA0 67
FILTER MAT
140 X 345 MM
FOR DUST COVER
-L31, -L32 6SR0900-0GA01-0AA0 4

-L33, -L34 INCOMMING REACTOR
FOR BLOWER


Spare Parts
Spare Parts List

Product Description
-R1, -R2 6SR0900-0GA03-0AA0 4

-R3, -R4 RESISTOR FOR BLOWER CONTROLL
-E31 6SR0900-0GM00-0AA0 2
-E33 EC centrifugal fan
R3G630_400V/50/60Hz
-E32 6SR0900-0GM10-0AA0 2
-E34 EC-CENTRIFUGAL FAN_R3G500_400VAC_1700RPM
-T20, -T21 6SR0960-0AJ02-0AA0 2

Current Transformer
500A LT 505-S
-A10 6SR0960-0CB15-0AD0 1
MULTI LANGUAGE KEYPAD ASSEMBLY
ENGLISH
-G2 6SR0960-0CC03-1AD0 1
POWER SUPPLY NXGPRO +/-15V
-A2 6SR0960-0CC07-1AD0 1
USER IO BOARD
GH180 24VDC
6SR0960-0CC08-0AD0 1
CONTROL SOFTWARE
V 6.0.0, GH180
-A3 6SR0960-0CC14-0AD0 1
GH180 NXGPRO SYSTEM INTERFACE
BOARD
-A1 6SR0960-0CC18-0AD0 1
GH180 NXGPRO CONTROLLER 18 CELL
-T10, -T11 6SR0960-0HA02-0AD0 2

CURRENT TRANSFORMER
MODEL 300, 100:5A
-F111, -F113, -F121, -F123, -F131, - 6SR0960-0JA10-0AA0 30

F133 -F141, -F143, -F151, -F153 FUSE
-F211, -F213, -F221, -F223, -F231, - NH00-DIN 80MM, 1KV, 280A
F233 -F241, -F243, -F251, -F253 AR FOR 140A PH POWER CELL
-F311, -F313, -F321, -F323, -F331, -
F333 -F341, -F343, -F351, -F353
-T5 6SR0960-0KA00-0AA0 1
TRANSFORMER FOR AUXILIARY
VOLTAGE 200-690V/115-230V,
500VA
-Z31 6SR0960-0KA02-0AA0 1
EMC-FILTER
16A
6SR0960-0LA11-0AA0 1
FIBER OPTIC SET, 15 CELLS
-A11, -A12, -A13 6SR0960-0MN00-0AA0 3

INPUT ATTENUATOR ASSEMBLY
3 AC 11000V

N-H91483667020001 EL AC SIEMENS AG

Spare Parts
Spare Parts List

Product Description
-A21, -A22, -A23 6SR0960-0NH00-0AA0 3

VOLTAGE DEVIDER
AC 6600V
-K1 6SR0960-0PA20-0AA0 1
RELAY POWER RR2KP-U DC24V
24 V DC
-A110 6SR4902-0AD00-0AA0 15
-A120 SINAMICS PERFECT HARMONY GH180
-A130 Power cell 140 A GenIV
-A140 WE RECOMMEND TO ORDER AND CHANGE 2 PCS.
-A150 OF CELL FUSE A1A099720 = 6SR4900-0JM00-2AD0
-A210 TOGETHER WITH THE CELL
-A220
-A230
-A240
-A250
-A310
-A320
-A330
-A340
-A350


Disposal and Recycling 11
11.1 Disposing of Device Components
Before dismantling the Drive, ensure that it is brought to a standstill and grounded.
If disposed of properly, none of the material listed below will pose any threat to the environment.
Take particular care when disposing of and recycling the following components:
● Batteries
● Capacitors
● PCBs
● Electronic components
Be sure to dispose of or recycle in accordance with the applicable country-specific guidelines /
regulations and with the applicable national regulations. .

Disposal and Recycling
11.2 Disposing of Packaging
11.2 Disposing of Packaging

Description
The packing is designed in such a way as to pose the minimum risk to the environment. Some
of the packaging can be recycled.
The disposal of packaging is controlled by country-specific laws. If in doubt, ask local disposal
specialists or contact the local authorities.
List of Packing Waste Materials

● Wooden frames
● Wooden pallets
● Polyethylene foil
● Plywood
● Plastic
● Silica gel

A.1 Siemens Industry Online Support (order documentation)
Details regarding the design of this device and the permissible operating conditions are
described in these instructions.
On-site service and spare parts

If you wish to request on-site service or if you require spare parts, please contact your local
sales partner who establishes the contact to the responsible service center.
Technical queries or additional information

If you have any technical queries or you require additional information, please contact the
Siemens Service Center.
Please have the following data ready:
● Order number
● Serial number
You can find this data on the rating plate of the device.
Answers to frequently asked questions and the possibility of sending your questions to the
service department can be found here (http://www.siemens.com/automation/support-request).
You can find your local contact partner here (www.siemens.com/automation/partner).
You can also call the following numbers directly during local working hours to reach a contact
partner who speaks the corresponding national language.
Contact to central technical support
Europe and Africa
+49 911 895 7222

+49 911 895 7223
support.automation@siemens.com
Americas
+1 423 262 5710

+1 423 262 2231
support.america.automation@siemens.com

Service and Support
A.1 Siemens Industry Online Support (order documentation)
Asia/Australia/Pacific
+86 10 6475 7575

+86 10 6474 7474
support.asia.automation@siemens.com

Technical Data B
B.1 Standards and regulations
Table B-1 Standards and conformity
Standards
Standards DIN EN 61800-3/VDE 0160 T103 (IEC 61800-3)
DIN EN 61800-4 / VDE 0160 T104 (IEC6 1800-4), however, only when referenced in the
standards DIN EN 61800-3 or DIN EN 61800-5-1
DIN EN 61800-5-1/VDE 0160 T105 (IEC 61800-5-1)
EU directives Up to April 19, 2016
2006/95/EC + amendments (Low Voltage Directive)
2004/108/EC + amendments (Electromagnetic Compatibility)
from April 20, 2016
2014/35/EU + amendments (Low Voltage Directive)
2014/30/EU + amendments (Electromagnetic Compatibility)
Certificate of compliance For the EMC Directive (2004/108/EC + amendments or 2014/30/EU + amendments)
with order (Product cannot be operated independently; limited distribution channel)
Interference omission This drive unit is part of a PDS, Category C4 according to DIN EN 61800-3/
VDE 0160 T103 (IEC 61800-3). The drive unit has not been designed to be connected to the
public line supply. The equipment can cause electromagnetic interference when it is connected
to the public grid. The essential requirements placed on EMC protection for the drive system
should be secured using an EMC plan at the customer site.
Insulation According to DIN EN 50178/VDE 0160 (IEC 62103), IEC 61800-5-1:
Pollution degree 2 (without conductive pollution), non-condensing
Degree of protection In accordance with DIN VDE 0470 T1, EN 60 529, IEC 60 529
Protection class Class 1 according to DIN EN 61800-5-1/VDE 0160 T105 (IEC 61800-5-1)
Touch protection DIN EN 50274/VDE 0660 T514

Technical Data
B.2 Storage, Transport and Operation Ambient Conditions

Refer to the General Ambient Conditions table to view the various ambient conditions of air-
cooled SINAMICS PERFECT HARMONY GH180. Note that these conditions meet the IEC
60721 and 61800 applicable standards.
Table B-2 General Ambient Conditions
Storage Transport Operating

CLIMATIC AMBIENT CONDITIONS
Ambient temperature +5 °C to +40 °C –25 °C to +60 °C +5 °C to +40 °C
in accordance with
IEC 60721 3-2, Class 2K2
Relative air humidity < 95 % < 95 % < 95 %
(VFD must be completely (VFD must be completely dry (condensation not permitted)
dry before commission‐ before
ing) commissioning)
Other climatic conditions in 1K2, 1Z2 2K2 3K3
accordance with class in accordance with in accordance with in accordance with
IEC 60721-3-1 IEC 60721 3-2, Class 2K2 IEC 60721-3-3
Degree of pollution 2 2 2
without conductive pollu‐ without conductive pollution without conductive pollution in ac‐
tion in accordance with in accordance with cordance with
IEC 61800-5 IEC 61800-5-1 IEC 61800-5-1
MECHANICAL AMBIENT CONDITIONS
STATIONARY VIBRATION, SINUSOIDAL
Displacement 1,5 mm (2 to 9 Hz) 3,5 mm (2 to 9 Hz) 0,3 mm (2 to 9 Hz)
Acceleration 5 m/s2 (9 to 200 Hz) 10 m/s2 (9 to 200 Hz) 1 m/s2 (9 to 200 Hz)
15 m/s2 (200 to 500 Hz)
Other mechanical condi‐ 1M2 2M1 3M1
tions in accordance with in accordance with in accordance with in accordance with
class IEC 60721-3-1 IEC 60721-3-2 IEC 60721-3-3
with exception that tilt must
be > 0 .
OTHER AMBIENT CONDITIONS
Biological ambient condi‐ 1B1 2B1 3B1
tions in accordance with in accordance with in accordance with in accordance with
class IEC 60721-3-1 IEC 60721-3-2 IEC 60721-3-3
Chemical active substances 1C1 2C1 3C1
in accordance with class in accordance with in accordance with in accordance with
IEC 60721-3-1 IEC 60721-3-2 IEC 60721-3-3
Mechanical active substan‐ 1S1 2S1 3S1 (standard)
ces in accordance with class in accordance with in accordance with in accordance with
IEC 60721-3-1 IEC 60721-3-2 IEC 60721-3-3 with addition of
sand content of 0.01 mg / m3

Technical Data
Note
For transportation and storage, Option Code (M66) complies with 2M1 in accordance with IEC
60721-3-2. Additionally, pitch and roll for operation, storage, and transport is ± 22.5° as
referenced in GL VI-7-2 Table 3.20.

Technical Data
B.3 Power Cell Specifications
B.3.1 Power Cell Specifications Table
Table B-3 Power Cell Frame Size 1
Cell Frame FRAME 1 Sizes

040 070 100 140
Output Nameplate Current 40 A 70 A 100 A 140 A
Input Voltage 750 V ± 10%, 3 phase, 50/60 Hz
Input Current 28 A 48 A 73 A 96 A
Overload Capacity (see Note) CL-1: 110% of nameplate 1 minute/10 minutes
(* Ambient <40°C) CL-2: 150% of nameplate 1 minute/10 minutes
CL-3: 200% of nameplate 3 seconds/10 minutes
Losses % 1.37 1.22 1.15 1.00
Discharge to 50 VDC (minutes) 0.84 1.68 2.53 3.37
Electrical Connections Rear access blind connection via power plugs
Weight 52 lbs 57.5 lbs 63 lbs 68.5 lbs
23.58 kg 26 kg 28.6 kg 31 kg
Enclosure Width 13.49"
342.8 mm
Enclosure Depth 22.08"
560.98 mm
Enclosure Height 10.25"
260.48 mm
Forced Air Cooling > 180 CFM (225-250 typical)
Power Cell Frame Size 2

200 260 315 375
Output Nameplate Current 200 A 260 A 315 A 375 A
Input Voltage 750 V ± 10%, 3 phase, 50/60 Hz
Input Current 140 A 182 A 220 A 375 A
Overload Capacity (see Note) CL-1: 110% of nameplate 1 minute/10 minutes CL-1: 110% of nameplate 1 minute/10 mi‐
(* Ambient <40°C) CL-2: 150% of nameplate 1 minute/10 minutes nutes
CL-3: 200% of nameplate 3 seconds/10 mi‐
nutes
Losses % 1.16 1.18 1.26 1.32
Discharge to 50 VDC (mi‐ 4.51 6.02 4.65 5.82
nutes)
Electrical Connections Rear access blind connection via power plugs
Weight 102.8 lbs 112.6 lbs 101.5 lbs 131.6 lbs
46.63 kg 51.07 kg 46.04 kg 59.69 kg

Technical Data

200 260 315 375
Enclosure Width 13.99"
355.55 mm
Enclosure Depth 25.88"
657.48 mm
Enclosure Height 13.12"
333.17 mm
Forced Air Cooling > 300 CFM (300-350 typical) > 425 CFM (425-450 typical)
Note
At ambient temperatures ranging from 40° to 50° C, the 140 A cell frame is limited to
150 % - 1 minute/10 minutes overload with a 130 amp continuous rating.
The general ambient conditions shown in Table B-1 are applicable to spare parts.
See also
System Specifications (Page 152)

Technical Data
B.4 System Specifications
B.4.1 15 Cell System Specifications
Table B-4 15-Cell System Parameters
Cells in Drive Output Voltage Hp Range Power Cell Types

(without Redundancy) Available L-L (with O-M) (Continuous Current Rating)
15 6600 V (7000 V) 300-3500 40, 70, 100, 140, 200, 260
Parameters Ratings
Input Line Voltage 2.4, 3.0, 3.3, 4.16, 4.8, 6.0, 6.3, 6.6, 6.9, 7.2, 8.4, 10, 11, 12, 12.47, 13.2, or 13.8 kV; 3 phase;
+10% / -5%
Input Frequency 50 or 60 Hz ±5%
Input Power Factor > 0.95 above 10% load
Input Harmonics <= 5% TDD with ambient THDv <= 2%
Efficiency Copper Wound Transformer: 98% Transformer, 99% Converter, > 96,5% Total VFD
Aluminium Wound Transformer: 97.5% Transformer, 99% Converter, > 96% Total VFD
Output Voltage 15 Cell
6600 V
Output HVF <0.03
Output dv/dt < 3000 V/µS
Overload Capacity 110 % 1 minute / 10 minute
Output Frequency & Drift 1
0.5 - 330 Hz, ± 0.5 % (derates at <10 Hz and at >167 Hz)
Output Torque 10 - 167 Hz rated torque (2 - Quadrant)
Design Life 20 years
Auxiliary Voltage 380 V - 400 V - 415 V, 50 Hz;
460 - 480 V, 575 V, 60 Hz; 3 phase2
Enclosure Type NEMA 1 Ventilated
Degree of Protection IP21 (optional IP42)
Ambient Temperature 0 - 40°C (maximum 50° C, derating starts from 40°C on)
Altitude 0 - 3300 ft. without derating (maximum 12,300 ft with derating)
Sound level 80 dB(A)
Cooling Ventilated, forced air-cooled with integrated fans
1. For high speed projects (>300 Hz), consult Siemens concerning trade sanctions
2. Consult factory for availability of auxiliary voltages other than shown

Technical Data

Technical Data
B.4.2 24 Cell System Specifications
Table B-5 24-Cell System Parameters
Cells in Drive Output Voltage Hp Range Power Cell Types

(without Redundancy) Available L-L (with O-M) (Continuous Current Rating)
24 11200 V (11770 V) 600-5600 40, 70, 100, 140, 200, 260
Parameters Ratings
Input Line Voltage 2.4, 3.0, 3.3, 4.16, 4.8, 6.0, 6.3, 6.6, 6.9, 7.2, 8.4, 10, 11, 12, 12.47, 13.2, or 13.8 kV; 3 phase;
+10% / -5%
Input Frequency 50 or 60 Hz ±5%
Input Power Factor > 0.95 above 10% load
Input Harmonics <= 5% TDD with ambient THDv <= 2%
Efficiency Copper Wound Transformer: 98% Transformer, 99% Converter, > 96,5% Total VFD
Aluminium Wound Transformer: 97.5% Transformer, 99% Converter, > 96% Total VFD
Output Voltage 24 Cell
11000 V
Output HVF <0.03
Output dv/dt < 3000 V/µS
Overload Capacity 110 % 1 minute / 10 minute
Output Frequency & Drift1 0.5 - 330 Hz, ± 0.5 % (derates at <10 Hz and at >167 Hz)
Output Torque 10 - 167 Hz rated torque (2 - Quadrant)
Design Life 20 years
Auxiliary Voltage 380 V - 400 V - 415 V, 50 Hz;
460 - 480 V, 575 V, 60 Hz; 3 phase2
Enclosure Type NEMA 1 Ventilated
Degree of Protection IP21 (optional IP42)
Ambient Temperature 0 - 40°C (maximum 50° C, derating starts from 40°C on)
Altitude 0 - 3300 ft. without derating (maximum 12,300 ft with derating)
Sound Level 80 dB(A)
Cooling Ventilated, forced air-cooled with integrated fans
1. For high speed projects (>300 Hz), consult Siemens concerning trade sanctions
2. Consult factory for availability of auxiliary voltages other than shown

Technical Data
B.5 Output Filters Data
B.5.1 9 Cell Output Filter, Capacitance
9-Cell Output Filter

When the VFD requires an Output Filter, the drive output is equipped with an output inductor
and capacitor filter. These components cannot be packaged into the core configuration due to
space limitations; therefore, they are housed in transition cabinets. Tables "9-Cell OutputFilter,
Capacitance" and " 9-Cell Output Filter, Inductance" list the required inductance and
capacitance for the VFD output L-C filters.
The reactors are typically custom engineered, and may include an overload rating that matches
the cell type and two sets of thermal protectors embedded into the windings.
The capacitors are heavy duty IEEE Standard 18 rated. Most commonly, available off-the-shelf
capacitors are rated for 60 Hz.
The filter connects to the output of the motor drive’s T1, T2, and T3 connections. The long
cable load is then connected to the load side of the filter reactors. The filter may include a
customer-supplied down hole monitoring system (DHMS). Special attention is required and
small resistors may need to be placed in series with the DHMS to prevent fuse failures during
motor starting. The filter components are sized, based upon the continuous current rating of
the power cells and maximum voltage available (without O-M) of the drive.
Table B-6 9-Cell Output Filter, Capacitance (40-260A)
Cell Size ZFL @ 4160 V Q, Reactive C, Capacitance C% C%

@ 60 Hz, 4160 V, 3 Ph @ 50 Hz @ 60 Hz
40 A 60.04 Ohms 25 kVAR 3.83 μF 6.96 % 8.35 %
70 A 34.31 Ohms 50 kVAR 7.66 μF 7.95 % 9.54 %
100 A 24.02 Ohms 75 kVAR 11.50 μF 8.35 % 10.02 %
140 A 17.16 Ohms 100 kVAR 15.33 μF 7.95 % 9.54 %
200 A 12.01 Ohms 150 kVAR 22.99 μF 8.35 % 10.02 %
260 A 9.24 Ohms 200 kVAR 30.64 μF 8.56 % 10.27 %
Note
Actual Project C Values
Actual project C values are subject to change.

Technical Data

space limitations; therefore, they are housed in transition cabinets. Tables " 12-Cell Output
Filter, Capacitance" and " 12-Cell Output Filter, Inductance" list the required inductance and
Table B-7 12-Cell Output Filter, Capacitance

@ 60 Hz, 5600 V, 3 Ph @ 50 Hz @ 60 Hz
40 A 69.28 Ohms 50 kVAR 4.23 μF 9.21 % 11.05 %
70 A 39.59 Ohms 100 kVAR 8.46 μF 10.52 % 12.62 %
100 A 27.71 Ohms 100 kVAR 8.46 μF 7.36 % 8.84 %
140 A 19.79 Ohms 150 kVAR 12.69 μF 7.89 % 9.47 %
200 A 13.86 Ohms 200 kVAR 16.92 μF 7.36 % 8.84%
260 A 10.66 Ohms 250 kVAR 21.15 μF 7.08 % 8.50 %
Note

space limitations; therefore, they are housed in transition cabinets. Tables " 15-Cell Output
Filter, Capacitance" and " 15-Cell Output Filter, Inductance" list the required inductance and

Technical Data

@ 60 Hz, 7200 V, 3 Ph @ 50 Hz @ 60 Hz
40 A 95.26 Ohms 50 kVAR 2.56 μF 7.66 % 9.19 %
70 A 54.44 Ohms 100 kVAR 5.12 μF 8.75 % 10.50 %
100 A 38.11 Ohms 150 kVAR 7.68 μF 9.19 % 11.03 %
140 A 27.22 Ohms 200 kVAR 10.23 μF 8.75 % 10.50 %
200 A 19.05 Ohms 300 kVAR 15.35 μF 9.19 % 11.03 %
260 A 14.66 Ohms 300 kVAR 15.35 μF 7.07 % 8.48 %
Note
B.5.4 24 Cell Output Filters, Capacitance

When the SINAMICS PERFECT HARMONY GH180 VFD requires an Output Filter, the drive
output is equipped with an output inductor and capacitor filter. These components cannot be
packaged into the core configuration due to space limitations; therefore, they are housed in
transition cabinets. Tables "24-Cell OutputFilter, Capacitance" and " 24-Cell Output Filter,
Inductance" list the required inductance and capacitance for VFD output L-C filters.

Technical Data

@ 60 Hz, 11000 V, 3 Ph @ 50 Hz @ 60 Hz
40 A 158.77 Ohms 75 kVAR 1.97 μF 9.84 % 11.81 %
70 A 90.73 Ohms 150 kVAR 3.95 μF 11.25 % 13.50 %
100 A 63.51 Ohms 150 kVAR 3.95 μF 7.87 % 9.45 %
140 A 45.36 Ohms 250 kVAR 6.58 μF 9.37 % 11.25 %
200 A 31.75 Ohms 350 kVAR 9.21 μF 9.19 % 11.02 %
260 A 24.43 Ohms 400 kVAR 10.52 μF 8.07 % 9.69 %
Note
B.5.5 9 Cell Output Filter, Inductance
9-Cell Output Filter. Inductance

When the VFD requires the SYNC TRANSFER feature, the output of the drive is equipped
with a reactor and switchgear (contactors). These reactors cannot be packaged into the core
configuration due to space limitations; therefore, they are housed in transition cabinets. These
reactors limit the rate of rise of current during transfers if the line voltage and drive output
voltage amplitude, frequency, and phase angle do not exactly match. Table "9-Cell Output
Filter Inductance" lists the required inductance for SINAMICS PERFECT HARMONY GH180
synchronous transfer reactors. These reactors are typically custom engineered, and may
include an overload rating that matches the cell type and two sets of thermal protectors
embedded into the windings. They are sized, based upon the continuous current rating of the
power cells and maximum voltage available of the drive.
Table B-10 9-Cell Output Filter, Inductance
Cell Size ZFL @ 4160 V L, Inductance L% L%

@ 50 Hz @ 60 Hz
40 A 60.04 Ohms 14.00 mH 7.61 % 9.13 %
70 A 34.31 Ohms 7.00 mH 6.67 % 7.99 %
100 A 24.02 Ohms 4.80 mH 6.52 % 7.83 %
140 A 17.16 Ohms 3.50 mH 6.67 % 7.99 %
200 A 12.01 Ohms 2.38 mH 6.47 % 7.76 %

Technical Data
Note
Actual project L values are subject to change.
12-Cell Output Filter, Inductance

reactors limit the rate of rise of current during transfers if the line voltage and drive output
voltage amplitude, frequency, and phase angle do not exactly match. Table "12-Cell Output
Filter. Inductance" lists the required inductance for SINAMICS PERFECT HARMONY GH180
synchronous transfer reactors. These reactors are typically custom engineered, and may
include an overload rating that matches the cell type and two sets of thermal protectors
Table B-11 Twelve Cell Output Filter, Inductance

@ 50 Hz @ 60 Hz
40 A 69.28 Ohms 15.90 mH 7.21 % 8.65 %
70 A 39.59 Ohms 9.10 mH 7.22 % 8.67 %
100 A 27.71 Ohms 7.00 mH 7.94 % 9.52 %
140 A 19.79 Ohms 4.80 mH 7.62 % 9.14 %
200 A 13.86 Ohms 3.50 mH 7.94 % 9.52 %
260 A 10.66 Ohms 2.38 mH 7.01 % 8.42 %
Note

Technical Data
15-Cell Output Filter. Inductance

reactors limit the rate of rise of current during transfers if the line voltage and SINAMICS
PERFECT HARMONY GH180 Drive output voltage amplitude, frequency, and phase angle
do not exactly match. Table "15-Cell Output Filter, Inductance" lists the required inductance
for VFD synchronous transfer reactors. These reactors are typically custom engineered, and
may include an overload rating that matches the cell type and two sets of thermal protectors
Table B-12 Fifteen Cell Output Filter, Inductance

@ 50 Hz @ 60 Hz
40 A 95.26 Ohms 15.90 mH 5.24 % 6.29 %
70 A 54.44 Ohms 9.10 mH 5.25 % 6.30 %
100 A 38.11 Ohms 7.00 mH 5.77 % 6.93 %
140 A 27.22 Ohms 4.80 mH 5.54 % 6.65 %
200 A 19.05 Ohms 3.50 mH 5.77 % 6.93 %
260 A 14.66 Ohms 2.38 mH 5.10 % 6.12 %
Note

Technical Data
24-Cell Output Filter, Inductance

When the SINAMICS PERFECT HARMONY GH180 requires the SYNC TRANSFER feature,
the output of the drive is equipped with a reactor and switchgear (contactors). These reactors
cannot be packaged into the core configuration due to space limitations; therefore, they are
housed in transition cabinets. These reactors limit the rate of rise of current during transfers if
the line voltage and drive output voltage amplitude, frequency, and phase angle do not exactly
match. Table "24-Cell Output Filter, Inductance" lists the required inductance for SINAMICS
PERFECT HARMONY GH180 synchronous transfer reactors. These reactors are typically
custom engineered, and may include an overload rating that matches the cell type and two
sets of thermal protectors embedded into the windings. They are sized, based upon the
continuous current rating of the power cells and maximum voltage available of the drive.
Table B-13 Twenty-Four Cell Output Filter, Inductance

@ 50 Hz @ 60 Hz
40 A 158.77 Ohms 37.90 mH 7.50 % 9.00 %
70 A 90.73 Ohms 22.00 mH 7.62 % 9.14%
100 A 63.51 Ohms 15.90 mH 7.87 % 9.44 %
140 A 45.36 Ohms 11.00 mH 7.62 % 9.14 %
200 A 31.75 Ohms 7.00 mH 6.93 % 8.31 %
260 A 24.43 Ohms 5.80 mH 7.46 % 8.95 %
Note

Technical Data
B.6 Ingress Protection (IP) Ratings

IP ratings are developed by the European Committee for Electro Technical Standardization
(CENELEC) (NEMA IEC 60529 Degrees of Protection Provided by Enclosures - IP Code),
specifying the environmental protection the enclosure provides.
The IP rating normally has two (or three) numbers:
● Protection from solid objects or materials
● Protection from liquids (water)
● Protection against mechanical impacts (commonly omitted, the third number is not a part
of IEC 60529).
Refer to the following table using the example shown to help in understanding the IP rating as
it applies to your equipment.
Example - IP Rating
● With the IP rating IP 54, 5 describes the level of protection from solid objects and 4 describes
the level of protection from liquids.
● An "X" can be used for one of the digits if there is only one class of protection (e.g.,IPX1,
which, addresses protection against vertically falling drops of water such as condensation).
IP First Number: Protection against solid objects

0 No special protection.
1 Protected against solid objects over 50 mm e.g. accidental touch by person's hands.
2 Protected against solid objects over 12 mm e.g. person's fingers.
3 Protected against solid objects over 2.5 mm (tools and wires).
4 Protected against solid objects over 1 mm (tools, wires and small wires).
5 Protected against dust limited ingress (no harmful deposit).
6 Totally protected against dust.
IP Second Number: Protection against liquids

0 No protection.
1 Protected against vertically falling drops of water e.g. condensation.
2 Protected against direct sprays of water up to 15 ° from the vertical.
3 Protected against direct sprays of water up to 60 ° from the vertical.
4 Protected against water sprayed from all directions - limited ingress permitted.
5 Protected against low pressure jets of water from all directions - limited ingress.
6 Protected against temporary flooding of water e.g. for use on ship decks - limited ingress permitted.
7 Protected against the effect of immersion between 15 cm and 1 m.
8 Protected against long periods of immersion under pressure.

Technical Data
IP Third Number: Protection against mechanical impacts

0 No protection.
1 Protected against impact of 0.225 joule (e.g. 150 g weight falling from 15 cm height).
5 Protected against impact of 6.0 joule (e.g. 1.5 kg weight falling from 40 cm height).
6 Protected against impact of 20.0 joule (e.g. 5 kg weight falling from 40 cm height).
To comply with the stringent requirements for CE marking machine makers today fit their
machines with parts certified according to European Union and international standards.

Technical Data
B.7 Technical data and drawings
B.7.1 Plant-specific data

Technical Data
SINAMICS PERFECT HARMONY Plant-specific data
GH180
IGBT Voltage DC link converter
Plant-specific data
Plant: Agiba Petroleum

Customer: Agiba Petroleum
Bestellnummer: 6SR4102-2ND41-7FG0-Z
G47+K31+K69+K73+L55+L93+M35+M42+M61+N35+N45+N50
+T74+U02+V12+X30
For option codes refer to documentation
Agiba Petroleum
SIEMENS AG - N-H91483667020001 JD AC 1-5

Technical Data
The reproduction, transmission or use of this document or its

contents is not permitted without express written authority.
Offenders will be liable for damages. All rights, including rights
created by patent grant or registration of a utility model or design,
are reserved.
We have checked that the contents of this document correspond to
the hardware and software described. Nonetheless, differences
might exist and therefore we cannot guarantee that they are
completely identical. The information contained in this document is,
however, reviewed regularly and any necessary changes will be
included in the next edition. We welcome suggestions for
improvement. Perfect Harmony© is a trademark of Siemens
Agiba Petroleum

Technical Data
 Siemens AG 2009 All rights reserved
Agiba Petroleum

Technical Data
NOTE
This data sheet lists the most important drive data. However, these data do not claim to be complete. Please
refer to the rating plates on the plant components for binding data.
Plant-specific data of the SINAMICS PERFECT HARMONY

GH180
Project name ................................................................................................ Agiba Petroleum
Year of construction .................................................................................... 2016
Power unit input (line side)
 Supply…….….. ....................................................................................... 3AC

 Rated input voltage ................................................................................. 11000 V
 Rated input frequency............................................................................. 50 Hz
 Rated input current ................................................................................. 82 A
Power unit output (motor side)
 Supply............ ......................................................................................... 3AC

 Output voltage range .............................................................................. 0 - 6600 V
 Output frequency range .......................................................................... 10 - 167 Hz
 Rated output current ............................................................................... 0-140 A
Rated power................................................................................................. 1578 kVA
Power losses................................................................................................ 53 kW
Efficiency...................................................................................................... 96,0 %
Duty class / operating mode ........................................................................ I, continously
Type of load ................................................................................................. M, motor
Auxiliary voltage supply 3AC

 Supply voltage ........................................................................................ 400 V
 Current consumption .............................................................................. approx. 16 A
Auxiliary voltage supply (UPS) 1AC

 Supply voltage ........................................................................................ --- V
 Current consumption .............................................................................. approx. --- A
Agiba Petroleum

Technical Data
Tolerance of the connection voltage ............................................................ U_nom. . ± 10 %, 50/60 Hz ± 5 %
Grid power factor, basic oscillation .............................................................. > 0.96
Protective class ............................................................................................ Class 1 acc. to IEC 60204-11
Cooling method............................................................................................ AF, air

3
Air flow ......................................................................................................... 5,0 m /s
Degree of protection .................................................................................... IP42
Sound pressure level for SN ........................................................................ 80 dB(A)
Ambient temperature range
Operation +5 - +40 °C
rel. humidity < 95 %, 3K3 corres. to IEC 60721-3-3
(condensation not permitted)
Storage -5°C - +45°C

rel. humidity < 95 %, 1K3 corres. to IEC 60721-3-1
Transport -25 °C - +70°C

rel. humidity < 95%, 2K2 corres. to IEC 60721-3-2
Installation altitude < 1000 m above sea level
Dimensions
See dimension diagram
Weight ................................................................................................... approx. 6400 kg
Paint finish ................................................................................................... RAL7035
Agiba Petroleum

Technical Data
B.7.2 Layout diagrams, dimension drawings
B.7.2.1 Layout diagram

Vorderansicht Transformatorschrank Vorderansicht Zellenschrank
Front view Transformer cabinet Front view Cell cabinet
C B
+1.TC +1.TC +1.CC +1.PC +1.PC

Detail F
Conveyed confidentially. All rights reserved.
6SR4102-2ND41-7FG0-Z
Conveyed confidentially.all rights reserved
G47 K31 K69 K73 L55 L93

M35 M42 M61 N35 N45 N50
Copyright (C) Siemens AG 2003
T74 U02 V12 X30
A C B
Date 07.09.2016 Agiba Petroleum Agiba Petroleum

171
Drawn System
SIEMENS AG
N-H91483667020001
PD LD MF NMA
AD Appr. TL - AO AD Sh
NbgVo
Rev. Remarks Date Name Norm See PDM Orig./Repl.f./Repl.by 1/5
Vorderansicht Transformatorschrank ohne Türen
Front view Transformer cabinet without doors
-E33 -E31
A-A
-Y4 -Y3
-S117 -S116 -S115 -L31
-L33
U1
11
-A
V1
-T10
21
-A
-T11
W1
31
-A
-T1
-Y12
-Q2
6SR4102-2ND41-7FG0-Z
-E54
G47 K31 K69 K73 L55 L93
-E55
M35 M42 M61 N35 N45 N50
T74 U02 V12 X30

172
Drawn System
SIEMENS AG
N-H91483667020001
PD LD MF NMA
NbgVo
C-C
B-B
Detail H
-L32 -L34
U2
2 1
-A
V2
2 2
-A
-E52
W2
23
-A
6SR4102-2ND41-7FG0-Z
G47 K31 K69 K73 L55 L93

M35 M42 M61 N35 N45 N50
T74 U02 V12 X30

173
Drawn System
SIEMENS AG
N-H91483667020001
PD LD MF NMA
NbgVo
Zellenschrank ohne Türen Rückansicht Zellenschrank ohne Rückwände
Cell cabinet without doors Rear view Cell cabinet without rears
-E32 -E34 -E34 -E32
-Y2 -Y1
-S113 -S112 -S111
-A310 -A210 -A110
-F111 -F131 -F151
-F121 -F141
-F113 -F133 -F153
-A320 -A220 -A120
-F123 -F143
-
-F311 -F331
F351
-A330 -A230 -A130

-F321 -F341
-F313 -F333 -F353
-F323 -F343
-A340 -A240 -A140
-F211 -F231 -F251
-F221 -F241
-F213 -F233 -F253

-A350 -A250 -A150
-F223 -F243
-E51
6SR4102-2ND41-7FG0-Z
-T20 -T21 G47 K31 K69 K73 L55 L93

M35 M42 M61 N35 N45 N50
T74 U02 V12 X30

174
Drawn System
SIEMENS AG
N-H91483667020001
PD LD MF NMA
NbgVo
Detail H
Steuerwanne
Control Panel
-S114
-K31 -K32 -K33 -K34
Bedienelemente in der Tür Detail F -Q31 -Q32 -Q33 -Q34

Control elements in the door Detail F
-F38
-F100
-K38
-Z31
-Q3
-F40
-X100
-T5 -K40
-X55
PE
PE
-S2 -X38
PE
-X230
-X33.1
-K51
-K22
-F4
-X31.1
-G1 -K41
-X80
-A10 -V41 -K1
PE
-V1.1 -X22
-K21
-K23
PE
-X24
-V1.2 -Z1
-X12
-X68
PE
-A2 -X4
PE
PE
-S31 -X3
-S1
-K52
-K53
-K54
-K55
PE
-A1
-S3
-X20 -G2
-A40 -X2
-X1
-A3
-RB2
-RB1
PE
6SR4102-2ND41-7FG0-Z
G47 K31 K69 K73 L55 L93

M35 M42 M61 N35 N45 N50
-A93
T74 U02 V12 X30
-E53

175
Drawn System
SIEMENS AG
N-H91483667020001
PD LD MF NMA
NbgVo
176
B.7.2.2 Dimension drawing

Technical Data

10 min 200mm 17 Detail Y
100
B C 60 50
0
2985 190 Ø65
2353
2188
Detail X
Ø14
80
60
20
12 13 0
min 650mm 0 70 115

20
8 8 8 8 8
X X
D D
V
A Y A
0
1252 200 285 1060 285 200 318 434 666 318
1302
4165
15
B C
V
M 1:5
1807
100
100
38
0
6 0
100
50
200
painting : RAL7035
400
2
750
transport units 16
4b
Degree of protection : IP42
100
150
600 150
2 4a 90 165 155 100 2 2 6 210
front view side view 6SR4102-2ND41-7FG0-Z

max 600
G47 K31 K69 K73 L55 L93

Note: Dimensions are in millimeters.
M35 M42 M61 N35 N45 N50
Weight and type of protection: see rating plate data

T74 U02 V12 X30
Weight: see an electrical data sheet

Türöffnungswinkel beträgt ca. bis max 90º
door opening angle is approx. 90 º to max

179
Drawn System
SIEMENS AG
N-H91483667020001
PD LD MF NMA
AC Appr. TB - MB AC Sh
NbgVo
Section D-D
280 620
11
562 1 550
240 11
462 11 4b
400
362 11
100 5
600 150
1
90 150
1 4a
160 147 100 1 6 227
400
536
1807
0
50
68
0
100
Section A-A
1250
1230
14
Ø20 14 Ø20
20
0
1242
1792
2286
2871
3456
4041
142
692
0
6SR4102-2ND41-7FG0-Z
G47 K31 K69 K73 L55 L93

M35 M42 M61 N35 N45 N50
T74 U02 V12 X30

180
Drawn System
SIEMENS AG
N-H91483667020001
PD LD MF NMA
NbgVo
Section C-C without blowers Section B-B without blowers
output input
415 272 230 140
Detail Z
5 1866
80 2U2
7
U1
1763
4b 1618
0 4a
1503
0 110
1358 1335 3
3
Z Z V1
1173
2V2 4a
1163
4b 3
3 890
758 W1
728
4a
553
2W2 7
563
4b 5
146
0 0
374 75
595 334
125 1778 990 242 495 1486
888 825 734 802 375

618
797 805
768
9 9 9
9 9 9
201,5 215 425 215

1630 1630
6SR4102-2ND41-7FG0-Z
G47 K31 K69 K73 L55 L93

Transformer cabinet Cell cabinet M35 M42 M61 N35 N45 N50
T74 U02 V12 X30

Front view Front view
Transformer cabinet Cell cabinet
Side view Side view

181
Drawn System
SIEMENS AG
N-H91483667020001
PD LD MF NMA
NbgVo
DEUTSCH / GERMAN ENGLISH FRANCAIS / FRENCH ITALIANO / ITALIAN
1) Kabeleinführung von unten innerhalb der 1) Cable entry possible from the 1) Entrée des câbles possible par le bas dans la 1) Ingresso cavi possibile dal basso entro l'area
grauen Fläche möglich bottom inside of the grey area zone grisée grigia
2) Kabeleinführung von oben innerhalb der 2) Cable entry possible from the top 2) Entrée des câbles possible par le haut dans la 2) Ingresso cavi possibile del'alto un entro l'area
grauen Fläche möglich inside of the grey area zone grisée grigia
3) Ankerschiene zur Kabelbefestigung 3) Anchor rail for cable mounting 3) Barre de fixation des câbles 3) Sbarra di ancoraggio per fissaggio cavi
4) Leistungsanschluß: 4) Power system connection: 4) Connexions pour les câbles de puissance : 4) Collegamento della potenza:
a) Netzseite a) Line side a) Côté réseau a) Lato rete
b) Maschinenseite b) Machine side b) Côté machine b) Lato macchina
5) Kugelfestpunkt, Durchmesser 20mm 5) Spherical grounding point, 5) Point de mise à la terre, sphérique 20 mm 5) Punti di messa a terra sferici 20mm
6) a) Anschlußklemmen für Signal- diameter 20 mm 6) a) Bornes pour signaux de commande 6) a) Morsetti di collegamento per cavi di
und Steuerleitung < 60V 6) a) Terminals for signal and et de contrôle < 60V segnale e controllo < 60V
b) Anschlußklemmen für Hilfsspannung control cables < 60V b) Bornes pour signaux de commande b) Morsetti di collegamento per tensione
und Steuerleitung > 60V b) Terminals for aux. voltage and et alimentations auxiliaires > 60V ausiliaria e cavo di controllo > 60V
7) Schirmschienen control cables > 60V 7) Barre de raccordement des blindages 7) Barre di schermatura
8) Lufteintrittsbereich 7) Shielding rails 8) Zone d'entrée d'air 8) Zona di ingresso dell'aria
9) Luftaustrittsbereich 8) Air inlet zone 9) Zone de sortie d'air 9) Zona di uscita dell'aria
10) Empfohlener Raum zum Wechseln des 9) Air outlet zone 10) Espace recommandé pour le remplacement 10) Spazio consigliato per sostituzione del ventilatore
Lüfters 10) Recommended space for changing du ventilateur 11) Piastra di messa a terra per PE
11) Erdungsblech für PE of the fan 11) Barre de mise à la terre PE 12) Passerella consigliata per ispezione
12) Empfohlener Revisionsgang 11) Grounding plate for PE 12) Passage recommandé pour inspection 13) Distanza minima consigliata
13) Empfohlener Abstand 12) Recommended inspection way 13) Distance recommandée 14) Per fissaggio sul basamento
14) Für Fundamentbefestigung 13) Recommended distance 14) Pour fixation au sol 15) Unità di trasporto
15) Transporteinheit 14) For mounting on base 15) Unité de transport 16) Baricentro per ogni unità di trasporto,
16) Schwerpunktangabe pro Transporteinheit, 15) Transport unit 16) Indication du centre de gravité de chaque attenzione allo spostamento del baricentro
Achtung Schwerpunktverlagerung 16) Centre of mass for each transport unité de transport, 17) Aperture per il trasporto con barre di sollevamento
17) Öffnungen zum Transport mit Hebestangen und unit, Attention displacement of Attention ! Déplacement du centre de gravité o con elevatori a forca
Gabelstapler the centre of mass 17) Ouvertures pour manutention avec barres de levier et - per ulteriori informazioni sul trasporto vedere
- weitere Informationen zum Transport siehe 17) Openings for transporting with lifting rods and chariot à fourche "Perfect Harmony Riepilogo delle istruzioni di
"Perfect Harmony Zusammenfassung Sicherheits- forklifts - pour plus d'informations sur la manutention, voir sicurezza e di trasporto" -
und Transporthinweise" - - For further information on transport please refer "Perfect Harmony Récapitulatif des instructions de sécurité
to "Perfect Harmony Summary of Safety and et de transport" -
Transport Instructions" -
ESPAÑOL / SPANISH РУССКИЙ / RUSSIAN 日本語 / JAPANESE 中文 / CHINESE
1) Entrada de cables posible desde abajo 1) Введение кабеля осуществляется 1) 下部からのケーブル引込口 1) 电缆可以从灰色区域内的下部引入
dentro del área gris снизу, через обозначенную серую панель （灰色の部分から） 2) 电缆可以从灰色区域内的上部引入
2) Entrada de cables posible desde arriba 2) Введение кабеля осуществляется 2) 上部からのケーブル引込口 3) 用于固定电缆的锚定导轨
dentro del área gris. сверху, через обозначенную серую панель （灰色の部分から） 4) 电力系统的连接:
3) Perfil de anclaje para fijación de cable 3) Короб для укладки и крепления кабелей 3) ケーブル取付け用アンカーレール a) 电源侧
4) Conexión de potencia: 4) Подключение системы питания: 4) 高圧ケーブル接続端子 b) 机器侧
a) Lado de la red а) Сеть a) 電源側 5) 直径为20 mm的球形接地点
b) Lado motor б) Агрегат
5) Сферическая точка заземления, диаметр 20mm b) モータ側 6) a) 信号和控制电缆的接线端子，小于 60V
5) Puntos de puesta a tierra esféricos de 20mm
6) a) Bornes para conectar los cables de 6) а) Клеммы для подключения сигнальных 5) 直径20 mm 球形接地端子 b) 辅助电压和控制电缆的接线端子，大于60V
señalización y control < 60V кабелей и кабелей управления< 60 В 6) a) 信号および制御ケーブル用端子（60V 以下） 7) 屏蔽排
b) Bornes para conectar los cables de б) Клеммы для подключения b) 制御用電源及び制御ケーブル用端子（60V 以上） 8) 进气区
tensión auxiliar y control > 60V вспомогательного напряжения и 7) シールドレール 9) 排气区
7) Railes para pantallas. кабелей управления > 60 В 8) 吸気口 10) 建议为了更换风机、打开减压防爆顶盖和风机挡
8) Zona de entrada de aire 7) Экранирующие шины 9) 排気口板应该保留的空间
9) Zona de salida de aire 8) Зона входа вентиляционного воздуха 10) 冷却ファン交換必要スペース 11) 用于保护地的接地盘
10) Espacio recomendado para cambiar el 9) Зона выхода вентиляционного воздуха 11) 接地端子 12) 建议此处用作检查通道和应该保留的距离
ventilador. 10) Рекомендуемое пространство для замены 12) 最小点検用スペース 13) 建议应该保留的距离
11) Puesta a tierra para PE. вентилятора 13) 最小据付スペース 14) 固定基座按此图布孔
12) Pasillo recomendado para inspección 11) Шина заземления 据付用
12) Рекомендуемый проход для сервиса
14) 15) 运输单元
13) Distancia mín. recomendada 搬送ユニット
14) Para fijación a cimientos 13) Рекомендуемая минимальная дистанция 15) 16) 每个运输单元的重心位置，注意重心的偏移
15) Unidad de transporte 14) Для монтажа на фундаменте 16) 各搬のための重心点 17) 使用起重杆和叉车进行运输时的开孔
16) Info de centro de gravedad por unidad de 15) Транспортное устройство 重心の変位に注意すること - 有关运输的详细信息请参见“Perfect
6SR4102-2ND41-7FG0-Z
transporte, Atención Centro de gravedad 16) Центр тяжести каждого транспортного 17) 金てこおよびフォークリフトによる搬送のための開口部 Harmony安全与运输说明概要”-
desplazado средства, Внимание, смещение центра тяжести - 搬送に関する詳細は、「Perfect Harmony 安全および G47 K31 K69 K73 L55 L93
17) Aberturas para el transporte y movimiento con 17) Отверстия для транспортировки с помощью 搬送に関する注意事項のまとめ」を参照 - M35 M42 M61 N35 N45 N50
palancas y carretillas elevadoras подъемных рычагов и вилочного погрузчика T74 U02 V12 X30
- para más información sobre el transporte, ver - дополнительную информацию по
"Perfect Harmony Resumen de instrucciones de транспортировке см. «Perfect Harmony: общие
seguridad y transporte" - указания по технике безопасности и
транспортировке» -

182
Drawn System
SIEMENS AG
N-H91483667020001
PD LD MF NMA
NbgVo
B.7.3 Circuit diagrams and charts
B.7.3.1 Interconnection diagram

Technical Data

réservés en cas de délivrance d'un brevet, d'enregistrement d'un modèle d'utilitè ou d'un modèle de design.
cette règle est illicite et expose son auteur au versement de dommages et intèrêts. Tous les droits sont
I> I>> U2
CB U1
Toute communication ou reproduction, diffusion et/ou modification de ce document ainsi que toute
exploitation ou communication de son contenu sont interdites, sauf autorisation expresse. Tout
Customer Supply
V1 V2
M
W1 W2
This contact must be integrated with input switchgear Option N45

to deactivate the drive input medium voltage upon the
This is the recommended CB rare event of a secondary circuit fault.
Grounding
-A93 3
Switch Output
schematic. The CB low voltage OFF: Contact open = permissive to close breaker Option L93 3
OFF: Contact close = trip breaker 3
coil shall always be used. L+ <U: Contact close = permissive to close breaker
Thermal
3
CONTACT RATINGS: Evaluation
<U: Contact open = trip breaker -X2: 6 x PT100
AC 50/60Hz (AC15) 3
11
INDUCTIVE LOAD 3
12
230V/10A; 400V/6A
*1) DLS= Door Locking System 13 M
500V/6A; 690V/2A
GS = Grounding Switch OFF 14 0-10V U1 Temperature AO1
*1) DLS GS LFR DC13 INDUCTIVE LOAD 3 RUNS Analog Output 1
LFR = Latch Fault Relay 24V/10A; 48V/10A; 110V/10A 4-20mA I1
<U M
220/2A; 440V/0,9A
L- 0-10V U2 Temperature AO2
Analog Output 2
4-20mA I2
manquement à
Emergency Stop Circuit OFF-Command

-X2:
E-Stop-Signal
Transmittal, reproduction, dissemination and/or editing of this document as well as utilization of its
1 remove jumper between

will be held liable for payment of damages. All rights created by patent grant or registration of a
2 X2:1 and X2:2 to integrate

contents and communication thereof to others without express authorization are prohibited.
external E-Stop -X2:

3 S3 5 Input Grounding Switch Feedback
Emergency Stop Feedback 6 Potential Free NCC
4
35 Input Grounding Switch Feedback
E-Stop 24V DC
36 Potential Free NOC
pot. free
Control and Communication

Control and Communication -X2: Interfaces
Interfaces -X2: 20
Option K73 DO-0 Drive Control Local
Common 15 COM 21
I/O-Board 22
Remote Inhibit 16 DI-0A I/O-Voltage DO-1 Drive Ready To Run
Digital Input 23
Start 17 DI-1A 24V Digital Output potential free
model or design patent are reserved.
24VDC / 10mA 24
Stop 18 DI-2A Inductive Load acc. to DO-2 Drive Running
Remote, Fault, Reset 19 DI-3A IEC 60947-5-1 25
(230VAC, 2 A) 26
DO-3 Drive Warning
Analog Input 1 (24VDC, 1 A) 27
-X3: Option M61 28
7 20mA(+) DO-4 Drive Fault
Redundant 29
Speed Setpoint1 AI1 4-20mA 8 20mA(-) 9
Blower -K41 MV Input Breaker Enable
9 shield
Offenders
10
utility
Analog Output 1 -X3:

und Mitteilung seines Inhaltes sind verboten, soweit nicht ausdrücklich gestattet.Zuwiderhandlungen
verpflichten zu Schadenersatz.Alle Rechte für den Fall der Patenterteilung, Gebrauchsmuster-oder
20mA(+) 1
both analog outputs 20mA(-) 2 Actual Speed AO, 4-20mA
Weitergabe sowie Vervielfältigung, Verbreitung und/oder Bearbeitung dieses Dokumentes,
can be configurated shield 3

in: 0-20mA, Analog Output 2

4-20mA or 0-10V 20mA(+) 4
20mA(-) 5 Motor Torque AO, 4-20mA
Option L55 shield 6
-X55:
Anticondensation Heating
L1 1
1AC/N/PE 115V-230V L1/N/PE 115-230VAC
N 2
50/60Hz Input 50/60 Hz, Power: max. 700W
PE PE
Geschmacksmustereintragung vorbehalten.
-X4:
L1 1
L2 2 4 Auxiliary Voltage 3AC/PE
3AC/PE 400V 3
L3 380-480V ± 10%, 16A,
50Hz Input N 50/60Hz ± 5%
Verwertung
PE PE 3
4
5
W:\WNV_ED_Auftraege\MV\3622_PH\A_ngebote_Aufträge\
6
N -X38:
Option N35 1 Feedback Signal
4_Auftraege\Aufträge_in_Bearbeitung\1483667_Agiba
2
-X100: Option X30 External
3 L1
Auxiliary Single L1/N/PE 120/230VAC 50/60Hz
L1 1 Uncontroled 4 N
Phase Devises 1/1,2kW Output
If a residual current-operated protective 3AC 400V 32A
L2 2
400V 3AC 32A
Outgoing PE PE
L3 3 Feeder 5 L1
(RCD) or monitoring (RCM) device is used 50Hz Output
N N 6 N
L1/N/PE 120/230VAC 50/60Hz
Petroleum_GenIVph3\Nahtstellenplan\
1/1,2kW Input
for protection in case of direct or indirect PE PE PE PE
contact, only an RCD or RCM of Type B is

allowed on the supply side of this product.
SU_A5E37944719A_AF.vsd
Option G47
Ethernet
-X20
185
AF P5A00182873 04.08.16 Sieburg Date 03.05.2016
SIEMENS AG Sinamics Perfect Harmony GH180
Interconnection Diagram
AE P5A00180091 22.07.16 Sieburg Drawn Sieburg Agiba Petroleum PD LD P MF-NMA EN D 3 +1.CC
AD P5A00178404 11.07.16 Sieburg Appr. s. TeamCenter Nürnberg Vo 6SR4102-2ND41-7FG0-Z Sheet 1
Rev. Remarks Date Name Norm Orig./Repl. f/Repl. by 11kV / 6,6kV 140A Air-Cooled A5E37944719A FF-SU AF 1 Sh
186
B.7.3.2 Circuit manual

Technical Data

Diagrams and charts/Schaltungsunterlagen
for/fuer:
Purchaser/ Agiba Petroleum

Besteller
Plant/
Anlage Agiba Petroleum
Plant section/ SINAMICS PERFECT HARMONY GH180

Anlagenteil
BASE CONFIGURATION, 6,6kV, AIR-COOLED
Order-number/
Auftragsnummer SAP: 0001483667-20
Serial Number/ SEE REFERENCE SHEET
Seriennummer
MLFB: 6SR4102-2ND41-7FG0-Z
Options / Optionen G47+K31+K69+K73+L55+L93+M35+
M42+M61+N35+N45+N50+T74+U02+
V12+X30
Function designation/
Funktionskennzeichen
Location designation/
Ortskennzeichen +1
Date of issue/
Ausgabedatum 05.08.2016
Department
Abteilung PD LD MF-NMA EN D3
AD see PDM 07.09.16 Sys

Documentation designation/ Sheet:/Blatt 1
Dokumentationskennzeichen FS-SP Blattsumme: 1
Total number of sheets
Rev. Remarks Date Name
Document-No./
Copyright (C) Siemens AG 2006 Zeichnungs-Nummer N-H91483667020001- FS-SP AD 189
Als Betriebsgeheimnis anvertraut. Alle Rechte vorbehalten.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Seri.No. Designation Document No. Revision Sheet No. Sheets Date Description Prepar. by
A N-H91483667020001- FS-SP AD 1 1 05.08.2016 SINAMICS PERFECT HARMONY GH180 PD LD MF-NMA EN D3 A

+1 BASE CONFIGURATION, 6,6kV, AIR-COOLED
N-H91483667020001- AB-SV AD 1 1 05.08.2016 SINAMICS PERFECT HARMONY GH180 PD LD MF-NMA EN D3

LIST OF DOCUMENTS Sys
.AB N-H91483667020001- FF-UP AD 1 7 05.08.2016 SINAMICS PERFECT HARMONY GH180 PD LD MF-NMA EN D3

+1 INFORMATION ABOUT Sys
B THE CIRCUIT MANUAL B
.BA N-H91483667020001- FF-SU AD 1 4 05.08.2016 SINAMICS PERFECT HARMONY GH180 PD LD MF-NMA EN D3

+1.LC BLOCK DIAGRAM Sys
.CA N-H91483667020001- FS-SP AD 1 9 05.08.2016 SINAMICS PERFECT HARMONY GH180 PD LD MF-NMA EN D3

+1.TB INCOMING SUPPLY AND Sys
CURRENT-/VOLTAGE FEEDBACK
.CD N-H91483667020001- FS-SP AD 1 15 05.08.2016 SINAMICS PERFECT HARMONY GH180 PD LD MF-NMA EN D3

+1.CC AUX.POWER SUPPLY Sys
C C
.M N-H91483667020001- FS-SP AD 1 1 05.08.2016 SINAMICS PERFECT HARMONY GH180 PD LD MF-NMA EN D3

+1.CC OPTION L55: Sys
ANTI-CONDENSATION HEATING
.P N-H91483667020001- FS-SP AD 1 1 05.08.2016 SINAMICS PERFECT HARMONY GH180 PD LD MF-NMA EN D3

+1.CC OPTION L93: Sys
TEMPERATURE EVALUATION
.S N-H91483667020001- FS-SP AD 1 1 05.08.2016 SINAMICS PERFECT HARMONY GH180 PD LD MF-NMA EN D3
D +1.PC OPTION M61: Sys D

REDUNDANT BLOWER
D:/GDOKU_AHEAD/AUFTRAEGE/0001483667_20/PDF/N-H91483667020001_SP_AD.pro
.TF N-H91483667020001- FS-SP AD 1 1 05.08.2016 SINAMICS PERFECT HARMONY GH180 PD LD MF-NMA EN D3

+1.CC OPTION N35-N38: Sys
ELCAD-Projektstruktur: List of documents | AA | N-H91483667020001- | 1 |
AUXILIARY DEVICES EXTERNAL
.UB N-H91483667020001- FS-SP AD 1 1 05.08.2016 SINAMICS PERFECT HARMONY GH180 PD LD MF-NMA EN D3

+1.PC OPTION N45: Sys
GROUNDING SWITCH SYSTEM
.W N-H91483667020001- FS-SP AD 1 1 05.08.2016 SINAMICS PERFECT HARMONY GH180 PD LD MF-NMA EN D3

E +1.CC OPTION X30 Sys E
N-H91483667020001_SP_AD
.CA N-H91483667020001- FF-KL AD 1 17 05.08.2016 SINAMICS PERFECT HARMONY GH180 PD LD MF-NMA EN D3

+1.CC .CA+1.CC-X12 Sys
7.9.0 SP2
ELCAD-VERSION:
Project:
F F
190
AD see PDM 07.09.16 Sys Date 05.08.2016 Agiba Petroleum SINAMICS PERFECT HARMONY GH180
Drawn Sys Agiba Petroleum PD LD MF-NMA EN D3
LIST OF DOCUMENTS
Appr. see PDM Nürnberg VO Sheet1
N-H91483667020001- AB-SV AD
Rev. Remarks Date Name Norm Orig./Repl.f./Repl.by List of documents Inhaltsverzeichnis 1 Sh.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

ERLAEUTERUNGEN ZUM SCHALTUNGSBUCH
INFORMATION ABOUT THE CIRCUIT MANUAL
INHALTSVERZEICHNIS
CONTENT
A A
1 AUFBAU DES HARDWARE-SCHALTUNGSBUCHES

1 STRUCTURE OF THE HARDWARE CIRCUIT MANUAL
1.1 UNTERLAGENARTEN
1.1 DOCUMENT TYPES
1.2 UNTERLAGENDEFINITIONEN
1.2 DOCUMENT DEFINITIONS
2 FERTIGUNGS- UND BESCHRIFTUNGSHINWEISE

2 PRODUCTION AND LABELING INSTRUCTIONS
2.1 LISTE DER EINZELLEITUNGEN UND KABEL

2.1 LIST OF SINGLE CABLES AND WIRES
B 2.2 BEDEUTUNG DER LEITUNGSFARBEN B
2.2 SIGNIFICANCE OF THE CABLE COLOR CODING
2.3 LEITUNGSVERLEGUNG
2.3 CABLE ROUTING
2.4 GENORMTE QUERSCHNITTE VON RUNDEN KUPFERLEITERN
2.4 CROSS-SECTIONS OF ROUND CONDUCTORS
3 EQUIPMENT DESIGNATION 3 BETRIEBSMITTELKENNZEICHNUNG
4 INTERRUPTION POINTS AND TARGET DESIGNATION 4 ABBRUCHSTELLEN UND ZIELHINWEISE
C C
1. STRUCTURE OF THE HARDWARE CIRCUIT MANUAL 1. AUFBAU DES HARDWARE-SCHALTUNGSBUCHES
1.1 DOCUMENT TYPES 1.1 UNTERLAGENARTEN
THE DOCUMENT TYPES OF THE HARDWARE CIRCUIT MANUAL ARE SUB-DIVIDED DIE UNTERLAGENARTEN DES HARDWARE-SCHALTUNGSBUCHES SIND WIE FOLGT GE-
AS FOLLOWS: GLIEDERT:
FS-SP: CIRCUIT MANUAL (COVER SHEET) FS-SP: SCHALTUNGSBUCH (DECKBLATT)

D AB-SV: LIST OF DOCUMENTS AB-SV: UNTERLAGENVERZEICHNIS D
FF-UP: INFORMATION ABOUT THE CIRCUIT MANUAL FF-UP: SCHALTBUCHERLAEUTERUNG
TL-AO: LAYOUT DIAGRAM TL-AO: ANORDNUNGSPLAN

FF-SU: BLOCK DIAGRAM FF-SU: UEBERSICHTSSCHALTPLAN
ELCAD-Projektstruktur: General diagram | AB | N-H91483667020001- | 1 |
FS-SP: CIRCUIT DIAGRAM FS-SP: STROMLAUFPLAN

FF-KL: CONNECTION DIAGRAM FF-KL: KLEMMENPLAN
E 1.2 DOCUMENT DEFINITIONS 1.2 UNTERLAGENDEFINITIONEN E
FS-SP = CIRCUIT MANUAL (COVER SHEET) FS-SP = SCHALTUNGSBUCH (DECKBLATT)

N-H91483667020001_SP_AD
6SR4102-2ND41-7FG0-Z
G47+K31+K69+K73+L55+L93+M35+
7.9.0 SP2
THE CIRCUIT MANUAL INCLUDES ALL OF THE CIRCUIT DOCUMENTATION WHICH IS DAS SCHALTUNGSBUCH IST DIE ZUSAMMENSTELLUNG DER SCHALTUNGSUNTERLAGEN,
M42+M61+N35+N45+N50+T74+U02+
HANDED OVER TO THE CUSTOMER WHEN THE EQUIPMENT IS SUPPLIED. DIE DEM AUFTRAGGEBER IM ZUSAMMENHANG MIT DER LIEFERUNG DES GERAETS V12+X30
THE COVER PAGE INCLUDES CUSTOMER-SPECIFIC INFORMATION, UEBERGEBEN WERDEN.
ELCAD-VERSION:
100 SINAMICS PERFECT HARMONY GH180

THE MLFB (ORDER NO.) AND THE INTERNAL NUMBERS. DAS DECKBLATT ENTHAELT KUNDENSPEZIFISCHE ANGABEN, DIE MLFB UND
ERLAEUTERUNGEN
INTERNE DOKUMENTENNUMMERN. ZUM SCHALTUNGSBUCH
Project:
F F
<100> 191
AD see PDM 07.09.16 Sys Date 05.08.2016 Agiba Petroleum SINAMICS PERFECT HARMONY GH180 =.AB
INFORMATION ABOUT +1
Appr. see PDM Nürnberg VO THE CIRCUIT MANUAL Sheet1
N-H91483667020001- FF-UP AD
Rev. Remarks Date Name Norm Orig./Repl.f./Repl.by General diagram Uebersichtsplan 7 Sh.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

AB-SV = LISTS OF DOCUMENTS AB-SV = UNTERLAGENVERZEICHNIS
A ALL OF THE DOCUMENTS WHICH BELONG TO THE CIRCUIT MANUAL OF THE IM AB-SV SIND DIE UNTERLAGEN AUFGELISTET, DIE ZUM SCHALTUNGSBUCH DER A
CONVERTER SYSTEM ARE LISTED IN THE AB-SV. ANLAGE GEHOEREN.
FF-UP = INFORMATION ABOUT THE CIRCUIT MANUAL FF-UP = SCHALTBUCHERLAEUTERUNG

DESCRIBES THE CONTENTS OF THE CIRCUIT MANUAL AND DEFINES THE HIERARCHIC BESCHREIBT DEN INHALT DES SCHALTBUCHS UND GIBT DEN HIERARCHISCHEN AUF-
STRUCTURE OF THE POWER SECTION (IF IT IS PART OF THE SCOPE OF SUPPLY) BAU UND DIE GLIEDERUNG DES LEISTUNGSTEILES SOWIE DER DIGITALEN STEUER-
OF THE DIGITAL OPEN- AND CLOSED-LOOP CONTROL. UNG UND REGELUNG WIEDER.
B THE FF-UP ALSO INCLUDES FABRICATION INSTRUCTIONS, PROVIDING INFORMATION BEINHALTET AUCH FERTIGUNGSHINWEISE, DIE AUFSCHLUSS UEBER DIE IN B
ABOUT SINGLE- AND RIBBON CABLES USED IN CABINETS. DEN SCHRAENKEN EINGESETZTEN EINZEL- UND FLACHLEITUNGEN GEBEN.
TL-AO = LAYOUT DIAGRAM TL-AO = ANORDNUNGSPLAN
THE LAYOUT DIAGRAMS INDICATES, IN A SIMPLIFIED FORM, THE SPATIAL DIE ANORDNUNGSPLAENE STELLEN IN VEREINFACHTER FORM DIE RAEUMLICHE AN-
ARRANGEMENT OF THE VARIOUS UNITS AND DEVICES IN THE CABINETS, ORDNUNG DER BETRIEBSMITTEL IN DEN SCHRAENKEN, DEN BAUGRUPPENTRAEGERN
SUBRACKS AND OPERATOR CONTROL INTERFACES. UND AUF DEN BEDIENFLAECHEN DAR.
C C
FF-SU = BLOCK DIAGRAM FF-SU = UEBERSICHTSSCHALTPLAN
A BLOCK DIAGRAM IS A SIMPLIFIED EIN UEBERSICHTSSCHALTPLAN IST DIE VEREINFACHTE

REPRESENTATION OF A CIRCUIT, WHICH SHOWS ONLY THE ESSENTIAL ELEMENTS. DARSTELLUNG EINER SCHALTUNG, BEI DER NUR DIE WESENTLICHEN TEILE BE-
THE BLOCK DIAGRAM INDICATES THE MODE OF OPERATION AND THE STRUCTURE OF RUECKSICHTIGT WERDEN. ER ZEIGT DIE ARBEITSWEISE UND DIE GLIEDERUNG
D AN ELECTRONIC UNIT. EINER ELEKTRISCHEN EINRICHTUNG. D
FS-SP = CIRCUIT DIAGRAM FS-SP = STROMLAUFPLAN

THE CIRCUIT DIAGRAM SHOWS THE DETAILED CIRCUIT. DER STROMLAUFPLAN IST DIE AUSFUEHRLICHE DARSTELLUNG EINER SCHALTUNG MIT
IT ALSO SHOWS THE SIGNAL TRACKING FROM THE POWER SECTION TO THE IHREN EINZELHEITEN.
DIGITAL OPEN- AND CLOSED-LOOP CONTROL, AND FROM THE HARDWARE TO THE UEBER IHN WIRD AUCH DIE SIGNALVERFOLGUNG VOM LEISTUNGS- IN DEN DIGI-
SOFTWARE AND VICE VERSA. TALEN STEUER- UND REGELTEIL UND VON DER HARDWARE ZUR SOFTWARE UND UMGE-
THESE DIAGRAMS ARE SUB-DIVIDED INTO FUNCTION GROUPS. KEHRT DURCHGEFUEHRT.
DIESE PLAENE SIND IN FUNKTIONSGRUPPEN UNTERTEILT.
E E
FF-KL = CONNECTION DIAGRAM FF-KL = ANSCHLUSSPLAN

N-H91483667020001_SP_AD
6SR4102-2ND41-7FG0-Z
THIS DIAGRAM SHOWS THE CONNECTION POINTS FOR THE ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT AUS IHM GEHEN DIE ANSCHLUSSPUNKTE DER ELEKTRISCHEN EINRICHTUNG UND DIE G47+K31+K69+K73+L55+L93+M35+
7.9.0 SP2
AND THE CONNECTED INNER (TO THE CONTROL DEVICE) AND OUTER DARAN ANGESCHLOSSENEN INNEREN UND AEUSSEREN LEITENDEN VERBINDUNGEN M42+M61+N35+N45+N50+T74+U02+
V12+X30
CABLE CONNECTIONS (TO THE PLANT/EXT. SYSTEM). HERVOR.
ELCAD-VERSION:

UNTERLAGENDEFINITIONEN
Project:
F F
192 <100>
DOCUMENT DEFINTIONS +1
N-H91483667020001- FF-UP AD
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
2. PRODUCTION AND LABELING INSTRUCTIONS / FERTIGUNGS- UND BESCHRIFTUNGSHINWEISE

A A
2.1 LIST OF WIRES AND CABLES / LISTE DER LEITUNGEN UND KABEL
CODE CABLE TYPE CORE/ COLOR ITEM-NO COMMENT/ CODE CABLE TYPE CORE/ ITEM-NO COMMENT/
LETTER CROSS SECTION MANUFACTURER LETTER CROSS SECTION MANUFACTURER
B KENNBUCH- LEITUNGSTYP ADERN/ FARBE SACH-NR. BEMERKUNG/ KENNBUCH- LEITUNGSTYP ADERN/ SACH-NR. BEMERKUNG/ B
STABE QUERSCHNITT HERSTELLER STABE QUERSCHNITT HERSTELLER
dbj SN55218 1x0,50 GY A5E01268137 ALTE SACHNR. 641811 -W2000,-W2001, -W2002, -W2003 GES GSC-01 2x0,62 A5E00293712
dbm SN55218 1x1,0 BK A5E00502583 ALTE SACHNR. 645192 -W2004, -W2005
dbn SN55218 1x1,5 BK A5E00502708 ALTE SACHNR. 641886 -W2010, -W2013
dbo SN55218 1x1,5 GNYE A5E00508337 ALTE SACHNR. 641910 -W2014, -W2015, -W2016, -W2017
dbr SN55218 1x10,0 BK A5E00502762 ALTE SACHNR. A5E01199379 -W2018 -W2019, -W2022, -W2023,
dbt SN55218 1x16,0 GNYE A5E01199380 ALTE SACHNR. 1003902 -W2040, -W2041, -W2042
dbu SN55218 1x2,5 BK A5E00502727 ALTE SACHNR. 641894
dbv SN55218 1x2,5 GNYE A5E01393777 ALTE SACHNR. 641928 -W2020, -W2021 GES GSC-01 3x0,62 A5E00293713
C dcg COPPER CABLE 1x50 - - 609743 -W2030, -W2011, -W2012 GES GSC-01 4x0,62 A5E00293714 C
dcj COPPER CABLE 1x95 - - 246801 -W2031 2YSLCY-J 4x4,0 A5E00103073
dcv H05V-K 1x1,0 GNYE 1010983 -W2032, -W2033, -W2034, -W2035, -W2036 LTG (OG) 3x1,5 1011212
ddf H07V-K 1x1,5 WH 215947 -W2055, -W2056
der LI6Y TR 1x1,3 TR 164608 -W2037 1x95 A5E03290484
dfr FIBER DUPLEX 1x1 BK A5E01001670 -W2038 1x95 A5E03290483
dgc SN55218 1x1,0 GY A5E01268361 ALTE SACHNR. A5E00410245 -W2050 AWG24 7x32 A5E00996559
dgk 1,3 AWG16 1x1,3 YE A5E00493935 -W2051 A5E00988809
dhs SN55218 1x0,50 BK A5E00496845 -W2052 A5E01001340
dgq SN55218 1x1,50 OG A5E01268363 ALTE SACHNR. A5E00507890 -W2053 AWG28 A5E01006991
D dgr SN55218 1x2,50 OG A5E00507905 D

dgs SN55218 1x4 OG A5E00507923 -W2070, -W2071 GES GSC-01 6x1,0 A5E00293715
dgt SN55218 1x10 OG A5E00507927 -W2060, -W2061, -W2062, -W2063 GES GSC-01 2x2,5 A5E02291826
dgx SN55218 1x4 GNYE A5E00508419

dgy SN55218 1x0,75 BK A5E00502235
dhq SIAF 1x35 RD 0142335200

dhr SIAF 1x70 RD A5E00846463
dhv SIAF 1x150 RD A5E00180171
dhw SIAF 1x240 RD A5E01275664
dca SN55218 1x6,0 BK A5E00502755
dbx SN55218 1x4,0 BK A5E00502735
E E
djo 44A0111-20-0 1x0,62 BK 193656
dje SIAF 1x95 RD A5E00891900
N-H91483667020001_SP_AD
6SR4102-2ND41-7FG0-Z
G47+K31+K69+K73+L55+L93+M35+
7.9.0 SP2
M42+M61+N35+N45+N50+T74+U02+
V12+X30
ELCAD-VERSION:

KABEL UND LEITUNGEN
Project:
F F
<100> 193
CABLES AND WIRES +1
N-H91483667020001- FF-UP AD
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

2.2 SIGNIFICANCE OF THE CABLE COLORS
2.2 BEDEUTUNG DER LEITUNGSFARBEN
A A
COLOR ABRR. PURPOSE

FARBE KURZ- BEDEUTUNG
ZEICHEN
WHITE/WEISS WH SHIELD/SIGNAL EARTH
WHITE/WEISS WH SCHIRM/SIGNALERDE
BLACK/SCHWARZ BK INTERNAL WIREING
BLACK/SCHWARZ BK INTERNE VERBINDUNG
GREENYELLOW/GRUENGELB GNYE PROTECTIVE EARTH
GREENYELLOW/GRUENGELB GNYE SCHUTZLEITER
B B
2.3 CABLE ROUTING 2.3 LEITUNGSVERLEGUNG
CABLES WHICH ARE NOT FUSED AND WHICH ARE USED TO ESTABLISH A CONNECTION UNABGESICHERTE LEITUNGEN ZUM ANSCHLUSS AN SAMMELSCHIENEN ODER QUER-
TO THE BUSBARS OR CABLES HAVING A HIGHER CROSS-SECTION ARE ROUTED IN SCHNITTSSTAERKERE LEITUNGEN SIND NACH DER REGELUNG FERTIGUNG RF3010-3
ACCORDANCE RF3010-3 SPECIFICATIONS. VERLEGT.
CABLES WHICH MUST BE ROUTED SO THAT THEY ARE SHORT-CIRCUIT AND KURZSCHLUSS- UND ERDSCHLUSSSICHER ZU VERLEGENDE LEITUNGEN SIND VOR DEM
GROUND-FAULT PROOF ARE IDENTIFIED WITH '#' IN FRONT OF THE CABLE CODE LEITUNGSKENNBUCHSTABEN MIT DEM KURZZEICHEN '#' GEKENNZEICHNET UND
LETTER AND ARE ROUTED IN ACCORDANCE RF3010-3 SPECIFICATIONS. NACH DER REGELUNG FERTIGUNG RF3010-3 VERLEGT.
C C
THE INFORMATION AND SPECIFICATIONS WHICH HAVE TO BE OBSERVED WHEN DIE FUER DIE LEITUNGSVERLEGUNG ERFORDERLICHEN ERLAEUTERUNGEN UND FEST-
ROUTING CABLES ARE INCLUDED IN THE PRODUCTION SPECIFICATION. LEGUNGEN SIND IN DEN GUELTIGEN FERTIGUNGSRICHTLINIEN ENTHALTEN.
IN ORDER TO PREVENT NOISE BEING COUPLED-IN, VOLTAGES EXCEEDING 60V UM STOERBEEINFLUSSUNGEN ZU VERMEIDEN, SIND SPANNUNGSBEREICHE GROESSER
MUST BE SEPARATED FROM VOLTAGES LESS THAN 60V. 60V VON SPANNUNGSBEREICHEN KLEINER 60V GETRENNT VERLEGT.
TO ENSURE A NOISE-IMMUNE DESIGN, THE APPROPRIATE IEC FUER EINEN STOERSICHEREN AUFBAU WURDEN DIE ENTSPRECHENDEN IEC
STANDARDS HAVE BEEN OBSERVED. NORMEN BEACHTET.
FOR EXAMPLE, THE SCREENS OF ALL OF THE SCREENED CABLES ARE CONNECTED SO SIND Z.B. DIE SCHIRME ALLER GESCHIRMTEN LEITUNGEN SO KURZ WIE MOEG-
TO THE CABINET GROUND THROUGH THE SHORTEST POSSIBLE PATH. LICH MIT SCHRANKMASSE VERBUNDEN.
D D
WHEN SECURING SEPARATE SHIELD CONNECTION CABLES, ENSURE THAT THE HOUSING BEIM BEFESTIGEN VON SEPARATEN SCHIRMANSCHLUSSKABELN AUF
CONTACT SURFACE IS OF BRIGHT METAL AND THAT THERE IS A PERMANENT CONNECTION. METALLBLANKE GEHAEUSEAUFLAGEFLAECHEN AUF FESTE VERBINDUNG ACHTEN.
INDIVIDUAL CABLES WHICH RELATE TO EACH OTHER WITH RESPECT TO SIGNAL SIGNALMAESSIG ZUSAMMENGEHOERIGE EINZELKABEL IN MOEGLICHST KLEINEM
SHOULD BE ROUTED WITH THE LEAST POSSIBLE DISTANCE FROM EACH OTHER ABSTAND ZUEINANDER VERLEGEN; EVTL. VERDRILLEN.
AND TWISTED WHERE NECESSARY. SIGNALKABEL UND POTENTIALAUSGLEICHSLEITUNG
SIGNAL CABLES AND BONDING CONDUCTOR SHOULD BE KEPT AS SHORT AS POSSIBLE. AUF DEM KUERZESTEM WEG VERLEGEN.
E E
N-H91483667020001_SP_AD
6SR4102-2ND41-7FG0-Z
G47+K31+K69+K73+L55+L93+M35+
7.9.0 SP2
M42+M61+N35+N45+N50+T74+U02+
V12+X30
ELCAD-VERSION:

KABEL UND LEITUNGEN
Project:
F F
194 <100>
CABLES AND WIRES +1
N-H91483667020001- FF-UP AD
Rev. Remarks Date Name Norm Orig./Repl.f./Repl.by Circuit diagram Stromlaufplan 7 Sh.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

2.4 CROSS-SECTIONS OF ROUND CONDUCTORS 2.4 GENORMTE LEITERQUERSCHNITTE VON RUNDEN KUPFERLEITERN
(ACCORDING TO EN 61800-5-1:2003) (NACH EN 61800-5-1:2003)
A A
ALTERNATIVE TO CHAPTER 2.1, ALL LISTED WIRES ALTERNATIV ZU DEN IN ABSCHNITT 2.1 AUFGELISTETEN EINZELDRAHTLEITERN
CAN BE REPLACED THROUGH UL-LISTED AWG-WIRES. DUERFEN UL-LISTED AWG-LEITUNGEN VERWENDET WERDEN.
THE TABLE SHOWS THE APPROXIMATE RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN ISO METRIC AND AWG/MCM SIZES. DIE NACHFOLGENDE TABELLE ZEIGT DIE BEZIEHUNG ZWISCHEN METRISCHER ISO- UND AWG-MCM-GROESSEN.
B B
ISO-CROSS-SECTION SIZE EQUIVALENT CROSS-SECTION
ISO-QUERSCHNITT GROESSE AEQUIVALENTER QUERSCHNITT
mm² AWG/MCM mm²
0,2 24 0,205
- 22 0,324
0,5 20 0,519
0,75 18 0,82
1,0 - -
C 1,5 16 1,3 C
2,5 14 2,1
4,0 12 3,3
6,0 10 5,3
10 8 8,4
16 6 13,3
25 4 21,2
35 2 33,6
50 0 53,5
70 00 67,4
D 95 000 85 D
- 0000 107,2
120 250 MCM 127

150 300 MCM 152
185 350 MCM 177

240 500 MCM 253
E E
N-H91483667020001_SP_AD
6SR4102-2ND41-7FG0-Z
G47+K31+K69+K73+L55+L93+M35+
7.9.0 SP2
M42+M61+N35+N45+N50+T74+U02+
V12+X30
ELCAD-VERSION:

KABEL UND LEITUNGEN
Project:
F F
<100> 195
CABLES AND WIRES +1
N-H91483667020001- FF-UP AD
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

3 EQUIPMENT DESIGNATION 3 BETRIEBSMITTELKENNZEICHNUNG
THE EQUIPMENT DESIGNATION IS A IDENTIFICATION CODE AND CONTAINS DAS BETRIEBSMITTELKENNZEICHEN IST EIN IDENTIFIZIERUNGSMERKMAL UND LIE-
INFORMATION REGARDING: FERT ANGABEN UEBER:
A A
1. THE SUPERORDINATED RELATIONSHIP 1. DIE UEBERGEORDNETE ZUORDNUNG

2. THE LOCATION OF THE EQUIPMENT 2. DEN ORT DES BETRIEBSMITTELS
3. IDENTIFICATION AND FUNCTION OF THE EQUIPMENT 3. IDENTIFIZIERUNG UND FUNKTION DES BETRIEBSMITTELS
4. THE TERMINAL AND CABLE DESIGNATION 4. DIE ANSCHLUSS- UND LEITERBEZEICHNUNG
THE VARIOUS DESIGNATION BLOCKS ARE EMPLOYED IN THE FOLLOWING SEQUENCE DIE VERSCHIEDENEN KENNZEICHNUNGSBLOECKE SIND IN FOLGENDER REIHENFOLGE.
AS PRESCRIBED BY DIN 40719. PART 2. ENTSPRECHEND DIN 40719 TEIL 2. ANGEGEBEN.
B B
= PLANT + LOCATION - KIND, NUMBER, FUNCTION : TERMINAL = ANLAGE + ORT - ART, ZAEHLNUMMER, FUNKTION : ANSCHLUSS
THE DESIGNATIONS NOT ALREADY ENTERED IN THE DRAWING TITLE BLOCK ARE DIE KENNZEICHNUNGEN DIE NICHT BEREITS IM SCHRIFTFELD STEHEN. SIND
LISTED ONE BELOW THE OTHER AS A BLOCK AT THE GRAPHICAL SYMBOL. BLOCKWEISE UNTEREINANDER AN DAS SCHALTZEICHEN GESCHRIEBEN.
DESIGNATION BLOCK 'PLANT' KENNZEICHNUNGSBLOCK 'ANLAGE'
THIS DESIGNATION BLOCK IS PREFIXED BY THE '=' QUALIFIED SYMBOL AND DER KENNZEICHNUNGSBLOCK BESCHREIBT DEN FUNKTIONALEN AUFBAU DES SCHAL-
C DESCRIBES THE FUNCTIONAL STRUCTURE OF THE CIRCUIT DOCUMENTATION TUNGSBUCHES UND HAT ALS VORZEICHEN DAS GLEICHHEITSZEICHEN. EIN GLIE- C
THIS BLOCK MAY BE SUBDIVIDED BY MEANS OF THE SEPARATION POINT. DERUNGSZEICHEN (PUNKT) UNTERTEILT DIESEN BLOCK.
AS CAN BE SEEN FOR THE FUNCTION STRUCTURE OF THE CIRCUIT DOCUMENTATION. WIE AUS DER FUNKTIONALEN GLIEDERUNG DES SCHALTUNGSBUCHES ERSICHTLICH
TOPOGRAPHICAL AND FUNCTIONAL CIRCUIT DIAGRAM GROUPS DESCRIBE THE IST, ERLAEUTERN ORTS- UND FUNKTIONSBEZOGENE SCHALTPLANGRUPPEN DIE
HARDWARE STRUCTURE. THE SECTION PRECEEDING THE SEPARATION POINT HARDWARESTRUKTUR. DER TEIL NACH DEM GLIEDERUNGSKENNZEICHEN BEINHALTET
DESCRIBES THE PLANT. WHEREAS THE SECTION FOLLOWING THE SEPARATION DIE GLIEDERUNG DER HARDWARE IN DIE VERSCHIEDENEN FUNKTIONSGRUPPEN.
POINT DESCRIBES THE DIVISION OF THE HARDWARE INTO DIFFERENT FUNCTIONAL WAEHREND VOR DEM GLIEDERUNGSZEICHEN ANGABEN ZUR ANLAGE EINGEFUEGT
GROUPS. WERDEN KOENNEN.
D DESIGNATION BLOCK 'LOCATION' KENNZEICHNUNGSBLOCK 'ORT' D
THIS DESIGNATION BLOCK 'LOCATION' IS PREFIXED BY THE QUALIFIED SYMBOL DER KENNZEICHNUNGSBLOCK ORT LOKALISIERT DIE BETRIEBSMITTEL UND HAT ALS
'+' AND IDENTIFIES THE LOCATION OF THE EQUIPMENT. VORZEICHEN DAS PLUSZEICHEN.
THE DESIGNATION BLOCK MAY BE SUBDIVIDED BY THE 'POINT'. THE SECTION ES WIRD DURCH DAS GLIEDERUNGSKENNZEICHEN 'PUNKT' UNTERTEILT: LINKS VOM
PRECEEDING THE SEPARATION POINT DESCRIBES A SUPERORDINATED LOCATION AND GLIEDERUNGSZEICHEN WERDEN UEBERGEORDNETE ORTE BESCHRIEBEN UND RECHTS
THE SECTION FOLLOWING THE SEPARATION POINT DESCRIBES THE LOCATION AT DAVON STEHEN ANGABEN ZUM EINBAUORT DES BETRIEBSMITTELS.
WHICH THE EQUIPMENT IS INSTALLED.
DESIGNATION BLOCK 'KIND, NUMBER, FUNCTION' KENNZEICHNUNG 'ART. ZAEHLNUMMER. FUNKTION'

E E
THIS DESIGNATION BLOCK COMPRISES THREE PARTS (CF DIN 40719. PART 2). DIESER KENNZEICHNUNGSBLOCK BESTEHT AUS 3 TEILEN (SIEHE DIN 40719 TEIL 2).
N-H91483667020001_SP_AD
IN THIS CIRCUIT DOCUMENTATION ONLY THE 'KIND' AND 'NUMBER' SECTION ARE IN DEM HIER VORLIEGENDEN SCHALTBUCH SIND NUR DIE BLOECKE 'ART' UND
EMPLOYED. E.G. '-D13'. 'ZAEHLNUMMER' VERWENDET Z.B. '-D13' 6SR4102-2ND41-7FG0-Z
G47+K31+K69+K73+L55+L93+M35+
7.9.0 SP2
THE LETTER 'D' DESCRIBES THE TYPE OF EQUIPMENT AND '13' IS THE NUMBER. DER BUCHSTABE D GIBT AUSKUNFT UEBER DIE ART DES BETRIEBSMITTELS UND DIE
M42+M61+N35+N45+N50+T74+U02+
ZIFFER 13 IST DIE ZAEHLNUMMER. V12+X30
ELCAD-VERSION:

BETRIEBSMITTELKENNZEICHNUNG
Project:
F F
196 <100>
EQIUPMENT DESIGNATION +1
N-H91483667020001- FF-UP AD
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
4 INTERRUPT POINTS AND TARGET DESIGNATION 4 ABBRUCHSTELLEN UND ZIELHINWEISE

A A
CONNECTIONS BETWEEN CARDS AND DEVICES. WHICH ARE DEPICTED ON DIFFERENT DIE VERBINDUNGEN ZWISCHEN BAUGRUPPEN BZW. GERAETEN, DIE AUF VERSCHIE-
SHEETS, ARE PROVIDED WITH A SIGNAL DESIGNATION OR A DESIGNATOR (STRING DENEN BLAETTERN DARGESTELLT SIND, WERDEN FUER DIE INDENTIFIZIERUNG AN
OF ALPHANUMERIC CHARACTERS) AND WITH I TARGET DESIGNATION. BEIDEN ENDEN MIT EINER SIGNALBEZEICHNUNG BZW. EINER KENNUNG (FOLGE
ALPHANUMMERISCHER ZEICHEN) UND MIT EINEM ZIELKENNZEICHEN GEKENNZEICHNET
THE TARGET DESIGNATION IS STRUCTURED AS FOLLOWS: DER ZIELHINWEIS HAT BEISPIELSWEISE FOLGENDEN AUFBAU:
B B
= . CD / 1 . 4 = . CD / 1 . 4
C SIGN VORZEICHEN C
SEPARATION MARK GLIEDERUNGSZEICHEN
FUNCTIONAL GROUP FUNKTIONSGRUPPE
SEPARATION MARK TRENNUNGSZEICHEN
SHEET NUMBER BLATTNUMMER
SEPARATION MARK GLIEDERUNGSZEICHEN
COUNTER ZAEHLTEIL
D D
E E
N-H91483667020001_SP_AD
6SR4102-2ND41-7FG0-Z
G47+K31+K69+K73+L55+L93+M35+
7.9.0 SP2
M42+M61+N35+N45+N50+T74+U02+
V12+X30
ELCAD-VERSION:

BETRIEBSMITTELKENNZEICHNUNG
Project:
F F
<100> 197
EQIUPMENT DESIGNATION +1
N-H91483667020001- FF-UP AD
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
No.

< >
1 SCOPE OF SUPPLY
2 DIGITAL CARD RACK
U1
3 SIGNAL CONDITIONING BOARD
PE PE V1
A A
W1
INPUT SECTION
EINGANG
<1>
B B
TRANSFORMER SECTION
TRAFOSCHRANK
1W1
1V1
1U1
.CA-SCB
<3>
1U2
1V2
1W2
C C
SEE SHEET 2 SCB CONTROL SECTION
SIEHE SEITE 2
.CA-DCR STEUERWANNE
1 LIEFERUMFANG
2 DIGITALE STEUEREINHEIT
<2>
3 SIGNALAUFBEREITUNGSEINHEIT
CELL SECTION DCR

ZELLENSEKTION
AC/DC
DC/AC
D D
OUTPUT SECTION
ELCAD-Projektstruktur: General circuit diagram | BA | N-H91483667020001- | 1 |
AUSGANG
PE
U2
E E
V2
W2
N-H91483667020001_SP_AD
6SR4102-2ND41-7FG0-Z
PE
G47+K31+K69+K73+L55+L93+M35+
7.9.0 SP2
M42+M61+N35+N45+N50+T74+U02+
V12+X30
100
ELCAD-VERSION:

M UEBERSICHTSPLAN
Project:
F F
3~
198 <100>
AD see PDM 07.09.16 Sys Date 05.08.2016 Agiba Petroleum SINAMICS PERFECT HARMONY GH180 =.BA
BLOCK DIAGRAM +1.LC
N-H91483667020001- FF-SU AD
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
No.

-T1 < >
-C1 C
H3
B 3
A
A A
-C2 C
B 3 -A110 -A210 -A310
-5% A
L1 L1 L1
0
-C3 C
L2 L2 L2
B 3 T1 T1 T1
B A T2 T2 T2 B
L3 L3 L3
+5%
H2
-B1 C
B 3
A
-B2 C
B 3
-5% -A120 -A220 -A320
A
C C
L1 L1 L1
0 -B3 C
B 3 L2 L2 L2
T1 T1 T1
A
+5% T2 T2 T2
L3 L3 L3
H1
-A1 C
B 3
A
D D
-A2 C
B 3
-5% -A130 -A230 -A330
A
L1 L1 L1
0 -A3 C
B 3 L2 L2 L2
T1 T1 T1
A
+5% T2 T2 T2
L3 L3 L3
E E
N-H91483667020001_SP_AD
A240
A340
A140
6SR4102-2ND41-7FG0-Z
G47+K31+K69+K73+L55+L93+M35+
7.9.0 SP2
/3.4
/3.5
/3.7
M42+M61+N35+N45+N50+T74+U02+
V12+X30
100
ELCAD-VERSION:

UEBERSICHTSPLAN
Project:
F F
<100> 199
BLOCK DIAGRAM +1.LC
N-H91483667020001- FF-SU AD
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
No.

-T1 < >
H3
A A
-C4 C
B 3
-5% A
0
-C5 C
B 3
B A B
+5%
H2
/2.4
/2.5
/2.7
A140
A240
A340
-B4 C
B 3
-5% -A140 -A240 -A340
A
C C
L1 L1 L1
0 -B5 C
B 3 L2 L2 L2
T1 T1 T1
A
+5% T2 T2 T2
L3 L3 L3
H1
D D
-A4 C
B 3
-5% -A150 -A250 -A350
A
L1 L1 L1
0 -A5 C
B 3 L2 L2 L2
T1 T1 T1
A
+5% T2 T2 T2
L3 L3 L3
E E
N-H91483667020001_SP_AD
6SR4102-2ND41-7FG0-Z
G47+K31+K69+K73+L55+L93+M35+
7.9.0 SP2
M42+M61+N35+N45+N50+T74+U02+
W2 V12+X30
V2
U2
100
ELCAD-VERSION:

UEBERSICHTSPLAN
Project:
F F
200 <100>
BLOCK DIAGRAM +1.LC
N-H91483667020001- FF-SU AD
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
No.

< >
A A
+1.TC +1.CC +1.PC +1.TC

INPUT TRANS- CONTROL CABINET POWER CELL CABINET INPUT TRANS-
B FORMER CABINET STEUERSCHRANK ZELLENSCHRANK FORMER CABINET B

EINGANG TRAFO EINGANG TRAFO
-SCHRANK -SCHRANK
C C
D D
FRONT VIEW SIDE VIEW

VORDERANSICHT SEITENANSICHT
E E
N-H91483667020001_SP_AD
6SR4102-2ND41-7FG0-Z
G47+K31+K69+K73+L55+L93+M35+
7.9.0 SP2
M42+M61+N35+N45+N50+T74+U02+
V12+X30
100
ELCAD-VERSION:

POSITION DER SCHRAENKE
Project:
F F
<100> 201
LOCATION OF CABINETS +1.LC
N-H91483667020001- FF-SU AD
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
No.

< >
-A11 dbv 1 LINE SIDE INCOMING SUPPLY
<2> -C11 2 VOLTAGE FEEDBACK INPUT 1U1

PE 3 VOLTAGE FEEDBACK INPUT 1V1
4 VOLTAGE FEEDBACK INPUT 1W1
A A
-V11
5 CURRENT FEEDBACK INPUT 1V1

ATTENTION, MECHANICAL
<7> MOUNTING DIRECTION
ddf
3
1
6 CURRENT FEEDBACK INPUT 1W1
7 INTERNAL RESISTOR
8 EACH CABLE PAIR HAS TO
RUN IN CABLE PROTECTIVE
TUBE A5E00993384
9 2,4kV <= Uin < 4,16kV 240mm2
-A12 dbv 4,16kV <= Uin <= 10kV 150mm2
<3> -C12 Uin > 10kV 95mm2
PE 10 CABLE HAS TO RUN
B THROUGH COPPER TUBE B
-V12 FOR VOLTAGE =< 10kV
<7>
ddf
3
1
-A13 dbv
<4> -C13 PE
C
-V13 C
<7>
ddf 1 NETZSEITIGE EINSPEISUNG
3
1
2 SPANNUNGSISTWERT
ERFASSUNG EINGANG 1U1
3 SPANNUNGSISTWERT
ERFASSUNG EINGANG 1V1
4 SPANNUNGSISTWERT
WH
BK
-W2002 ERFASSUNG EINGANG 1W1
5 STROMISTWERT
-X12 ERFASSUNG EINGANG 1V1
<8> +1.CC 1 U1W1.2
WH
BK
=.CD/7.3 MECHANISCHE EINBAU-

-W2001 D2 B U1W1.1 RICHTUNG BEACHTEN
=.CD/7.3 6 STROMISTWERT
D3 B U1V1.2
=.CD/7.3 ERFASSUNG EINGANG 1W1
dgk
dgk
dgk
WH
D D
BK
D4 B U1V1.1 7 INTERNER WIDERSTAND

-W2000 =.CD/7.3
D5 B 8 JEDES KABELPAAR IST IN
U1U1.2
=.CD/7.3
SCHUTZSCHLAUCH ZU
D6 B U1U1.1 VERLEGEN A5E00993384
=.CD/7.3
D B 9 2,4kV <= Uin < 4,16kV 240mm2
<1> <9>
ELCAD-Projektstruktur: Circuit diagram | 01CA | N-H91483667020001- | 1 |
4,16kV <= Uin <= 10kV 150mm2

Uin > 10kV 95mm2
U1
1U1
/2.3 10 LEITUNG IN KUPFERROHR
-T10 <5> VERLEGEN FUER
V1
1V1 SPANNUNG =< 10kV

/2.3
X1
X2
-T11 <6>
W1
1W1
/2.3
X1
X2
E -W2063 -W2061 E
dcg
dcg
PE PE PE
dbv
dbv
PE PE -W2062 -W2060
N-H91483667020001_SP_AD
ONLY FOR PE PE
6SR4102-2ND41-7FG0-Z
RATING VOLTAGE <10> -X22 G47+K31+K69+K73+L55+L93+M35+
7.9.0 SP2
<8> BU +1.CC 1 BL T11X2

>10kV =.CD/7.2 M42+M61+N35+N45+N50+T74+U02+
BK D2 B BK T11X1 V12+X30
=.CD/7.2
BU D3 B BL T10X2 100
ELCAD-VERSION:
=.CD/7.1 SINAMICS PERFECT HARMONY GH180

BK D4 B BK T10X1
=.CD/7.2 EINSPEISUNG UND
D B ISTWERTERFASSUNG
Project:
F F
202 <100>
AD see PDM 07.09.16 Sys Date 05.08.2016 Agiba Petroleum SINAMICS PERFECT HARMONY GH180 =.CA
INCOMING SUPPLY AND +1.TB
Appr. see PDM Nürnberg VO CURRENT-/VOLTAGE FEEDBACK Sheet1
N-H91483667020001- FS-SP AD
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
No.

1U1 < >
/1.7
1V1
/1.7 1 SECONDARY WINDING
1W1 TERMINALS
/1.7
(690VAC PER WINDING)
H2
H3
H1
2 SURGE ARRESTORS
A -T1 A
3 TRANSFORMER OVER
dcj TEMPERATURE ALARM 1
4 TRANSFORMER OVER
TEMPERATURE ALARM 2
PE 5 CABLES HAVE TO RUN IN
CABLE PROTECTIVE TUBE
<2> PE PE PE
<1> <1> <1>

B B
A1A dhq A1A A1B dhq A1B A1C dhq A1C
/3.2 /3.2 /3.2
/3.4 /3.4 /3.5
/3.6 /3.7 /3.7
/4.2 /4.2 /4.2
/4.4 /4.4 /4.5
-5% B1A dhq B1A -5% B1B dhq B1B -5% B1C dhq B1C
/5.2 /5.2 /5.2
B2A dhq B2A B2B dhq B2B B2C dhq B2C
/5.4 /5.4 /5.5
0 /5.6 0 /5.7 0 /5.7
C /6.2 /6.2 /6.2 C
/6.4 /6.4 /6.5
1 SEKUNDAERWICKLUNGS
+5% C1A dhq C1A +5% C1B dhq C1B +5% C1C dhq C1C ANSCHLUESSE
/7.2 /7.2 /7.2
C2A dhq C2A C2B dhq C2B C2C dhq C2C (690VAC PRO WICKLUNG)
/7.4 /7.4 /7.5 2 UEBERSPANNUNGSSCHUTZ
C3A dhq C3A C3B dhq C3B C3C dhq C3C
/7.6 /7.7 /7.7 3 TRANSFORMATOR
C4A dhq C4A C4B dhq C4B C4C dhq C4C UEBERTEMPERATUR ALARM 1
/8.2 /8.2 /8.2 4 TRANSFORMATOR
C5A dhq C5A C5B dhq C5B C5C dhq C5C
<3> -B1 /8.4 <3> -B2 /8.4 <3> -B3 /8.5 UEBERTEMPERATUR ALARM 2
5 KABELVERLEGUNG IM
θ
θ
SCHUTZSCHLAUCH
-X80
1C 1NC 1C 1NC 1C 1NC +1.CC
D D
L24_xfmr62
1
=.CD/9.5
D B
2
3
D <5>
4
5
D xfmrALARM_DI
6
=.CD/4.5
-B4 -B5 -B6 D B
ddf
ddf
ddf
<4> <4> <4>
θ
θ
PE PE PE
-X80
1C 1NC 1C 1NC 1C 1NC +1.CC
E L24_xfmr70 E
7
=.CD/9.5
D B
8
N-H91483667020001_SP_AD
12 11 10 9
D <5> 6SR4102-2ND41-7FG0-Z
G47+K31+K69+K73+L55+L93+M35+
7.9.0 SP2
D
M42+M61+N35+N45+N50+T74+U02+
D xfmrFAULT_DI V12+X30
=.CD/4.6
D B
ddf
ddf
ddf
100
ELCAD-VERSION:

PE PE PE EINGANGS TRANSFORMATOR
Project:
F F
<100> 203
INPUT POWER TRANSFORMER +1.TC
N-H91483667020001- FS-SP AD
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
No.

< >
/2.4
/2.4
/2.4
/2.3
/2.6
/2.3
/2.6
/2.3
/2.6
1 FUSE
2 POWERCELL
A1A
A1B
A1C
A2A
A2B
A2C
A3A
A3B
A3C
WITH DRIVER BOARD
3 STATUS LED:
A A
Q1:IGBT1
Q2:IGBT2
A2A.1
A3A.1
A1A.1
A2C.1
A3C.1
A2B
A3B
A1C.1
A1B
Q3:IGBT3
Q4:IGBT4
FAULT:
-F111 -F113 -F121 -F123 -F131 -F133 LINK ON:
+1.TB +1.TB +1.TB +1.TB +1.TB +1.TB
4 LWL-CONTROL
dhq A1A.2
dhq A1C.2
dhq A2A.2
dhq A2C.2
dhq A3A.2
dhq A3C.2
<1> <1> <1>
dhq
dhq
dhq
-A110 -A120 -A130
B B
A2A.3
A3A.3
A2B.3
A3B.3
A1A.3
A2C.3
A3C.3
A1B.3
A1C.3
<2> <2> <2>
Q4 Q4 Q4
Q3 Q3 Q3
Q2 Q2 Q2
C C
+ + + + + + + + +
1 SICHERUNG
2 POWERZELLE
Q1 Q1 Q1
MIT ANSTEUERUNG
3 STATUS LED:
Q1:IGBT1
Q2 Q1 Q2 Q1 Q2 Q1 Q2:IGBT2
FAULT FAULT FAULT Q3:IGBT3
Q4:IGBT4
FAULT:
LINK ON:
LINK ON LINK ON LINK ON 4 LWL-ANSTEUERUNG
D Q4 Q3 Q4 Q3 Q4 Q3 D
<3> <3> <3>
A1 A2 A3
R
T1
T2
T1
T2
T1
T2
dfr
dfr
dfr
dfr
dfr
dfr
E E
<4> <4> <4>
N-H91483667020001_SP_AD
A130_T2
XMT_A2
XMT_A3
XMT_A1
RCV_A2
RCV_A3
A110_T1
RCV_A1
6SR4102-2ND41-7FG0-Z
G47+K31+K69+K73+L55+L93+M35+
7.9.0 SP2
M42+M61+N35+N45+N50+T74+U02+
=.CD/10.6
=.CD/10.6
/5.2
=.CD/10.6
=.CD/10.6
=.CD/10.6
=.CD/10.6
/4.2
V12+X30
100
ELCAD-VERSION:

UMRICHTER PHASE U
Project:
F F
204 <100>
PHASE U CONVERTER +1.PC
N-H91483667020001- FS-SP AD
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
No.

< >
1 FUSE
/2.4
/2.4
/2.3
/2.6
/2.3
/2.6
2 POWERCELL
WITH DRIVER BOARD
A4A
A4B
A4C
A5A
A5B
A5C
3 STATUS LED:
A A
Q1:IGBT1
Q2:IGBT2
A4A.1
A5A.1
A4C.1
A4B
A5C.1
A5B
Q3:IGBT3
Q4:IGBT4
FAULT:
-F141 -F143 -F151 -F153 LINK ON:
+1.TB +1.TB +1.TB +1.TB
4 LWL-CONTROL
dhq A4A.2
dhq A4C.2
dhq A5A.2
dhq A5C.2
<1> <1>
dhq
dhq
-A140 -A150
B B
A4A.3
A4B.3
A5A.3
A4C.3
A5B.3
A5C.3
<2> <2>
Q4 Q4
Q3 Q3
Q2 Q2
C C
+ + + + + +
1 SICHERUNG
2 POWERZELLE
Q1 Q1
MIT ANSTEUERUNG
3 STATUS LED:
Q1:IGBT1
Q2 Q1 Q2 Q1 Q2:IGBT2
FAULT FAULT Q3:IGBT3
Q4:IGBT4
FAULT:
LINK ON:
LINK ON LINK ON 4 LWL-ANSTEUERUNG
D Q4 Q3 Q4 Q3 D
<3> <3>
A4 A5
R
T1
T2
T1
T2
dfr
dfr
dfr
dfr
E E
<4> <4>
N-H91483667020001_SP_AD
XMT_A4
A130_T2
XMT_A5
RCV_A4
RCV_A5
6SR4102-2ND41-7FG0-Z
1U2
G47+K31+K69+K73+L55+L93+M35+
7.9.0 SP2
M42+M61+N35+N45+N50+T74+U02+
=.CD/10.6
=.CD/10.6
/3.7
=.CD/10.2
=.CD/10.2
/9.1
V12+X30
100
ELCAD-VERSION:

UMRICHTER PHASE U
Project:
F F
<100> 205
PHASE U CONVERTER +1.PC
N-H91483667020001- FS-SP AD
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
No.

< >
1 FUSE
/2.4
/2.4
/2.4
/2.3
/2.6
/2.3
/2.6
/2.3
/2.6
2 POWERCELL
WITH DRIVER BOARD
3 STATUS LED:
B1A.1 B1A
B1B
B1C
B2A.1 B2A
B2B B2B
B2C.1 B2C
B3A.1 B3A
B3B B3B
B3C.1 B3C
A A
Q1:IGBT1
Q2:IGBT2
B1C.1
B1B
Q3:IGBT3
Q4:IGBT4
FAULT:
-F211 -F213 -F221 -F223 -F231 -F233 LINK ON:
+1.TB +1.TB +1.TB +1.TB +1.TB +1.TB
4 LWL-CONTROL
dhq B1A.2
dhq B1C.2
dhq B2A.2
dhq B2C.2
dhq B3A.2
dhq B3C.2
<1> <1> <1>
dhq
dhq
dhq
-A210 -A220 -A230
B B
B2A.3
B3A.3
B2B.3
B3B.3
B1A.3
B2C.3
B3C.3
B1B.3
B1C.3
<2> <2> <2>
Q4 Q4 Q4
Q3 Q3 Q3
Q2 Q2 Q2
C C
+ + + + + + + + +
1 SICHERUNG
2 POWERZELLE
Q1 Q1 Q1
MIT ANSTEUERUNG
3 STATUS LED:
Q1:IGBT1
Q4:IGBT4
FAULT:
LINK ON:
D Q4 Q3 Q4 Q3 Q4 Q3 D
<3> <3> <3>
B1 B2 B3
R
T1
T2
T1
T2
T1
T2
dfr
dfr
dfr
dfr
dfr
dfr
E E
<4> <4> <4>
N-H91483667020001_SP_AD
A230_T2
A210_T1
XMT_B2
XMT_B3
XMT_B1
A110_T1
RCV_B2
RCV_B3
RCV_B1
6SR4102-2ND41-7FG0-Z
G47+K31+K69+K73+L55+L93+M35+
7.9.0 SP2
M42+M61+N35+N45+N50+T74+U02+
=.CD/10.6
=.CD/10.6
/3.2
/7.2
=.CD/10.6
=.CD/10.6
=.CD/10.6
=.CD/10.6
/6.2
V12+X30
100
ELCAD-VERSION:

UMRICHTER PHASE V
Project:
F F
206 <100>
PHASE V CONVERTER +1.PC
N-H91483667020001- FS-SP AD
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
No.

< >
1 FUSE
/2.4
/2.4
/2.3
/2.6
/2.3
/2.6
2 POWERCELL
WITH DRIVER BOARD
B4A
B4B
B4C
B5A
B5B
B5C
3 STATUS LED:
A A
Q1:IGBT1
Q2:IGBT2
B4A.1
B5A.1
B4C.1
B4B
B5C.1
B5B
Q3:IGBT3
Q4:IGBT4
FAULT:
-F241 -F243 -F251 -F253 LINK ON:
+1.TB +1.TB +1.TB +1.TB
4 LWL-CONTROL
dhq B4A.2
dhq B4C.2
dhq B5A.2
dhq B5C.2
<1> <1>
dhq
dhq
-A240 -A250
B B
B4A.3
B4B.3
B5A.3
B4C.3
B5B.3
B5C.3
<2> <2>
Q4 Q4
Q3 Q3
Q2 Q2
C C
+ + + + + +
1 SICHERUNG
2 POWERZELLE
Q1 Q1
MIT ANSTEUERUNG
3 STATUS LED:
Q1:IGBT1
Q4:IGBT4
FAULT:
LINK ON:
D Q4 Q3 Q4 Q3 D
<3> <3>
B4 B5
R
T1
T2
T1
T2
dfr
dfr
dfr
dfr
E E
<4> <4>
N-H91483667020001_SP_AD
A230_T2
XMT_B4
XMT_B5
RCV_B4
RCV_B5
6SR4102-2ND41-7FG0-Z
1V2
G47+K31+K69+K73+L55+L93+M35+
7.9.0 SP2
M42+M61+N35+N45+N50+T74+U02+
=.CD/10.6
=.CD/10.6
/5.7
=.CD/10.2
=.CD/10.2
/9.1
V12+X30
100
ELCAD-VERSION:

UMRICHTER PHASE V
Project:
F F
<100> 207
PHASE V CONVERTER +1.PC
N-H91483667020001- FS-SP AD
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
No.

< >
1 FUSE
/2.4
/2.4
/2.4
/2.3
/2.6
/2.3
/2.6
/2.3
/2.6
2 POWERCELL
WITH DRIVER BOARD
3 STATUS LED:
C1A
C1B
C1C
C2A.1 C2A
C2B C2B
C2C
C3A.1 C3A
C3B C3B
C3C
A A
Q1:IGBT1
Q2:IGBT2
C1A.1
C2C.1
C3C.1
C1C.1
C1B
Q3:IGBT3
Q4:IGBT4
FAULT:
-F311 -F313 -F321 -F323 -F331 -F333 LINK ON:
+1.TB +1.TB +1.TB +1.TB +1.TB +1.TB
4 LWL-CONTROL
dhq C1A.2
C1C.2
dhq C2A.2
dhq C2C.2
dhq C3A.2
dhq C3C.2
<1> <1> <1>
dhq
dhq
dhq
dhq
-A310 -A320 -A330
B B
C2A.3
C3A.3
C2B.3
C3B.3
C1A.3
C2C.3
C3C.3
C1B.3
C1C.3
<2> <2> <2>
Q4 Q4 Q4
Q3 Q3 Q3
Q2 Q2 Q2
C C
+ + + + + + + + +
1 SICHERUNG
2 POWERZELLE
Q1 Q1 Q1
MIT ANSTEUERUNG
3 STATUS LED:
Q1:IGBT1
Q4:IGBT4
FAULT:
LINK ON:
D Q4 Q3 Q4 Q3 Q4 Q3 D
<3> <3> <3>
C1 C2 C3
R
T1
T2
T1
T2
T1
T2
dfr
dfr
dfr
dfr
dfr
dfr
E E
<4> <4> <4>
N-H91483667020001_SP_AD
A330_T2
A210_T1
XMT_C2
XMT_C3
XMT_C1
RCV_C2
RCV_C3
RCV_C1
6SR4102-2ND41-7FG0-Z
G47+K31+K69+K73+L55+L93+M35+
7.9.0 SP2
M42+M61+N35+N45+N50+T74+U02+
=.CD/10.6
=.CD/10.6
/5.2
=.CD/10.6
=.CD/10.6
=.CD/10.6
=.CD/10.6
/8.2
V12+X30
100
ELCAD-VERSION:

UMRICHTER PHASE W
Project:
F F
208 <100>
PHASE W CONVERTER +1.PC
N-H91483667020001- FS-SP AD
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
No.

< >
1 FUSE
/2.4
/2.4
/2.3
/2.6
/2.3
/2.6
2 POWERCELL
WITH DRIVER BOARD
3 STATUS LED:
C4A.1 C4A
C4B C4B
C4C.1 C4C
C5A.1 C5A
C5B C5B
C5C
A A
Q1:IGBT1
Q2:IGBT2
C5C.1
Q3:IGBT3
Q4:IGBT4
FAULT:
-F341 -F343 -F351 -F353 LINK ON:
+1.TB +1.TB +1.TB +1.TB
4 LWL-CONTROL
dhq C4A.2
dhq C4C.2
dhq C5A.2
dhq C5C.2
<1> <1>
dhq
dhq
-A340 -A350
B B
C4A.3
C4B.3
C5A.3
C4C.3
C5B.3
C5C.3
<2> <2>
Q4 Q4
Q3 Q3
Q2 Q2
C C
+ + + + + +
1 SICHERUNG
2 POWERZELLE
Q1 Q1
MIT ANSTEUERUNG
3 STATUS LED:
Q1:IGBT1
Q4:IGBT4
FAULT:
LINK ON:
D Q4 Q3 Q4 Q3 D
<3> <3>
C4 C5
R
T1
T2
T1
T2
dfr
dfr
dfr
dfr
E E
<4> <4>
N-H91483667020001_SP_AD
A330_T2
XMT_C4
XMT_C5
RCV_C4
RCV_C5
6SR4102-2ND41-7FG0-Z
1W2
G47+K31+K69+K73+L55+L93+M35+
7.9.0 SP2
M42+M61+N35+N45+N50+T74+U02+
=.CD/10.6
=.CD/10.6
/7.7
=.CD/10.2
=.CD/10.2
/9.1
V12+X30
100
ELCAD-VERSION:

UMRICHTER PHASE W
Project:
F F
<100> 209
PHASE W CONVERTER +1.PC
N-H91483667020001- FS-SP AD
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
No.

< >
-A21 dbv
1 CUSTOMER CONNECTION MOTOR
<2> -C21 2 VOLTAGE FEEDBACK OUTPUT L1
PE
3 VOLTAGE FEEDBACK OUTPUT L2
4 VOLTAGE FEEDBACK OUTPUT L3
A -V21 A
5 CURRENT FEEDBACK OUTPUT L2

<7> 6 CURRENT FEEDBACK OUTPUT L3
ddf 7 INTERNAL RESISTOR
3
1
-A22 dbv
<3> -C22
PE
B -V22 B
<7>
ddf
3
1
-A23 dbv
<4> -C23 PE
-V23
C <7> C
ddf
3
1
1 MOTOR KUNDENANSCHLUSS
2 SPANNUNGSISTWERT
A CABLE CROSS SECTION
ERFASSUNG AUSGANG L1
40A-140A 50mm² 3 SPANNUNGSISTWERT
WH
BK
200A-260A 120mm² ERFASSUNG AUSGANG L2
-W2003 4 SPANNUNGSISTWERT
B ONLY FOR OPTION L09+Y15
WH
ERFASSUNG AUSGANG L3
BK
dgk
40A-260A 120mm² -W2004 5 STROMWERTERFASSUNG
dgk
WH
AUSGANG L2
BK
dgk -W2005 6 STROMWERTERFASSUNG
AUSGANG L3
U1W2.2 7 INTERNER WIDERSTAND
=.CD/7.4
D U1W2.1 D
-W2020 -W2021 =.CD/7.4
U1V2.2
=.CD/7.4
U1V2.1
=.CD/7.4
U1U2.2
=.CD/7.4
1U2 -T20 U1U2.1
/4.5 =.CD/7.4
/6.5
1V2 <5> A1.1 A1.2 -T21 OPTION N45
=.UB/1.4
=.UB/1.4
=.UB/1.4
1W2 <6> A2.1 A2.2
/8.5
PE PE PE
E E
GS_O_U2
GS_O_V2
GS_O_W2
T20I1V2 BN 2 (M)
N-H91483667020001_SP_AD
=.CD/7.5
T20+15 RD 1 (+15)
=.CD/7.5 6SR4102-2ND41-7FG0-Z
T20-15 BK 3 (-15) A
G47+K31+K69+K73+L55+L93+M35+
U2
7.9.0 SP2
=.CD/7.6
M42+M61+N35+N45+N50+T74+U02+
dbv
T21I1W2 BN 2 (M) V12+X30

=.CD/7.6
V2
T21+15 RD 1 (+15) 100
PE
ELCAD-VERSION:
=.CD/7.6 SINAMICS PERFECT HARMONY GH180

T21-15 BK 3 (-15)
=.CD/7.7 AUSGANG
W2
ISTWERTERFASSUNG
Project:
F F
210 <100> <1>
OUTPUT +1.TB
Appr. see PDM Nürnberg VO VOLTAGE FEEDBACK Sheet9
N-H91483667020001- FS-SP AD
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
No.

< >
1 TAKE RELAY INPUT

VOLTAGE IN ACCOUNT
A A
VOLTAGE LH1 LH2

SPANNUNG
220V 2 4
240V 1 4
380V 3 5
B 400V 2 5 B
420V 1 5
<1>
440V 3 6
200V-240V 3,5A
460V 2 6
380V-420V 1,8A
480V 1 6
440V-500V 1,4A
520V 1,2A
-X230
550V-690V 1,1A dbn L230_SITOP
5
/9.2
B
-Q3 -F4
-X230 A
-T5 dbn 2 1 dbn dbn L230_DCR
3
C C
1
/8.7
31 6A B B
-X68 -X68 C 1 EINGANGSSPANNUNG
X681 dbu 1 2 dbn
3
I>> I>> I>>

BEIM SCHUETZ BEACHTEN
1
/15.6
dbn
X682 B D dbu 3 4 LH1 33
-X230
4
2
/15.6
B D 5 6 dbn dbn N230_SITOP
-X68
6
/9.2
PE
LH2 32 B
dbn
PE
34 dbn
-X230 A
dbn N230_DCR
4
2
/8.7
B B
C C
dbv
dbv
dbv
D PE PE D
-X230
PE
B
PE
ELCAD-Projektstruktur: Circuit diagram | 01CD | N-H91483667020001- | 1 |
E E
N-H91483667020001_SP_AD
6SR4102-2ND41-7FG0-Z
G47+K31+K69+K73+L55+L93+M35+
7.9.0 SP2
M42+M61+N35+N45+N50+T74+U02+
V12+X30
100
ELCAD-VERSION:

HILFSSTROMVERSORGUNG
Project:
F F
<100> 211
AD see PDM 07.09.16 Sys Date 05.08.2016 Agiba Petroleum SINAMICS PERFECT HARMONY GH180 =.CD
AUX.POWER SUPPLY +1.CC
N-H91483667020001- FS-SP AD
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
No.

< >
1 DIGITAL OUTPUTS
DO-0: SPEED DEMAND LOCAL
DO-1: DRIVE READY TO RUN
DO-2: DRIVE RUNNING
A A
DO-3: DRIVE ALARM

DO-4: DRIVE FAULTED
DO-5: DOOR INTERLOCK
MAGNET
DO-6: GROUNDING SWITCH
MAGNET (N44-N45)
2 SIGNAL CONNECTIONS
FOR CUSTOMER
<2>
B B
-X2
24
20
22
23
25
26
27
28
29
21
B B B B B B B B B B
C C
/14.4
/14.2
/14.3
/9.6
dgc
dgc
dgc
dgc
dgc
dgc
dgc
dgc
dgc
dgc
1 DIGITALAUSGAENGE
DOORMAGNET_DO
24V_DOORMAGNET
GSMAGNET_DO
L24_GSMAGNET
DO-0: DREHZAHL SOLLWERT
/8.5
VOR ORT
DO-1: UMRICHTER
USER-IO
BETRIEBSBEREIT
DO-2: UMRICHTER LAEUFT
DO-3: UMRICHTER WARNUNG
DO-4: UMRICHTER STOERUNG
DO-5: TUERSCHLIESS-
SYSTEM MAGNET
DO-6: ERDUNGSDRAUF-
SCHALTER MAGNET (N44-N45)
2 SIGNALANSCHLUESSE FUER
D D
DEN KUNDEN
-A2
J1-2
J1-3
J1-1
J1-5
J1-6
J1-4
J1-8
J1-9
J1-7
J1-11
J1-12
1J-10
J2-2
J2-3
J2-1
J2-5
J2-6
J2-4
J2-8
J2-9
J2-7
XMTR2
XMTR1
RCVR2
RCVR1
DO-4
DO-0
DO-2
DO-3
DO-5
DO-6
DO-1
E E
USER IO-BOARD
N-H91483667020001_SP_AD
<1> 6SR4102-2ND41-7FG0-Z
G47+K31+K69+K73+L55+L93+M35+
7.9.0 SP2
M42+M61+N35+N45+N50+T74+U02+
V12+X30
100
ELCAD-VERSION:

USER-IO BAUGRUPPE
Project:
F F
212 <100>
USER -IO BOARD +1.CC
N-H91483667020001- FS-SP AD
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
No.

< >
-X3 1 DIGITAL OUTPUTS
4
D0-7:DRIVE STATUS
5
1
<2> (N30-N38)
B B B B D0-8:TRANSFORMER
A OPTION N30-38 OPTION M61/U10 A
BLOWER 1 STARTER
D0-9:TRANSFORMER
=.TF/1.5
BLOWER 2 STARTER
=.S/1.5
=.S/1.7
=.S/1.1
=.S/1.1
(M61), ELSE SPARE
/9.7
D0-10:CELL BLOWER 1
STARTER
24V_CELLBLW2
L24_N30N38
N24_N35N38_DO
xfmrBLW2_DO
24V_xfmrBLW2
CELLBLW2_DO
D0-11:CELL BLOWER 2
WH
BK
STARTER (M61)
-W2013 D0-12:INTERNAL RESERVED
D0-13:INTERNAL RESERVED
WH
D0-14:INTERNAL RESERVED
BK
D0-15:LATSCH FAULT RELAY
-W2014 LATCH
B B
2 2 ANALOG OUTPUTS
dgc
dgc
dgc
dgc
dgc
dgc
/15.2
/15.2
/15.5
/15.5
/11.1
/11.1
/9.5
xfmrBLW1_DO
24V_xfmrBLW1
CELLBLW1_DO
24V_CELLBLW1
LFRLATCH_DO
L24_LFRSUPPLY
LFRRESET
C C
1 DIGITAL AUSGAENGE
D0-7:UMRICHTER ZUSTAND
(N30-N38)
D0-8:TRANSFORMATOR
LUEFTER 1 STARTER
-X2 D D D -X1 D D D D D0-9:TRANSFORMATOR
30
32
14
31
13
15
16
LUEFTER 2 STARTER
(M61), SONST RESERVE
B B B B B B B D0-10:CELL LUEFTER 1
STARTER
dbo
D0-11:CELL LUEFTER 2
STARTER (M61)
D PE D0-12:INTERN RESERVIERT
D
dgc
dgc
dgc
dgc
dgc
dgc
dgc
dgc
dgc
dgc
D0-13:INTERN RESERVIERT
D0-14:INTERN RESERVIERT
ddf ddf
D0-15:SELBSTHALTENDES
RELAIS SETZEN
2 2 ANALOG AUSGAENGE
J2-11
J2-12
J2-10
J3-2
J3-3
J3-1
J3-5
J3-6
J3-4
J3-8
J3-9
J3-7
J3-11
J3-12
J3-10
J4-2
J4-3
J4-1
J4-5
J4-6
J4-4
J4-8
J4-9
J4-7
J4-11
J4-12
J4-10
J5-1
J5-2
J6
J5-3
J5-4
-A2
(-)
(+)
(-)
(+)
SHIELD
ANALOG OUT 2
ANALOG OUT 1
E E
DO-14
DO-10
DO-12
DO-13
DO-15
DO-11
DO-7
DO-8
DO-9
4-20mA
4-20mA
N-H91483667020001_SP_AD
USER IO-BOARD
6SR4102-2ND41-7FG0-Z
G47+K31+K69+K73+L55+L93+M35+
7.9.0 SP2
M42+M61+N35+N45+N50+T74+U02+
<1> V12+X30
100
ELCAD-VERSION:

USER-IO BAUGRUPPE
Project:
F F
<100> 213
N-H91483667020001- FS-SP AD
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
No.

< >
<1>
OPTION L81/L82/L91/ OPTION M61/U10
1 DIGITAL INPUTS
L24_K52_RELAY L93/L95 DI-0A:REMOTE INHIBIT
/9.6
/13.5
DI-1A:REMOTE START
/9.7
DI-2A:REMOTE STOP
A A
=.P/1.2
=.P/1.3
=.S/1.3
=.S/1.6
DI-3A:REMOTE FAULT RESET
L24_K21_RELAY
L24_K22_RELAY
DI-0B:SW1 OFF
DI-1B:SW1 REMOTE
TEMPW_DI-1C
TEMPF_DI-2C
xfmrBLW2_DI
CELLBLW2_DI
DI-2B:DOOR INTERLOCK RELEASE
DI-3B:DOOR INTERLOCK STATE
dgc
DI-0C:GROUNDING
SWITCH STATE
DI-1C:MOTOR TEMP WARNING

dgc dgc dgc dgc dgc DI-2C:MOTOR TEMP FAULT
DI-3C:TRANSFORMER ALARM
dgc
dgc
dgc
dgc
DI-0D:TRANSFORMER FAULT
-K52 -K53 -K54 -K55 -K21 -K51 -K23 DI-1D:TRANSFORMER BLOWER 1
B DI-2D:TRANSFORMER BLOWER 2 B
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
(OPT. M61)
/6.2 /6.3 /6.4 /6.4 /14.2 /12.5 /14.4 DI-3D:CELL BLOWER 1
=.CA/2.7
=.CA/2.7
DI-0E:CELL BLOWER 2
12
14
12
14
12
14
12
14
12
14
12
14
12
14
/15.4
/15.7
/11.3
/11.3
/11.6
(OPT. M61)
DI-1E:INTERNAL RESERVED
DI-2E:INTERNAL RESERVED
SW1OFF_DI
SW1REMOTE_DI
xfmrALARM_DI
xfmrFAULT_DI
xfmrBLW1_DI
CELLBLW1_DI
LFRFEEDBACK_DI
DI-3E:LATCH FAULT
RELAY FEEDBACK
C C
dgc
dgc
dgc
dgc
dgc
dgc
dgc
dgc
dgc
dgc
dgc
dgc
dgc
dgc
1 DIGITAL EINGAENGE
DI-0A:FERN SPERRE
DI-1A:FERN START
J7-1
J7-2
J7-3
J7-4
J7-7
J7-8
J7-9
J7-10
J8-1
J8-2
J8-3
J8-4
J8-7
J8-8
J8-9
J8-10
J9-1
J9-2
J9-3
J9-4
DI-2A:FERN STOP
-A2 DI-3A:FERN FEHLER
ZURUECKSETZEN
DI-0B:SW1 AUS
DI-OA
DI-2A
DI-3A
DI-1B:SW1 FERN
DI-0B
DI-2B
DI-3B
DI-0D
DI-2D
DI-3D
DI-1A
DI-0C
DI-2C
DI-3C
DI-0E
DI-2E
DI-3E
DI-1B
DI-1D
DI-1C
DI-1E
DI-2B:TUER SCHLIESS-
SYSTEM FREIGABE
DI-3B:TUER SCHLIESS-
SYSTEM ZUSTAND
DI-0C:ERDUNGSDRAUF-
D D
SCHALTER ZUSTAND
DI-1C:MOTORTEMP.WARNUNG
DI-2C:MOTORTEMP.STOERUNG
DI-3C:TRAFO ALARM
USER IO-BOARD
DI COM D
DI COM C
DI COM E
DI COM A
DI COM B
DI-0D:TRAFO STOERUNG
DI-1D:TRAFO LUEFTER 1
DI-2D:TRAFO LUEFTER 2
(OPT. M61)
DI-3D:ZELLEN LUEFTER 1
J8-12
J7-12
J7-11
J8-11
J7-5
J8-6
J9-5
J9-6
J7-6
J8-5
DI-0E:ZELLEN LUEFTER 2
(OPT. M61)
DI-1E:INTERN RESERVIERT
DI-2E:INTERN RESERVIERT
dgc
dgc
dgc
dgc
dgc
dgc
DI-3E:LATCH FAULT
E RELAY FEEDBACK E
N24_I/O_POWER
N-H91483667020001_SP_AD
6SR4102-2ND41-7FG0-Z
G47+K31+K69+K73+L55+L93+M35+
7.9.0 SP2
M42+M61+N35+N45+N50+T74+U02+
V12+X30
100
ELCAD-VERSION:
/9.3

USER-IO BAUGRUPPE
DIGITAL EINGAENGE
Project:
F F
214 <100>
Appr. see PDM Nürnberg VO DIGITAL INPUTS Sheet4
N-H91483667020001- FS-SP AD
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
No.

< >
-X3
PE
14
ddf
19
GND_X3 1 4-20mA
3
6
9
/7.7 ANALOG INPUT
C
A IN 1: SPEED
SETPOINT
A A
2 4-20mA / 0-10V
ANALOG INPUT
A IN 2: SPEED REFERENCE
(ON/OFF)
A IN 3: TORQUE
(ON/OFF)
-X3 D D D
10
12
13
15
16
17
18
11
7
8
B B B B B B B B B B
WH
BK
B -W2010 B
BN
OG
RD
BK
-W2011
BN
OG
RD
BK
-W2012
ddf
ddf
C ddf C
1 4-20mA
ANALOG EINGANG
A IN 1: DREHZAHL-
SOLLWERT
J10-12
J10-13
J10-1
J10-2
J10-3
J10-4
J10-5
J10-6
J10-7
J10-8
J10-9
J10-10
J10-11
J11
J10-14
J10-15
J10-16
-A2 P1 2 4-20mA / 0-10V
ANALOG EINGANG
RS232 A IN 2: DREHZAHLSOLLWERT
(EIN/AUS)
A IN 2 0-20MA(+)
A IN 3 0-20MA(+)
A IN 1 0-20MA(+)
SHIELD
A IN 3: DREHMOMENTVORGABE
A IN 2 0-10V W
A IN 3 0-10V W
A IN 2 0-10V H
A IN 3 0-10V H
(EIN/AUS)
A IN 2 RTDA
A IN 3 RTDA
A IN 2 RTDB
A IN 3 RTDB
A IN 2 RTDC
A IN 3 RTDC
A IN 2 COM
A IN 3 COM
A IN 1 COM
D P2 D
UN-USED
UN-USED
N 24VDC
L 24VDC
USER IO-BOARD
<1> <2>
J9-10
J9-12
J9-11
J9-7
J9-8
J9-9
dgc
dgc
E E
N24_USER_IO
L24_USER_IO
N-H91483667020001_SP_AD
6SR4102-2ND41-7FG0-Z
G47+K31+K69+K73+L55+L93+M35+
7.9.0 SP2
M42+M61+N35+N45+N50+T74+U02+
/9.1
/9.1
V12+X30
100
ELCAD-VERSION:

USER-IO BAUGRUPPE
Project:
F F
<100> 215
N-H91483667020001- FS-SP AD
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
No.

< >
<1> 1 DIGITAL INPUTS

DI-0A:REMOTE INHIBIT
DI-1A:REMOTE START
DI-2A:REMOTE STOP
A A
DI-3A:REMOTE FAULT RESET

<3> 2 RELAY 24V-240V DC
24V-240V AC
3 WIRING BY CUSTOMER
ACC. PLANT SPEC.
DOCUMENTATION
B B
DI-0A
DI-2A
DI-3A
DI-1A
-X2 D D D D
15
16
17
18
19
B B B B B
C C
1 DIGITAL EINGAENGE
DI-0A:FERN SPERRE
dbm
dbm
dbm
dbm
DI-1A:FERN START
DI-2A:FERN STOP
DI-3A:FERN FEHLER
RUECKSETZEN
2 RELAIS 24V-240V DC
A1
A1
A1
A1
24V-240V AC
-K52 -K53 -K54 -K55 3 VERDRAHTUNG DURCH KUNDEN
<2> NACH ANLAGENSPEZIFISCHER
A2
A2
A2
A2
DOKUMENTATION
dbm
dbm
dbm
dbm
D D
E 14 11 14 11 14 11 14 11 E
/4.2 12 /4.2 12 /4.2 12 /4.3 12
N-H91483667020001_SP_AD
6SR4102-2ND41-7FG0-Z
G47+K31+K69+K73+L55+L93+M35+
7.9.0 SP2
M42+M61+N35+N45+N50+T74+U02+
V12+X30
100
ELCAD-VERSION:

USER-IO BAUGRUPPE
Project:
F F
216 <100>
N-H91483667020001- FS-SP AD
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
No.
20
22
23
25
26
21
< >
-X3 -X3
24
PE
B B B B B B
27
GND_X3 ddf 1 OUTPUT APPARENT OHMIC
/5.7 RISISTANCE OUTPUT 1V2
C
2 OUTPUT APPARENT OHMIC
RISISTANCE OUTPUT 1W2
A A
3 INPUT CURRENT FEEDBACK

4 INPUT VOLTAGE FEEDBACK
5 OUTPUT VOLTAGE FEEDBACK
/11.5
/11.1
/8.4
6 OUTPUT CURRENT FEEDBACK
<1> <2> 7 INHIBIT
INPUTPROTECT_DO
+VDC_FEEDBACK
50 COND CABLE P1
8 FOR RESISTANCE VALUES
SEE BOM
9 SHAFT ENCODER
-RB1 -RB2 10 M1 DOUT (MV TRIP)
11 INPUT VOLTAGE FEEDBACK 2
<8> <8> 12 OUTPUT FILTER
CURRENT FEEDBACK
B B
-TBHEB
-A3
48
50
52
54
56
23
25
27
29
31
33
26
24
22
20
46
44
42
40
1
P1 TB1 TB1
-TBHEC 4
2
3
2
3
1
1
(B-) (B+) (NC) (A-) (A+) (A) (B) (C)
<9> <12>
51
53
<10>
C 55 C
1 BUERDE FUER
AUSGANGSSTROM 1V2
2 BUERDE FUER
AUSGANGSSTROM 1W2
TB1 HE POS 2
3 EINGANGSTROMISTWERT
E STOP1 43 HE COM 6 4 EINGANGSSPANNUNGSISTWERT
/11.5 P24Vdc 5 AUSGANGSSPANNUNGISTWERT
45 HE NEG 4
H120Vac 6 AUSGANGSSTROMISTWERT
47 <7> TB1 7 SPERREN
N120Vac
49 8 FUER WIEDERSTANDSWERTE
N24_ESTOP
/9.3 N24Vdc SIEHE SL
9 DREHZAHLGEBER
10 M1 DOUT (MV TRIP)
D <3> <11> <4> <5> PHASE B PHASE C D
11 EINGANGSSPANNUNGSISTWERT 2
12 AUSGANGSFILTER
(B) (C) (A) (B) (C) (A) (B) (C) (A) (B) (C)
STROMISTWERT
34
35
37
39
38
ddf 36
28
32
30
J3
41
J2
14
TB1 TB1 TB1
15
17
19
21
13
18
ddf 16
12
10
J1
11
3
8
1
ddf
ddf ddf ddf
ddf ddf
dbv
T10X2
ddf ddf
T10X1
T11X2
T11X1
PE
T20I1V2
T21I1W2
T20+15
T20-15
WH
T21+15
T21-15
BK
=.CA/1.7
=.CA/1.7
=.CA/1.7
=.CA/1.7
-W2042
E E
<6>
WH
BK
=.CA/9.1
=.CA/9.1
=.CA/9.1
=.CA/9.1
=.CA/9.1
=.CA/9.1
-W2041
N-H91483667020001_SP_AD
WH
BK
6SR4102-2ND41-7FG0-Z
-W2040
G47+K31+K69+K73+L55+L93+M35+
7.9.0 SP2
M42+M61+N35+N45+N50+T74+U02+
U1W2.2
U1W1.2
U1V2.2
U1W2.1
U1U2.2
U1V1.2
U1W1.1
U1V2.1
U1U1.2
U1U2.1
U1V1.1
U1U1.1
V12+X30
100
ELCAD-VERSION:

=.CA/1.7
=.CA/1.7
=.CA/1.7
=.CA/1.7
=.CA/1.7
=.CA/1.7
=.CA/9.7
=.CA/9.7
=.CA/9.7
=.CA/9.7
=.CA/9.7
=.CA/9.7
SIGNAL INTERFACE
BAUGRUPPE
Project:
F F
<100> 217
SIGNAL INTERFACE BOARD +1.CC
N-H91483667020001- FS-SP AD
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
No.

< >
-X20 KEYPAD 1 NXGPRO-RACK
ETHERNET
-A10
A OPTION G47 A
16
TX+
TX-
RX+
RX-
RJ45 1 2 3
4 5 6
4
2
3
5
6
7
8
7 8 9
1
1
-W2051 -W2053
B B
/7.2
/2.1
50 COND CABLE P1
USER-IO
PE
<1> -G2
C -A1 C
1 NXGPRO-BAUGRUPPENTRAEGER
P12VPFCOM TOP BOTTOM
P_FAIL
2
VIEW VIEW
P12VPF
BOTTOM VIEW
TOP VIEW
10
P12V
P12V +12V
DIGITAL
6A
DGND
DGND 12V RTN
D P15VA LINE D
L230_DCR
dbt
+15V /1.7
ANALOG
AGND
NEU N230_DCR
0,1A
15V RTN /1.7
PE
FIBER #2
FIBER #1
USER I/O
BYPASS
N15VA GND
-15V
dbo
(P2A) HEPSP
HALL EFFECT
EXTERNAL I/O +15V
PE
AGND
2A
15V RTN
(P2)
VGA HEPSN
-15V
(P3) (J1) (J3) (P6) (P7)
KEYPAD MODEM SYSTEM POWER REDUNDAND 5VSB
ETHERNET (P1) 1 +5V
E INTERFACE SUPPLY POWER E
USB 0-1 5VSBCOM 2
3 5V RTN
N-H91483667020001_SP_AD
6SR4102-2ND41-7FG0-Z
G47+K31+K69+K73+L55+L93+M35+
7.9.0 SP2
M42+M61+N35+N45+N50+T74+U02+
V12+X30
100
ELCAD-VERSION:

KONTROLLEINHEIT NXGPRO
Project:
F F
218 <100>
CONTROL UNIT NXGPRO +1.CC
N-H91483667020001- FS-SP AD
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
F
E
D
C
B
A
Project: N-H91483667020001_SP_AD
AD
ELCAD-VERSION: 7.9.0 SP2
Rev.
ELCAD-Projektstruktur: Circuit diagram | 01CD | N-H91483667020001- | 9 | Als Betriebsgeheimnis anvertraut. Alle Rechte vorbehalten.
1
1
Remarks
see PDM
/5.2
/5.2
Date
L24_USER_IO
N24_USER_IO
07.09.16 Sys
-G1
- L1 L230_SITOP
Name Norm
/1.7
+
N N230_SITOP
Drawn Sys
/1.7
2
2
dbp +
Appr. see PDM

dbp - PE
230AC, 50/60Hz
Date 05.08.2016
OK
24V DC / 10A
dbv
-X24
PE
D
N24_BLWPOWER 2
/15.2
B 2
N24_ESTOP dgc 4 dgc N24_LFRSUPPLY
Agiba Petroleum
Agiba Petroleum
/7.1 /11.6
B
D
3
3
Orig./Repl.f./Repl.by
N24_I/O_POWER 4 - VDC
C
/4.2 /11.5
A
N24_DOORRELEASE dgc 6
/13.5
B
6 N24_DOORMAGNET
C
/14.2
N24_L91/L93/L95 8
=.P/1.2
B
D
N24_L55 10
=.M/1.4
B
D
10
C
4
4
12 N24_N35N38
=.TF/1.4
B
D
12
C
14
14
Nürnberg VO
PD LD MF-NMA EN D3
16
16
-X24
D
5
5
L24_BLWPOWER dgc 1
/15.4
B
L24_xfmr62 dgc 1 dgc L24_xfmr70

C
=.CA/2.7 =.CA/2.7
Circuit diagram
A
L24_ESTOP dgc 3 dgc L24_LFRSUPPLY

/11.5 /3.6
B
D
L24_K52_RELAY 3 + VDC
C
/4.1 /11.7
A
5 dgc L24_DCSSUPPLY
POWER SUPPLY 24V DC

/12.3
D
L24_GSMAGNET dgc 5 L24_GS_STATUS

C
/2.7 /14.6
A
Stromlaufplan
L24_L91/L93/L95 7
<100>
=.P/1.1
B
D
6
6
L24_SIGNAL 7
=.P/1.1
A
L24_L55 9
=.M/1.4
B
D
9
C
L24_K21_RELAY dgc 11 L24_N30N38

/4.4 /3.1
D
11
C
13
13
7
7
15
15
No.
100
< >
V12+X30
N-H91483667020001- FS-SP AD
8
8
=.CD
+1.CC
6SR4102-2ND41-7FG0-Z
219
STROMVERSORGUNG 24V DC
Sheet9
G47+K31+K69+K73+L55+L93+M35+
M42+M61+N35+N45+N50+T74+U02+
15 Sh.
F
E
D
C
B
A
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
No.

< >
A A
-A1
FIBER OPTIC MODULATOR BOARD
LINK BOARD FOR POWERCELLS

FOR POWER CELLS
B B
RCV_A5 RCV_A5 RCV_A1 RCV_A1
=.CA/4.4 =.CA/3.1
XMT_A5 XMT_A5 XMT_A1 XMT_A1
=.CA/4.3 =.CA/3.1
RCV_B5
TEST PORT
RCV_B5 RCV_B1 RCV_B1
=.CA/6.4 =.CA/5.1
NETWORK 1
XMT_B5 XMT_B5 XMT_B1 XMT_B1
=.CA/6.3 =.CA/5.1
-X50
RCV_C5 RCV_C5 RCV_C1 RCV_C1
=.CA/8.4 =.CA/7.1
XMT_C5 XMT_C5 XMT_C1 XMT_C1
=.CA/8.3 =.CA/7.1
RCV_A6 RCV_A2 RCV_A2

C =.CA/3.4 C
XMT_A6 XMT_A2 XMT_A2
=.CA/3.3
=.CA/5.4
XMT_B6 XMT_B2 XMT_B2
=.CA/5.3
RCV_C6
STATUS
RCV_C2 RCV_C2
NETWORK 2
=.CA/7.4
XMT_C6 XMT_C2 XMT_C2
=.CA/7.3
-X51
RCV_A7
USB 2-3
RCV_A3 RCV_A3
=.CA/3.6
=.CA/3.6
D =.CA/5.6 D
=.CA/5.6
RCV_C7 RCV_C3 RCV_C3

=.CA/7.6
=.CA/7.6
COMPACT FLASH
RCV_A8 RCV_A4 RCV_A4
=.CA/4.1
=.CA/4.1
=.CA/6.1
=.CA/6.1
E RCV_C8 RCV_C4 RCV_C4 E
=.CA/8.1
=.CA/8.1
N-H91483667020001_SP_AD
6SR4102-2ND41-7FG0-Z
G47+K31+K69+K73+L55+L93+M35+
7.9.0 SP2
M42+M61+N35+N45+N50+T74+U02+
V12+X30
100
ELCAD-VERSION:

LWL-ANSTEUERUNGSKARTE
Project:
F F
220 <100>
FOC MODULATOR BOARD +1.CC
N-H91483667020001- FS-SP AD
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
No.

+L -L <6> < >
CB (OFF)
CB (<U)
1 OFF (SWITCH IS CLOSED)
2 LOCAL (SWITCHES ARE OPEN)
3 REMOTE (SWITCH IS CLOSED)
4 CONTACT RATINGS
A A
-X2
AC 50/60Hz (AC15)
INDUCTIVE LOAD
4
/9.3
230V/10A; 400V/6A
/7.1
<7>
B 500V/6A; 690V/2A
-X2 A A A A DC13 INDUCTIVE LOAD 3 RUNS
E STOP1
- VDC
14
10
12
13
11
9
24V/10A; 48V/10A; 110V/10A
220V/2A; 440V/0,9A
B B B B B 5 LATCHING RELAY
6 OFF COMMAND CIRCUIT
dbn
dbn
dbn
dbn
BREAKER
dgc
dgc
dgc
7 MV INPUT BREAKER ENABLE
-K41 -K41 -K41 8 KEY RESET FOR
43
-X2
91
13
B B LATCH FAULT RELAY B
2
6 6 6
SW1OFF_DI -X2
dbn 44
14
/4.3
dbn 92
1
dbn
B
1 2 3 <1>
43
dgc
-S1
-K41 -K41 -K41
54
24
82
OPTION N45
41
21
-S3
11
6 6 6
44
=.UB/1.4
=.UB/1.4
dbn 53
dbn 81
dbn 23
12
INPUTPROTECT_DO dgc 42
22
<2>
dgc
GSF_O_NC_1
GSF_O_NCC_1
dgc
C C
-K41 -K41 -K41
63
33
71
1 AUS (SCHALTER IST GESCHL.)
dgc
13
<3> -S1 6 6 6 2 LOKAL (SCHALTER SIND OFFEN)
L24_ESTOP
64
34
3 FERN (SCHALTER IST GESCHL.)
72
4 KONTAKTBELASTUNG
14
AC 50/60Hz (AC15)
dbn
dbn
SW1REMOTE_DI INDUKTIVE LAST
/4.3 230V/10A; 400V/6A
/9.5
/7.1
500V/6A; 690V/2A
-X2 A A

DC13 INDUKTIVE LAST 3 BAHNEN
24V/10A; 48V/10A; 110V/10A
dgc
5
B 220V/2A; 440V/0,9A
B B -X2
3
B B 5 SCHUETZ MIT SELBSTHALTUNG
6 AUSBEFEHL
D D
-V1.1 dgc
LEISTUNGSSCHALTER
+ VDC 7 MS-EING. SCHALTER FREIGABE
djo djo /9.6
dgc
dgc
-V41
8 SCHLUESSELSCHALTER RESET
A1
FUER LATCH FAULT RELAY
-K1 -K41
-K22
A2
<5>
+VDC_FEEDBACK -K51 24 21 dgc 1 5 dgc
/7.1
24 21 dgc 22
22 /14.3 13 14
/12.5 <4> 7
LFRLATCH_DO 10 2 N24_LFRSUPPLY 23 24
/3.6 S Q /9.3 7
33 34
dgc
-S2 7
43 44
E 14 13 dgc 6 3 5 E
R Q 53 54
5
dgc
<8> 63 64
N-H91483667020001_SP_AD
5
71 72
LFRRESET dgc 8 11 LFRFEEDBACK_DI 7 6SR4102-2ND41-7FG0-Z
/3.6 /4.7 81 82 G47+K31+K69+K73+L55+L93+M35+
7.9.0 SP2
7
91 92 M42+M61+N35+N45+N50+T74+U02+
7 V12+X30
01 02
djo djo 100
ELCAD-VERSION:

-V1.2 NOT-AUS UND SCHUETZ
Project:
F F
<100> 221
AD see PDM 07.09.16 Sys Date 05.08.2016 Agiba Petroleum SINAMICS PERFECT HARMONY GH180 .CD
E-STOP AND RELAIS +1.CC
N-H91483667020001- FS-SP AD
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
No.

< >
L24_DCSSUPPLY 1 DOOR SWITCH

/9.6 DOORS POWER SECTION
21
13
-S113 ARE CLOSED
H-ACTIVE
A <1> A
+1.PC
22
14
=.CA-X22 B
dgc
8
21
13
-S112
<1>
=.CA-X22 +1.PC
22
14
7
B B
B
dgc
dgc
21
13
-S111 <1>
+1.PC
21
13
-S117
22
14
<1>
dgc
+1.TC
22
dgc 14
=.CA-X22 B
5
C C
D
21
13
-S116 1 TUERENDSCHALTER
dgc
<1> TUEREN LEISTUNGSTEIL
GESCHLOSSEN
+1.TC H-ACTIVE
22
14
21
13
-S114
<1>
dgc
22
14
21
13
-S115
dgc
+1.TC
22
14
D <1> D
A1
-K51
dgc
A2
=.CA-X22 B
N24_BUSBAR
6
/14.4
D
dgc
14 11
/4.4 12
24 21
E E
/11.3 22
N-H91483667020001_SP_AD
6SR4102-2ND41-7FG0-Z
G47+K31+K69+K73+L55+L93+M35+
7.9.0 SP2
M42+M61+N35+N45+N50+T74+U02+
V12+X30
100
ELCAD-VERSION:

TUERVERRIGELUNGSSYSTEM
TUERENDSCHALTER
Project:
F F
222 <100>
DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM +1.CC
Appr. see PDM Nürnberg VO DOOR SWITCHES Sheet12
N-H91483667020001- FS-SP AD
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
No.

< >
1 LIFT MAGNET FOR

DOOR LOCKING
A A
B
=.CA-X22 C B
dgc dgc dgc dgc dgc
9
D B
A
<1> <1> <1> <1>

-K21
24
22
A1
A1 A1 -Z1 A1 A1
/14.2
-Y1 -Y2 -Y3 -Y4
+1.PC +1.PC +1.TC +1.TC
A2 A2 A2 A2
21
A2
C
=.CA-X22 A =.CA-X22 C C
dgc dgc dgc dgc
10
11
D B 1 VERRIEGELUNGSMAGNET
D
FUER TUEREN
dgc
OPTION N44, N45
D
34
-Q1 A2
-X2 C
B
-Q2 A2
=.UB/1.2
-Q2 A1
=.UB/1.2
D D
C
33
-Q1 A1
-X2 B
D
dgc
-K22
14
12
/14.3
11
dgc
E dgc dgc L24_K22_RELAY E

/4.4
N-H91483667020001_SP_AD
N24_DOORRELEASE
/9.3
6SR4102-2ND41-7FG0-Z
G47+K31+K69+K73+L55+L93+M35+
7.9.0 SP2
M42+M61+N35+N45+N50+T74+U02+
V12+X30
100
ELCAD-VERSION:

TUERVERRIEGELUNGS-
SYSTEM
Project:
F F
<100> 223
DOOR LOCKING +1.CC
Appr. see PDM Nürnberg VO SYSTEM Sheet13
N-H91483667020001- FS-SP AD
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
No.

< >
1 DOOR MAGNET ENABLE

SIGNAL
2 GROUNDING SWITCH MAGNET
ENABLE SIGNAL
A A
/9.3
N24_DOORMAGNET
B B
dgc
BUSBAR BUSBAR N24_BUSBAR

/12.6
A2
A2
A2
-K21 -K22 -K23
C C
A1
A1
A1
-X2 1 TUER MAGNET
35
36
37
38
<1> <2> dgc dgc dgc L24_GS_STATUS FREIGABESIGNAL
/9.6
B B B B 2 ERDUNGSDRAUFSCHALTER
A A MAGNET FREIGABESIGNAL
dgc
dgc
dgc
24V_DOORMAGNET
DOORMAGNET_DO
GSMAGNET_DO
GSF_O_NOC_1
GSF_O_NO_1
D D
/2.6
/2.7
/2.6
=.UB/1.5
=.UB/1.5
14 11 14 11 14 11
OPTION N45
/4.4 12 /13.4 12 /4.4 12
24 21 24 21
/13.1 22 /11.3 22
E E
N-H91483667020001_SP_AD
6SR4102-2ND41-7FG0-Z
G47+K31+K69+K73+L55+L93+M35+
7.9.0 SP2
M42+M61+N35+N45+N50+T74+U02+
V12+X30
100
ELCAD-VERSION:

TUERVERRIEGELUNGS-
SYSTEM
Project:
F F
224 <100>
DOOR LOCKING +1.CC
Appr. see PDM Nürnberg VO SYSTEM Sheet14
N-H91483667020001- FS-SP AD
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
No.

< >
-W2031 -Z31 X681

/1.1 1 AUX. POWER SUPPLY
-S31 X682 SEE DATASHEET
-X4 /1.1
2 CABLE HAS TO RUN IN
dbu
dbu
<1> CABLE PROTECTIVE TUBE
A BN L1 L1' dbu L1 T1 E321 A
3 PE-CONNECTION
1
=.S/1.2
B BK L2 L2' dbu L2 T2 E322 AT BLOWER BOX
2
=.S/1.2 4 ALARM / AT BLOWER FAULT
B GY L3 L3' dbu L3 T3 E323
4 3 =.S/1.2 CONTACT OPEN
B 5 AFTER BLOWER REPLACEM.
BUSBAR SPEED CONTROL HAS
B GNYE PE PE'
5
TO BE SET
dbu
dbu
dbu
=.S/1.3
B
dbv
6
B
-Q31 -Q32
N1
3
5
3
5
1
1
PE
L24_BLWPOWER_A
N2
ONLY FOR
B B OPTION M61 B
/4.6
/4.6
/9.5
/3.3
4,6A 4,6A
PE
L24_BLWPOWER
xfmrBLW1_DI
CELLBLW1_DO
CELLBLW1_DI
I>> I>> I>> I>> I>> I>>
L2_F100
L3_F100
L1_F100
N_F100
2
4
6
2
4
6
dbn
dbn
dbn
dbn
dbn
dbn
=.W/1.4
=.W/1.4
=.W/1.4
=.W/1.4
24V_xfmrBLW1 24V_CELLBLW1
/3.2 /3.3
-K31 -K32
dgc
3
5
3
5
1
1
2 5
-X1 D
D
4
C C
2
4
6
2
4
6
/3.2
xfmrBLW1_DO -X1 D D
B A
2
1
-X31.1 D D D
C
B 1 HILFSSTROMVERSORGUNG
2
3
SIEHE DATENBLATT
1
B B
2 KABELVERLEGUNG IM
dgc
dgc
B B B SCHUTZSCHLAUCH
dgc
-X31.1 D D 3 PE-ANSCHLUSS AM
dbn
dbn
dbn
dbn
dbn
dbn
LUEFTERKASTEN
5
4 ALARM / KONTAKT BEI
B B
A1
A1
1W2
1W2
LUEFTERFEHLER OFFEN
1V2
1V2
1U2
1U2
-K31 dbv -K32 dbv 5 BEI LUEFTER WECHSEL
EINSTELLUNG AUF
-L31 PE -L32 PE
A2
A2
1 2 1 2 DREHZAHLREGEL. NOTWENDIG
3 +1.TC 6 +1.PC
3 4 3 4
D 3 6 D
1U1
1V1
1W1
1U1
1V1
1W1
5 6 5 6
3 6
<2> <2>
dbn
dbn
dbn
dgc
dgc
dgc
OPTION M61
dbn
dbn
dbn
dgc
dgc
N24_BLWPOWER dgc N24_BLWPOWER_A
/9.3 =.S/1.1
5
1
PE
PE
-X31 -X31 <3> -X32 -X32 <3>
dbn
dbn
dbn
dbv
dbn
dbn
dbn
dbv
dgc
dgc
dgc
dgc
-E31 -E32
+1.TC +1.PC
<2> <2> <2> <2> <2> <2>
E E
NC COM NC COM
-V1 PE -V2 PE
N-H91483667020001_SP_AD
GND <4> GND <4>

L2
L3
L2
L3
L1
L1
8,2V,1W 8,2V,1W 6SR4102-2ND41-7FG0-Z
W
W
V
V
U
U
G47+K31+K69+K73+L55+L93+M35+
7.9.0 SP2
M42+M61+N35+N45+N50+T74+U02+
-R1
Ain1U
M <5>
-R2
Ain1U
M <5>
V12+X30
+10V +10V 100

3~ 3~
ELCAD-VERSION:

1KOhm 1KOhm
HILFSSTROMVERSORGUNG
1% 1W 1% 1W UND LUEFTER
Project:
F F
<100> 225
AUX.POWER SUPPLY +1.CC
Appr. see PDM Nürnberg VO AND FANS Sheet15
N-H91483667020001- FS-SP AD
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
No.

AC 230/120V 50/60Hz < >
L24_L55 1 POWER PER 100W SWITCH-

=.CD/9.6 ON CURRENT MAX. PER 5A
A A A
-X55
dgc
RATED VOLTAGE 230V (50/60Hz)
PE1
VOLTAGE RANGE 110V....250V
2
A A
1
1
B B -A40
PE
θ<
dgr
dgr
-F40 10°C
3
1
dgc 2
13 14
2
4
10A
A1
21 22
21 dgr
31 dgr
1
31 32
-K40
B B
-K40 2
dgc A2
43 44
4
22
32
N24_L55
=.CD/9.4
dgr
dgr
PE -W2032
A
BN
3
-X55 B
D A
BU
4
C -X55 B C
D
GNYE 1 LEISTUNG JE 100W
-X55 B EINSCHALTSTROM MAX. JE 5A
PE2
A NENNSPANNUNG 230V (50/60Hz)

FUNKTIONSBEREICH 110V....250V
GNYE
-W2034
GNYE
BN
BU
BN
BU
-W2033 GNYE
-W2036
BU
BN
D GNYE D
BN
BU
-W2035
ELCAD-Projektstruktur: Circuit diagram | 02L55 | N-H91483667020001- | 1 |
dbo dbo dbo dbo dbo

PE
PE
PE
PE
PE
+1.PC +1.TC +1.TC
E E
PE PE PE PE PE
N-H91483667020001_SP_AD
PE
PE
PE
PE
PE
L1
L1
L1
L1
L1
6SR4102-2ND41-7FG0-Z
N
N
-E53 -E52 -E51 -E54 -E55 G47+K31+K69+K73+L55+L93+M35+
7.9.0 SP2
+1.PC +1.TC +1.TC M42+M61+N35+N45+N50+T74+U02+

V12+X30
100
ELCAD-VERSION:

OPTION L55:
STILLSTANDSHEIZUNG
Project:
F <1> <1> <1> <1> <1> F

226 <100>
AD see PDM 07.09.16 Sys Date 05.08.2016 Agiba Petroleum SINAMICS PERFECT HARMONY GH180 =.M
OPTION L55: +1.CC
Appr. see PDM Nürnberg VO ANTI-CONDENSATION HEATING Sheet1
N-H91483667020001- FS-SP AD
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
No.

< >
<1> <2>
1 GROUP 1
2 GROUP 2
3 GROUP 1 WARNING
4 GROUP 2 FAULT
A A
5 SENSOR NO WIRE FRACTUR

θ θ θ θ θ θ
=.CD/9.4
=.CD/9.6
L24_L91/L93/L95
N24_L91/L93/L95
B B
dgc
dgc
T42
T43
T22
T23
T32
T33
T52
T53
T62
T63
T41
T12
T13
T21
T31
T51
T61
T11
A2
Y2
PE
A1
Y1
-A93
L(+)
L(-)
RESET EXTERN
C θ θ θ θ θ θ C
AC/DC
1 GRUPPE 1
24-60V SELECT °C 2 GRUPPE 2
SENSOR 3 GRUPPE 1 WARNUNG
4 GRUPPE 2 ABSCHALTUNG
5 SENSOR KEIN DRAHTBRUCH
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 MODE
SET
ALARM
ERROR RESET
ANALOG OUTPUTS
D 0/4-20mA D
OUT1 OUT2
0/2-10V
12
11
14
22
21
24
32
31
34
42
41
44
52
51
54
62
61
64
72
71
74
U1
I1
U2
I2
dgc
dgc
ELCAD-Projektstruktur: Circuit diagram | 02L93 | N-H91483667020001- | 1 |
dgc
dgc
L24_SIGNAL dgc
=.CD/9.6
<5>
TEMPW_DI-1C dgc
TEMPF_DI-2C dgc
E E
N-H91483667020001_SP_AD
6SR4102-2ND41-7FG0-Z
G47+K31+K69+K73+L55+L93+M35+
7.9.0 SP2
=.CD/4.5
=.CD/4.5
M42+M61+N35+N45+N50+T74+U02+
V12+X30
100
ELCAD-VERSION:

OPTION L93:
TEMPERATURERFASSUNG
Project:
F <3> <4> F
<100> 227
AD see PDM 07.09.16 Sys Date 05.08.2016 Agiba Petroleum SINAMICS PERFECT HARMONY GH180 =.P
OPTION L93: +1.CC
Appr. see PDM Nürnberg VO TEMPERATURE EVALUATION Sheet1
N-H91483667020001- FS-SP AD
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
No.

BUSBAR BUSBAR < >
E323
=.CD/15.7
E322 1 ALARM AT BLOWER FAULT
=.CD/15.7 CONTACT OPEN
E321 2 PE-CONNECTION
=.CD/15.7
AT BLOWER BOX
A A
-Q33 -Q34
AFTER BLOWER REPLACEM.
3
5
3
5
1
1
SPEED CONTROL HAS
TO BE SET
3 CABLE HAS TO RUN IN
4,6A 4,6A CABLE PROTECTIVE TUBE
=.CD/15.7
A5E00993384
=.CD/4.6
4 AFTER BLOWER
I>> I>> I>> I>> I>> I>> REPLACEMENT SPEED

<1>
CONTROL HAS TO BE SET
2
4
6
2
4
6
-K34
xfmrBLW2_DI
L24_BLWPOWER_A
+1.CC
dbn
dbn
dbn
dbn
dbn
dbn
5
5 6
B -K33 B
3
5
1
3 4
2
+1.CC 1 2
2
4
6
24V_xfmrBLW2
=.CD/3.2
dgc
=.CD/3.4
=.CD/4.6
dbn
dbn
dbn
=.CD-X1 D A
36
35
<1>
+1.CC
dbn
dbn
dbn
D
CELLBLW2_DO
CELLBLW2_DI
B B
dgc
dgc
1W2
1V2
1U2
dbv
C =.CD-X33.1 D D D D D -L34 C
4
2
5
1
+1.CC
PE 1 WARNUNG KONTAKT
B B B B B
BEI LUEFTERFEHLER OFFEN
xfmrBLW2_DO
dbn
dbn
dbn
1U1
1V1
1W1
=.CD/3.2 2 PE-ANSCHLUSS AM LUEFTER-
KASTEN BEI LUEFTER-
WECHSEL EINSTELLUNG AUF
1W2
1V2
1U2
dbv DREHZAHLREGEL. NOTWENDIG

3 KABELVERLEGUNG IM
-L33 SCHUTZSCHLAUCH
+1.TC PE A5E00993384
=.CD-X1
A1
A1
4 BEI LUEFTERWECHSEL
D
-K33 -K34
1U1
1V1
1W1
38
37
24V_CELLBLW2 EINSTELLUNG AUF
+1.CC =.CD/3.4 DREHZAHLREGELUNG
+1.CC +1.CC D
B B
A2
A2
NOTWENDIG
D 1 2 <2> D
dbn
dbn
dbn
dgc
dgc
2 1 2
dbn
dbn
dbn
dgc
dgc
3 4 5 <2>
3 3 4
PE
5 6 5
dgc
5
4
3
3 -X33 -X33 5 6
dgc
PE
5
5
4
3
1
ELCAD-Projektstruktur: Circuit diagram | 02M61 | N-H91483667020001- | 1 |
N24_BLWPOWER_A -X34 -X34

=.CD/15.5
dbn
dbn
dbn
dbv
dgc
dgc
dbn
dbn
dbn
dbv
dgc
dgc
-E33 -E34
+1.TC
<3> <3> <3> <3>
-V3 NC COM -V4 NC COM
8,2V,1W 8,2V,1W
PE PE
E GND <1> GND <1> E
L2
L3
L2
L3
L1
L1
N-H91483667020001_SP_AD
W
V
V
U
U
Ain1U Ain1U 6SR4102-2ND41-7FG0-Z
G47+K31+K69+K73+L55+L93+M35+
M M
7.9.0 SP2
+10V +10V M42+M61+N35+N45+N50+T74+U02+

<4> <4> V12+X30
-R3 3~ -R4 3~
100
ELCAD-VERSION:
1KOhm 1%1W 1KOhm 1%1W SINAMICS PERFECT HARMONY GH180

OPTION M61:
REDUNDANTER LUEFTER
Project:
F F
228 <100>
AD see PDM 07.09.16 Sys Date 05.08.2016 Agiba Petroleum SINAMICS PERFECT HARMONY GH180 =.S
OPTION M61: +1.PC
Appr. see PDM Nürnberg VO REDUNDANT BLOWER Sheet1
N-H91483667020001- FS-SP AD
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
No.

< >
1AC 120V-230V 50/60Hz
1 CONTROLLED
<2> OUTGOING LINE
2 SUPPLY OF CONTROLLED
OUTGOING LINE
A A
ATTENTION!
A BRANCH CIRCUIT
PROTECTION SHELL BE
PROVIDED BY INSTALLER
-X38
=.CD/9.4
=.CD/3.1
PE2
A A A 3 FEEDBACK SIGNAL
5
6
B B
N24_N35N38
N24_N35N38_DO
PE
dgs
dgs
B B
-F38
13
21
3
1
dgc
dgc
2
4
14
22
5
A1
-K38
A2
CIRCUIT
OPTION
BREAKER
dgs
dgs
C C
N35 C10A 1 GESTEUERTER FREMD-
SPANNUNGSABGANG
1 2
4 2 EINSPEISUNG FUER
N36 C16A 3 4 GESTEUERTEN FREMD-
4
5 6 SPANNUNGSABGANG
ACHTUNG!
N37 C20A UEBERGEORDNETER
LEISTUNGSSCHALTER IST
DURCH DEN BETREIBER
N38 C25A
VORZUSEHEN
3 RUECKMELDUNG
D MAX. 60V DC D
-K38 -F38
13
3
ELCAD-Projektstruktur: Circuit diagram | 02N35-38 | N-H91483667020001- | 1 |
5 4
2
4
14
dgs
dgs
dbj
dbj
PE
-X38 B B -X38 B B
PE1
E E
4
3
2
1
A A A A A
N-H91483667020001_SP_AD
6SR4102-2ND41-7FG0-Z
G47+K31+K69+K73+L55+L93+M35+
7.9.0 SP2
M42+M61+N35+N45+N50+T74+U02+
V12+X30
100
ELCAD-VERSION:

OPTION N35-N38:
<1> <3> HILFSBERIEBE EXTERN
Project:
F F
<100> 229
AD see PDM 07.09.16 Sys Date 05.08.2016 Agiba Petroleum SINAMICS PERFECT HARMONY GH180 =.TF
OPTION N35-N38: +1.CC
Appr. see PDM Nürnberg VO AUXILIARY DEVICES EXTERNAL Sheet1
N-H91483667020001- FS-SP AD
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
No.

< >
1 LIFT MAGNET
2 GROUNDING SWITCH
MOTOR SIDE
A A
-Q2 A1
=.CD/13.5
-Q2 A2
=.CD/13.5
B <2> B
=.CD/14.5
=.CD/11.2
=.CA/9.5
=.CA/9.6
=.CA/9.6
GSF_O_NC_1
GS_O_U2
GSF_O_NO_1
GS_O_V2
GS_O_W2
BN
RD
BK
OG
C -W2071 C
1 VERRIGELUNGSMAGNET
dhv
dhv
dhv
2 ERDUNGSDRAUFSCHALTER
MOTORSEITE
A2
A1
23
13
21
11
3
5
-Q2
1
-Y12 <1>
D D
12
14
22
24
dcj
ELCAD-Projektstruktur: Circuit diagram | 02N45 | N-H91483667020001- | 1 |
PE
BU
YE
-W2071 GSF_O_NOC_1
GSF_O_NCC_1
E E
N-H91483667020001_SP_AD
=.CD/11.2
=.CD/14.5
6SR4102-2ND41-7FG0-Z
G47+K31+K69+K73+L55+L93+M35+
7.9.0 SP2
M42+M61+N35+N45+N50+T74+U02+
V12+X30
100
ELCAD-VERSION:

OPTION N45:
ERDUNGSDRAUFSCHALTER SYSTEM
Project:
F F
230 <100>
AD see PDM 07.09.16 Sys Date 05.08.2016 Agiba Petroleum SINAMICS PERFECT HARMONY GH180 =.UB
OPTION N45: +1.PC
Appr. see PDM Nürnberg VO GROUNDING SWITCH SYSTEM Sheet1
N-H91483667020001- FS-SP AD
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
No.

< >
A A
=.CD/15.1
=.CD/15.1
=.CD/15.1
=.CD/15.1
L1_F100
L2_F100
L3_F100
N_F100
B B
dgt
dgt
dgt
-F100
3
5
1
2
4
6
32A
C C
dgt
dgt
dgt
dgt
-X100 B B B B
PE
N
2
3
1
D D
FEED TO AUX.
CONTACTOR BOX
ELCAD-Projektstruktur: Circuit diagram | 02X30 | N-H91483667020001- | 1 |
E E
N-H91483667020001_SP_AD
6SR4102-2ND41-7FG0-Z
G47+K31+K69+K73+L55+L93+M35+
7.9.0 SP2
M42+M61+N35+N45+N50+T74+U02+
V12+X30
100
ELCAD-VERSION:

OPTION X30
Project:
F F
<100> 231
AD see PDM 07.09.16 Sys Date 05.08.2016 Agiba Petroleum SINAMICS PERFECT HARMONY GH180 =.W
OPTION X30 +1.CC
N-H91483667020001- FS-SP AD
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Terminal Line-up type Type of wiring

Cable designation Type, core number, cross section Destination, item designation Level
1 -W2000 GES GSC-01 2x0,62 mm²

2 -W2001 GES GSC-01 2x0,62 mm²
3 -W2002 GES GSC-01 2x0,62 mm²
A A
4 -W2040 GES GSC-01 2x0,62 mm²

5 -W2041 GES GSC-01 2x0,62 mm²
6 -W2042 GES GSC-01 2x0,62 mm²
7
Cable connection to termination
8
A BK B BK
9
C BK D BK
10
Termination A Destination Terminal strip Termination B Destination

B Termination C Destination Termination D Destination B
Item designation Item designation
Link Term.-
No
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
-X12
WH 1 +1.CC=.CD -A3 :5 /1.6
WH +1.TB -A13 :2
BK 2 +1.CC=.CD -A3 :5 /1.6
BK +1.TB -A13 :2
WH 3 +1.CC=.CD -A3 :3 /1.6
C WH
C
+1.TB -A12 :2
BK 4 +1.CC=.CD -A3 :3 /1.6
BK +1.TB -A12 :2
WH 5 +1.CC=.CD -A3 :1 /1.6
WH +1.TB -A11 :2
BK 6 +1.CC=.CD -A3 :1 /1.6
BK +1.TB -A11 :2
D D
ELCAD-Projektstruktur: Terminalblock diagram | KL | N-H91483667020001- | 1 |
E E
N-H91483667020001_SP_AD
7.9.0 SP2
ELCAD-VERSION:
Screen bus
N-bus Cover
PE-PEN-bus insulation plate

Project:
F F
Used cores total higher level insulation plate
232 Continued on sheet
AD see PDM 07.09.16 Sys Date 05.08.2016 Agiba Petroleum SINAMICS PERFECT HARMONY GH180 .CA
.CA+1.CC-X12 +1.CC
N-H91483667020001- FF-KL AD
Rev. Remarks Date Name Norm Orig./Repl.f./Repl.by Terminalblock diagram Klemmenplan 17 Sh.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 -W2060 GES GSC-02 2x2,5 mm²

2 -W2061 GES GSC-02 2x2,5 mm²
3 -W2062 GES GSC-02 2x2,5 mm²
A A
4 -W2063 GES GSC-02 2x2,5 mm²

5
7
8
A BK B BK
9
C BK D BK
10

Link Term.-
No
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
-X22
BL 1 +1.CC=.CD -A3 :21 /1.6
BU +1.TB -T11 :X2
BK 2 +1.CC=.CD -A3 :19 /1.6
BK +1.TB -T11 :X1
BL 3 +1.CC=.CD -A3 :15 /1.6
C BU
C
+1.TB -T10 :X2
BK 4 +1.CC=.CD -A3 :17 /1.6
BK +1.TB -T10 :X1
5 +1.PC=.CD -S111 :14 =.CD/12.5
+1.CC=.CD -S114 :13
6 +1.TC=.CD -S115 :14 =.CD/12.3
+1.PC=.CD -S113 :13
7 +1.TC=.CD -S117 :13 =.CD/12.3
8 +1.CC=.CD -X24 :5D =.CD/12.3
+1.CC=.CD -Z1 :A1 9 +1.TC=.CD -Y3 :A1 =.CD/13.4

D +1.PC=.CD -Y2 :A1 D
+1.CC=.CD -Z1 :A2 10 =.CD/13.4
+1.PC=.CD -Y2 :A2
11 +1.TC=.CD -Y3 :A2 =.CD/13.4

+1.CC=.CD -X2 :34D
E E
N-H91483667020001_SP_AD
7.9.0 SP2
ELCAD-VERSION:
Screen bus
N-bus Cover

Project:
F F
Continued on sheet
233
.CA+1.CC-X22 +1.CC
N-H91483667020001- FF-KL AD
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

3
A A
7
8
A BK B BK
9
C BK D BK
10

Link Term.-
No
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
-X80
1 +1.CC=.CD -X24 :1A /2.7
+1.TC -T1-B3 :1NC
2 /2.7
+1.TC -T1-B3 :1C
3 /2.7
C C
+1.TC -T1-B2 :1NC
4 /2.7
+1.TC -T1-B2 :1C
5 /2.7
+1.TC -T1-B1 :1NC
6 +1.CC=.CD -A2 :J8-4 /2.7
+1.TC -T1-B1 :1C
7 +1.CC=.CD -X24 :1C /2.7
+1.TC -T1-B6 :1NC
8 /2.7
+1.TC -T1-B6 :1C
9 /2.7
D +1.TC -T1-B5 :1NC D
10 /2.7
+1.TC -T1-B5 :1C
11 /2.7
+1.TC -T1-B4 :1NC

12 +1.CC=.CD -A2 :J8-7 /2.7
+1.TC -T1-B4 :1C
E E
N-H91483667020001_SP_AD
7.9.0 SP2
ELCAD-VERSION:
Screen bus
N-bus Cover

Project:
F F
.CA+1.CC-X80 +1.CC
N-H91483667020001- FF-KL AD
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

3
A A
7
8
A BK B BK
9
C BK D BK
10

Link Term.-
No
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
-X1
1 -X31.1 :4D /15.4
-A2 :J8-8
2 -X31.1 :5D /15.4
-A2 :J3-3 -X24 :1B
3 -X32 :2 /15.7
C C
-A2 :J8-10
4 -X32 :1 /15.7
-A2 :J3-9
13 -A2 :J3-2 /3.2
-K31 :A1
14 -A2 :J3-5 /3.2
+1.CC=.S -K33 :A1
15 -A2 :J3-8 /3.3
-K32 :A1
16 -A2 :J3-11 /3.4
+1.CC=.S -K34 :A1
35 -X33.1 :5D =.S/1.3
D -A2 :J3-6 D
36 -X33.1 :4D =.S/1.3
-A2 :J8-9
37 +1.PC=.S -X34 :1 =.S/1.7

-A2 :J3-12
38 +1.PC=.S -X34 :2 =.S/1.6
-A2 :J9-1
E E
N-H91483667020001_SP_AD
7.9.0 SP2
ELCAD-VERSION:
Screen bus
N-bus Cover

Project:
F F
Continued on sheet
235
.CD+1.CC-X1 +1.CC
N-H91483667020001- FF-KL AD
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 -W2071 GES GSC-01 6x1,0 mm²

2
3
A A
7
8
A BK B BK
9
C BK D BK
10

Link Term.-
No
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
-X2
1 -S3 :11 /11.5
2 -A3 :43 /11.5
3 -S3 :22 /11.5

C C
4 -S3 :21 /11.5
5 -A3 :51 /11.2
6 /11.2
BK +1.PC=.UB -Q2 :11 7 /11.2
BU +1.PC=.UB -Q2 :12 8 -K51 :24 /11.2
9 -K41 :43 /11.5

D D
10 -K41 :64 /11.6
11 -K41 :72 /11.6

12 /11.6
13 -K41 :91 /11.7
14 -K41 :13 /11.7
15 -K52 :A2 /6.2
E 16 /6.2
E
-K52 :A1
17 -K53 :A1 /6.3

N-H91483667020001_SP_AD
18 -K54 :A1 /6.4

7.9.0 SP2
19 -K55 :A1 /6.4

ELCAD-VERSION:
Screen bus
N-bus Cover

Project:
F F
.CD+1.CC-X2 +1.CC
N-H91483667020001- FF-KL AD
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 -W2071 GES GSC-01 6x1,0 mm²

2
3
A A
7
8
A BK B BK
9
C BK D BK
10

Link Term.-
No
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
-X2
20 -A2 :J1-2 /2.2
21 -A2 :J1-3 /2.3
22 -A2 :J1-5 /2.3

C C
23 -A2 :J1-6 /2.3
24 -A2 :J1-8 /2.4
25 -A2 :J1-9 /2.4
26 -A2 :J1-11 /2.5
27 -A2 :J1-12 /2.5
28 -A2 :J2-2 /2.5

D D
29 -A2 :J2-3 /2.5
30 -A2 :J2-11 /3.1

31 -A2 :J2-12 /3.1

-X24 :11D
32 -A2 :J2-10 /3.1
33 /13.4
RD +1.PC=.UB -Q2 :A1 -K22 :14
34 /13.4
BN +1.PC=.UB -Q2 :A2 +1.CC=.CA -X22 :11D
E 35 /14.4
E
-K23 :A1
36 /14.5
N-H91483667020001_SP_AD
YE +1.PC=.UB -Q2 :14 37 /14.5

7.9.0 SP2
OG +1.PC=.UB -Q2 :13 38 -X24 :5C /14.5

ELCAD-VERSION:
Screen bus
N-bus Cover

Project:
F F
Continued on sheet
237
.CD+1.CC-X2 +1.CC
N-H91483667020001- FF-KL AD
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 -W2010 GES GSC-01 2x0,62 mm²

2 -W2011 GES GSC-01 4x0,62 mm²
3 -W2012 GES GSC-01 4x0,62 mm²
A A
4 -W2013 GES GSC-01 2x0,62 mm²

5 -W2014 GES GSC-01 2x0,62 mm²
6
7
8
A BK B BK
9
C BK D BK
10

Link Term.-
No
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
-X3
WH 1 -A2 :J5-2 /3.7
BK 2 -A2 :J5-1 /3.7
3 /5.7
C C
WH 4 -A2 :J5-4 /3.7
BK 5 -A2 :J5-3 /3.7
6 /5.7
BK 7 -A2 :J10-1 /5.5
WH 8 -A2 :J10-2 /5.5
9 /5.7
D D
BN 10 -A2 :J10-3 /5.5
OG 11 -A2 :J10-4 /5.5

RD 12 -A2 :J10-5 /5.5
BK 13 -A2 :J10-6 /5.5
14 /5.7
BN 15 -A2 :J10-10 /5.6
E 16 /5.6
E
OG -A2 :J10-11
RD 17 -A2 :J10-12 /5.6

N-H91483667020001_SP_AD
BK 18 -A2 :J10-13 /5.6

7.9.0 SP2
19 /5.7
ELCAD-VERSION:
Screen bus
N-bus Cover

Project:
F F
.CD+1.CC-X3 +1.CC
N-H91483667020001- FF-KL AD
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

3
A A
7
8
A BK B BK
9
C BK D BK
10

Link Term.-
No
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
-X3
20 /7.2
21 /7.2
22 /7.2
C C
23 /7.3
24 /7.7
25 /7.3
26 /7.3
27 /7.7
PE /5.6
D D
E E
N-H91483667020001_SP_AD
7.9.0 SP2
ELCAD-VERSION:
Screen bus
N-bus Cover

Project:
F F
Continued on sheet
239
.CD+1.CC-X3 +1.CC
N-H91483667020001- FF-KL AD
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

3
A A
7
8
A BK B BK
9
C BK D BK
10

Link Term.-
No
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
-X24
+1.CC=.CA -X80 :1B 1 -X1 :2D /9.5
+1.CC=.CA -X80 :7B -G1 :+
2 -K31 :A2 /9.3
-G1 :-
-K52 :11 3 -S3 :12 /9.5
C C
-K41 :A1 -A2 :J4-12
-A2 :J7-5 4 -A3 :49 /9.3
-S3 :41 -K1 :2
-A2 :J2-9 5 /9.6
-X2 :38B +1.CC=.CA -X22 :8B
6 +1.PC -Y1 :A2 /9.3
-K21 :A2
+1.CC=.P -A93 :71 7 +1.CC=.P -A93 :A1 /9.6
8 +1.CC=.P -A93 :A2 /9.4
9 +1.CC=.M -A40-1 /9.6

D D
10 +1.CC=.M -K40 :A2 /9.4
-K21 :11 11 /9.7

-X2 :31D
12 /9.4
+1.CC=.TF -K38 :A2
13 /9.7
14 /9.4
15 /9.7
E 16 /9.5
E
N-H91483667020001_SP_AD
7.9.0 SP2
ELCAD-VERSION:
Screen bus
N-bus Cover

Project:
F F
.CD+1.CC-X24 +1.CC
N-H91483667020001- FF-KL AD
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

3
A A
7
8
A BK B BK
9
C BK D BK
10

Link Term.-
No
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
-X31.1
1 +1.TC -L31 :1U2 /15.3
-K31 :2
2 +1.TC -L31 :1V2 /15.3
-K31 :4
3 +1.TC -L31 :1W2 /15.3
C C
-K31 :6
4 -X31 :2 /15.4
-X1 :1B
5 -X31 :1 /15.4
-X1 :2B
D D
E E
N-H91483667020001_SP_AD
7.9.0 SP2
ELCAD-VERSION:
Screen bus
N-bus Cover

Project:
F F
Continued on sheet
241
.CD+1.CC-X31.1 +1.CC
N-H91483667020001- FF-KL AD
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

3
A A
7
8
A BK B BK
9
C BK D BK
10

Link Term.-
No
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
-X33.1
1 +1.TC=.S -L33 :1U2 =.S/1.2
+1.CC=.S -K33 :2
2 +1.TC=.S -L33 :1V2 =.S/1.3
+1.CC=.S -K33 :4
3 +1.TC=.S -L33 :1W2 =.S/1.3
C C
+1.CC=.S -K33 :6
4 +1.PC=.S -X33 :2 =.S/1.3
-X1 :36B
5 +1.PC=.S -X33 :1 =.S/1.3
-X1 :35B
D D
E E
N-H91483667020001_SP_AD
7.9.0 SP2
ELCAD-VERSION:
Screen bus
N-bus Cover

Project:
F F
.CD+1.CC-X33.1 +1.CC
N-H91483667020001- FF-KL AD
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

3
A A
7
8
A BK B BK
9
C BK D BK
10

Link Term.-
No
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
-X68
1 -Q32 :1 /1.2
2 -Q32 :3 /1.2
3 /1.2
C C
-Q3 :1
4 /1.2
-Q3 :3
PE /1.2
D D
E E
N-H91483667020001_SP_AD
7.9.0 SP2
ELCAD-VERSION:
Screen bus
N-bus Cover

Project:
F F
Continued on sheet
243
.CD+1.CC-X68 +1.CC
N-H91483667020001- FF-KL AD
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

3
A A
7
8
A BK B BK
9
C BK D BK
10

Link Term.-
No
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
-X230
1 -F4 :1 /1.6
2 -T5 :34 /1.6
3 -G2 :LINE /1.6

C C
4 -G2 :NEU /1.6
5 -G1 :L1 /1.6
6 -G1 :N /1.6
PE /1.6
D D
E E
N-H91483667020001_SP_AD
7.9.0 SP2
ELCAD-VERSION:
Screen bus
N-bus Cover

Project:
F F
.CD+1.CC-X230 +1.CC
N-H91483667020001- FF-KL AD
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 -W2032 LTG 3x1,5 mm²

2 -W2033 LTG 3x1,5 mm²
3
A A
7
8
A BK B BK
9
C BK D BK
10

Link Term.-
No
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
-X55
1 -F40 :1 /1.1
2 -F40 :3 /1.2
BN -K40 :22 3 +1.TC -E54 :L1 /1.1

C BN
C
-E53 :L1
BU -K40 :32 4 +1.TC -E54 :N /1.2
BU -E53 :N
PE1 /1.2
GNYE GNYE -E53 :PE PE2 +1.TC -E54 :PE /1.2
D D
E E
N-H91483667020001_SP_AD
7.9.0 SP2
ELCAD-VERSION:
Screen bus
N-bus Cover

Project:
F F
Continued on sheet
245
AD see PDM 07.09.16 Sys Date 05.08.2016 Agiba Petroleum SINAMICS PERFECT HARMONY GH180 .M
.M+1.CC-X55 +1.CC
N-H91483667020001- FF-KL AD
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

3
A A
7
8
A BK B BK
9
C BK D BK
10

Link Term.-
No
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
-X38
1 -F38 :14 /1.5
2 -F38 :13 /1.5
3 -K38 :2 /1.4
C C
4 -K38 :4 /1.4
5 -F38 :1 /1.4
6 -F38 :3 /1.4
PE1 /1.4
PE2 /1.4
D D
E E
N-H91483667020001_SP_AD
7.9.0 SP2
ELCAD-VERSION:
Screen bus
N-bus Cover

Project:
F F
AD see PDM 07.09.16 Sys Date 05.08.2016 Agiba Petroleum SINAMICS PERFECT HARMONY GH180 .TF
.TF+1.CC-X38 +1.CC
N-H91483667020001- FF-KL AD
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

3
A A
7
8
A BK B BK
9
C BK D BK
10

Link Term.-
No
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
-X100
1 -F100 :2 /1.4
2 -F100 :4 /1.4
3 -F100 :6 /1.4
C C
N +1.CC=.CD -X4 :N2B /1.4
PE /1.4
D D
E E
N-H91483667020001_SP_AD
7.9.0 SP2
ELCAD-VERSION:
Screen bus
N-bus Cover

Project:
F F
Continued on sheet
247
AD see PDM 07.09.16 Sys Date 05.08.2016 Agiba Petroleum SINAMICS PERFECT HARMONY GH180 .W
.W+1.CC-X100 +1.CC
N-H91483667020001- FF-KL AD
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 -W2031 2YSLCY-J 4x4 mm²

2
3
A A
8 Cable connection to termination

9 A BK B BK
10

B B
Link Term.-
No
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
-X4
BN 1 -Z31 :L1 /15.1
2 +1.CC=.W -F100 :1 /15.1
BK 3 -Z31 :L2 /15.1
4 +1.CC=.W -F100 :3 /15.1
GY 5 -Z31 :L3 /15.1
C 6 /15.1
C
+1.CC=.W -F100 :5
N1 /15.1
N2 +1.CC=.W -X100 :NB /15.1
GNYE PE -Z31 :PE /15.1
D D
E E
N-H91483667020001_SP_AD
7.9.0 SP2
ELCAD-VERSION:
Screen bus
N-bus Cover

Project:
F F
.CD+1.CC-X4 +1.CC
N-H91483667020001- FF-KL AD
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Quality C
C.1 CE Marking and Directives for SINAMICS PERFECT HARMONY
GH180 Products
The CE marking identifies products that are in compliance with the appropriate EU directives.
The CE marking is not a seal of quality. It was created to guarantee end users safe products
in the free flow of goods within the European Economic Community (EEC) and the European
Community (EC). By applying the CE marking the manufacturer acknowledges the product is
in conformance with the applicable EU Directives and the product complies with the “essential
requirements” defined in these directives. Based on the Gambica CE Marking and Technical
Standardization Guidelines, Edition 3.0, compliance to EN 61800-5-1 is a harmonized standard
and confers a presumption of conformity with the essentials of the Low Voltage Directive (LVD).
C.1.1 CE Marking on Power Drive Systems (PDS)

The terminology used throughout IEC and EN standards relating to electrical VFDs is contained
in the IEC 61800 series of standards. The IEC 61800 series fo standards references other
components of the PDS with respect to the VFD; however, those components are covered by
different IEC product relevant materials.
As referenced in Figure "Power Drive System", the installation, parts of the installation, the
motor or any machinery, including gearboxes and the driven equipment, are outside of the
scope of Siemens LD's responsibility.

Quality
C.1 CE Marking and Directives for SINAMICS PERFECT HARMONY GH180 Products
,QVWDOODWLRQRUSDUWRILQVWDOODWLRQ
3RZHU'ULYH6\VWHP3'6
&RPSOHWH'ULYH0RGXOH&'0
6\VWHPFRQWURO
VHTXHQFLQJ
%DVLF'ULYH0RGXOH%'0
&RQWURO &RQYHUWHU
)HHGLQJVHFWLRQ
DX[LOLDULHV
0RWRU 6HQVRUV
'ULYHQ(TXLSPHQW
Figure C-1 Power Drive System
Siemens Industry, Inc. I DT LD SINAMICS PERFECT HARMONY GH180 designs always

include the Basic Drive Module (BDM) consisting of a Perfect Harmony™ transformer,
converter/inverter (power cell) section, and control section. Depending on the Siemens
Industry, Inc. I DT LD scope of supply, SINAMICS PERFECT HARMONY GH180 Complete
Drive Module (CDM) may include optional components, such as a motor excitation unit, output
line filter, output line reactor, or earthing switches.
Note
As referenced in Figure Power Drive System, the installation, parts of the installation, the motor,
or any machinery, including gearboxes and the driven equipment, are outside of the scope of
Siemens LD's responsibility.

Quality
/9 /9FRQWURO /9

SRZHU SRZHU SRZHU
3'6
3HUIHFW
+DUPRQ\ 70
&'0
'ULYHE\SDVV
&LUFXLWEUHDNHUFRQWDFWRU
/RDGEUHDNVZLWFK
3HUIHFW
+DUPRQ\ 70
%'0 6WDWLFH[FLWHU
&RQWURO
)LEHURSWLF
+DUPRQ\ LQWHUFRQ
WUDQVIRUPHU 3UH QHFWLRQ
'ULYHLQSXW FKDUJH 'ULYHRXWSXW
SKDVH &LUFXLWEUHDNHUFRQWDFWRU 'ULYHRXWSXW &LUFXLWEUHDNHUFRQWDFWRU ,QGXFWLRQRU
3RZHU 5HDFWRU
09SRZHU /RDGEUHDNVZLWFK /RDGEUHDNVZLWFK V\QFKURQRXV
VHFWLRQ /RZSDVVILOWHU
+] (DUWKVZLWFK (DUWKVZLWFK PRWRU
* Optional Components in SINAMIC PERFECT HARMONY CDM:

● May not be in Siemens scope of supply.
● May be housed separately in stand-alone enclosure.
Figure C-2 Overview of PDS containing the SINAMICS PERFECT HARMONY BDM and CDM
C.1.2 Directives that apply to the Power Drive System (PDS)

● LVD: Low Voltage Directive – 2006/95/EEC (formerly 72/23/EEC). Siemens Industry, Inc.
I DT LD SINAMICS PERFECT HARMONY GH180 designs comply with IEC 61800-5-1
(2007) “Adjustable Speed Electrical Power Drive Systems”, Part 5-1 “Safety Requirements
– Electrical, Thermal and Energy.”
● EMC: EMC Directive - 2004/108/EEC (formerly 89/36/EEC). Siemens Industry, Inc. I DT
LD SINAMICS PERFECT HARMONY GH180 designs comply with IEC 61800-3 (2004)
“Adjustable Speed Electrical Power Drive Systems”, Part 3 “EMC Requirements and
specific test methods.” Reference Section “EMC Installation Guidelines for SINAMICS
PERFECT HARMONY GH180 "in Siemens Industry, Inc. I DT LD document A5E03091809
(this document).
– The SINAMICS PERFECT HARMONY GH180 is verified compliant to IEC 61800-3
through type testing of the BDM/CDM itself. Compliance with IEC 61800-3 is a
requirement of the EMC Directive; however, the SINAMICS PERFECT HARMONY
GH180 cannot directly state compliance to the EMC Directive because the directive
requires type testing of the complete PDS as it is installed at the customer site.
● MD: Machinery Directive – 98/37/EEC until 29 Dec. 2009, then 2006/42/EEC becomes
effective.
– Although the Machinery Directive is a recognized directive associated with a PDS, the
SINAMICS PERFECT HARMONY GH180 cannot directly state compliance to the
Machinery Directive. The Machinery Directive provides clear definition for a machine
and a partially completed machine. SINAMICS PERFECT HARMONY GH180 VFD
does not meet these definitions. This is defined in Section CE Marking.

Quality
● PED: Pressure Equipment Directive – 97/23EC. Liquid cooled Siemens Industry, Inc. I DT
LD SINAMICS PERFECT HARMONY GH180 designs are exempt since they operate at
pressures less than ten bars.
● ATEX: Explosive Atmospheres – 94/9/EC. Siemens Industry, Inc. I DT LD does not
authorize the use of SINAMICS PERFECT HARMONY GH180 designs in an explosive
atmosphere.
C.1.3 CE Marking
CE Marking
Conformity with the directives (or with the relevant national law) is expressed by the CE mark
(Option U02).
The CE marking is required for all products which fall in the scope of a European Directive
(which foresees the CE marking for those products) which are placed on the market in the
European Economic Area.
Note
CE Marking and Standardization
Guidelines for Application to Electrical Power Drive Systems Edition 3.0 may be accessed at
www.rema.uk.com/pdfs/UserGuide3.pdf
Figure C-3 CE Mark
See also
www.gambica.org.uk (www.gambica.org.uk)

Quality
C.2 Motor Compatibility
NEMA-MG-1 Conformance--Example: Test of a 9 Cell Unit

Although the SINAMICS PERFECT HARMONY GH180 topology output voltage contains a
high THDv %, the drive was shown to have low harmonic content between the fundamental
and 25th.
The 9-cell air-cooled drive was factory tested at Siemens and was found to meet NEMA MG-1
for Harmonic Voltage Factor (HVF) < 0.03; and, therefore, motors do not need to be derated.
* Results are shown for a 1100 Hp 4160 V 9-Cell Drive loaded at 505 kW, 86 A, and 4230 voltage
output
Figure C-4 Results: Harmonic Voltage Factor for 9 Cell Air-Cooled Principle
hV |ChV| hV · FOUT
1 88.987 60
2 0.109 120
3 0.617 180
4 0.930 240
5 0.349 300
6 0.287 360
7 0.437 420
8 0.177 480
9 0.310 540
10 0.295 600
11 0.420 660
12 0.201 720
13 0.410 780
14 0.333 840
15 0.425 900
16 0.265 960
17 0.894 1.02 · 103

Quality
hV |ChV| hV · FOUT
18 0.368 1.08 · 103
19 0.384 1.14 · 103
20 0.554 1.20 · 103
21 0.157 1.26 · 103
22 0.672 1.32 · 103
23 0.383 1.38 · 103
24 0.380 1.44 · 103
25 0.245 1.50 · 103

Quality
C.3 IEEE 519 Conformance
IEEE 519 Conformance -- Example: 18-Pulse Test of a 9-Cell Unit

The 18--pulse 9-cell air-cooled drive was factory tested at SIEMENS and was found to meet
IEEE 519 for the most stringent TDD limits. The pre-existing voltage distortion was less than
2 % and the primary current contained a K-factor of less than 2 A.
* Results shown for a 4160 V input 1100 Hp drive.

THDi < 5%, for THDv existing ≦2%
18-pulse, air-cooled Micro Harmony meets IEEE 519-1992 TDD Harmonic Limits
Figure C-5 Results: 9-Cell - Harmonic Current Distortion (TDD < %)
hl |Chl| · 100 / |Cl|

1 100
2 0.888
3 1.884
4 0.407
5 2.453
6 0.490
7 1.171
8 0.224
9 0.508
10 0.324

Quality
hl |Chl| · 100 / |Cl|

11 1.333
12 0.299
13 0.949
14 0.407
15 0.143
16 0.218
17 1.051
18 0.243
19 0.578
20 0.407
21 0.701
22 0.162
23 0.326
24 0.058
25 0.233

Quality
C.4 Quality documents
C.4.1 EC declaration of conformity

Quality

Quality

Quality

Quality

Quality

Quality

Quality

Quality

Quality

Quality
C.4.2 Factory certificate of Electromagnetic Compatibility

Quality

Quality

Quality

Quality

Quality

Quality

Quality

Quality

Quality
C.4.3 Routine test certificate
Test Certificate
Customer/Code word Agiba Petroleum

Customer Order No., external Agiba Petroleum
Serial-No. N-H91483667020001
Customer Order No., internal 0001483667
Pos. No. 20
Order no. 6SR4102-2ND41-7FG0-Z
Options see next Page
Technical Data:
Input 3AC / 11000V

82A
Output 3AC / 0 - 6600V
0-140A
Duty Class I, continously
Cooling Method AF, air
Temperature Range +5 - +40°C
Degree of protection IP42
Test according to: Part List Test Instructions

M6SR4 A5E03792376A QP
Tests carried out according to: IEC 61800-5-1, EN 50178, EN 60146-1-1

1. Instruments- and Line Check
2. Visual test
3. Insulation test
Rated voltage Test voltage
AC 11000V DC 37,25kV
AC 0 - 6600V DC 29,70kV
AC 400V DC 2,55kV
AC 230V DC 2,06kV
DC 24V DC 0,5kV
4. Function test
The routine test has been passed in all respects.

The product is released for delivery through: PD LD P MF-NMA D AMD
This test certificate is only valid with the red test label on the converter cubicle.
Comments:
Agiba Petroleum
SIEMENS AG - N-H91483667020001 JQ AC 1-2

Quality
Test Certificate
Options Description
G47 Ethernet port connector mounted on the door
K31 Off-Local-Remote Selector
K69 Control voltage 120 V AC by Siemens
K73 I/O signal voltage 24 V DC
L55 Anti-condensation heating for cabinet
L93 PT100 evaluation unit with 6 inpuuts and 2 analog outputs
M35 Gland plates, aluminum
M42 IP42 degree of protection
M61 Redundant blower
N35 Controlled outgoing feeder for auxiliaries 230 V 1 AC or 120 V 1 AC
N45 Make-proof grounding switch at drive output (manually driven)
N50 Internal cabling with halogen-free cables
T74 Nameplate and warning labels in English/German
U02 Version with CE conformity
V12 Motor voltage 6.6 kV
X30 Implementation according to customer specifications
Agiba Petroleum
2-2 N-H91483667020001 JQ AC - SIEMENS AG

Quality

Abbreviations D
D.1 Abbreviations
This appendix contains a list of symbols and abbreviations commonly used throughout this
manual group.
Table D-1 Commonly Used Abbreviations
Abbreviation Meaning
• Boolean AND function
+ Addition or Boolean OR function
∑ Summation
µ Microsecond
A Amp, Ampere
AC Alternating Current
accel Acceleration
A/D Analog-to-digital (converter)
AI Analog Input
Alg Analog
AP Advanced protocol for cell communication
avail Available
BTU British thermal units
C Centigrade or Capacitor
cap Capacitor
CCB Cell Control Board
ccw Counter clockwise
CE Formerly European Conformity, now true definition
CFM Cubic Feet per Minute
CLVC Closed Loop Vector Control
cmd Command
com Common
conn Connector
CPS Control Power Supply
CPU Central Processing Unit
CSMC Closed Loop Synchronous Motor Control
CT Current Transformer
cu Cubic
curr, I Current
cw Clockwise
D Derivative (PID), depth
D/A Digital-to-analog (converter)

Abbreviations
D.1 Abbreviations
db Decibel
DC Direct Current
DCR Digital Control Rack
DCS Distributed Control System
decel Deceleration
deg, ° Degrees
Div Division
dmd Demand
e Error
ELV Extra Low Voltage
EMC Electromagnetic Compatibility
EMF Electromotive Force
EMI Electromagnetic Interference
EPS Encoder Power Supply
ESD Electrostatic Discharge
ESP Electrical Submersible Pump
ESTOP, e-stop Emergency Stop
fb, fdbk Feedback
ffwd Feed Forward
FLC Full Load Current
freq Frequency
ft, ' Feet
fwd Forward
gnd Ground
GUI Graphical User Interface
H Height
hex Hexadecimal
hist Historic
Hp Horsepower
hr Hour
HVAC Heating, Ventilation, Air Conditioning
HVF Harmonic Voltage Factor
Hz Hertz
I Integral (PID)
ID Identification
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers
IGBT Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistor
In Input
In, " Inches
INH Inhibit
I/O Input(s)/Output(s)
IOB I/O Breakout Board

Abbreviations
D.1 Abbreviations
IOC Instantaneous Overcurrent
IP Input Protection
k 1,000 (e.g., Kohm)
kHz KiloHertz
kV Kilo Volts
kVA One Thousand Volt Amps
kW Kilowatt
L Inductor
LAN Local Area Network
Lbs Pounds (weight)
LCD Liquid Crystal Display
ld Load
LED Light-emitting Diode
LFR Latch Fault Relay
Lim Limit
LOS Loss Of Signal
lps Liters Per Second
mA Milliamperes
mag Magnetizing
max Maximum
MCC Motor Control Center
Mg Milligram
Min Minimum, Minute
msec Millisecond(S)
Msl Mean Sea Level
MV Medium Voltage
mvlt Motor Voltage
MW Megawatt
NC Normally Closed
NEMA National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association
No Normally Open
NVRAM Non-Volatile Random Access Memory
NXG Next Generation Control
NXGII Next Generation Control II
NXGpro Next Generation Control pro
OLVC Open Loop Vector Control
O-M Overmodulation
OOS Out of Saturation (IGBT)
overld Overload
P Proportional (PID)
Pa Pascals
pb Push Button
PC Personal Computer or Printed Circuit

Abbreviations
D.1 Abbreviations
PCB Printed Circuit Board
PID Proportional Integral Derivative
PLC Programmable Logic Controller
PLL Phase Locked Loop
pot Potentiometer
pp Peak-to-peak
ppm Parts per Million
PPR Pulses per Revolution
PQM Power Quality Meter
ProToPS TM
Process Tolerant Protection Strategy
PSDBP Power Spectral Density Break Point
psi Pounds Per Square Inch
pt Point
PT Potential Transformer
PWM Pulse Width Modulation
Q1,Q2,Q3,Q4 Output Transistor Designations
rad Radians
RAM Random Access Memory
ref Reference
rev Reverse, Revolution(S)
RFI Radio Frequency Interference
RLBK Rollback
rms Root-mean-squared
RPM Revolutions Per Minute
RTD Resistance Temperature Detector
RTU Remote Terminal Unit
RX Receive (RS232 Communications)
s Second(s)
SCB Signal Conditioning Board
SCR Silicon Controlled Rectifier
sec Second(s)
ser Serial
SMC Synchronous Motor Control
SOP Sum of Products; System Operating Program
spd Speed
stab Stability
std Standard
sw Switch
T1, T2 Output Terminals TI and T2
TB Terminal Block
TBD To Be Determined
TCP/IP Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol
THD Total Harmonic Distortion

Abbreviations
D.1 Abbreviations
TOL Thermal Overload
TP Test Point
trq, τ Torque
TX Transmit (RS232 Communications)
UPS Uninterruptable Power Supply
V Voltage, Volts
VA Volt-Amperes
VAC Volts AC
var Variable
VDC Volts DC
vel Velocity (speed)
VFD Variable Frequency Drive
V/Hz Volts per Hertz
vlts Voltage(s), Volts
W Width, Watts
WAGO Expansion I/O System (brand name)
xfmr, xformer Transformer

Abbreviations
D.1 Abbreviations

Glossary
AND
AND is a logical Boolean function whose output is true if all of the inputs are true in SOP
notation, AND is represented as "∗" (e.g., C=A∗B), although sometimes it may be omitted
between operands with the AND operation being implied (e.g., C=AB).
ASCII
ASCII is an acronym for American Standard Code for Information Interchange, a set of 8-bit
computer codes used for the representation of text.
Baud rate
Baud rate is a measure of the switching speed of a line, representing the number of changes
of state of the line per second. The baud rate of the serial port is selected through the Baud
Rate parameter in the Communications Menu [9].
Bit
Bit is an acronym for BInary digiT. Typically, bits are used to indicate either a true (1) or false
(0) state within the drive’s programming.
Boolean algebra
A form of mathematical rules developed by the mathematician George Boole used in the design
of digital and logic systems.
Carrier frequency
Carrier frequency is the set switching frequency of the power devices (IGBTs) in the power
section of each cell. The carrier frequency is measured in cycles per second (Hz).
Catch a spinning load

"Catch a spinning load" is a feature that can be used with high-inertia loads (e.g., fans), in
which the drive may attempt to turn on while the motor is already turning. This feature can be
enabled via the control menu system.
CLVC
An acronym for Closed Loop Vector Control, one of the control modes in the drive. This is flux
vector control for an induction machine (IM), utilizing an encoder for speed feedback.

Glossary
CMP
Refer to the glossary term SOP.
Comparator
A comparator is a device that compares 2 quantities and determines their equality. The
comparator submenus allow the programmer to specify two variables to be compared. The
results of the custom comparison operations can be used in the system program.
Configuration Update
see Tool Suite definition.
Converter
The converter is the component of the drive that changes AC voltage to DC voltage.
Critical speed avoidance

Critical speed avoidance is a feature that allows the operator to program up to 3 mechanical
system frequencies that the drive will "skip over" during its operation.
CSMC
An acronym for Closed Loop Synchronous Machine (SM) Control, one of the control modes
of the drive. This is a flux vector control for a synchronous machine, utilizing an encoder for
speed feedback and providing a field excitation command for use by an external field exciter.
DC link
The DC link is a large capacitor bank between the converter and inverter section of the drive.
The DC link, along with the converter, establishes the voltage source for the inverter.
De Morgan’s Theorem
The duality principal of Boolean algebra used to convert system logic equations into sum-of-
products notation.
Debug Tool

Glossary
Downloading
Downloading is a process by which information is transmitted from a remote device (such as
a PC) to the drive. The term "downloading" implies the transmission of an entire file of
information (e.g., the system program) rather than continued interactive communications
between the two devices. The use of a PC for downloading requires special serial
communications software to be available on the PC, which may link to the drive via RS232 or
through the Host Simulator via an ethernet connection.
DRCTRY
Directory file for system tokens and flags used in the compilation of system programs. It
provides a direct lookup table of ASCII names to internal ID numbers. It also identifies whether
the flag is a word or bit-field, and also whether it can be used as an input or output only, or can
be used for both.
Drive
The term "drive" refers to the power conversion equipment that converts utility power into power
for a motor in a controlled manner.
ELV
ELV is an acronym for extra low voltage, and represents any voltage not exceeding a limit that
is generally accepted to be 50 VAC and 120 VDC (ripple free).
EMC
EMC is an acronym for electromagnetic compatibility–the ability of equipment to function
satisfactorily in its electromagnetic environment without introducing intolerable
electromagnetic disturbances to anything in that environment.
ESD
ESD is an acronym for ElectroStatic Discharge. ESD is an undesirable electrical side effect
that occurs when static charges build up on a surface and are discharged to another. When
printed circuit boards are involved, impaired operation and component damage are possible
side effects due to the static-sensitive nature of the PC board components. These side effects
may manifest themselves as intermittent problems or total component failures. It is important
to recognize that these effects are cumulative and may not be obvious.
Fault log
Fault messages are saved to memory so that the operator may view them at a later time. This
memory location is called the fault log. The fault log lists both fault and alarm messages, the
date and time that they occurred, and the time and date that they are reset.

Glossary
Faults
Faults are error conditions that have occurred in the system. The severity of faults vary.
Likewise, the treatment or corrective action for a fault may vary from changing a parameter
value to replacing a hardware component such as a fuse.
Flash Card
Non-volatile memory storage device for the control. It stores the drive program, system
program, logs, parameters, and other related drive files.
FPGA
Field Programmable Gate Array. An FPGA is an integrated circuit that contains thousands of
logic gates.
Function
A function is one of four components found in the menu system. Functions are built-in programs
that perform specific tasks. Examples of functions include System Program Upload/Download
and Display System Program Name.
Harmonics
Harmonics are undesirable AC currents or voltages at integer multiples of the fundamental
frequency. The fundamental frequency is the lowest frequency in the wave form (generally the
repetition frequency). Harmonics are present in any non-sinusoidal wave form and cannot
transfer power on average.
Harmonics arise from non-linear loads in which current is not strictly proportional to voltage.
Linear loads like resistors, capacitors, and inductors do not produce harmonics. However, non-
linear devices such as diodes and silicon controlled rectifiers (SCRs) do generate harmonic
currents. Harmonics are also found in uninterruptable power supplies (UPSs), rectifiers,
transformers, ballasts, welders, arc furnaces, and personal computers.
Hexadecimal digits
Hexadecimal (or "hex") digits are the "numerals" used to represent numbers in the base 16
(hex) number system. Unlike the more familiar decimal system, which uses the numerals 0
through 9 to make numbers in powers of 10, the base 16 number system uses the numerals
0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, A, B, C, D, E, and F to make numbers in powers of 16.

Glossary
Historic log
The historic log is a troubleshooting/diagnostic tool of the control. The historic log continuously
logs drive status, including the drive state, internal fault words, and multiple user-selectable
variables. This information is sampled every slow loop cycle of the control (typically 450 to 900
times per second). If a fault occurs, the log is frozen a predefined number of samples after the
fault event, and data samples prior to and after the fault condition are recorded to allow post-
fault analysis. The number of samples recorded are user-selectable via the control, as well as
the option to record the historic log within the VFD event log.
Host Simulator
I/O
I/O is an acronym for input/output. I/O refers to any and all inputs and outputs connected to a
computer system. Both inputs and outputs can be classified as analog (e.g., input power, drive
output, meter outputs, etc.) or digital (e.g., contact closures or switch inputs, relay outputs,
etc.).
IGBT
IGBT is an acronym for Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistors. IGBTs are semiconductors that
are used in the drive to provide reliable, high-speed switching, high-power capabilities,
improved control accuracy, and reduced motor noise.
Induction motor
An induction motor is an AC motor that produces torque by the reaction between a varying
magnetic field (generated in the stator) and the current induced in the coils of the rotor.
Intel hex
Intel hex refers to a file format in which records consist of ASCII format hexadecimal (base 16)
numbers with load address information and error checking embedded.
Inverter
The inverter is a portion of the drive that changes DC voltage into AC voltage. The term
"inverter" is sometimes used mistakenly to refer to the entire drive (the converter, DC link, and
inverter sections).
Jog mode
Jog mode is an operational mode that uses a pre-programmed jog speed when a digital input
(programmed as the jog mode input) is closed.

Glossary
Jumpers
Jumper blocks are groups of pins that can control functions of the system, based on the state
of the jumpers. Jumpers (small, removable connectors) are either installed (on) or not installed
(off) to provide a hardware switch.
Ladder logic (Also Ladder Diagram)

A graphical representation of logic in which two vertical lines, representing power, flow from
the source on the left and the sink on the right, with logic branches running between, resembling
rungs of a ladder. Each branch consists of various labeled contacts placed in series and
connected to a single relay coil (or function block) on the right.
Loss of signal feature

The loss of signal feature is a control scheme that gives the operator the ability to select one
of three possible actions in the event that the signal from an external sensor, configured to
specify the speed demand, is lost. Under this condition, the operator may program the drive
(through the system program) to (1) revert to a fixed, pre-programmed speed, (2) maintain the
current speed, or (3) perform a controlled (ramped) stop of the drive. By default, current speed
is maintained.
LVD
LVD is an acronym for Low Voltage Directive, a safety directive in the EU.
Lvl RH
This term refers the two security fields associated with each parameter of the system. These
fields allow the operator to individually customize specific security features for each menu
option (submenu, parameter, pick list, and function). These fields are shown in parameter
dumps and have the following meanings. Lvl is the term for the security level. Setting R=1
blocks parameter change, and setting H=1 hides the menu option from view until the
appropriate access level has been activated.
Memory
Memory is the working storage area for the drive that is a collection of RAM chips.
Microprocessor
A microprocessor is a central processing unit (CPU) that exists on a single silicon chip. The
microprocessor board is the printed circuit board on which the microprocessor is mounted.
The drive employs a single-board computer with a Pentium® microprocessor.

Glossary
NEMA 1 and NEMA 12

NEMA 1 is an enclosure rating in which no openings allow penetration of a 0.25-inch diameter
rod. NEMA 1 enclosures are intended for indoor use only. NEMA 12 is a more stringent NEMA
rating in which the cabinet is said to be "dust tight" (although it is still not advisable to use
NEMA 12 in conductive dust atmospheres). The approximate equivalent IEC rating is IP52.
Normally closed (NC)

Normally closed refers to the contact of a relay that is closed when the coil is de-energized.
Normally open (NO)

Normally open refers to the contact of a relay that is open when the coil is de-energized.
OLTM
An acronym for Open Loop Test Mode, one of the control modes of the drive.
OLVC
An acronym for Open Loop Vector Control, also known as Encoderless Vector Control. OLVC
is a flux vector control that is one of the control modes of the drive. The drive computes the
rotational speed of the rotor and uses it for speed feedback.
OOS
OOS is an abbreviation for out of saturation - a type of fault condition in which a voltage drop
is detected across one of the IGBTs during conduction. This can indicate that the motor is
drawing current too rapidly or in excess.
OR
OR is a logical Boolean function whose output is true if any of the inputs is true. In SOP notation,
OR is represented as "+".
Parameter
A parameter is one of four items found in the menu system. Parameters are system attributes
that have corresponding values that can be monitored or, in some cases, changed by the user.
PED
PED is an acronym for pressure equipment directive, a directive of the EU relating to pressure
vessels.

Glossary
Pick list
A pick list is one of four items found in the menu system. Pick lists are parameters that have
a finite list of pre-defined "values" from which to choose, rather than a value range used by
parameters.
PID
PID is an acronym for proportional + integral + derivative, a control scheme used to control
modulating equipment in such a way that the control output is based on (1) a proportional
amount of the error between the desired setpoint and the actual feedback value, (2) the
summation of this error over time, and (3) the change in error over time. Output contributions
from each of these three components are combined to create a single output response. The
amount of contribution from each component is programmable through gain parameters. By
optimizing these gain parameters, the operator can "tune" the PID control loop for maximum
efficiency, minimal overshoot, quick response time, and minimal cycling.
Qualified user
A qualified user is a properly trained individual who is familiar with the construction and
operation of the equipment and the hazards involved.
RAM
RAM is an acronym for Random Access Memory, a temporary storage area for drive
information. The information in RAM is lost when power is no longer supplied to it. Therefore,
it is referred to as volatile memory.
Regeneration
Regeneration is the characteristic of an AC motor to act as a generator when the rotor’s
mechanical frequency is greater than the applied electrical frequency.
Relay
A relay is an electrically controlled device that causes electrical contacts to change their status.
Open contacts will close and closed contacts will open when rated voltage is applied to the
coil of a relay.
RS232C
RS232C is a serial communications standard of the Electronics Industries Association (EIA).
Set point
Set point is the desired or optimal speed of the VFD to maintain process levels (speed
command).

Glossary
Slip
Slip is the difference between the stator electrical frequency of the motor and the rotor
mechanical frequency of the motor, normalized to the stator frequency as shown in the
following equation:
Slip = (ωS - ωR) / ωS
Slip compensation
Slip compensation is a method of increasing the speed reference to the speed regulator circuit
(based on the motor torque) to maintain motor speed as the load on the motor changes. The
slip compensation circuit increases the frequency at which the inverter section is controlled to
compensate for decreased speed due to load droop. For example, a motor with a full load
speed of 1760 rpm has a slip of 40 rpm. The no load rpm would be 1800 rpm. If the motor
nameplate current is 100 A, the drive is sending a 60 Hz wave form to the motor (fully loaded);
then the slip compensation circuit would cause the inverter to run 1.33 Hz faster to allow the
motor to operate at 1800 rpm, which is the synchronous speed of the motor.
SMC
Is an acronym for Synchronous Motor Control, one of the control modes of the drive. This mode
computes the rotational speed similarly to open-loop vector control, and controls the field
reference or the synchronous motor as in closed-loop synchronous motor control.
SOP
(1) SOP is an acronym for Sum Of Products. The term "sum-of-products" comes from the
application of Boolean algebraic rules to produce a set of terms or conditions that are grouped
in a fashion that represents parallel paths (ORing) of required conditions that all must be met
(ANDing). This would be equivalent to branches of connected contacts on a relay logic ladder
that connect to a common relay coil. In fact, the notation can be used as a shortcut to describe
the ladder logic.
(2) SOP, when used as a filename extension, refers to System Operating Program.
SOP Utilities
The program within the Siemens Tool suite used for converting between text and machine
loadable code. It can also be used for uploading and downloading files over the RS232
connection.
See Tool Suite definition.
Speed Menu function

Speed menu is a feature of the menu system that allows the operator to directly access any
of the menus or parameters, rather than scrolling through menus to the appropriate item. This
feature uses the [Shift] button in conjunction with the right arrow. The user is prompted to enter
the four digit ID number associated with the desired menu or parameter.

Glossary
Stop mode
Stop mode is used to shut down the drive in a controlled manner, regardless of its current
state.
Submenus
A submenu is one of four components found in the menu system. Submenus are nested menus
(i.e., menus within other menus). Submenus are used to logically group menu items based on
similar functionality or use.
Synchronous speed
Synchronous speed refers to the speed of an AC induction motor’s rotating magnetic field. It
is determined by the frequency applied to the stator and the number of magnetic poles present
in each phase of the stator windings. Synchronous Speed equals 120 times the applied
Frequency (in Hz) divided by the number of poles per phase.
System Operating Program

The functions of the programmable inputs and outputs are determined by the default system
program. These functions can be changed by modifying the appropriate setup menus from the
front keypad and display. I/O assignments can also be changed by editing the system program
(an ASCII text file with the extension .SOP), compiling it using the compiler program, and then
downloading it to the controller through its serial port, all by utilizing the SOP Utility Program
with the Siemens ToolSuite.
Tool Suite
Is the suite of programs developed by Siemens that allows easier access to the drive for
programming and monitoring. It is comprised of the following components:
● Tool Suite Launcher - also referred to as Tool Suite; used for coordinating other tools.
● SOP Utilities - used to launch an editor that compiles or reverse compiles a System
Program. It also allows for serial connection to the drive for uploading and downloading
System Programs.
● Configuration Update - allows for backing-up, updating, and cloning drives via direct access
to the Flash Disk.
● Host Simulator - used for monitoring, programming, and controlling a drive remotely from
a PC over the built-in ethernet port of the drive. Parameter changes, status display, and
graphing of internal variables are its main functions.
● Debug Tool - this tool is used to display the diagnostic screens of the drive for diagnosing
drive problems or improving performance via the built-in ethernet port of the drive.
Tool Suite Launcher


Glossary
Torque
The force that produces (or attempts to produce) rotation, as in the case of a motor.
Uploading
Uploading is a process by which information is transmitted from the drive to a remote device
such as a PC. The term uploading implies the transmission of an entire file of information (e.g.,
the system program) rather than continued interactive communications between the two
devices. The use of a PC for uploading requires communications software to be available on
the PC.
Variable frequency drive (VFD)

A VFD is a device that takes a fixed voltage and fixed frequency AC input source and converts
it to a variable voltage, variable frequency output that can control the speed of a motor.
VHZ
Is an acronym for Volts per Hertz control, one of the control modes in the drive. This mode is
intended for multiple motors connected in parallel. Therefore, it disables spinning load and fast
bypass. This is essentially open-loop vector control with de-tuned (smaller bandwidth obtained
by reducing the gain) current regulators.

Glossary

Index
Dust deposits, 116
A
abbreviations, 279
E
Access plate, 74 Electromagnetic fields, 24
Arcing, 21 electro smog, 24
Asynchronous motors, 17 Electrostatic discharge, 22
Auxiliary power supply, 17 Electrostatic Protective Measures, 23
Auxiliary voltage EMC Directive, 251
Interference suppression, 80 EMC-compliant installation, 17
ESD guidelines, 22
EU directives, 249
B
basic drive module, 250
F
Faults and Alarms Response Type Data, 90
C Filter mats, 122
Five safety rules, 19
cable, 63
fuse replacement
Cable cross section
15-cell, 24-cell, 131
Ground connection to the peripherals, 79
fuse sources
Cabling, 17
blown cell input fuse, 129
CE marking, 249
Gambica guidelines, 249
CE Marking Information, 252
Cell Frame, 150
G
Cell Input Power Fuse Grounding, 17, 63
matching fuses, fuse replacement, primary fuses,
E-rated fuses, 130
circuit breaker I
customer, 86
Industrial network, 17
cleaning
ingress protection ratings, 162
contamination, 116
Input conductor
Commissioning, 17
sizing guidelines, 75
Conformance Example
Input Line Disturbance Faults and Alarms, 93
IEE-519, 255
Input Protection Scheme, 28
NEMA-MG-1, 253
Install Perfect Harmony Power Cells, 129
Contact person, 145
Installation, 17
Cooling System
components, 32
function of, 32
K
Keypad
D operation, 32
Keypad Functions
Disposal of
activate control functions, 31
packing waste materials, 144
edit parameters, 31
drive
enter security access codes, 31
grounding, 63
enter system in desired mode, 31

Index
navigation, 31
reset system after faults, 31
S
Safety information
L Crane, 53
Lock-out / Tag-out procedure, 20 Fork-lift truck, 52
Low Voltage Directive, 249, 251 Secondary Circuit Fault
Coordinated Input Protection Scheme, 28
Selector Switch
M Off-Local-Remote, 32
Service Center, 145
Machinery Directive, 251
Shielding, 17
Main entry, 250
Siemens Service Center, 145
Major Faults and Alarms
Software version
Fault / Alarm Types and Responses, 90
keypad, 31
medium input voltage circuit breaker
Spare parts, 145
Coordinated Input Protection Scheme, 28
Standard Scope of Supply
Mode Displays
Blowers, 27
Keypad Mode, 99
Control Section, 27
Mode of Operation, 100
Input/Output Section, 27
More information, 145
Transformer Section, 27
Motor Output Related Faults and Alarms, 94
symbols, 279
Type, 94, 95, 96
Synchronous motors, 17
Synchronous Transfer Reactors, 158, 159, 160, 161
Synchronous Transfer Related Faults, 99
O
off-loading, 58
On-site service, 145 T
Origin of User Faults and Alarms, 92
terminal blocks, 29
Torque Specifications, 74, 75
touch-up paint, 115
P Transport, 17
Power Cell Specifications, 150 Troubleshooting
Pressure Equipment Directive, 252 Handling AC Fuses Blown Faults, 103
protective earthing, 63 Handling Blocking Failure Faults, 103
Handling Capacitor Sharing Faults, 102
Handling Cell Overtemperature Faults, 104
R Handling Control Power Faults, 103
Handling Failed Bypass Faults, 104
Reactors and Capacitors, 155, 156, 157
Handling Q1-Q4 OOS Faults, 103
receiving procedure
Handling Switching Failure Faults, 103
carrier, 56
Handling VDC Undervoltage Faults, 104
damage, 56
inspection, 56
replacement of parts
CompactFlash card, 128
U
Replacement of Parts, 120 unpacking, 56
Replacing the filter mats, 121 damage, 57
inspection, 56
User faults, 92

Index
V
Variable-Speed Drives, 17
W
Warranty, 43

Index

AD 0001483667-20-001-U323
AD 0001483667-20-001-U102
AD 0001483667-20-001-U054
AF ID_GH180_Agiba Petroleum K:M6SR_IDN
AC 0001483667-20-001-U301
AC 0001483667-20-001-U051
AC 0001483667-20-001-U400
AB EC-declaration of Conformity PH GH180
AB Factory certificate PH GH180
0001483667 000020 01 EN 04
Siemens AG
Process Industries and Drives
Postfach 48 48
*000148366700002001EN04*
90026 NÜRNBERG 000148366700002001EN04
GERMANY
www.siemens.com/drives

Booster Pump Agiba PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Booster Pump Agiba PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

1.B-04.03.

Meleiha Field Upgrade

Section 1 Leading Particulars Approved: PB

Phone: (+44) 01226 763311

Fax: (+44) 01226 766535

Section 1 Leading Particulars Approved: PB

2. INSTALLATION AND COMMISIONING

9. MECHANICAL SEAL IOM

10. COUPLING IOM

11. VFD IOM

Section 1 Leading Particulars Approved: PB

Section 1 – Leading Particulars

Section 1 Leading Particulars Approved: PB

Section 1 Leading Particulars Approved: PB

Before Start Up Before Stripping for Maintenance/ Repair

Section 1 Leading Particulars Approved: PB

General Data Impeller

Section 1 Leading Particulars Approved: PB

MOUNTING THE PUMP

Section 2 Installation and Commissioning Approved: PB

Section 2 Installation and Commissioning Approved: PB

Levelling the Baseplate

2. Should it prove necessary to remove the driver Figure 3

Section 2 Installation and Commissioning Approved: PB

If possible, the suction strainer should be installed in a

Section 2 Installation and Commissioning Approved: PB

Section 2 Installation and Commissioning Approved: PB

Operating Speed Angular Concentric

0.004" 0.006" (0.15mm)

Section 2 Installation and Commissioning Approved: PB

Section 3 Operation Approved: PB

Section 3 Operation Approved: PB

Section 3 Operation Approved: PB

Section 4 Maintenance Approved: PB

Section 4 Maintenance Approved: PB

2. Unfasten the setscrews on the fan and remove

View of Thrust bearing assembly before dismantling.

3. Remove the lubrication connections and any

4. Remove outboard cover fasteners, cover &

1. Remove fan guard by unfastening the retaining

5. Untighten and remove the locknut. Then remove

Section 4 Maintenance Approved: PB

6. Remove inboard cover fasteners.

View of Radial bearing assembly before dismantling.

7. Remove housing mounting fasteners and

1. Remove the lubrication connections and any

8. Remove Bearing and spacer (Abutment) ring.

Section 4 Maintenance Approved: PB

5. Remove Bearing housing.

6. Untighten and remove the locknut. Then remove

7. Remove Bearing, flinger and thrust ring.

Section 4 Maintenance Approved: PB

Section 4 Maintenance Approved: PB

Section 4 Maintenance Approved: PB

Section 4 Maintenance Approved: PB

New Part Design Clearances

Diameter of Parts API 610

Under 2.00" .010" - .012"

4.0" – 4.499" .015" - .018"

7.0" – 7.999" .019" - .022"

10.00" – 10.999" .022" - .026"

13.00" – 13.999" .025" - .030"

Section 4 Maintenance Approved: PB